JP2017148189A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suppressing a decrease in interest in a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes: a game board including a game area on a front; a shooting device for shooting game balls toward to the game area; distribution means for distributing the game balls passing through a specific area inside the game area to one of a first passage and a second passage that are formed on the game area; a first start pocket permitting entry of the game balls flowing down the first passage; a second start pocket permitting entry of the game balls flowing down the second passage, and having a degree of advantage differing from that of the first start pocket; lottery means for holding a lottery based on entry into the first start pocket or the second start pocket; and profit awarding means for awarding predetermined profit based on a lottery result. The game machine allows the game balls to alternately flow down the first passage and the second passage by the distribution means, and allows the game balls to successively enter the first start pocket and the second start pocket.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 114

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) or a spinning-type gaming machine (generally also referred to as a “pachislot machine”).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a gaming machine in which a game area is formed on the front surface of a game board and a plurality of start ports are provided in the game area. In such a gaming machine, when a player operates an operation handle and a game ball that is driven into the game area enters one of a plurality of start openings, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to win a game. . When the result of the lottery is a big hit, a big hit gaming state that gives a profit to the player is generated.

  In addition, as the plurality of start ports, a first start port and a second start port having a higher degree of advantage than the first start port are provided, each of which is provided at a separated position in the game area. (For example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-16021

  In the above gaming machine, a game aiming at one of a plurality of start ports is performed according to the gaming state, but when a plurality of game balls are driven toward the game area, the plurality of game balls are Since it is in a state where it is possible to continuously enter the 2 starting openings, the game manager (hall side) will be unilaterally disadvantaged when entering only the second starting opening having a high degree of advantage. On the other hand, if a plurality of game balls enter the first start port continuously and enter only the first start port with a low degree of advantage, the player will be unilaterally disadvantaged, There was a risk of a decline in interest.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

In order to achieve the above object, in the invention according to claim 1,
A game board having a game area on the front;
A launcher that launches a game ball toward the game area;
Distribution means for distributing game balls that have passed through a specific area in the game area to either the first path or the second path formed in the game area;
A first start port into which a game ball flowing down the first passage can enter;
A second starting port that allows a game ball flowing down the second passage to enter and has a different advantage from the first starting port;
Lottery means for performing lottery based on entering the first starting port or the second starting port;
Profit granting means for granting a predetermined profit based on the result of the lottery,
A game ball is allowed to flow alternately into the first passage and the second passage using the distribution means, and the balls can sequentially enter the first start port and the second start port. .

  Thus, according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one embodiment of the present invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from back. It is the perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front in the state where the door frame was opened from the main body frame and the main body frame was opened from the outer frame. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and was seen from the back. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the outer frame and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the site | part of the outer frame side upper hinge member in an outer frame from the lower side, omitting the left frame member, (b) is the exploded perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows (a). is there. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of an outer frame, (b) is an outer upper hinge member. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to. It is explanatory drawing which shows the effect | action of the lock member in an outer frame. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a right view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the AA line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the BB line in FIG. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the CC line | wire in FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame for every main member and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit in a door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feed unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the front after removing the cover member, (b) is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the foul cover unit from the back after removing the cover member. It is a front view of a foul cover unit in the state where a lid member was removed. (A) is the front view of the handle unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the handle unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the handle unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit of the door frame from the front right, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the tray unit from the left front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from upper right back, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from lower left back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the plate unit for every main member and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a lower plate in the state which removed the lower plate cover in sectional drawing of FIG. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the example provided with the ball guide part in the lower plate, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows schematically the example provided with the ball guide part different from (a) in the lower plate. (C) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the example provided with the further different bulb | ball guidance part. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the lower plate which can be divided | segmented, (b) is description which shows the state which expanded the storage area | region of the lower plate according to the magnitude | size of the space behind a production operation unit. (C) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) with a schematic perspective view. (A) is a front view of the rendering operation unit in the door frame, and (b) is a right side view of the rendering operation unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation unit from the back. FIG. 11 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the DD line | wire in Fig.48 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the EE line | wire in FIG.48 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the FF line | wire in FIG.48 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective view of the production operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled for each main member. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the operation button and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which disassembled the operation button and was seen from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the decoration board | substrate unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the base unit of the production operation unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the base unit of the production operation unit, and was seen from back. It is explanatory drawing which shows the state which pressed the operation button in sectional drawing of the production operation unit of FIG. (A) is a view of the production operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and shows a part of the operation button that is notched and hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing shown, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of an effect operation unit. (A) is explanatory drawing shown in the perspective view which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the front, (b) is explanatory drawing which looked at the external appearance of the production | presentation operation unit from the direction where the central axis of an operation button is extended. . FIG. 48A is a front view of a second effect operation unit different from the embodiment of the effect operation unit in FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the back. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extended. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the GG line in Fig.64 (a). It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the HH line | wire in FIG.64 (b). (A) is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the II line | wire in FIG.64 (b), (b) is an enlarged view of the A section in (a). It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the 2nd production operation unit for every main member, and was seen from back. (A) is the exploded perspective view which exploded and looked at the operation button of the 2nd production operation unit, and (b) was the exploded perspective view which exploded and looked at the operation button of the 2nd production operation unit from the back is there. It is the perspective view which looked at the 2nd base unit of the 2nd production operation unit from the front. (A) is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state where the main screen of the screen unit was turned forward, and (b) is the subscreen of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button is extended in the state which turned to the front. (A) is a cross-sectional view cut along line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line KK in FIG. 74 (b). (A) is an attempt to hide the second rendering operation unit from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen facing forward by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is present, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is. (A) In the state which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state where the subscreen turned to the front, it tried to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is present, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a) It is. (A) is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame left side unit from the back. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame left side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the LL line | wire in Fig.78 (a). (A) is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame right side unit from the rear. FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame right side unit and was seen from the back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the MM line | wire in Fig.82 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line NN in FIG. 82 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along the line OO in FIG. 82 (a). (A) is the front view of the door frame top unit in a door frame, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front, (c) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back It is. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame top unit and was seen from back. It is sectional drawing cut | disconnected by the PP line in FIG. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the main body frame for every main member and was seen from back. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dispensing unit from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout unit for every main structure, and was seen from back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit of the payout unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball guidance unit from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view of a ball guidance unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus of a payout unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout apparatus from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the payout apparatus and was seen from back. (A) is a front view of a dispensing device, (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line QQ in (a). (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which closed the ball extraction channel | path with the ball extraction movable piece in the dispensing device, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state which opened the ball extraction channel | path with the ball extraction movable piece. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the upper full sphere path unit from the back. (A) is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path | route unit and was seen from the front, (b) was the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper full sphere path unit and was seen from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit in the dispensing unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the lower full sphere path unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full ball path unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower full tank path unit and was seen from back. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is closed in a lower full sphere path | route unit, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the state in which the guidance path opening / closing door is open. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full sphere path | route unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a payout unit. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a distribution member. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game ball in the 1st passage. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game ball in the 2nd passage. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game ball in the 2nd passage. It is explanatory drawing which expands and shows the site | part of a function display unit from the front in the state which attached the game board to the pachinko machine. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 121 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 120. It is the schematic of the various detection signals input / output to lending device connection terminal boards, such as a game ball which relays the electrical connection of the payout control board which comprises a main board, CR unit, and a frequency display board. FIG. 121 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 120. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram around VDP with a built-in sound source in the liquid crystal and the sound control unit. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to the payout control board from the main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. 127 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 127. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the payout control board which a main control board receives. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of a game. (A) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the main process performed by main control MPU, (b) is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the interruption process regularly performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the special symbol process process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st starting port passage process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the prior determination process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd starting port passage process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol process process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol normal process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the hit | judging determination process performed by main control MPU. (A) is a winning determination table used for lottery processing for winning, (B) is a big hit symbol determination table used for lottery processing for big winning types, and (C) is a small winning type. Is a small winning symbol determination table used for the lottery process for, and (D) is a table showing the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 1st special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd special symbol stop symbol setting process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd fluctuation pattern setting process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 2nd special symbol stop process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the jackpot control process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hit control process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the small hits start process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the middle hit process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol process process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the gate part passage process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the common figure prior determination process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol normal process performed by main control MPU. (A) is a universal figure determination table used for the lottery process for the normal map, and (B) is an open pattern table for the normal map used for the determination process for the open pattern for the normal map. is there. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol fluctuation pattern determination process performed by main control MPU. It is a common figure fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol fluctuation | variation process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal symbol stop process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the normal electric accessory release process performed by main control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the sub main process performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the 16mS steady process performed by peripheral control MPU. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure about the effect control process performed by the periphery control MPU. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game during chance mode and winning right exercise time. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display content of the production | presentation display apparatus in chance mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the production | presentation in chance mode. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game during chance mode and winning right exercise time. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game during chance mode and winning right exercise time. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game during chance mode and winning right exercise time. It is a time chart which shows the flow of the game during chance mode and winning right exercise time. It is an example of the effect display performed when the transition control from the normal mode to the chance mode is performed and a game ball is received at the second start port during the chance mode. It is an example of the effect display in chance mode. It is an example of the effect display in the last battle effect. It is an example of the effect display in the last battle effect.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, with reference to FIG. 1 thru | or FIG. 10, the whole structure of the pachinko machine 1 of this embodiment is demonstrated. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the left front, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the rear. FIG. 8 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine seen from the front after disassembling the door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG. 10 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, game board, main body frame, and outer frame. FIG.

  A pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front surface of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be opened and closed, and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side, and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball is driven.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 includes an upper frame member 10 and a lower frame member 20 that are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member. 20 includes a left frame member 30 and a right frame member 40 which are connected to each other at both ends and extend vertically. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20.

  In addition, the outer frame 2 is attached to the left end side of the upper frame member 10 as viewed from the front, and the curtain plate member 50 that connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60, and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end portion of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30. The main frame 4 and the door frame 3 are attached to be openable and closable by an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2.

  The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 has a frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having a through-hole 111 penetrating front and rear in a quadrilateral shape whose front view extends vertically, and a through-hole of the door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 300 that is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface below 111 and can be operated by a player to drive a game ball into the game area 5 a of the game board 5, and a through-hole 111 of the door frame base unit 100. The player is provided with a tray unit 320 attached to the lower portion of the front side below the player and the game state that is attached to the center of the tray unit 320 and changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a. A stage operation unit 400 capable of presenting a participatory stage, and attached to the upper left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the through-hole 111 above the plate unit 320, and the door frame left side unit 530. And a door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the through-hole 111 above the right side unit 550 of the door frame.

  The main body frame 4 of the pachinko machine 1 includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, the reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front, and the main body frame base 600 The ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. 4, And a locking unit 700 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and an inverted L-shape that is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600 and pays out a game ball to the player side. -Shaped payout unit 800, board unit 900 attached to the lower rear portion of main body frame base 600, and rear of game board 5 attached to main body frame base 600 and attached to the rear side of main body frame base 600 so as to be openable and closable. And a back cover 980 covering the side.

  The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 has an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and is attached to the upper part of the payout unit base 801 and extends to the left and right open upward. A ball tank 802 that stores a game ball supplied from an island facility (not shown) in a box shape, and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. The game ball in the ball tank 802 is moved to the left in a front view. A tank rail 803 that extends to the left and right to guide, a ball guide unit 820 that is attached to the rear surface of the upper left portion of the payout unit base 801 and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and a ball guide unit 820 A game ball that is detachably attached from the payout unit base 801 and guided by the ball guiding unit 820. Based on instructions from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950, the payout device 830 pays out one by one, and the game balls attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and paid out by the payout device 830 downward. An upper full ball path unit 850 that guides and discharges a game ball from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full discharge port 850e according to the storage state of the game ball in the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320, and a payout unit A normal guiding path 861 that is attached to the lower end of the base 801 and that guides the game ball released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides it from the front end to the through ball path 273 of the door frame 3 and the full guide path 861. The game ball released from the tongue outlet 850e is guided forward and guided from the front end to the full ball receiver 274 of the door frame 3. A lower full sphere path unit 860 having a RuMitsurutan taxiway 862, and a.

  The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a speaker for bass that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side when viewed from the front of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball is housed inside. A payout control board box 950 .

  As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 defines the outer periphery of the game area 5 a into which the game ball is to be shot and moves the game ball launched from the ball launcher 680 to the upper part of the game area 5 a. A front component member 1000 having an outer rail 1001 and an inner rail 1002 that are guided to the front, and a flat gaming panel 1100 that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and defines the rear end of the game area 5a. Yes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, when the player rotates the handle 302 in a state where the game ball is stored in the upper plate 321, the ball launcher 680 causes the game ball to have strength according to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The game board 5 is driven into the game area 5a. When the game balls that have been thrown into the game area 5a are received in the winning opening, a predetermined number of gaming balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 by the payout device 830 in accordance with the received winning opening. Since the player's interest can be enhanced by paying out this game ball, the game ball in the upper plate 321 can be driven into the game area 5a, and the game can be enjoyed by the player.

[2. Overall structure of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 to 16. FIG. 11 is a front view of the outer frame in the pachinko machine, and FIG. 12 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 14 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame as seen from the front. FIG. 16A is a perspective view of a portion of the outer frame side upper hinge member in the outer frame, viewed from the lower side with the left frame member omitted, and FIG. 16B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 1 such as a game hall is installed.

  As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 is connected to both ends of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 which are separated from each other in the vertical direction and extend to the left and right, and the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are provided. The upper frame member 10, the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40 are formed to have the same width in the front-rear direction. The upper and lower lengths of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are longer than the left and right lengths of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20. The outer frame 2 is assembled so that the left and right end surfaces of the upper frame member 10 and the lower frame member 20 and the side surfaces of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 facing outward in the left-right direction are the same surface. It has been.

  The outer frame 2 includes an outer frame side upper hinge member 60 attached to the left end portion of the upper frame member 10 when viewed from the front, a lock member 66 attached to the lower surface of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, An outer frame side lower hinge member 70 attached to the upper left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the left frame member 30 is provided. With the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be attached so as to be opened and closed.

  The outer frame 2 connects the lower ends of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is attached to the front side of the lower frame member 20 and is attached to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50. A curtain plate reinforcing member 80 whose both ends are attached to the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 respectively, a flat plate-like left sliding member 81 attached to the left side of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 from the left and right center, and a curtain A plate-like right sliding member 82 attached at a position near the right end on the upper surface of the plate member 50. The curtain plate reinforcing member 80 is formed of a solid member (for example, wood, plywood, etc.), and is attached to the lower frame member 20, the left frame member 30, and the right frame member 40.

  Further, the outer frame 2 includes an upper frame member 10 and a left frame member 30, an upper frame member 10 and a right frame member 40, a lower frame member 20 and a left frame member 30, and a lower frame member 20 and a right frame member 40, respectively. A connecting member 85 is provided. The outer frame 2 is attached to the inner side (left side) of the right frame member 40 and includes an upper hook member 90 and a lower hook member 91 to which an outer frame hook 703 of a locking unit 700 described later is locked. Have.

[2-1. Upper frame member]
The upper frame member 10 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The upper frame member 10 includes an engagement notch portion 11 penetrating vertically in the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction. In the engagement notch portion 11, an upper left fixing member 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and an upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 are attached. Moreover, the upper frame member 10 is provided with the mounting step part 12 which became depressed rather than the general surface in the upper surface and front surface of a left end part by front view. An outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is attached to the attachment step portion 12.

[2-2. Lower frame member]
The lower frame member 20 of the outer frame 2 is formed of a solid (solid) material (for example, wood, plywood, etc.) having a predetermined thickness. The lower frame member 20 is formed such that the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses are the same as the left and right lengths and the upper and lower thicknesses of the upper frame member 10, and the front and rear width is the upper frame member 10. It is formed longer than the width before and after. The lower frame member 20 includes an engagement notch portion 21 penetrating vertically and recessed toward the center in the left-right direction at a position closer to the rear side than the center in the front-rear direction at both left and right ends. In the engagement notch portion 21, a lower left connecting member 85C and a lower lateral fixing portion 88 of the connecting member 85, which will be described later, are attached.

  In addition, the lower frame member 20 includes front end notch portions 22 that are recessed rearward from the front surfaces at both left and right ends. In the lower frame member 20, the width in the front-rear direction from the rear end of the front end notch 22 to the rear surface of the lower frame member 20 is formed to the same size as the width in the front-rear direction of the upper frame member 10. When the lower frame member 20 is assembled to the outer frame 2, a portion between the left and right front end cutout portions 22 is inserted into the curtain plate member 50.

[2-3. Left frame member and right frame member]
The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and are formed of a metal extruded shape such as an aluminum alloy. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are formed in symmetrical shapes in plan view. When the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are assembled as the outer frame 2, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are recessed inwardly from the rearward position to the vicinity of the rear end with respect to the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portions 31 and 41 and the protruding portions 32 and 42 that bulge from the side surface on the opposite side of the concave portions 31 and 41 and are formed in a hollow shape are provided. The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are enhanced in strength and rigidity by the protrusions 32 and 42. In addition, in the protrusions 32 and 42, a lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B, which will be described later, of the connecting member 85 is inserted and attached.

  The left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 have a plurality of grooves extending vertically on the surface. With the plurality of grooves, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed or transported in an island facility such as a game hall, the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held by the operator, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily held. The design of the appearance of the machine 1 can be improved.

[2-4. Curtain plate member]
The curtain plate member 50 of the outer frame 2 is formed in a box shape with the rear side opened. The curtain plate member 50 is formed in a U-shape with a rear extension 51 extending rearward in the vicinity of the left end in front view on the upper surface and a size allowing a game ball to pass from the left end of the rear extension 51. A left discharge hole 52 that is notched and penetrates up and down, and a right discharge hole 53 that penetrates up and down in a size that allows a game ball to pass on the right side of the left discharge hole 52 in the rear extension 51; A standing wall portion 54 that extends upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 including the rear end of the rearward extending portion 51, and a front surface that bulges forward from the vicinity of the upper end of the standing wall portion 54. And a return portion 55 that is inclined so as to go backward as it goes to.

  The curtain plate member 50 is configured so that the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is placed on the upper surface on the front side of the rear extension 51 and the upper surface of the rear extension 51. A horizontal portion 71 described later is attached. Further, the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50 is formed at a position coincident with a discharge hole 74 described later of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. Further, the right discharge hole 53 is formed at a position on the right side of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 in a state assembled to the outer frame 2. The right discharge hole 53 is formed larger than the left discharge hole 52.

  Further, the curtain plate member 50 is inclined such that the upper surface on the right side of the rear extension 51 is lower on the front end side. Further, the curtain plate member 50 has a left mounting portion 56 for mounting the left sliding member 81 on the right side of the rear extending portion 51 on the upper surface, and a right mounting for mounting the right sliding member 82 near the right end on the upper surface. Part 57. The lower surface of the main body frame 4 is placed on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 via the left sliding member 81 and the right sliding member 82.

  As shown in the figure, the curtain plate member 50 has a shallow relief decoration on the front surface. Further, although not shown, the curtain plate member 50 has a box-shaped interior partitioned into a lattice by a plurality of ribs, thereby enhancing strength and rigidity. The curtain plate member 50 is formed so that the front half of the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 can be accommodated therein.

[2-5. Outer frame side upper hinge member]
As shown in the drawing, the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is a flat plate extending horizontally and having a rectangular outer shape, and a flat plate extending forward from the front end of the upper fixing portion 61. The front extension 62, the bearing groove 63 extending to the left and right center of the front extension 62 as it goes forward from the right end of the front extension 62, and the top fixing part 61 in plan view. A flat horizontal fixing portion 64 extending downward from the left side, and a horizontal fixing portion extending downward from an end side of the front extending portion 62 from the left end to the portion where the bearing groove 63 is opened around the front end. A flat drooping portion 65 that is continuous with the portion 64 (see FIG. 16B and the like).

  In the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the upper fixing portion 61 is placed on the upper surface of the mounting step portion 12 of the upper frame member 10 in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, and is fixed by a screw (not shown). Yes. Further, the front extension 62 extends forward from the front end of the upper frame member 10. Further, the lateral fixing portion 64 is fixed to the left frame member 30 with screws while being inserted into the recess 31 on the outer side surface of the left frame member 30 from above.

  The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 inserts the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 into the bearing groove 63, thereby cooperating with the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. It can be supported so that it can be opened and closed. The outer frame side upper hinge member 60 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

[2-6. Lock member]
As shown in FIG. 16, the lock member 66 of the outer frame 2 includes a band plate-like lock main body 66 a extending in the front-rear direction with a predetermined width on the left and right sides, and an operation portion protruding rightward from the rear end of the lock main body 66 a. 66b, an elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock main body 66a and extending obliquely left frontward, and a mounting hole penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock main body 66a 66d. The lock member 66 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 66 is rotatably attached to the lower surface of the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 by an attachment screw 67.

  The lock member 66 is attached at a position where the rear end of the lock main body 66a is behind the bearing groove 63 in the front extending portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 through the attachment hole 66d. When the lock member 66 is attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the lock main body 66a can block the bearing groove 63 in a plan view, and the right side surface near the front end has the outer frame side upper hinge member. 60 extends forward so as to be able to come into contact with a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 63 in the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18).

  The tip of the elastic portion 66c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60. The lock member 66 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the attachment hole 66d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 66 near the front end of the lock body 66a is in contact with the hanging portion 65 (see FIG. 18). In this state, a space that can accommodate a body frame upper hinge pin 622 (to be described later) of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is formed in a portion of the bearing groove 63 on the front side of the lock main body 66a.

  The lock member 66 can rotate the lock body 66a against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c by operating the operation portion 66b. Then, by operating the operation portion 66b, the lock main body 66a is rotated in a direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, whereby the lock main body 66a can be retracted from the bearing groove 63 in a plan view. Can pass through. As a result, the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be inserted into the bearing groove 63, or the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-7. Outer frame side lower hinge member]
As shown in the figure, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 stands upward from a horizontally extending flat plate portion 71 and a rear side of the left side of the horizontal portion 71 from the center in the front-rear direction. A rising plate-like rising portion 72, an outer frame lower hinge pin 73 projecting upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71, and passing through the horizontal portion 71 up and down so that only one game ball can pass therethrough. And a discharge hole 74 having a size. The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the bottom in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 has a cylindrical shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape whose upper end is narrower than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 73 is attached to the left side position in the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 71. The discharge hole 74 is formed in the horizontal portion 71 so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 72 and extend in an inverted U shape from the left side of the horizontal portion 71 to the right. The discharge hole 74 is formed in substantially the same size as the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50.

  In the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 has the horizontal portion 71 placed on the upper surface near the left end of the curtain plate member 50 and the rear extension portion 51. Is fixed to the curtain plate reinforcing member 80 by screws (not shown) penetrating the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the rising portion 72 is attached to a portion of the inner side surface of the left frame member 30 on the front side of the protruding portion 32 with a screw (not shown). The outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is formed by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 73 into a main body frame lower hinge hole (not shown) in the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable in cooperation with the hinge member 60.

  Further, in a state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 74 coincides with the left discharge hole 52 of the curtain plate member 50. Thereby, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 can be dropped (discharged) to the rear side of the curtain plate member 50 through the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls that have dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 are closed as the main body frame 4 is closed. Is gradually narrowed, so that the gap is rolled to the rear side with a wide interval, and the discharge hole 74 can be discharged. At this time, the discharge hole 74 is formed at a position that is substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The game ball dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 can be easily prevented from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4 by being discharged from the discharge hole 74, and the outer frame side It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to stay on the lower hinge member 70.

[2-8. Connecting member]
The connecting member 85 of the outer frame 2 includes an upper left connecting member 85A that connects the upper frame member 10 and the left frame member 30, an upper right connecting member 85B that connects the upper frame member 10 and the right frame member 40, and a lower frame member. There are a lower left connecting member 85C that connects 20 and the left frame member 30, and a lower right connecting member 85D that connects the lower frame member 20 and the right frame member 40.

  The connecting member 85 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 86, a flat plate-like upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extending upward from either one of the left and right sides of the horizontal fixing portion 86, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a flat lower lateral fixing portion 88 extending downward from the same side as the portion where the upper lateral fixing portion 87 extends. The connecting member 85 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  In the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 extends upward from the center of the horizontal fixing portion 86 in the front-rear direction, and the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 are formed from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. It extends downward. That is, the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are provided with two lower lateral fixing portions 88 that are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the upper left connecting member 85 </ b> A and the upper right connecting member 85 </ b> B are fixed to the upper frame member 10 in contact with the lower surface of the upper frame member 10. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the engagement notch portion 21 of the upper frame member 10 and is fixed to the left and right ends of the upper frame member 10. In addition, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 on the front side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B are fixed to the inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portion 88 on the rear side of the upper left connecting member 85A and the upper right connecting member 85B is inserted into the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 and is screwed from the outer side surface. Thus, the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40 are respectively fixed.

  In the lower left connecting member 85 </ b> C and the lower right connecting member 85 </ b> D, the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 protrudes rearward from the rear end of the horizontal fixing portion 86 and is more than the horizontal fixing portion 86 of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87. A lower lateral fixing portion 88 extends below the horizontal fixing portion 86 from the lower end of the portion protruding rearward. The lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D further include a bent portion 89 that protrudes from the rear end of the upper horizontal fixing portion 87 to the same side as the horizontal fixing portion 86. The horizontal fixing portions 86 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed in contact with the upper surface of the lower frame member 20. Further, the upper horizontal fixing portions 87 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are fixed to inner side surfaces on the front side of the protruding portions 32 and 42 of the left frame member 30 and the right frame member 40, respectively. Further, the lower horizontal fixing portions 88 of the lower left connecting member 85C and the lower right connecting member 85D are inserted into the engagement notches 21 of the lower frame member 20 and fixed to the end surfaces in the left and right direction of the lower frame member 20, respectively. The

[2-9. Lock mechanism for upper hinge member on outer frame side]
Next, in the outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, a locking mechanism for the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the main body frame 4 by the lock member 66 in the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 will be described with reference to FIGS. The description will be given with reference. FIG. 17A is an enlarged perspective view showing a state in which the main body frame side upper hinge member of the main body frame is removed with respect to the outer frame side upper hinge member of the outer frame, and FIG. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the state by which the main body side upper hinge member is attached to the hinge member. FIG. 18 is an explanatory view showing the action of the lock member in the outer frame.

  When the lock member 66 in the outer frame 2 is attached to the front extension portion 62 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 (normal state), the tip of the elastic portion 66 c is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the hanging portion 65. In addition, the lock body 66a is configured to close a part of the bearing groove 63 bent in a square shape, and the distal end portion of the lock body 66a does not close the deepest part of the bearing groove 63. In the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63, a space is formed in which the body frame upper hinge pin 622 of the body frame side upper hinge member 620 of the body frame 4 can be inserted.

  The support mechanism of the body frame upper hinge pin 622 using the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the lock member 66 in this embodiment is such that the body frame upper hinge pin 622 is inserted into the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63 and the front end of the lock body 66a. The right side surface of the lock body 66 is in close contact with the right hanging portion 65 (in this state, there is a slight gap between the right side surface at the front end of the lock body 66a and the right hanging portion 65 so that it is in contact with the right hanging surface 65). In the normal shaft support state, the center of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame located at the deepest portion of the bent bearing groove 63 and the front end surface of the lock main body 66a are opposed to each other in an oblique direction. It is in a state.

  In this normal shaft support state, the main body frame hinge pin 622 supporting the heavy main body frame 4 is in contact with the front end portion of the bearing groove 63. A load from 622 to the front end surface of the lock body 66a is hardly applied. That is, no load is applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66. Since the front end surface of the lock body 66a is formed in an arc shape, the lock member 66 smoothly rotates when the operation portion 66b is rotated to rotate the lock member 66. Yes. In the drawing, the center of the arc of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is the center of the mounting hole 66d (the rotation center of the lock member 66).

  Therefore, when the acting force F is applied in a direction in which the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is removed along the inclination of the bearing groove 63 formed in a square shape, the acting force is applied to the arcuate front end surface of the lock body 66a. F is a component force F1 (normal direction of the arc of the front end surface of the lock main body 66a) acting on a contact portion between the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the arc-shaped front end surface, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame and the bearing groove 63. The component force F1 is directed to the center of the mounting hole 66d (mounting screw 67) (the rotation center of the lock member 66) when divided into the component force F2 acting on the contact portion with the inner surface of the one side. The moment of rotating the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 in the direction away from the right hanging portion 65 does not act, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is connected to the front end of the lock main body 66 a of the lock member 66 and the bearing groove 63. Inside Clamped state is maintained between the.

  For this reason, even in a normal shaft support state or a state where the acting force of the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is applied to the lock member 66, the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 is not constantly loaded, and is integrally formed of synthetic resin. It is possible to prevent plastic deformation caused by creep of the elastic portion 66c, and to prevent the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame from coming off from the bearing groove 63 over a long period of time. Even if an excessive force is applied and the front end portion of the lock main body 66a of the lock member 66 is rotated in the direction of moving to the right, the right side surface of the front end of the lock main body 66a contacts the drooping portion 65 and beyond. Since it does not rotate, the lock member 66 is prevented from protruding outside the front extension 62.

  Even if the shape of the front end surface of the lock body 66a is not an arc, the position where the rotational moment does not occur due to the action of the component force F1 described above or the front end portion of the lock member 66 faces the outside of the front extension portion 62. By positioning the rotation center of the lock member 66 (the axis fixed by the mounting screw 67) at a position where the rotational moment to rotate is generated, a load is not applied to the elastic portion 66c of the lock member 66 at all times. Even if the lock member 66 rotates, the right side surface of the front end of the lock body 66 a only abuts on the hanging portion 65, so that the lock member 66 does not protrude outside the front extension portion 62.

  When the main body frame hinge pin 622 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 is supported by the bearing groove 63 of the outer frame side upper hinge member 60, the main body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63 from the open side of the bearing groove 63. The hinge pin 622 is inserted. When the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is inserted into the bearing groove 63, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame comes into contact with the right side surface of the lock body 66a of the lock member 66, and the front end of the lock body 66a is against the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates about the mounting screw 67 so as to move to the left. As a result, the lock main body 66 a that has closed the bearing groove 63 is retracted, the bearing groove 63 is opened, and the main body frame hinge pin 622 can be moved to the deepest portion (front end) of the bearing groove 63.

  When the body frame hinge pin 622 is moved to the deepest part of the bearing groove 63, the contact between the body frame hinge pin 622 and the lock body 66a of the lock member 66 is released, and the lock body 66a is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 66c. The lock member 66 rotates so that the front end of the lock member moves to the right, and the lock member 66 returns to the normal state. As a result, the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is accommodated in a space in front of the front end of the lock body 66 a in the bearing groove 63, and the hinge pin 622 on the body frame is rotatable at the deepest portion of the bearing groove 63. The state is held (locked) in the state.

  When the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame is removed from the bearing groove 63, the lock member 66 is rotated so that the front end of the lock main body 66a moves to the left by operating the operation portion 66b of the lock member 66. The lock body 66a is retracted from the bearing groove 63 against the urging force of 66c. As a result, the deepest part of the bearing groove 63 and the opening communicate with each other, and the hinge pin 622 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 63.

[2-10. Crime prevention mechanism and ball biting prevention mechanism at the outer frame side lower hinge member]
In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the ball engagement prevention for preventing the game ball from being sandwiched between the crime prevention mechanism and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 at the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2. The mechanism will be described.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, an outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is attached to the left end portion in front view on the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50. The horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is mounted in a state of being placed near the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50 and the upper surface of the rear extending portion 51. The curtain plate member 50 includes a standing wall portion 54 that rises upward from the rear end of the upper surface. As a result, even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the rear side of the main body frame 4 (pachinko machine 1) through the gap between the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640. Since the tip of the unauthorized tool comes into contact with the standing wall 54 extending upward from the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized tool from being inserted further to the rear side. It is possible to prevent an illegal act from being performed via the outer frame side lower hinge member 70.

  Moreover, since the return part 55 extended ahead is provided in the upper end of the standing wall part 54, when the unauthorized tool contact | abutted to the standing wall part 54 bends upwards, the front-end | tip of an unauthorized tool by the return part 55 Can be folded further forward, so that unauthorized tools can be prevented from entering the rear side of the main body frame 4, and an illegal act is performed through the portion of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70. Can be surely prevented.

  By the way, when the upright wall portion 54 extending upward is provided at the rear end of the upper surface of the curtain plate member 50, the game ball is placed on the outer frame side while the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2. When falling on the lower hinge member 70 (horizontal portion 71), the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 is not discharged backward from the rear end of the horizontal portion 71 due to the presence of the standing wall portion 54, so the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 There is a risk of being caught between. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the discharge hole 74 and the left discharge hole 52 through which the game ball can pass through the horizontal part 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 and the rearward extension part 51 of the curtain plate member 50. And the right discharge hole 53, the game ball on the horizontal portion 71 of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 can be discharged downward from the discharge hole 74 and the like. It is possible to reduce the game ball being caught between the two.

  Therefore, when the game ball is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4, the periphery of the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 is damaged, or the main body frame 4 is not closed in a normal state. It is possible to prevent a gap from being formed between the main body frame 4 and illegal acts using the gap.

[3. Overall structure of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 20 is a right side view of the door frame, FIG. 21 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 22 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 23 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, FIG. 24 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front, and FIG. 25 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the rear. 26 is a sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. 19, FIG. 27 is a sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. 19, and FIG. 28 is a sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. FIG. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view in which the door frame is disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 and 30, the door frame 3 is attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and the square frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose front view extends vertically. Handle unit 300, a pan unit 320 attached to the lower front portion of the door frame base unit 100, a rendering operation unit 400 attached to the center of the plate unit 320, and a door frame base unit above the plate unit 320. Door frame left side unit 530 attached to the front left part of the door 100, door frame right side unit 550 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 above the dish unit 320, and the door frame left side The door frame top attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. It includes a knit 570, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is a plate-shaped door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape (rectangular shape) whose front view extends vertically. A frame-shaped reinforcing unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and attached to both upper and lower ends of the reinforcing unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front, and attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be capable of hinge rotation. A door frame side upper hinge member 140 and a door frame side lower hinge member 150; a glass unit 190 which is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and closes the through hole 111; and a security cover 200 which covers the lower rear surface of the glass unit 190; The door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 that are attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to protrude forward through the door frame base 110. An opening / closing cylinder unit 210 for locking the space, a ball feed unit 250 for sending a game ball to the ball launcher 680 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a ball attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110 A foul cover unit 270 that receives a game ball that has been launched by the launching device 680 and has not reached the game area 5a and that discharges it to the lower plate 322.

  Although the handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail later, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 is changed according to the rotation angle of the handle 302 by the player rotating the rotatable handle 302. It can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 with high strength.

  As will be described in detail later, the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3 is attached to a lower portion of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. The effect operation unit 400 is attached to the front end in the center in the left-right direction. The tray unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. Within the range of the lower tray 322 that can be stored, the upper tray ball removal button 327 for removing the game balls stored in the upper tray 321 to the lower tray 322, and the balance of cash or prepaid card that has been put into the ball lending machine A ball lending button 328 for lending a game ball to the player, a return button 329 for returning cash or a prepaid card obtained by subtracting the amount of the game ball lending from the ball lending machine, and cash inserted into the ball lending machine , A ball rental return display unit 330 for displaying the remaining number of prepaid cards, etc., an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 that can be accepted by the player when the effect is presented, and a lower plate Game balls in 22 and lower tray ball vent button 333 for discharging downwardly the dish unit 320, and a.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the door frame 3 is attached to the front portion of the dish unit 320 at the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and can be pressed by the player and presents an effect image to the player. It is something that can be done. As will be described in detail later, the effect operation unit 400 has a large operation button 410 that can be operated by the player, and a door frame side effect that can be viewed from the player side in the operation button 410 and can display an effect image. Display device 460.

  The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the upper left side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front side of the door frame base unit 100 on the left side of the front side of the plate unit 320. The left outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame left side unit 530 includes a left unit decorative lens member (not shown) that can be decorated with light emission.

  The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3, which will be described in detail later, is attached to the upper right side of the door frame base unit 100 on the right side of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 320. The right outer side of the game area 5a) is decorated. The door frame right side unit 550 protrudes more forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and is provided at the front end with a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on both left and right sides. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is provided. The door frame right side unit 550 can decorate the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 is attached to the upper side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550. The upper part of the frame 3 is decorated. The door frame top unit 570, which will be described in detail later, has a pair of upper speakers 573 spaced left and right, a top middle decorative member 576 protruding forward in the center of the front surface, and both left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. A top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 are provided. The door frame top unit 570 can light-decorate the top middle decorative member 576, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the main part of the door frame base unit as seen from the rear. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable / closable (rotatable by hinges) so that the left side when viewed from the front closes the front surface of the main body frame 4. The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 300 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 320 to which the rendering operation unit 400 is attached at the lower front surface of the through hole 111, and a door frame left side unit 530 at the left outer front surface of the through hole 111. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right outer front surface of the through hole 111, and the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the through hole 111, respectively.

  As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the door frame base unit 100 includes a plate-like door frame base 110 having a through-hole 111 penetrating in the front and rear in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. The frame-shaped reinforcement unit 130 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and the upper and lower ends of the reinforcement unit 130 on the left end side when viewed from the front are projected forward from the door frame base 110 and The door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 that are rotatably attached to the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640, and the front surface of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110. A door frame left side decorative board 160 mounted on the left side and mounted with a plurality of LEDs on the front surface, and a glass unit 19 rotatably mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 110. The glass unit mounting member 170 for mounting the detachably, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 is attached to the lower right corner in front view on the front surface of the door frame base 110 and is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and a cylindrical handle attachment member 180 for attaching the handle unit 300. A glass unit 190 that closes the through-hole 111, a security cover 200 that covers the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and an opening / closing cylinder unit that is attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 so as to penetrate the door frame base 110 and protrude forward. 210, a ball feeding unit 250 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110, and a foul cover unit 270 attached to the lower rear surface of the door frame base 110.

  Further, although not shown, the door frame base unit 100 includes various decorative boards provided in the door frame 3, a ball feeding solenoid 255, a handle rotation detection sensor 307, a handle touch sensor 310, a single button operation sensor 312, Ball rental button 328, return button 329, ball rental return display section 330, effect selection left button 331, effect selection right button 332, vibration motor 424, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 (liquid crystal display device 461) , Etc., and a door main body relay board for relaying the connection between the main body frame 4 and the door frame relay board 911 of the board unit 900.

[3-1a. Door frame base]
The door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 110 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangular shape) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 110 penetrates back and forth, and includes a through-opening 111 formed in a substantially quadrilateral shape whose inner peripheral shape in a front view extends vertically. In the through-hole 111, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner periphery are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 110, and the lower side forming the inner periphery is the upper and lower sides from the lower end of the door frame base 110. It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. Therefore, the door frame base 110 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the through-hole 111 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The door frame base 110 is integrally formed of synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 110 is formed in the front lower right corner of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 112 that is inclined so that the left end protrudes slightly forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 112, and the through-hole 111. Between the cylinder mounting portion 113 and the cylinder mounting portion 113 to which the cylinder mounting metal plate 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is mounted, and is opened through the cylinder mounting portion 113 in the front-rear direction. Is inserted through the cylinder insertion hole 114 through which the cylinder lock 211 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 114 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 on the left side when viewed from the front, and forward through the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. And a ball feed opening 115 for facing the surface.

  Further, the door frame base 110 penetrates forward and rearward at the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 112 to the left of the center of the door frame base 110 in the left-right direction, and faces the ball outlet 276 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. The lower plate passing opening 116 and the door frame base 110 near the left end when viewed from the front are adjacent to the lower side of the through hole 111 so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door frame base 110 and face the through ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270 forward. A dish passage opening 117, a glass unit mounting portion 118 into which the glass frame 191 of the glass unit 190 is inserted and recessed from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the through-hole 111, and both left and right sides of the door frame base 110 And a speaker insertion port 119 through which the rear end of the upper speaker 573 of the door frame top unit 570 is inserted.

[3-1b. Reinforcement unit]
The reinforcing unit 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The reinforcing unit 130 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 to reinforce the door frame base 110 and increase the strength and rigidity of the door frame base 110 (door frame 3). The reinforcing unit 130 includes left and right upper reinforcing metal plates 131 attached along the upper side of the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and left and right middle reinforcing members attached to the lower side of the through hole 111 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110. A sheet metal 132, a left reinforcing sheet metal 133 extending up and down attached along the front left side of the door frame base 110, and a right reinforcing up and down attached along the right side of the door frame base 110 viewed from the front. A sheet metal 134 and a locking engagement portion 135 attached to the rear surface of the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 and to which the door frame collar 702 of the locking unit 700 is engaged are provided.

  In the reinforcing unit 130, the left and right ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131 are connected and fixed to the upper ends of the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 with screws, and the left end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected to the left reinforcing sheet metal 133 with screws. It is fixed. The right end of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is connected and fixed to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 via a cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 described later. Therefore, the reinforcing unit 130 is formed in a frame shape by the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the like.

  The upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, the right reinforcing sheet metal 134, and the locking engagement portion 135 of the reinforcing unit 130 are formed by appropriately bending metal plates. The middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 is formed with a notch portion 132a penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the upper plate passage opening 117 of the door frame base 110.

  Although the detailed illustration is omitted, each of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 131, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132, the left reinforcing sheet metal 133, and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 has a portion bent in the front-rear direction. This part increases the strength and rigidity, and prevents the entry of unauthorized tools such as piano wires and flat-blade screwdrivers from the outside.

[3-1c. Door frame side upper hinge member]
The door frame side upper hinge member 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame-side upper hinge member 140 is attached to the door frame base 110 and has a pair of protruding pieces 141a that are spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and a pair of protrusions of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. A cylindrical door frame upper hinge pin 142 inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a pair of projecting pieces 141a in the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that penetrates the piece 141a. A disc-shaped eaves member 143 attached at a position between the eaves member 143, the eaves member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and a hinge pin 142 on the door frame , And a lock spring 144 that biases the hinge pin 142 on the door frame upward.

  Although not shown, the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a flat mounting piece that connects the rear ends of the pair of protruding pieces 141a, and the shape in a side view is opened forward. It is formed in a letter shape. The door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141 has a mounting piece connecting a pair of protruding pieces 141a attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame upper hinge pin 142 is rotatably inserted into a door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 at a portion (upper end) protruding above the upper protruding piece 141a. Further, although not shown, the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is bent in a horizontal direction at a portion protruding downward from the lower protruding piece 141a. The bent portion abuts on the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 141a, thereby restricting the upward movement of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame.

  The eaves member 143 is an E-ring, and is inserted and held in a groove formed on the outer periphery of the door frame upper hinge pin 142. The lock spring 144 is a coil spring through which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be inserted, and has an upper end in contact with the flange member 143 and a lower end in contact with the lower protruding piece 141a. The lock spring 144 is interposed between the flange member 143 and the lower protruding piece 141a in a compressed state, and biases the door frame upper hinge pin 142 upward via the flange member 143. .

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 142 is urged upward by the lock spring 144, and the horizontally bent portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 projects downward. By contacting the lower surface of the piece 141a, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a.

  The door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a portion bent horizontally at the lower end of the hinge pin 142 on the door frame and pulls the portion downward against the urging force of the lock spring 144. The upper hinge pin 142 can be moved generally downward, and the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 141a. Therefore, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 inserts the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 into the door frame upper hinge hole 623 of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 from below or pulls it downward. Can do. As a result, the upper left end of the door frame 3 is inserted into the upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame of the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 by inserting the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140. The main body frame 4 can be supported so as to be capable of hinge rotation.

  Further, the door frame side upper hinge member 140 has a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 142 that is supported by a pair of protruding pieces 141a of the door frame upper hinge shaft bracket 141. The lower hinge pin 152 is supported coaxially. Thus, the door frame 3 upper hinge member 140 and the door frame side lower hinge member 150 can rotate the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 in a favorable state.

[3-1d. Door frame side lower hinge member]
The door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is attached to the door frame base 110 and includes a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 having a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending forward, and a door frame lower hinge shaft bracket. A columnar door frame lower hinge pin 152 (see FIGS. 21 and 22) protruding downward from the vicinity of the front end of the extending piece 151a.

  The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a flat plate-like attachment piece (not shown) extending upward from the rear end of a flat plate-like extension piece 151a extending horizontally, and has an overall shape in a side view. Is formed in a substantially L-shape. The door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151 has a mounting piece (not shown) attached to the rear surface of the door frame base 110 with screws.

  The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is formed in a truncated cone shape whose lower end is narrowed toward the lower side. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is rotatably inserted into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 in the main body frame 4 described later. The door frame lower hinge pin 152 is arranged coaxially with the door frame upper hinge pin 142 of the door frame side upper hinge member 140.

  The door frame side lower hinge member 150 is capable of hinge-rotating the door frame 3 with respect to the body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 152 into the door frame hinge hole 644 of the body frame side lower hinge member 640. Can be supported.

[3-1e. Door frame left side decorative board]
The door frame left side decorative board 160 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The door frame left side decorative substrate 160 is attached to the front side of the through hole 111 on the front side of the door frame base 110. The door frame left side decorative board 160 extends up and down from the height of the position below the speaker insertion port 119 on the left side when viewed from the front in the door frame base 110 to the height near the center of the through hole 111 in the vertical direction. The frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board extending up and down from the height of the lower position of the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 to substantially the same height as the lower end of the upper plate passage opening 117. A substrate 162.

  The door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 include a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a that can irradiate light forward. These LEDs 161a and 162a are full-color LEDs.

  The door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned behind the door frame left side unit 530, which will be described later, in a state where the door frame 3 is assembled, and includes a plurality of LEDs 161a and 162a provided (mounted) on the front surface. By appropriately emitting light, the left unit decorative lens member of the door frame left side unit 530 can be decorated with light emission.

[3-1f. Glass unit mounting member]
The glass unit mounting member 170 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIG. The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110, and is for attaching the glass unit 190 in a detachable manner. The glass unit mounting member 170 is a disc-shaped base portion 171 that is rotatably attached to an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 110, and protrudes in a bar shape from the base portion 171 in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 172.

  The glass unit attachment member 170 is rotatably attached to a portion below the pair of speaker insertion openings 119 on the rear surface of the door frame base 110 and outside the glass unit attachment portion 118.

  When the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, the protruding portion 172 is more outward than the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110 in the rear view. The glass unit 190 can be inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, or the glass unit 190 can be removed from the glass unit mounting portion 118.

  When the glass unit 190 is rotated so that the protrusion 172 protrudes downward from the base 171 in a state where the glass unit 190 is inserted into the glass unit attachment 118 of the door frame base 110, the protrusion 172 becomes glass. The unit 190 comes into contact with the rear side of the mounting piece 191a, and the rearward movement of the upper portion of the glass unit 190 is restricted, so that the glass unit 190 can be attached to the door frame base 110.

  In the glass unit mounting member 170, the protruding portion 172 protrudes from a disk-shaped base 171 that is rotatably mounted on the door frame base 110. . From this, in a state where the glass unit mounting member 170 can freely rotate, the protruding portion 172 is stabilized in a state of protruding downward from the base portion 171. Further, in the glass unit mounting member 170, the rearward movement of the glass unit 190 is regulated by the projecting portion 172 when the projecting portion 172 projects downward from the base portion 171. Even if vibration or the like acts on the member 170, the whole does not rotate so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the restriction of the backward movement of the glass unit 190 is naturally released. Absent.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated so that the protruding portion 172 protrudes upward from the base portion 171, and the protruding portion 172 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass unit 190. By moving the glass unit 190 to the outside, the upper side of the glass unit 190 can be moved rearward, and the glass unit 190 can be removed from the door frame base 110.

[3-1 g. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The handle attachment member 180 is for attaching the handle unit 300 to the front surface of the door frame base 110. As shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the handle mounting member 180 includes a cylindrical tube portion 181 extending in the front-rear direction, and outward from the rear end of the tube portion 181 in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tube portion 181. An annular flange portion 182 that extends, and a plurality of the flange portions 182 that protrude into the cylindrical portion 181 and extend over the entire length in the axial direction of the cylindrical portion 181 and are arranged at unequal intervals with respect to the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 ( In this example, three ridges 183, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 184 that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 181 and the front surface of the flange portion 182 and are arranged in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 181 are provided. .

  The handle attachment member 180 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 182 is in contact with the front surface of the handle attachment seat surface 112 in the door frame base 110.

  The cylindrical portion 181 has an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 301 a of the handle base 301 in the handle unit 300. One of the three protrusions 183 is provided on the upper side in the cylindrical portion 181, and the remaining two are provided on the lower side in the cylindrical portion 181. These three protrusions 183 are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 301 c in the handle base 301. Therefore, the handle attachment member 180 can insert the base portion 301a of the handle base 301 into the cylindrical portion 181 only when the three protrusions 183 and the three groove portions 301c of the handle base 301 are aligned. The rotational position of the handle base 301 (handle unit 300) can be restricted with respect to the door frame base 110.

  The handle mounting member 180 is attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 because the axis of the cylinder 181 extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange 182. Thus, the handle unit 300 can be attached to the door frame base 110 in a tilted state.

[3-1h. Glass unit]
The glass unit 190 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 190 closes the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 so that the rear can be visually recognized from the front. The glass unit 190 has a frame-shaped glass frame 191 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 and can be attached to the glass unit attachment portion 118, and the outer periphery of the glass frame 191 is closed. Two transparent glass plates 192 attached to 191. The two glass plates 192 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 191, respectively, and are spaced apart from each other so that a space is formed between them (see FIG. 26 and the like).

  The glass frame 191 has a pair of mounting pieces 191a extending in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right upper corners when viewed from the front, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. A plate-like locking piece 191b. The mounting piece 191 a of the glass frame 191 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170. The locking piece 191b can be inserted into a space between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 (see FIG. 26).

  The glass unit 190 is formed by inserting a locking piece 191b of the glass frame 191 from the rear side of the door frame base 110 into the gap between the door frame base 110 and the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130 from above. The front end of the glass frame 191 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 118 of the door frame base 110, the glass unit mounting member 170 is rotated, and the protruding portion 172 of the glass unit mounting member 170 is attached to the mounting piece 191a of the glass frame 191. It is attached to the door frame base 110 by contacting the rear surface.

  When removing the glass unit 190 from the door frame base 110, the glass unit 190 can be removed by a procedure reverse to the above. Thereby, the glass unit 190 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

[3-1i. Security cover]
The security cover 200 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 200 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 so as to cover the lower rear portion of the glass unit 190, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 200 is arranged with a flat plate-shaped main body portion 201 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, a flat plate-shaped rear protrusion piece 202 that protrudes rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 201, and is separated from the left and right. And a pair of locking pieces 203 that protrude forward from the main body 201 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110.

  The main body 201 of the security cover 200 is formed such that the lower end protrudes below the lower end of the glass unit 190 in a state of being attached to the door frame base 110. Further, the main body 201 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5 a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 201 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002 of the front constituent member 1000 to be described later, a part of the out guiding part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The pachinko machine 1 is assembled so as not to protrude into the game area 5a.

  The rear protrusion 202 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. Accordingly, the security cover 200 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body 201 and the rear protrusion piece 202, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, as shown in FIG. 33, the rear protruding piece 202 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 201. The rear projecting piece 202 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 201 is formed so as to be along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component member 1000 of the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear projecting piece 202 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, a game ball (game ball launched by the ball launching device 680) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear protruding piece 202 of the crime prevention cover 200, and the game area 5a There is no hindrance to the game ball.

  The pair of locking pieces 203 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base 110. Thereby, the security cover 200 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base 110.

  When the security cover 200 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 201 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 190 (the rear end of the glass frame 191) and protrudes backward from the lower side of the main body 201. The removed rear protrusion 202 is in a state of being inserted into a security recess 1008 of the front component 1000 described later. Further, the security cover 200 is in a state in which the rear protruding piece 202 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 201 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front structural member 1000 so as to contact the lower surface of the front structural member 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess portion 1008 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[3-1j. Opening and closing cylinder unit]
The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The opening / closing cylinder unit 210 is attached from the rear side to a cylinder mounting portion 113 at a position between the through-hole 111 and the handle mounting seat surface 112 near the right end of the door frame base 110 in a front view, and cooperates with a locking unit 700 described later. It is used to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

  The open / close cylinder unit 210 includes a cylindrical cylinder lock 211 having a key hole 211a on the front surface and extending in the front-rear direction, and is attached to the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 and rotates the key inserted into the key hole 211a. A rotation transmission member 212 for transmitting to 700 key cylinders 710 and a cylinder mounting plate 213 for mounting the cylinder lock 211 to the door frame base 110 (reinforcing unit 130) are provided.

  The cylinder lock 211 can rotate a key by inserting a corresponding key (not shown) into the key hole 211a. If the key is a corresponding key, the cylinder lock 211 can be rotated clockwise or counterclockwise. Can also be rotated by a predetermined angle in this direction.

  The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear side (specifically, a conical cylinder shape whose diameter increases toward the rear side), and is directed forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of cutout portions 212a cut out. The rotation transmitting member 212 is formed such that the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the protrusion of the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted into the pair of notches 212a. Thus, the rotation of the rotation transmitting member 212 (the key inserted into the key hole 211a of the cylinder lock 211) can be transmitted to the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 to rotate the key cylinder 710.

  The cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 is formed by bending a single metal plate, and is formed in a convex shape whose shape in plan view protrudes forward. More specifically, the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 includes a rectangular and flat front plate portion 213a extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of side plate portions 213b extending rearward from the left and right sides of the front plate portion 213a. And a pair of mounting plate portions 213c extending in a flat plate shape in a direction away from the rear sides of each of the pair of side plate portions 213b. In the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting metal plate 213, the cylinder lock 211 penetrates from the rear at a substantially central position in the vertical direction, and the rear end of the cylinder lock 211 is attached to the rear surface of the front plate portion 213a. The pair of mounting plate portions 213 c of the cylinder mounting plate 213 includes a mounting plate portion 213 c on the left side when viewed from the front and is attached to the right end portion of the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 of the reinforcing unit 130, and a mounting plate portion 213 c on the right side when viewed from the front. Attached to the right reinforcing sheet metal 134. Accordingly, the middle reinforcing sheet metal 132 and the right reinforcing sheet metal 134 are connected by the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213.

  When the open / close cylinder unit 210 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the front end of the cylinder lock 211 protruding forward from the front plate portion 213a of the cylinder mounting sheet metal 213 has a cylinder insertion hole from the rear side of the door frame base 110. 114 and protrudes forward of the door frame base 110, and the front plate portion 213 a and the pair of side plate portions 213 b of the cylinder mounting plate 213 are accommodated in a box-shaped cylinder mounting portion 113 that is opened rearward. ing.

[3-1k. Ball feed unit]
The ball feeding unit 250 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 34 and FIG. FIG. 34A is a perspective view of the ball feed unit of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 34B is a perspective view of the ball feed unit as seen from the back. FIG. 35A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 35B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit as seen from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. The ball feeding unit 250 can supply the game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 one by one to the ball launching device 680, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 can be used as the upper plate ball. It can be pulled out to the lower pan by operating the pull button 327.

  In the ball feed unit 250, the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 are supplied through the upper plate ball feed port 323d of the plate unit base 323 and the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110 and penetrated in the front-rear direction. A box-shaped front cover 251 that has an entrance 251a and a ball outlet 251b that opens to the lower side of the entrance 251a and that is open at the rear, and a box that closes the rear end of the front cover 251 and is opened at the front , A rear cover 252 having a hitting ball supply port 252a for supplying a game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a of the front cover 251 penetrating in the front-rear direction to the ball launcher 680, the rear cover 252 and the front cover A partition portion 253 that is pivotally supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between 251 and partitions between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b on the rear side of the front cover 251. The ball punching member 253 having a ball and the game balls on the partitioning portion 253a of the ball punching member 253 are sent one by one to the hitting ball supply port 252a of the rear cover 252 and vertically between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252. A ball feeding member 254 supported so as to be rotatable around the extended axis, and a ball feeding solenoid 255 for rotating the ball feeding member 254 are provided.

  As shown in the figure, the ball feeding unit 250 has a ball feeding member 254 disposed on the right side of the entrance 251a in front view, and a ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball feeding member 254. A ball feeding solenoid 255 is arranged on the right side.

  The front cover 251 of the ball feeding unit 250 includes an arc-shaped slit 251c concentrically formed with respect to the rotation center of the ball removing member 253 on the left side of the ball outlet 251b when viewed from the front, and this slit 251c. An operating rod 253c of a ball punching member 253, which will be described later, extends forward. The front cover 251 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 251a. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the front cover 251 is located upstream of the ball feed guide path 323e and the ball removal guide path 323f of the dish unit base 323. The part opened to the rear on the end side is formed to be closed from the rear side.

  The ball removal member 253 includes a partition portion 253a that is divided below the entrance port 251a and between the entrance port 251a and the ball exit port 251b and whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feed member 254, and a ball of the partition portion 253a. It extends downward from the end opposite to the feed member 254 and bends in the shape of a letter from the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 251b and rotates around the axis whose lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A pivot collar 253b that is movably supported, a rod-shaped actuation collar 253c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the pivot collar 253b, and a side below the actuation collar 253c from the side surface of the pivot collar 253b. A weight portion 253d protruding to the opposite side of the partition portion 253a. The operating rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 251c formed in the front cover 251 (see FIG. 34A). The operating rod 253 c comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327 a that is operated by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 through the ball feed opening 115 of the door frame base 110.

  The ball feeding member 254 has a fan-shaped blocking portion 254a and a rear end of the blocking portion 254a in plan view with the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction facing the entrance 251a and the partitioning portion 253a of the ball removing member 253. A sphere holding portion 254b that is recessed in an arc shape from the rotation axis to the rotation shaft core side, and a rod-like flange portion 254c that extends downward from the rear end of the sphere holding portion 254b. The blocking portion 254a and the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° around the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 254b of the ball feeding member 254 has a size that can hold one game ball. The ball feeding member 254 rotates around the rotation axis when the collar portion 254c arranged at a position eccentric from the rotation axis is moved in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 255.

  The ball feeding member 254 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 254a faces the direction of the partition portion 253a and at the same time the ball holding portion 254b communicates with the hitting ball supply port 252a, and the ball holding portion 254b is in the direction of the partition portion 253a. It is designed to rotate between the holding position facing toward. When the ball feeding member 254 is in the supply position, the game ball held in the ball holding portion 254b is supplied from the hitting ball supply port 252a to the ball launching device 680 and enters the partition portion 253a from the entrance 251a. However, the blocking unit 254a blocks the movement toward the ball holding unit 254b (hitting ball supply port 252a) and stays on the partition unit 253a. On the other hand, when the ball feed member 254 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 254b faces the partition portion 253a, and the end of the ball holding portion 254b on the flange 254c side closes the hitting ball supply port 252a. Only one game ball on the partition portion 253a is held in the ball holding portion 254b.

  Further, the ball feed unit 250 is moved back and forth by the ball feed operation rod 256 whose tip is swung vertically by driving (energizing) the ball feed solenoid 255 and the movement of the tip of the ball feed operation rod 256 swinging vertically. And a ball feed crank 257 that rotates around an axis extending in the direction and rotates the ball feed member 254 around an axis extending in the vertical direction. The ball feed crank 257 is engageable with the tip of the ball feed actuating rod 256 that moves up and down and extends in the left-right direction, and the side that engages the ball feed actuating rod 256 of the engaging portion 257a. A shaft portion 257b that is disposed on the opposite side and is pivotally supported around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 251 and the rear cover 252 and extending upward from the shaft portion 257b, A transmission portion 257c that engages with a rod-shaped flange portion 254c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position that is eccentric with respect to the rotation center of the member 254 is provided.

  The ball feed unit 250 transmits the movement of the ball feed actuating rod 256 that is swung by driving the ball feed solenoid 255 that moves forward and backward by the ball feed actuating rod 256 and the ball feed crank 257 so that the ball feed member 254 is moved. It can be rotated. When the ball feed solenoid 255 is not driven (normal time), the ball feed operating rod 256 is separated from the lower end of the ball feed solenoid 255 and the tip is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feed member 254 is in the supply position. It will be in the state located. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 256 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 255 so that the tip is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 254 is rotated to the holding position. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 254 receives one game ball, and when the ball feeding solenoid 255 is released (OFF state), the ball feeding member 254 is activated. Can be sent (supplied) to the ball launcher 680 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 255 in the ball feeding unit 250 is controlled in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 682 by a firing control unit (not shown) of the payout control board 951.

  Further, the ball removing member 253 pivotally supported in the ball feeding unit 250 is applied with a moment that rotates counterclockwise by the weight portion 253d, but protrudes forward. Since the rotation of the actuating rod 253c is brought into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 327a that is operated by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320, the ball removal member 253 is normally operated. The partition 253a partitions the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b, so that the game ball does not enter the ball outlet 251b side.

  When the player presses the upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 downward, the upper dish ball removal slider 327b slides downward together with the operation transmission unit 327a, and the operation transmission unit 327a moves downward. Accordingly, the operating rod 253c also moves relatively downward. When the operating rod 253c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion 327a, the ball removing member 253 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition between the entrance 251a and the ball outlet 251b by the partition portion 253a is released. Is done. As a result, the game ball that has entered from the entrance 251a is discharged from the ball outlet 251b to the ball outlet guide path 323f of the tray unit 320 and discharged (supplied) to the lower tray 322 via the lower tray ball supply port 323c. be able to.

  The upper dish ball removal slider 327b formed with the action transmitting portion 327a with which the operation rod 253c of the ball removal member 253 contacts is urged upward by the upper dish ball removal spring 327c. Even if game balls are supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the upper dish ball removal spring 327c via the operating rod 253c, and the ball removal member 253 and the like can be prevented from being damaged. The game ball can be prevented from bouncing back at the partition portion 253a.

  The ball feeding unit 250 has a rectangular mounting recess 252b (see FIG. 35 (b) and the like) that is recessed forward in the upper right in the rear view of the hitting ball supply port 252a in the rear cover 252. A tamper-proof member 260 is mounted in the mounting recess 252b. The fraud prevention member 260 of the ball feeding unit 250 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is attached to the inside of the mounting recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so as to be detachable from the rear side.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is formed in a rectangular shape whose outer shape in front view extends to the left and right, and an upper piece 261 that is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center in a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. A lower piece 262, and inclined portions 263 that are each formed in a C-chamfered shape on the tip side (the right end side in front view) of the sides of the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 facing each other. . The upper piece 261 of the anti-fraud member 260 is bent with respect to the general surface of the anti-fraud member 260 so that the right end in front view protrudes backward. The lower piece 262 extends on the same plane as the general surface of the tamper-proof member 260. Thereby, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 261 and the lower piece portion 262 form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

  The fraud prevention member 260 is attached to the attachment recess 252b of the rear cover 252 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 communicates with the inside of the hit ball supply port 252a. Become.

  According to the fraud prevention member 260, an illegal game ball with a string attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launcher 680 from the upper plate 321 via the ball feed unit 250, and attached to the illegal game ball. When a fraudulent act is performed in which a string is manipulated to cause an illegal game ball to be taken in and out of the first left starting port 2002a, etc., A string attached to an illegal game ball is inserted between the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262 and then narrowed in a V shape formed by the upper piece 261 and the lower piece 262. It is possible to cut off by a portion that has been removed, and to prevent an illegal act using an illegal game ball with a string attached.

[3-1l. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 270 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. FIG. 36 (a) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 37A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the front with the lid member removed, and FIG. 37B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit viewed from the rear with the lid member removed. Further, FIG. 38 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed.

  As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 270 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 271 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 110 and opened on the front side, and a flat lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271. 272. The foul cover unit 270 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and passes through the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port 323a of the dish unit 320. A full sphere receiving port 274 that opens toward the rear at the lower right side of the front sphere passage 273 and the through-sphere passage 273 and communicates with the full guide passage 862 of the lower full sphere route unit 860 of the main body frame 4. And.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 opens upward on the right side of the full ball receiving port 274 when viewed from the front, and does not reach the game area 5a despite being fired by the ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving port 275 for receiving a game ball (foul ball), and a game ball opened to the front near the lower right corner of the front view and received in the full tank receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 are moved forward. And a ball discharge port 276 that communicates with the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the tray unit 320.

  Further, the foul cover unit 270 is formed between the full tank receiving port 274 and the foul ball receiving port 275 and the ball discharge port 276 by the unit main body 271 and the lid member 272, and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. A storage passage 277 having a wide area, a plate-shaped movable piece 278 constituting a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 277 and having a lower end rotatably attached to the unit main body 271, and a movable piece A full tank detection sensor 279 that detects rotation of the 278 in a direction away from the storage passage 277 and a spring 280 that biases the movable piece 278 toward the center of the storage passage 277 are provided.

  When the inside of the lower plate 322 of the dish unit 320 is filled with game balls and the game balls are not released from the ball discharge port 276 to the lower plate 322 side, the foul cover unit 270 has a certain number in the storage passage 277. The game balls can be stored. When a certain number of game balls are stored in the storage passage 277, the upper end of the movable piece 278 moves away from the storage passage 277 against the biasing force of the spring 280 by the weight of the game balls. The movable piece 278 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279. Thereby, since it can be determined that the lower tray 322 is full of game balls, when full tank detection is detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, payout of further game balls is stopped, This can be notified to a player, a staff member of the game hall, or the like, and can be urged to eliminate the filling of the lower plate 322.

  The foul cover unit 270 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271 and below the through ball passage 273, and the guide path opening / closing door of the lower full ball path unit 860 in the payout unit 800 described later of the main body frame 4. A door opening / closing contact portion 281 with which the operation protrusion 863e of 863 can contact is provided (see FIG. 112). The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it goes downward. The door opening / closing contact portion 281 is formed such that when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the operation protrusion 863 e of the guide path opening / closing door 863 contacts. When the operating projection 863e of the guideway opening / closing door 863 contacts the door opening / closing contact portion 281, the guideway opening / closing door 863 rotates and the downstream end (front opening) of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862. ) Can be opened.

[3-2. Handle unit]
The handle unit 300 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 and 40. 39A is a front view of the handle unit in the door frame, FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 39B is a perspective view of the handle unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 40A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 40B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as seen from the rear. The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment member 180 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be driven by the player into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by operating the game ball in the upper plate 321. It is.

  The handle unit 300 covers the handle base 301 attached to the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle attachment member 180 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 302 attached rotatably to the front end of the handle base 301, and the front end side of the handle 302. And a handle cover 303 attached to the handle base 301.

  The handle unit 300 has an inner base 304 attached to the front surface of the handle base 301 on the rear side of the handle 302, a handle 302 attached to the front end, and a rotatable attachment by the inner base 304 and the handle base 301 on the outer periphery. A shaft member 305 having a drive gear portion 305a, a transmission gear 306 meshing with the drive gear portion 305a of the shaft member 305, a detection shaft 307a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 306, and a handle base 301 and an inner And a handle rotation detection sensor 307 sandwiched between the base and the base.

  Furthermore, the handle unit 300 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 301 and the other end side is attached to the handle 302 so that the handle 302 is returned to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). One end side is attached to the inner base 304 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 306, and the detection shaft 307a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 306. The auxiliary spring 309 biased in the direction, the handle touch sensor 310 attached to the handle base 301 behind the inner base 304, and the tip side outward from the left side of the front end outer peripheral surface of the handle base 301 in front view. The handle is protruding and the base end is behind the inner base 304 A single button 311 that is rotatably mounted around a shaft extending in the front-rear direction of the case 301, and a single button operation sensor 312 that is attached to the handle base 301 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 311. Yes.

  A handle base 301 of the handle unit 300 includes a cylindrical base portion 301a extending in the front-rear direction, a disk-shaped front end portion 301b protruding in a radial direction from the front end of the base portion 301a, and a hollow from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base portion 301a. And three groove portions 301c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base 301 a of the handle base 301 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180. Further, the three groove portions 301 c are formed at positions corresponding to the three protrusions 183 of the cylindrical portion 181 in the handle mounting member 180. Accordingly, the base 301a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 with the three groove portions 301c aligned with the three protrusions 183, and the protrusions 183 are respectively inserted into the three groove portions 301c. By being inserted, the handle base 301 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 180.

  The handle 302 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d that protrude outward in the circumferential direction from the outer peripheral surface, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 305). Two slits 302e extending in a circular arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from an inner position with respect to the rotation center with respect to the slit 302e, the other end side of the handle return spring 308 is locked. A locking projection 302f.

  The four first protrusions 302a, the second protrusions 302b, the third protrusions 302c, and the fourth protrusions 302d are sequentially provided in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Specifically, the first protrusion 302a bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front portion of the portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 bulges outward, and the opposite side is the opposite side. The side surface in the direction of is recessed (curled) so as to curve inward. The portion of the second protrusion 302b that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the portion of the first protrusion 302a that protrudes most clockwise by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees. Slightly low. The second protrusion 302b bulges so that the side surface in the clockwise direction of the front projection of the second protrusion 302b bulges outward, and the side surface in the direction around the counter-tick that is the opposite side is curved inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 302a.

  In the third protrusion 302c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 302b in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half the height. The third protrusion 302c is inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and more gently than the side face in the counterclockwise direction where the side face in the clockwise direction is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 302d has a portion that protrudes most from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 302 away from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 302c in a clockwise direction by a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and from the first protrusion 302a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 302d is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle with side surfaces on both sides inclined substantially linearly.

  The handle cover 303 is provided with three mounting bosses 303a that have a round front center and bulge forward and project rearward. The three attachment bosses 303a are attached to the front surface of the handle base 301 through the slits 302e of the handle 302 from the front. Since the attachment boss 303a of the handle cover 303 passes through the slit 302e of the handle 302, the attachment boss 303a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 302e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 302. In this example, the handle 302 can be rotated within a range of a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle unit 300 is attached to the handle attachment seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 via a handle attachment member 180. The handle mounting seat surface 112 of the door frame base 110 is inclined so that the right end side is positioned rearward of the left end side in plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 300 that is attached to the pachinko machine 1 is also inclined to the outside in a plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined to the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). Are attached and fixed to the door frame 3. Thereby, the player can easily grip the handle 302 of the handle unit 300, and can perform a turning operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 307 of the handle unit 300 is a variable resistor. When the handle 302 is rotated, the detection shaft 307 a of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 rotates via the shaft member 305 and the transmission gear 306. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 307a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 682 in the ball launching device 680 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 307. The game ball is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302.

  The outer peripheral surfaces of the handle 302 and the handle cover 303 are conductively plated, and the handle touch sensor 310 detects contact when the player contacts the handle 302 or the like. When the handle 302 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 310 detects a player's contact, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 307 is accepted, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 302. The driving of 682 is controlled, and a game ball can be shot. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 302 by some method without touching the handle 302, the firing solenoid 682 is not driven and the game ball can be driven. I can't do it. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from playing the game by rotating the handle 302 in a different way from the original, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  Further, in the handle unit 300, when the player presses the single button 311 while rotating the handle 302, the single button operation sensor 312 detects the operation of the single button 311, and the firing control unit (illustrated) of the payout control board 951 is shown. Is omitted), the rotation drive of the firing solenoid 682 is stopped. This makes it possible to temporarily stop the playing of the game ball without returning the rotation operation of the handle 302 and to release the single button 311 before operating the single button 311 by releasing the pressing operation of the single button 311. The game ball can be driven again into the game area 5a with strength.

  Further, the handle unit 300 includes four first protrusions 302a, second protrusions 302b, third protrusions 302c, and fourth protrusions 302d on the handle 302, and the handle 302 is most rotated in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front. Thus, when the game ball is driven most strongly into the game area 5a (so-called “right-handed”), the position of the first protrusion 302a when the handle 302 is not rotated is the fourth protrusion 302d. Therefore, by changing the handle 302 with the fourth protrusion 302d as the first protrusion 302a, the player can maintain the handle 302 in the “right-handed” position in an easy state. It is possible to reduce a person's feeling of fatigue and suppress a decrease in interest in games. However, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, if the player hits the right side in the normal gaming state, it is difficult to accept the game balls at the various receiving ports although the consumption of the held balls is large. It is disadvantageous for the player as compared to hitting it.

[3-3. Overall configuration of pan unit]
The dish unit 320 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45. 41A is a perspective view of the tray unit of the door frame as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 41B is a perspective view of the tray unit as viewed from the left front. FIG. 42A is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the upper right rear, and FIG. 42B is a perspective view of the dish unit viewed from the lower left rear. FIG. 43 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 44 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit as seen from the back after being broken down for every main member. FIG. 45 is an explanatory view showing, in an enlarged manner, a portion of the lower plate with the lower plate cover removed in the sectional view of FIG. The dish unit 320 is attached to a lower portion of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and the front surface bulges forward. An effect operation unit 400 described later is attached to the front surface of the dish unit 320.

  The tray unit 320 stores an upper plate 321 for storing game balls to be driven into the game area 5a, and game balls supplied from the upper plate 321 and the foul cover unit 270. A lower tray 322 that can be stored.

  The dish unit 320 is attached to the plate-shaped dish unit base 323 attached to the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 and the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit base 323, and the left side of the dish unit base bulges forward greatly from the left and right center. An upper plate body 324 that forms an upper plate 321, and a lower plate body 325 that is attached to the left side of the left and right center at the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 323 and bulges forward to form a lower plate 322. And a dish unit cover 326 attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 so as to cover the front sides of the upper dish body 324 and the lower dish body 325.

  Further, the dish unit 320 includes an upper dish ball removal button 327 that is attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 so that it can be pressed from above on the right side of the upper dish 321 when viewed from the front, and a front view of the upper dish ball removal button 327. A ball rental button 328 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side, a return button 329 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side of the ball rental button 328, and a ball rental button 328 The ball rental return display unit 330 attached to the upper surface of the dish unit cover 326 behind the return button 329 and the dish front upper decoration part 326b on the front surface of the dish unit cover 326 in front of the upper dish 321. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332, and projecting forward from the front of the dish unit cover 326 in front of the lower dish 322. And it has and a, a lower tray ball vent button 333 which is mounted for pressing from the front.

[3-3a. Top plate]
The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 and 44. The upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is formed by the plate unit base 323 and the upper plate body 324, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side is larger than the center of the left and right sides when viewed from the front and is opened upward. Has been. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) has a portion of about 約 bulges forward from the left end to the right with respect to the width in the left-right direction of the door frame 3. As the upper plate 321 moves from the most bulged part to the right in the front view, the front end retreats backward, and a guide passage part 321a having a depth in the front-rear direction slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball is formed. Yes. The entire upper surface of the upper plate 321 including the guide passage portion 321a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the right end side in front view of the guide passage portion 321a is the upper surface of the plate unit cover 326 (the upper plate ball removal button 327). ) (See FIG. 44).

  The upper plate 321 is assembled to the plate unit base 323, and the bottom surface of the upper plate 321 is a game ball with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball feed port 323d from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 323a of the plate unit base 323. It inclines so that it may become slightly lower toward the position below the outer diameter. Thereby, the game ball released forward from the upper plate ball supply port 323a can be received and stored in the upper plate 321, and the received game ball can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 321a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding port 323d.

  As described above, the upper plate 321 is formed such that the bottom surface thereof is lowered downward in the guide passage portion 321a in which the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrow. That is, a part of the upper plate 321 protrudes from above into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 to which a later-described effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A) is attached. Therefore, in the upper plate 321, a sufficient amount of game balls can be secured. The upper plate 321 (upper plate main body 324) protrudes into the mounting space 326j of the plate unit cover 326 so as not to contact the effect operation unit 400 (second effect operation unit 400A).

  The guide passage portion 321a is provided with a metal grounding metal 321b that is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball comes into contact with (rolls), so that the game ball Charged static electricity can be removed.

[3-3b. Lower plate]
The lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45 and the like. The lower dish 322 is disposed below the upper dish 321 and on the left side of the center of the dish unit 320 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower tray 322 is formed in a container shape that can store a game ball, and is attached to the tray tray cover 326 and a lower tray ball removal hole 322a that penetrates the bottom wall portion 325a up and down to allow the game ball to be discharged. And an escape portion 322b for avoiding contact with the rendered production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). The relief portion 322b of the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right front corner is recessed in an arc shape toward the rear.

  The lower plate 322 includes a lower plate main body 325 whose upper and rear sides are open, a lower plate cover portion 326k that covers the upper side from the left end side of the lower plate main body 325, and an open of the lower plate main body 325. A dish unit base 323 that is closed at the rear, and a lower dish cover 340 that covers the upper side of the portion of the lower dish body 325 that projects into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The cover 326 faces outward from the lower plate opening 326d. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 45, the lower plate 322 has a quadrangular shape in which the outer peripheral shape in plan view extends to the left and right, and a trapezoid in which the front side of the quadrangle is the base and the upper side shorter than the base is disposed on the front side. Are curved so that the left and right sides of the trapezoid extending obliquely are recessed backward. The lower plate 322 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction increases in the plan view from the front to the rear.

  As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44 and the like, the lower dish main body 325 is formed in a container shape whose upper and rear sides are open. The lower dish main body 325 has a flat bottom wall portion 325a, a main body standing wall portion 325b extending upward from an outer peripheral end excluding a rear end side of the bottom wall portion 325a, and a game ball passing through the bottom wall portion 325a. A lower dish ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically in a possible size. The outer peripheral shape of the bottom wall portion 325a is curved so that the left and right sides extending left and right, and the front side of the quadrangle and the upper side shorter than the bottom side are arranged on the front side and the left and right sides extending obliquely are recessed backward. It is formed in a shape that combines a trapezoid. The bottom wall portion 325a (the upper surface thereof) is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. The main body standing wall 325b rises upward from the bottom wall 325a at a height that is two to five times the diameter of the game ball. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is formed at a position on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the lower dish body 325 (bottom wall portion 325a). In the lower dish main body 325, the curved portion at the front right front corner of the bottom wall portion 325a and the main body standing wall portion 325b corresponds to the escape portion 322b.

  The lower plate cover 340 is formed so as to cover approximately the upper right half of the lower plate body 325. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 44, the lower plate cover 340 includes a cover upright wall portion 340a that rises upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower platen main body 325, and an approximately upper end of the cover upright wall portion 340a. A ceiling portion 340b extending horizontally. The cover standing wall portion 340a rises from a portion from a part of the front side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower dish main body 325 to the rear end of the right side. When the lower tray cover 340 is assembled to the tray unit 320, the rear ends of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b are in contact with the front surface of the tray unit base 323. Further, the front end (the left end side of the front side) of the cover standing wall 340a is in contact with the right end side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. Furthermore, the left end of the ceiling part 340b is in contact with the right end of the lower dish cover part 326k of the dish unit cover 326. In the lower plate cover 340, the curved surface portion of the cover standing wall portion 340a and the portion extending obliquely between the cover standing wall portion 340a and the ceiling portion 340b on the rear side correspond to the escape portion 322b. Yes.

  The lower plate 322 is covered with a plate unit cover 326 (the production operation unit 400) from the vicinity of the left end of the front end side of the front end side that extends short to the left and right, and more than half of the production operation unit 400 in the front view. Located behind. That is, the lower plate 322 is formed such that the right half wraps around the effect operation unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45, the lower plate 322 includes a lower plate first area A1 (a cross hatch area in FIG. 45) located behind a lower plate opening 326d of a plate unit cover 326, which will be described later, and a lower plate. Lower pan second area A2 (shaded in FIG. 45) located behind the opening 326d on the right side (the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower tray cover 340). Area). In other words, the lower dish 322 is more than half of the storage area in which the game ball can be stored (the area corresponding to the storage area in plan view and the lower dish first area A1 and the lower dish second area A2). It is located behind the rendering operation unit 400. In FIG. 45, the dotted hatch area is the remaining space (area) of the mounting space 326 j in the dish unit cover 326.

  In the lower plate 322, a lower plate ball supply port 323c that forms the rear wall is open to the right side of the center of the rear wall in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. More specifically, the lower tray ball supply port 323c of the lower tray 322 includes the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outside of the lower tray opening 326d) in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. It arrange | positions at the lower plate | pan 2nd area | region A2 used as the back of the side. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, the lower tray ball supply port 323c is not visible from the player side through the lower tray opening 326d (see FIG. 19 and the like). Accordingly, the lower plate 322 is formed so as to bend toward the rear of the production operation unit 400 from the lower plate opening 326d on the left side surface of the plate unit 320 (the plate unit cover 326) bulging forward. The storage volume of the game ball is formed larger than the range seen from the front. In other words, the lower dish 322 is formed so that the lower dish second area A2 is larger than the lower dish first area A1. Thereby, when the lower plate 322 is viewed from the outside (player side), more game balls can be stored in the lower plate 322 than it looks.

  In the lower plate 322, the right half of the lower plate main body 325 in the left-right direction (lower plate second region A2) is, as shown in FIG. 41 (a), an effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (mounting space 326j) of the plate unit cover 326. The lower plate cover 340 covers the upper side of the portion of the lower plate main body 325 that protrudes into the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a. The lower plate cover 340 prevents the fingertip from touching the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) when the player inserts a finger into the lower plate 322 from the lower plate opening 326d. can do.

  The lower dish 322 includes a lower dish ball removal hole 322a penetrating vertically in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c in the lower dish second region A2. The bottom surface of the lower dish 322 is inclined so as to become lower toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is closed so as to be opened and closed by a lid member 334 that is operated by pressing the lower dish ball removal button 333. In the normal state, the lower dish 322 has a lower dish ball removal hole 322 a closed by a lid member 334, so that a game ball can be stored in the lower dish 322. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed to open the lid member 334, the game ball in the lower plate 322 can be discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to the lower side of the plate unit 320.

  The lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is disposed in front of (in front of) the lower dish ball supply port 323c of the dish unit base 323 that forms the rear wall of the lower dish 322. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame 3, the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located on the right side of the lower dish opening 326d of the dish unit cover 326 and behind the frame unit 415 in the rendering operation unit 400. It is invisible from the player (front) side.

  As described above, the lower plate 322 is formed in a shape in which the outer peripheral shape is a combination of a front side of a quadrangle extending left and right and a trapezoid whose front side is narrowed, and the bottom surface has a lower plate ball hole 322a. It is inclined to become lower toward Therefore, the game balls supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c into the lower plate 322 in the state where the lid member 334 is opened and the lower plate ball hole 322a is opened are directly in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c. Immediately it is discharged downward from the opened lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Since the lower end of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is located slightly to the left of the left end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the lower dish ball supply hole 322a is opened in the state where the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened. The game ball supplied from the mouth 323c to the lower plate 322 does not directly flow to the left side region of the lower plate ball hole 322a in the lower plate 322, and is discharged from the lower plate ball hole 322a. Become.

  On the other hand, since the right end of the lower dish ball discharge hole 322a is located to the left of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, the game supplied to the lower plate 322 from the vicinity of the right end of the lower dish ball supply port 323c. A ball | bowl will contact | abut to the site | part which forms the standing wall of the right side of the lower plate 322 in the main body standing wall part 325b. Since the standing wall on the right side of the lower plate 322 is curved obliquely with respect to the front-rear direction so as to face the direction of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is When it comes into contact with the inclined portion, the light is reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball hole 322a, and is discharged from the lower dish ball hole 322a without going to the region on the left side of the lower dish ball hole 322a. (See FIG. 45).

  Thus, since the lower tray 322 of this embodiment is formed so as to guide the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a, the lower tray ball extraction hole 322a is formed. In a state in which is opened, the game ball supplied from the lower plate ball supply port 323c is immediately inserted into the region on the left side of the lower plate ball hole 322a in the lower plate 322 from the lower plate ball hole 322a. It can be discharged downward (dollar box). As a result, if the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is kept open, the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322 cannot be seen from the player side, so that they are paid out from the upper plate 321 or the payout device 830. An illusion that game balls and the like are directly discharged to the dollar box can be made to make it difficult for the game balls to feel annoying through the lower plate 322, thereby allowing the player to play a game (game ball driving operation). And a production image, etc.), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the lower plate 322 of the present embodiment includes the main body standing wall 325b of the lower plate main body 325 and the lower plate covers 340 and 340A extending upward from the upper end of the main body standing wall 325b. Even if the game ball supplied to the inside of the lower plate 322 jumps and jumps up, it is possible to prevent the game ball from entering the mounting space 326j from the lower plate 322, and the game ball in the lower plate 322 It is possible to prevent the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) from coming into contact with the rear side. Accordingly, the game balls supplied in the lower plate 322 and the game balls stored in the lower plate 322 are brought into contact with or pressed against the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A). It is possible to prevent the rear side of the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) from being damaged by the game ball.

  Furthermore, since the lower dish 322 is provided with a lower dish ball removal hole 322a in front of the lower dish ball supply port 323c, when the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the lower dish ball supply hole 323c is discharged. Since the played game ball can be directly entered into the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and discharged downward (dollar box), it is difficult for the game ball to reach the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower dish body 325. Can do. In addition, since the bottom wall portion 325a of the lower plate main body 325 near the front end of the lower plate 322 becomes higher toward the front, the game ball toward the front end side of the main body standing wall portion 325b of the lower plate main body 325 is inclined. It will climb the bottom, and the moving speed of the game ball can be attenuated. Therefore, the impact when the game balls released from the lower tray ball supply port 323c into the lower tray 322 abut against the lower tray covers 340 and 340A and the main body standing wall portion 325b can be reduced and damaged. Can be difficult.

  In the present embodiment, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be interlocked with the upper dish ball removal button 327. Accordingly, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed. It will be discharged | emitted from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have a strong illusion that the game ball on the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, and the above-described effects can be further exhibited. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the ball may be performed simultaneously by driving a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be performed simultaneously by a mechanical link mechanism.

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 constituting the lower plate 322 are separated, but the lower plate body 325 and the lower plate cover 340 are disassembled. It may be an impossible one. Moreover, although the cover standing wall part 340a of the lower dish cover 340 has shown the example which stood up from the upper end of the main body standing wall part 325b of the lower dish main body 325, the bottom wall part 325a of the lower dish main body 325 showed the bottom plate cover 340's The cover standing wall 340a may rise. Moreover, although the ceiling part 340b of the lower tray cover 340 showed the example extended substantially horizontally from the upper end of the cover standing wall part 340a, the ceiling part 340b of the lower dish cover 340 is shown in the main body standing wall part 325b of the lower dish main body 325. You may make it extend substantially horizontally from an upper end.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, although the example provided with the escape part 322b for avoiding the contact with the production operation unit 400 (2nd production operation unit 400A) of the lower plate 322 was shown, the escape part 322b is not provided. A lower plate 322 may be used.

  In the present embodiment, the lower plate 322 (the lower plate main body 325, the lower plate cover 340, etc.) has a uniform surface shape with no through holes. It may have a perforated hole. Specifically, at least a part of the bottom wall portion 325a, the main body standing wall portion 325b, the cover standing wall portion 340a, the ceiling portion 340b, etc. of the lower plate 322 is formed in a fence shape having a gap through which a game ball cannot pass. It is good also as what was formed in the thing and net shape. It should be noted that a light emitter such as an LED may be disposed in the dish unit cover 326 (mounting space 326j) so that the interior of the lower dish 322 is illuminated (light-emitting decorated) through a fence-like or net-like gap of the lower dish 322. .

  In this embodiment, the lower plate 322 is formed by the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 (lower plate cover portion 326k) formed separately. However, the lower plate 322 may be formed by combining these four members in an appropriate combination. Specifically, the lower plate cover 340 and the lower plate body 325 are integrated, the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. What is integrated, one in which the lower plate cover 340 and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, one in which the lower plate body 325 and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, the plate unit base 323 and the plate unit cover 326 In which the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit base 323 are integrated, and the lower plate body 325, the lower plate cover 340, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated. The lower plate cover 340, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit cover 326 are integrated, the lower plate body 325, the plate unit base 323, and the plate unit. That the Tokaba 326 are integrated, that a lower tray body 325 and Shitasara cover 340 and tray unit base 323 and dish unit cover 326 is integrated, it may be like.

[3-3b-1. Ball guide part of lower plate]
With reference to FIG. 46, an embodiment in which the lower tray 322 of the tray unit 320 is provided with a ball guiding portion 322c for guiding a game ball from the lower tray ball supply port 323c to the lower tray ball removal hole 322a will be described in detail. . FIG. 46A is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion, and FIG. 46B is an explanatory diagram schematically showing an example in which the lower plate is provided with a ball guiding portion different from (a). It is a figure, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows roughly the example provided with the further different bulb | ball guidance part. In FIG. 46, the same components as those described above are denoted by the same reference numerals.

  The example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46A is substantially the same as the diameter of the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a in the portion between the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a on the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. A pair of sphere guiding portions 322c are provided that are separated from each other by a distance. The pair of ball guiding portions 322c is formed in a rail shape (protrusion) extending forward and backward in a state of protruding from the bottom surface of the lower plate 322. The lower plate 322 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Accordingly, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c into the lower dish 322 are guided to the lower dish ball extraction holes 322a by the pair of ball guide parts 322c without getting over the ball guide parts 322c, and the lower dish balls It is discharged downward (dollar box) from the hole 322a.

  The lower plate 322 in this example is similar to the above in that the lower plate ball supply port 323c and the lower plate ball are located on the rear side (lower plate second region A2) on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326. The hole 322a is arranged in a straight line in the front-rear direction. Accordingly, the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are located behind the covering wall such as the effect operation unit 400, the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in the dish unit cover 326, and the front end side of the lower dish cover 340. It is not visible from the front.

  Thus, since the lower tray 322 of this example includes a pair of ball guiding portions 322c, the game ball supplied from the lower tray ball supply port 323c in a state where the lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened. Can be immediately discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without entering the left side area of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a in the lower dish 322. And since the game balls circulating on the lower plate 322 cannot be seen from the player side, the illusion that the game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are directly discharged to the dollar box. By making it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance that passes through the lower plate 322, it is possible to concentrate the player on the game (gaming operation of the game ball, a production image, etc.) and suppress a decrease in interest Can do.

  In the example of FIG. 46 (a), the ball guide portion 322c is rail-shaped, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the game ball is lowered like a groove extending toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Any material that can be guided to the dishball hole 322a may be used.

  Next, in the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (b), the game ball released diagonally forward to the right from the lower plate ball supply port 323c passes through the right wall of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the lower plate 322. In addition to being formed in a shape that reflects in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, a buffer portion 322d is provided at a portion where the game ball abuts. The buffer 322d is formed of rubber, foam or the like.

  Similarly to the above, the lower plate 322 of this example is also provided with a lower plate ball hole 322a in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c, and the bottom surface of the lower plate 322 is lowered toward the lower plate ball hole 322a. It is inclined to become. Therefore. The game ball released straight forward from the lower tray ball supply port 323c is discharged downward (dollar box) through the lower tray ball removal hole 322a. On the other hand, the game ball released to the right front from the lower dish ball supply port 323c is reflected toward the lower dish ball hole 322a by the buffer 322d and discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball hole 322a. Is done. At this time, since the game ball abuts on the buffer portion 322d and reflects, the collision sound at the time of reflection is reduced.

  Further, the lower plate 322 of this example is also on the right side of the lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 in the same manner as described above (the production operation unit 400 that is the lower plate second area A2 and the production operation in the plate unit cover 326). The unit mounting portion 326a and the lower plate cover 340 are disposed behind the covering wall such as the front end side of the lower plate cover 340 so that they cannot be seen from the front.

  Thus, since the lower tray 322 of this example includes the buffer portion 322d on the wall portion that reflects the game ball, even if the game ball is not released straight forward from the lower tray ball supply port 323c, The buffer portion 322d can be reflected in the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a without any sound and discharged downward (dollar box). Accordingly, when game balls and the like paid out from the upper plate 321 and the payout device 830 are discharged to the dollar box, the collision sound of the game balls cannot be heard from the lower plate 322, so that the bag is also discharged directly to the dollar box. By making it difficult to feel the annoyance of the game ball passing through the lower plate 322, the player can concentrate on the game (game ball driving operation, production image, etc.) and suppress the decrease in interest Can be made.

  Subsequently, in the example of the lower plate 322 in FIG. 46 (c), a portion on the opposite side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c with the lower plate ball removal hole 322a in the bottom surface (bottom wall portion 325a) of the lower plate 322 therebetween. And a return portion 322e that reflects the game ball that has jumped upward from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a toward the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. In addition, the return part 322e may use the same material as the material which forms the lower plate 322, and may use the buffer material which relieves the collision sound at the time of reflection, such as rubber | gum and a foam. Moreover, the return part 322e is good also as what does not comprise the side wall of the lower plate 322, and may comprise a part of side wall (main body standing wall part 325b) of the lower plate 322.

  In the lower plate 322, the lower plate ball supply port 323c, the lower plate ball hole 322a, and the return portion 322e are arranged in a straight line from the rear to the front, and the lower plate of the plate unit cover 326 Behind the opening 326d on the right side (the rear side of the covering wall on the front end side of the stage operation unit 400, the stage operation unit mounting part 326a in the dish unit cover 326, and the lower dish cover 340). It is arranged so that it cannot be seen from the front. In this lower plate 322, even if the game balls flowing from the lower plate ball supply port 323c to the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a jump over the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a, the return plate 322e causes the lower plate ball discharge hole 322a side to And can be discharged downward (dollar box) from the lower dish ball removal hole 322a. Therefore, the same operational effects as described above can be achieved.

  In the present embodiment, the above-described ball guiding portion 322c and the buffer portion 322d may be appropriately combined with the lower plate 322. Thereby, there can exist an effect similar to the above.

[3-3b-2. Another embodiment of lower plate]
Another embodiment of the lower plate 322 of the plate unit 320 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 47 (a) is an explanatory view schematically showing a lower plate that can be divided, and FIG. 47 (b) is a schematic view showing a state where the storage area of the lower plate is expanded according to the size of the space behind the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing shown, (c) is explanatory drawing which shows the lower plate of (b) with a schematic perspective view. The lower plate 322 shown in FIG. 47 is configured such that the lower plate main body 325 can be divided at the dividing line PL arranged in the lower plate second region A2. In addition, the area | region shown with a dotted line hatch in FIG. 47 has shown the remaining space of the attachment space 326j.

  First, the lower dish main body 325 (lower dish 322) shown in FIG. 47 (a) constitutes a part of the lower dish first area A1 and the lower dish second area A2, and has a lower dish ball removal hole 322a. A main body part 325A and a first extension part 325B that is attached to the right side of the main body part 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower dish second area A2 are provided. The first extension unit 325B further includes the remaining space (the production operation unit 400 and the second production operation unit 400A) of the installation space 326j in which the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) is accommodated, as compared with the main body unit 325A. Projects into the rear space). As shown in the figure, the first extension portion 325B is formed so that the width in the left-right direction increases from the front to the rear. In addition, the first extension part 325B is formed with an escape part 322b for avoiding contact with the second effect operation unit 400A at the right front corner.

  Next, in the example of FIGS. 47B and 47C, the rear end of the rendering operation unit 400 does not protrude rearward from the front end of the lower plate 322, and is more than that of the example of FIG. The space behind the rendering operation unit 400 (the remaining space of the mounting space 326j) is widened. The lower plate main body 325 (lower plate 322) includes a main body portion 325A that constitutes a part of the lower plate first area A1 and the lower plate second area A2 and has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a. It is attached to the right side of the part 325A and constitutes the remaining area of the lower dish second area A2, and includes a second extension part 325C larger than the first extension part 325B. As shown in the figure, the second extension part 325C has a constant lateral width from the front end to the rear end, and has a larger storage area for game balls than the first extension part 325B. Further, the lower plate 322 is attached with a lower plate cover 340A having a shape corresponding to the shape of the second extension portion 325C (see FIG. 47C).

  In the example shown in FIG. 47, by attaching the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C to the main body part 325A, the storage areas of the respective game balls become continuous (communication), and the storage area of the game balls Expands. The boundary between the main body 325A and the first extension 325B or the second extension 325C is a dividing line PL. Further, the first extension part 325B and the second extension part 325C in the lower platen main body 325 communicate with a predetermined gap (mounting space 326j) between the rear surface of the effect operation unit 400 and the second effect operation unit 400A. Space) is formed.

  As described above, in the above example, the lower tray main body 325 (lower tray 322) is configured to be divided, and at least one of the divided members can be replaced. The storage area can be increased or decreased as necessary. In addition, since the lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) is configured to be split, the production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) attached to the plate unit cover 326 protrudes behind (in the installation space 326j). An extension part (first extension part 325B or second extension part 325C) having a size corresponding to the amount can be attached.

  In the above embodiment, the dividing line PL is arranged in the lower dish second area A2 behind the effect operating unit 400 (second effect operating unit 400A). You may arrange | position on the boundary line of dish 1st area | region A1 and lower dish 2nd area | region A2, and may arrange | position in lower dish 1st area | region A1.

  In the above embodiment, the main body portion 325A of the lower plate body 325 (lower plate 322) is provided with the lower plate ball punching hole 322a, but the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are provided. You may make it provide the lower dish ball | bowl hole 322a.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first extension portion 325B and the second extension portion 325C are attached to the right side of the main body portion 325A of the lower dish main body 325. However, the game ball is placed on the right side of the main body portion 325A. A flat closing member that does not have a storage area may be attached.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiment, the lower plate body 325 in the lower plate 322 has been described, but the lower plate cover 340 can also be divided in the same manner as the lower plate body 325, or can be divided into the first extension unit 325B and the second extension unit. The shape may be adjusted to the size of 325C.

[3-3c. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 323 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit base 323 is attached to the lower side of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the left-right direction over the entire width of the door frame base 110 (the rear is opened). It is formed in a shallow box shape.

  The dish unit base 323 penetrates back and forth in the vicinity of the upper left corner when viewed from the front, and penetrates back and forth at the lower side of the upper dish ball supply port 323a and the upper dish ball supply port 323a extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear. A speaker slit 323b composed of a plurality of elongated holes extending vertically, and a lower dish ball supply port 323c penetrating back and forth in the lower left portion from the left and right center in front view and extending in a cylindrical shape to the rear, The upper plate ball supply port 323c is provided with an upper plate ball feed port 323d that penetrates forward and backward on the upper right side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c and extends vertically and has an upper portion positioned at the right end of the upper plate body 324.

  In addition, the tray unit base 323 has a ball feed guide path 323e for guiding the game ball sent to the rear side of the tray unit base 323 through the upper dish ball feed port 323d to the entrance 251a of the ball feed unit 250, After hanging down from the lower side of the feed guiding path 323e, it extends in a substantially L shape so as to become lower toward the right side surface of the lower dish ball supply port 323c when viewed from the front, and from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feed unit 250. A ball removal guide path 323f for guiding the released game ball to the lower dish ball supply port 323c, a left side of the front view of the ball feed guide path 323e, and a lower end of the ball feed guide path 323e and an upper end of the ball removal guide path 323f An operation transmitting portion 327a that is penetrating back and forth at a height between the two and is in contact with the operating rod 253c of the ball feeding unit 250 and operated by the upper dish ball removing button 327 protrudes so as to face rearward. And it includes an opening 323 g, a. The ball removal guide path 323f has a downstream end opened in a cylindrical portion of the lower dish ball supply port 323c.

  Further, the dish unit base 323 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner when viewed from the front, and the handle insertion port 323h through which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the front and rear near the right corner when viewed from the front. And a cylinder insertion port 323i through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted.

  The upper tray ball supply port 323a of the tray unit base 323 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens on the rear wall of the upper plate 321, and the cylindrical rear end is the upper tray passage port for the door frame base 110. 117 is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the through-ball passage 273 of the foul cover unit 270. Thereby, the game ball paid out from the payout unit 800 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 321 through the upper plate ball supply port 323a.

  The lower tray ball supply port 323c is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end opens in the rear wall of the lower plate 322, and the cylindrical rear end penetrates the lower tray passage port 116 from the front side of the door frame base 110. Then, the front end of the ball discharge port 276 of the foul cover unit 270 is connected. Thereby, the game balls circulating in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270 are supplied into the lower plate 322 through the lower plate ball supply port 323c. The lower tray ball supply port 323c is arranged behind the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outside of the lower tray opening 326d) of the tray unit cover 326, the front end side of the lower tray cover 340, and the like. Thus, when the door frame 3 is viewed from the front, it cannot be seen from the player side through the lower plate opening 326d.

[3-3d. Dish unit cover]
The dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The dish unit cover 326 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 so as to cover the front side of the upper dish body 324 and the lower dish body 325. The dish unit cover 326 has an effect operation unit mounting portion 326a in which the center in the left-right direction bulges forward and opens largely forward in the center in the left-right direction and to which the effect operation unit 400 is attached. A dish front upper decoration part 326b formed at substantially the same height as the upper dish 321 and a dish front lower decoration part 326c formed on the lower side of the left and right dish front decoration part 326b are provided. Yes.

  The production operation unit mounting portion 326a is formed with a size of about 1/3 in the horizontal direction with respect to the full width in the horizontal direction of the dish unit 320, and the vertical direction is substantially the same as the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320. It is formed at a height. In addition, the production operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined so as to move backward as the front end moves upward. Specifically, the front end of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a is inclined at an angle of 27 degrees with respect to the vertical line.

  The front front decoration part 326b moves rearward as it goes from the horizontal direction center side of the dish unit cover 326 toward both left and right sides. The intermediate portion is formed in a curved surface shape that slightly bulges forward with respect to the plane connecting the end portions. Further, the upper front decorative portion 326b is inclined so that the lower end moves upward from the horizontal center side of the plate unit cover 326 toward the left and right ends, and the horizontal side of the plate unit cover 326 ( It is formed so that the vertical direction is narrowed from the rendering operation unit attachment part 326a side) toward the left and right ends. In the dish unit cover 326, an effect selection left button 331 and an effect selection right button 332 are attached to the upper front dish portion 326b on the left side when viewed from the front.

  The front front side of the dish front decorative portion 326c moves rearward from the center side of the dish unit cover 326 in the left-right direction toward the both left and right sides. It is formed in a curved surface shape such that the intermediate portion is recessed backward with respect to the plane connecting the end portions.

  A lower dish opening 326d penetrating in the front-rear direction is formed in the front lower dish portion 326c on the left side of the front view, and the lower dish 322 faces forward from the lower dish opening 326d. In the lower front dish portion 326c on the left side when viewed from the front, a lower dish ball removal button 333 projects forward from the lower front surface of the lower dish opening 326d. Further, a lower speaker opening 326e made of punching metal is formed on the left side of the lower dish opening 326d in the front lower dish part 326c on the left side when viewed from the front. The lower speaker port 326e is located in front of the speaker slit 323b of the dish unit base 323 in a state where it is assembled to the dish unit 320.

  The front lower dish portion 326c on the right side when viewed from the front has a handle insertion port 326f that passes through the front and rear at the lower right corner when viewed from the front and through which the cylinder portion 181 of the handle mounting member 180 of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted. A cylinder insertion port 326g that penetrates back and forth above the handle insertion port 326f in the vicinity of the right corner and through which the cylinder lock 211 of the open / close cylinder unit 210 is inserted is formed.

  The dish unit cover 326 has a plate-shaped top plate part 326h extending from the upper end of the dish front upper decoration part 326b on the right side when viewed from the front to the front end of the dish unit base 323, and the top plate part 326h allows Covers the upper right side. The top plate ball removal button 327, the ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 are attached to the top plate portion 326h.

  The dish unit cover 326 includes a flat bottom plate part 326 i that extends from the lower end of the dish front lower decorative part 326 c to the front surface of the dish unit base 323. The bottom side of the dish unit 320 is closed by the bottom plate portion 326i. The bottom plate portion 326i is formed in a step shape so that a portion located below the lower plate 322 is recessed from below to above, and a lower plate ball removing base 335 described later is attached to the portion. Further, the bottom plate portion 326i is formed with a hole penetrating in the vertical direction at a position corresponding to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322.

  The dish unit cover 326 includes a mounting space 326j that opens forward at the site of the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a and into which the rear side of the rendering operation unit 400 (second rendering operation unit 400A) is inserted (accommodated). In addition, the dish unit cover 326 includes a lower dish cover part 326k that extends rearward from the left side and the upper side of the lower dish opening 326d and covers the lower dish 322 (see FIG. 44). . The lower plate cover part 326k comes into contact with the upper end of the left side of the main body standing wall 325b in the lower plate body 325 at the left end, and the left end of the ceiling part 340b in the lower plate cover 340 comes into contact with the right end. Yes.

[3-3e. Top plate ball removal button]
The upper dish ball removal button 327 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The upper dish ball removal button 327 is attached to the top plate portion 326h of the dish unit cover 326 on the right side of the upper dish 321 when viewed from the front. It can be pulled out. Although the detailed illustration of the upper dish ball removal button 327 is omitted, the rear edge side of the upper side of the top plate part 326h is shifted to the left and right by a ball removal button holder attached to the lower side of the top part 326h of the dish unit cover 326. It is attached rotatably about an axis extending in the direction. The upper end of the upper plate ball removal button 327 is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper plate ball removal lever that extends vertically. The ball removal lever is attached to be slidable in the vertical direction by a ball removal base attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 323 below the upper dish ball removal button 327.

  The ball removal lever whose upper end is in contact with the lower surface of the front end of the upper dish ball removal button 327 comes into contact with the upper part of the upper dish ball removal slider 327b that is slidably mounted by the dish unit base 323 from above. ing. The upper dish ball removal slider 327b includes an operation transmission part 327a that protrudes rearward from the rear surface. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the operation transmission part 327a is connected to the opening 323g in the dish unit base 323. It protrudes rearward so as to face, and abuts from below on the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 in the ball feeding unit 250. The upper dish ball removal slider 327b is biased upward by an upper dish ball removal spring 327c, and the biasing force of the upper dish ball removal spring 327c causes the upper dish ball removal slider 327b and the ball removal lever to be biased. An upper pan ball removal button 327 is located at the rising end.

  Therefore, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is pressed downward against the urging force of the upper dish ball removal spring 327c, the operation transmission part 327a of the upper dish ball removal slider 327b moves downward, and the operation transmission part 327a Since the operating rod 253c of the ball removing member 253 that is in contact with the upper end side also moves relatively downward, the ball removing member 253 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, and enters by the partition portion 253a. The partition between the mouth 251a and the ball outlet 251b is released, and they are in communication with each other. Thereby, the game balls in the upper tray 321 are discharged from the ball outlet 251b of the ball feeding unit 250 to the ball outlet guide path 323f of the tray unit 320, and discharged to the lower tray 322 via the lower tray ball supply port 323c. (Supply).

  When the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be moved in conjunction with the upper dish ball removal button 327. Accordingly, when the upper dish ball removal button 327 is operated, the lid member 334 is also moved to open the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, so that the game balls discharged from the upper dish 321 to the lower dish 322 are further removed. It will be discharged | emitted from the hole 322a to the lower dollar box. That is, when the upper plate ball removal button 327 is operated to remove the game ball from the upper plate 321, the game ball of the upper plate 321 is discharged to the dollar box even though the lower plate ball removal button 333 is not operated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to have a strong illusion that the game ball of the upper plate 321 is directly discharged to the dollar box, thereby making it difficult for the game ball to feel annoying through the lower plate 322. It is possible to concentrate the player on the game (gaming operation of game balls, effect images, etc.) and suppress a decrease in interest. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the ball may be performed simultaneously by driving a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be performed simultaneously by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-3f. Ball rental button, return button, and ball rental return display section]
The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The ball lending button 328, the return button 329, and the ball lending return display unit 330 are, as shown in the drawing, on the right side of the top dish ball removal button 327 in the top plate portion 326h of the dish unit cover 326 in the circular decoration. Installed on.

  The ball lending button 328 is used to insert a predetermined number of game balls into the ball lending machine (not shown) placed adjacent to the pachinko machine 1 by inserting a cash or prepaid card and pressing it. The unit 320 is lent out (paid out) into the upper plate 321. When the return button 329 is pressed in a state where the cash or prepaid card inserted into the ball lending machine is inserted, the cash or prepaid card is returned after subtracting the rented game balls.

  Although not shown, the ball rental return display unit 330 has a three-digit 7-segment LED disposed below the transparent surface, and the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards inserted into the ball rental machine, or An error code or the like when the ball lending machine breaks down is displayed.

[3-3 g. Production selection left button and production selection right button]
The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are attached near the right end of the dish unit cover 326 near the effect operation unit attachment part 326a in the front dish upper decoration part 326b on the left side when viewed from the front. The effect selection left button 331 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex pointing leftward. The effect selection right button 332 is formed in a triangular shape with one vertex directed rightward on the right side of the effect selection left button 331.

  The effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 are provided to the player in the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 arranged in the game area 5a in front view. On the other hand, when an effect image prompting selection is displayed, a pressing operation can be accepted, and a desired option is selected by operating the effect selection left button 331 and the effect selection right button 332 within a predetermined time. .

[3-3h. Bottom dish ball removal button]
The lower dish ball removal button 333 of the dish unit 320 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 41 to 44 and the like. The lower dish ball removal button 333 protrudes forward from the front lower end of the front dish lower decorative part 326c on the left side when viewed from the front, below the lower dish opening 326d in the dish unit cover 326 in front of the lower dish 322. When the lower plate ball removal button 333 is pressed, the lid member 334 closing the lower plate ball removal hole 322a of the lower plate 322 can be rotated, and the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower tray ball removal hole 322a is opened, and the game balls stored in the lower tray 322 can be discharged below the tray unit 320.

  The lower dish ball removal button 333 is slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower dish ball removal base 335 (see FIG. 42B) attached to the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326 on the lower side of the lower dish body 325. Installed on. The lower dish ball removal button 333 is disposed on the left side with respect to the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 (see FIG. 28 and the like).

  The bottom plate ball removal base 335 has a bottom plate so that the bottom plate portion 326i of the plate unit cover 326 is accommodated in a stepped portion that is recessed from below to above at a position below the lower plate 322. It is attached to the portion 326i. The lower dish ball removal base 335 is formed with a discharge port 335a penetrating vertically in the same size as the lower dish ball removal hole 322a at a position directly below the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322. . Although the detailed illustration is omitted, the lid member 334 is disposed between the lower dish body 325 and the lower dish ball removal base 335. Accordingly, when the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322a of the lower dish 322 is opened, the discharge port 335a of the lower dish ball removal base 335 is also opened, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a are opened. Are in communication with each other.

  Although not shown, the lid member 334 is attached to the lower dish ball removal base 335 so as to be rotatable around a position on the left side of the lower dish ball removal button 333 in plan view. The lower dish ball removal button 333 is connected to a portion between a portion of the lid member 334 that closes the lower dish ball removal hole 322 a and a portion that is rotatably attached by the lower dish ball removal base 335. As a result, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is moved in the front-rear direction, the lid member 334 rotates about the vertically extending axis, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) can be opened and closed.

  Although not shown, the lower dish ball removal base 335 includes a holding device that holds the lower dish ball removal button 333 when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pushed backward and moved, and a lower dish ball removal button. A lower dish ball spring for biasing 333 forward is attached. When the lower dish ball removal button 333 protrudes forward and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is closed by the lid member 334, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pressed and moved backward, the lid member 334 is rotated. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a is moved to move, and the lower dish ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and remains in the rearward movement state. In this state, even if the lower dish ball removal button 333 is released, the lower dish ball removal button 333 does not move forward, and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is maintained open. The game balls in 322 can be discharged to the lower side of the dish unit 320 through the lower dish ball removal hole 322a and the discharge port 335a.

  Then, when the lower dish ball removal button 333 is pushed backward while the lower dish ball removal button 333 is held by the holding device and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a is opened, the holding by the holding device is released. In this state, if the lower dish ball removal button 333 is released, the lower dish ball removal button 333 moves forward by the biasing force of the lower dish ball removal spring, returns to the protruding state, and the lid member 334 rotates. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is closed. Thereby, a game ball can be stored in the lower plate 322.

  In addition to the pressing operation of the lower dish ball removal button 333, the lid member 334 closing the lower dish ball removal hole 322a (discharge port 335a) is also moved by the pressing operation of the upper dish ball removal button 327. The lower dish ball removal hole 322a may be opened. Thus, when it is desired to discharge the game balls stored in the upper plate 321 to the dollar box disposed below the plate unit 320, the dollar box can be operated via the lower plate 322 only by operating the upper plate ball removal button 327. Can be discharged, and the labor involved in ball removal can be simplified. Note that the simultaneous opening of the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 for removing the ball may be performed simultaneously by driving a driving source such as a motor or a solenoid, or may be performed simultaneously by a mechanical link mechanism.

[3-4. Overall structure of production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the rendering operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 48 to 55 and the like. FIG. 48A is a front view of the effect operation unit in the door frame, and FIG. 48B is a right side view of the effect operation unit. 49A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 49B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 50 is an explanatory view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. 51 is a cross-sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 48A, and FIG. 52 is a cross-sectional view taken along line EE in FIG. 53A is a cross-sectional view taken along line FF in FIG. 48B, and FIG. 53B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the front after being disassembled for each main member, and FIG. 55 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit as seen from the rear after being disassembled as the main members. The production operation unit 400 is attached to the front part in the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front of the dish unit 320, and can be pressed by the player and can also provide a production image to the player. It is.

  The production operation unit 400 has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer periphery, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player. The production operation unit of the dish unit cover 326 surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the attachment portion 326a, a decorative board unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of emitting and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the unit 415, and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front surface. The base unit 430 is attached to the base unit 430 so as to be visible from the player side through the operation button 410. A door frame side effect display device 460 capable of displaying an image; Eteiru.

[3-4a. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 56 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the front, and FIG. 56 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the operation button as seen from the back. The operation button 410 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed to be transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a part of the spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and on the front side of the outer periphery of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 is attached, and a cylindrical button base 413 is attached to the rear side of the button frame 412 so as to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 and the button base 413 are formed of members that are difficult to transmit light.

  The button lens 411 is formed with a substantially constant thickness as a whole. Further, the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface with no irregularities on the surface side. The button lens 411 extends in a predetermined length from the back surface to the center side (inner side) at a position on the inner peripheral side of the button frame 412 in a W-shaped cross section, and is arranged in the circumferential direction. One button decoration part 411a and a line extending within a predetermined angular range in the circumferential direction while extending on the axis toward the center side in a state of being recessed in a circular arc shape from the back surface at a position on the outer peripheral side than the first button decoration part 411a And a plurality of (six) second button decoration portions 411b.

  As shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 extends from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side in a state assembled to the operation button 410. Longer than the center.

  Each of the plurality of second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411 extends in an arc shape on the same circumference, and three are formed on each of the left and right sides. These second button decoration portions 411 b are formed so as to face the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412, and protrude forward so that the front side is substantially flush with the front surface of the button frame 412.

  The button lens 411 exhibits a lens effect in which light is refracted by the concave and convex portions having a W-shaped cross section or a circular arc shape formed on the back surface in the first button decorative portion 411a and the second button decorative portion 411b. Therefore, the rear side is not clearly visible.

  The button frame 412 is formed in an annular shape, and includes a plurality of (six) frame openings 412 a penetrating in the front-rear direction and extending in a circular shape with a predetermined length in the circumferential direction. Six frame openings 412a are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the six second button decoration portions 411b of the button lens 411. The button frame 412 includes a plating layer having a metallic luster on the surface.

  The button base 413 includes a substantially cylindrical main body 413a that extends short in the front-rear direction, an annular flange 413b that protrudes outward from the front end of the main body 413a, and a main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (four) guide bosses 413c projecting rearward along the outer circumference of the main body 413a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction, and along the outer circumference of the main body 413a from the rear side of the flange 413b. A plurality of (three) detection pieces 413d that protrude rearward in a band shape and penetrate the flange portion 413b in the front-rear direction outside the main body portion 413a and have a predetermined length along the outer periphery. A plurality of (six) base openings 413e extending in the circumferential direction, and extending in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the main body 413a to the front, the front end being the inner surface of the button lens 411 And a, an inner extending portion 413f are narrowed inward (central side) along.

  The outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411 and the button frame 412 are attached to the outer peripheral surface of the inner extending portion 413f and the front surface of the flange portion 413b in the button base 413. The four guide boss portions 413c are respectively disposed at portions corresponding to the four corners of the upper, lower, left, and right with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body portion 413a. These four guide boss portions 413c are slidably inserted into the holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, respectively. The three detection pieces 413d are arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction so as to be arranged two on the upper side and one on the lower side with respect to the circumferential direction of the main body 413a. These three detection pieces 413d are detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430 when the operation button 410 is pressed.

  The six base openings 413 e are provided on each of the left and right sides, and correspond to the second button decoration part 411 b of the button lens 411 and the frame opening 412 a of the button frame 412. In the portion of the base opening 413e in the button base 413, a part of the main body 413a and the inner extension 413f is recessed inward from the outer peripheral side. The inner extension portion 413f has an inner diameter of the front end that is narrowed inward substantially equal to the inner diameter of the button frame 412.

  The operation button 410 has a front surface that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) and is formed to be transparent, and the door frame side effect display device 460 disposed on the rear side. Can be viewed from the front. The operation button 410 has four guide boss portions 413 c slidably inserted into the holding holes 431 b of the unit base 431 in the base unit 430, and the operation button springs 438 inserted into the holding holes of the unit base 431 at 431 b. It is urged forward by. The operation button 410 is further prevented from moving forward by the front side of the outer peripheral edge coming into contact with the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438 of the base unit 430, and the urging force of the operation button spring 438 is As a result, the rear end moves backward until it comes into contact with the front surface of the base unit 430. When the operation button 410 is pressed and moved backward, at least one of the three detection pieces 413d is detected by the press detection sensor 440 of the base unit 430. The operation button 410 is operated by the detection of the detection piece 413d by the press detection sensor 440.

  The operation button 410 is a first button decoration formed over the entire circumference so as to extend from the inner peripheral end of the button frame 412 to the center side in the transparent button lens 411 in a state where the production operation unit 400 is assembled. By the portion 411a, the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button inner decoration member 432 of the base unit 430 can be made difficult to see from the player side.

  Further, the operation button 410 has a cylindrical button base 413 whose front end opening is closed by a button lens 411 and a button frame 412, and the operation button 410 is attached to the outer periphery of the button lens 411 by the button frame 412. With respect to the outer diameter of 410, a transparent portion whose rear side is visible is formed so as to be constricted inward from the outer periphery. The presence of the button frame 412 also makes it difficult for the player to see the gap between the inner peripheral surface of the button base 413 and the operation button interior decoration member 432 of the base unit 430.

  In addition, when the operation button 410 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end of the cylindrical button base 413 (main body 413 a) passes through the inner peripheral side of the decoration board unit 420 and is more than the front surface of the decoration board unit 420. It will be in the state of protruding backward. As a result, the light emitted forward from the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b mounted on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420 is displayed. It is possible to prevent leakage from the outside of the base 413 to the inside, and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inside of the base unit 430. It is possible to prevent light emitted forward from the LED mounted on the decorative substrate 436 from leaking from the inside to the outside of the button base 413. Accordingly, the first LED 422a, 423a and the second LED 422b, 423b of the decoration board unit 420 and the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button of the base unit 430. The LEDs mounted on the lower inner decorative board 436 can prevent the portions other than the light emitting decoration target from being decorated with light emission, and can perform the light emission decoration with good appearance.

[3-4b. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 includes a frame-shaped frame body 416 having a circular central opening 416a attached to the rendering operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320, and the frame main body 416 on the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A pair of translucent frame side lenses 417 attached from the rear side, and a translucent frame top lens 418 attached from the front side to the frame body 416 above the central opening 416a. Yes.

  The frame body 416 has a circular central opening 416a that is smaller in diameter than the outer diameter of the operation button 410 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and penetrates in the front-rear direction on both the left and right sides of the central opening 416a. A plurality of (six) outer peripheral openings 416b extending in a circular arc shape along the peripheral edge of the central opening 416b, and a notch 416c notched with a predetermined width on the upper front surface of the central opening 416a. It is equipped with. The central opening 416a is formed to have substantially the same diameter as the outer diameter of the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410. Thereby, the front end side of the flange part 413b of the button base 413 in the operation button 410 can contact | abut on the outer peripheral rear side of the frame opening part 412a.

  Six outer peripheral openings 416b are provided in three each on the left and right outer sides of the central opening 416a, and are closed by a frame side lens 417 from the rear side. The notch 416c penetrates also in the front-rear direction, and the frame top lens 418 is fitted from the front side.

  The frame main body 416 includes a substantially cylindrical inner cylindrical portion 416d extending rearward from a position slightly outside the peripheral edge of the central opening 416a. The inner cylindrical portion 416d extends rearward from a position between the central opening 416a and the outer peripheral opening 416b, and a portion corresponding to the notch 416c is cut away. The inner cylinder portion 416d has the first LED 422a and 423a and the second LED 422b and 423b on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423 of the decoration board unit 420 in a state where the effect operation unit 400 is assembled. Between the first LEDs 422a and 423a and the second LEDs 422b and 423b (see FIG. 52).

  Furthermore, the frame main body 416 extends outward at the upper left and right sides of the outer periphery, and includes a pair of attachment portions 416e attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320. The frame main body 416 (the production operation unit 400) is attached to the production operation unit attachment portion 326a of the plate unit cover 326 of the plate unit 320 at the left and right sides of the pair of attachment portions 416e and the cutout portion 416c.

  The frame body 416 is substantially entirely metal except for a portion having the same width as the notch 416c on the side opposite to the notch 416c side (the side on which the frame top lens 418 is attached) with the central opening 416a in between. A glossy plating layer is formed.

  The frame side lens 417 closes the outer peripheral openings 416b formed on the left and right sides of the frame main body 416 from the rear side. The front side of the frame side lens 417 is formed on a smooth surface without irregularities, and a plurality of irregularities along the periphery of the central opening 416a are formed on the rear side (see FIGS. 53 and 63). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame side lens 417 cannot be seen.

  The frame top lens 418 has a substantially quadrangular outer shape so as to be fitted into the notch 416c of the frame body 416 from the front side. The frame top lens 418 has a smooth front surface. The frame top lens 418 has a plurality of projections and recesses extending in a zigzag shape along the periphery of the central opening 416a on the rear surface side in a plurality of rows in the radial direction of the central opening 416a (see FIGS. 51 and 63). reference). The light is refracted by the plurality of irregularities so that the rear side of the frame top lens 418 cannot be seen.

  The frame unit 415 is a state in which the production operation unit 400 is assembled, and a pair of frame side lenses 417 are arranged on the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and the operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 of the decorative substrate unit 420, respectively. The frame top lens 418 is positioned in front of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437 of the base unit 430, and each of the second LEDs 422b, 423b and the like mounted thereon can be decorated with light emission. .

[3-4c. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the decorative substrate unit of the effect operation unit as seen from the front. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the base unit 430 below the frame unit 415, and can light-decorate the second button decoration part 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. The operation unit 400 can be given vibration.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, an operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front portion of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The substrate base 421 is formed so that the inner peripheral side is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the cylindrical main body 413 a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and the outer peripheral side is larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 413 b in the button base 413. In addition, it is formed smaller than the outer diameter of the frame unit 415.

  The operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 has a plurality of first LEDs 422a mounted on the front side along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and a radially outer side of the plurality of first LEDs 422a on the inner circumference of the board base 421. And a plurality of second LEDs 422b mounted along. The operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 extends in an arc shape along the front surface of the substrate base 421. The operation button right outer decorative board 423 is provided on the front side with a plurality of first LEDs 423a mounted along the inner circumference of the board base 421, and on the inner circumference of the board base 421 at a radially outer side than the plurality of first LEDs 423a. And a plurality of second LEDs 423b mounted along. The operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are white on both front and rear sides.

  The vibration motor 424 has an eccentric weight 424a attached to the rotation shaft, and can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a.

  When the decorative board unit 420 is assembled to the effect operation unit 400, the rear end side of the cylindrical main body 413 a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 is inserted inside the board base 421. Further, in the decorative board unit 420, the first LEDs 422a and 423a in the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are located behind the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410, respectively. The second LEDs 422b and 423b are located behind the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415. Further, in the assembled state in the production operation unit 400, a frame is provided between the first LEDs 422a and 423a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board 423 and the second LEDs 422b and 423b, respectively. The inner cylinder part 416d of the unit 415 is located (see FIG. 52).

  Therefore, the decoration board unit 420 emits and decorates only the second button decoration portion 411b of the operation button 410 by the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a on the operation button left outer decoration board 422 and the operation button right outer decoration board 423. In addition, only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be illuminated and decorated by the light from the respective second LEDs 422b and 423b.

  In addition, the decorative substrate unit 420 can generate vibration by rotating the weight 424a of the vibration motor 424, and can vibrate the effect operation unit 400 as a whole.

[3-4d. Base unit]
The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 58A is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 58B is a perspective view of the base unit of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view in which the base unit of the effect operation unit is disassembled and viewed from the front. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view in which the base unit of the effect operation unit is disassembled and viewed from behind. The base unit 430 of the effect operation unit 400 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 while the operation buttons 410 are attached so as to be able to advance and retreat.

  The base unit 430 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415 and has four through holes 431a penetrating in a substantially square shape extending vertically in the center portion, and four stop holes opened forward on the outside of the through hole 431a. A ring-shaped unit base 431 having a holding hole 431b, a translucent operation button decorative member 432 which is attached so as to cover the through-hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431, and which extends in a short tube shape in the front-rear direction; The operation button left inner decoration board 433 and the operation button right inner decoration board 434 attached to the left and right sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 behind the button inner decoration member 432, and the operation button inner decoration member 432, respectively. The operations attached to the upper and lower sides of the through hole 431a on the front surface of the unit base 431 at the rear. A button on the decorative substrate 435 and the operation buttons under the decorative substrate 436, and a frame top lens decorative board 437 attached to the upper front portion of the unit base 431, a.

  The base unit 430 includes four operation button springs 438 inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431, three sensor holders 439 attached to the front surface of the unit base 431, and each sensor holder. Each of the three press detection sensors 440 that are attached to the 439 and detect the pressing operation of the operation button 410, the effect operation unit relay board 441 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431, and the effect operation unit relay board 441. A relay board cover 442 attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so as to cover the rear side.

  The unit base 431 has a substantially circular outer shape and is slightly smaller than the outer shape of the frame unit 415. The unit base 431 penetrates back and forth in the center, and is formed with a substantially rectangular through hole 431a extending vertically. The through hole 431a is sized to fit within the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410, and is sized to allow the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460 to be inserted. A door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431.

  The four holding holes 431b of the unit base 431 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 at the four corners on the top, bottom, left, and right outside the through hole 431a. These holding holes 431b are formed so that the inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be slidably inserted.

  More specifically, the upper left holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b is from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410) to the center of the unit base 431. Thus, it is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees counterclockwise. In addition, the upper right holding hole 431b of the four holding holes 431b is clockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 431 from a center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 431 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, two holding holes 431b arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 431b are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 431 with respect to the upper two holding holes 431b. .

  Further, the unit base 431 has a light shielding wall portion 431c that protrudes forward in a flat plate shape from between a portion to which the operation button upper inner decorative substrate 435 is attached and a portion to which the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 is attached in the upper front portion. It has. The light shielding wall 431c allows the frame top lens 418 to be decorated with light emission only by the frame top lens decoration substrate 437.

  The operation button internal decoration member 432 is formed in a curved surface shape so that the substantially cylindrical peripheral wall portion 432a that extends short in the front-rear direction and the front end side of the peripheral wall portion 432a are closed and the center protrudes forward. A front plate portion 432b, a rectangular opening 432c that passes through the front plate portion 432b in the front-rear direction and extends vertically, a flange portion 432d that extends outward from the rear end of the peripheral wall portion 432a, and a flange portion 432d And a plurality of mounting bosses 432e that are attached to the unit base 431.

  The peripheral wall portion 432 a of the operation button inner decoration member 432 has an outer diameter that is substantially the same as the inner diameter of the button frame 412 in the operation button 410. The opening 432c penetrating through the front plate portion 432b is formed in substantially the same size as the display screen of the door frame side effect display device 460.

  In the operation button inner decoration member 432, the outer peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the front surface of the front plate portion 432b are formed on a smooth surface without unevenness.

  The operation button inner decorative member 432 is formed on the inner peripheral surface of the peripheral wall portion 432a, is recessed in an arc shape and extends in the front-rear direction, and includes a plurality of first button inner decorative portions 432f provided in the circumferential direction. , Formed on the rear surface of the front plate portion 432b, bulging in an arc shape, extending in an odd octagonal shape centering on the center of the front plate portion 432b, and concentrically centering on the center of the front plate portion 432b A plurality of second button interior decoration portions 432g (see FIG. 63). The second button interior decoration portion 432g is formed to have a portion extending in parallel with the four inner peripheries of the opening 432c.

  The operation button internal decoration member 432 is formed of a transparent member. The operation button inner decorative member 432 is not clearly visible behind the lens due to the lens effect of the first button inner decorative portion 432f of the peripheral wall portion 432a and the second button inner decorative portion 432g of the front plate portion 432b. .

  The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are each mounted with a plurality of LEDs. By making it emit light, the decorative member 432 in the operation button can be decorated with light emission. By decorating the operation button interior decoration member 432 with light emission, the inside of the operation button 410 or the outside of the door frame side effect display device 460 can be light emission decorated.

  A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437, and by emitting these LEDs, the frame top lens 418 in the frame unit 415 can be decorated with light emission.

  The LEDs mounted on the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 are respectively full color LEDs. It is said that. The operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, the operation button lower inner decoration board 436, and the frame top lens decoration board 437 have a white front surface. .

  The operation button spring 438 is a coil spring and is inserted into the four holding holes 431b in the unit base 431 from the front. The operation button spring 438 is a guide boss whose rear end is in contact with the bottom surface of the holding hole 431b and whose front end protrudes rearward from the main body 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 when assembled in the production operation unit 400. It abuts on the rear end of the portion 413c. These operation button springs 438 urge the operation buttons 410 forward.

  The three press detection sensors 440 are arranged at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 in the operation button 410. Specifically, three pressure detection sensors 440 are arranged on the front surface of the unit base 431, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 431b, the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 431b, and the other on the lower left side. Are attached to the lower right side of the holding holes 431b via sensor holders 439, respectively. The three press detection sensors 440 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 431. These three press detection sensors 440 can detect the three detection pieces 413 d of the operation button 410.

  The effect operation unit relay board 441 is attached to the left side (right side of the front view) of the through hole 431a in the rear view on the rear side of the unit base 431. The production operation unit relay board 441 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, an operation button left inner decoration board 433, an operation button right inner decoration board 434, and an operation button upper inner decoration board. 435, operation button lower inner decoration board 436, frame top lens decoration board 437, press detection sensor 440, door frame side effect display device 460 and the door frame base unit 100 for relaying the connection to the door body relay board. Is.

  The relay board cover 442 extends leftward from the lower end of the portion covering the rear side of the effect operation unit relay board 441, and includes a leg portion 442a attached to the lower rear portion of the unit base 431. The leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 has a bottom surface extending substantially horizontally when assembled to the door frame 3 and a bottom plate portion 326i forming the bottom surface of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320. A slight gap is formed (see FIG. 26). As a result, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or struck downward, until the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the frame unit 415 The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e and the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 being bent downward. Then, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 are controlled. It is possible to prevent an undue force from acting on 326a and the like and to prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4e. Door frame side effect display device]
The door frame side effect display device 460 of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 54 and 55. The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 so that the display screen faces forward from the opening 432c of the operation button interior decoration member 432 in the base unit 430, and the operation button 410 is transparent. The display screen can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the center portion, and the effect image can be displayed on the display screen.

  The door frame side effect display device 460 is attached to the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 461 having a square display screen on the front surface and the liquid crystal display device 461, and attached to the rear side of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430. And a mounting bracket 462 having a bottomed rectangular tube shape. The liquid crystal display device 461 is a commercially available color liquid crystal display having an aspect ratio of 16: 9 and a diagonal length of about 4.3 inches. The mounting bracket 462 has an outer periphery formed in the same shape as the outer periphery of the liquid crystal display device 461, and is attached so that the bottom of the bottomed cylindrical shape comes into contact with the rear surface of the liquid crystal display device 461.

  In a state where the door frame side effect display device 460 is assembled in the effect operation unit 400, the liquid crystal display device 461 passes through the through hole 431 a of the unit base 431 from the rear side, and the inside of the peripheral wall portion 432 a of the operation button interior decoration member 432. (See FIG. 51). The front surface (display screen) of the liquid crystal display device 461 is located in the vicinity of the front end of the peripheral wall portion 432a of the operation button inner decorative member 432, and faces forward from an opening 432c penetrating the front plate portion 432b.

  Door frame side effect display device 460 can display a predetermined effect image based on a control signal from peripheral control board 1510 in liquid crystal display device 461.

[3-4f. Effect of production operation unit]
The effects of the effect operation unit 400 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 to 63 and the like. FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a state where an operation button is pressed in the cross-sectional view of the effect operation unit of FIG. FIG. 62 (a) is a view of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and a part of the operation button is cut away so as to be hidden by the first button decoration portion or the button frame of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows a site | part, (b) is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of a production | presentation operation unit. FIG. 63A is an explanatory view showing the appearance of the rendering operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 63B is an explanatory view of the appearance of the rendering operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. It is.

  The effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment can show the effect image to the player according to the game state that is changed when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5, and the player can operate the game. It is possible to entertain and entertain the player in the presentation presented to the player by operating the button 410.

  The production operation unit 400 has an overall height that is substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. In addition, the production operation unit 400 has a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The production operation unit 400 is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

  In the rendering operation unit 400, the upper part of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326 a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. When the rendering operation unit 400 is attached to the tray unit 320, the bottom surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 serving as the bottom surface is spaced from the top surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the tray unit cover 326 of the tray unit 320. Is formed. That is, only the upper part of the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit 320 and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the rendering operation unit 400, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the rendering operation unit attachment portion 326a. As installed. As a result, the production operation unit 400 is configured such that the central axis CL of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is at an angle of 63 degrees with respect to the vertical line. It is inclined to move upward as it goes forward. Accordingly, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is arranged above the plate unit 320 (the production operation unit 400). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the center axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the effect operation unit 400 (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as close as possible to the front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the operation button 410 and the door frame side effect display device 460 in the operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the effect operation unit 400, the four guide boss portions 413c of the operation button 410 are slidably inserted into the four holding holes 431b of the base unit 430, and are urged forward by the operation button spring 438. In the normal operation state (the state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the effect operation unit 400 causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be attached to the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring 438. The frame body 416 is in contact with a portion near the central opening 416a on the rear surface.

  In the normal operation state, the rendering operation unit 400 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415 from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the center side (center axis line CL side). Yes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) in the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is formed. The frame unit 415 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 51 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  When the player presses the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 in a normal state, the operation button 410 moves backward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring 438. Then, when the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the unit base 431 of the base unit 430, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the operation buttons for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the center axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, whereas the operation buttons 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of the present embodiment. Since the central axis CL is attached to be inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above as in the conventional pachinko machine, as shown by the white arrow in FIG. The part away from the central axis CL of the operation button 410 is pressed.

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing the part off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part is retracted first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 of this embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a pressing operation is performed at a position away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, and the operation button 410 becomes difficult to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves rearward straightly. Can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. The operation to operate can be fully enjoyed.

  In addition, the production operation unit 400 has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decorative board unit 420, and as described above, only the upper part is a dish so that the production operation unit 400 can be suspended. Since the vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, the vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part because it is attached to the production operation unit attaching part 326a of the unit cover 326. The entire production operation unit 400 can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and the vibration can be transmitted to the player who is touching the production operation unit 400. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can relatively press the button (the position of the white arrow in FIG. 61), Strong vibrations can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a of the relay board cover 442 forming the lower surface and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. Since a gap is formed between the upper surface of the portion 326i and the lower surface of the leg portion 442a comes into contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i when the operation button 410 is strongly pressed or hit, the frame The impact can be absorbed by the mounting portion 416e of the unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc. being bent downward. Further, after the lower surface of the leg portion 442a contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i, the downward movement of the rendering operation unit 400 is restricted, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the rendering operation unit mounting of the dish unit cover 326 are restricted. It is possible to prevent an excessive force from acting on the portion 326a and the like, and it is possible to prevent the rendering operation unit 400 and the like from being damaged. Therefore, even when the operation button 410 is pressed or hit with a strong force when an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 is presented to the player, the operation button 410 or the effect operation unit Since 400 and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to the damage, to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player, and to increase the burden on the game hall side by making it difficult to break. Can be suppressed.

  As described above, the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape projecting forward (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface), and thus a flat plate shape. Compared to the case, the strength and rigidity are high, and even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be distributed to the entire button lens 411 and is not easily damaged.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 63, the effect operation unit 400 includes a button lens 411, a frame side lens 417, a frame top lens 418, and an operation button interior decoration member 432 made of transparent members. Decorations such as first button decoration part 411a, second button decoration part 411b, first button decoration part 432f, and second button decoration part 432g formed on the back side are on the front side (player side) ). In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner because the plate thickness is changed, so that the rear side is difficult to see through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  The effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, and thus the uneven decoration of the first button decoration portion 411a. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion that is inside the button lens 411. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (backward in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the peripheral wall portion of the operation button inner decoration member 432 A gap between the outer peripheral surface of the operation button 432a is positioned, and the outer periphery of the operation button inner decorative member 432 is moved from the front side (player side) by the first button decoration portion 411a positioned in front of the gap. It can be difficult to see. Thereby, even if the operation button 410 that can be pressed is provided with the operation button decoration member 432 whose position is fixed, the appearance of the operation button 410 can be prevented from deteriorating. The player can be prevented from feeling uncomfortable, and the operation button decoration member 432 can be disposed in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and the appearance of the operation button 410 can be improved.

  More specifically, the effect operation unit 400 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410. The unit base 431 and the decorative board unit 420 on the rear side (back side) on the outer side are formed so as not to be seen from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. Specifically, in FIG. 62, the cross hatched part surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, the outside and the back side of the operation button inner decoration member 432 are hidden from view. Therefore, the appearance of the operation button 410 and, consequently, the production operation unit 400 can be improved.

  Further, in the effect operation unit 400, the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410 extends toward the central axis CL of the operation button 410 and is arranged in the circumferential direction. Thus, the second button interior decoration portion 432g formed on the front plate portion 432b of the operation button interior decoration member 432 disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410 extends in an odd octagonal shape centering on the central axis CL. As shown in FIG. 63, the concave and convex lines of the first button decorative portion 411a and the concave and convex lines of the second button decorative portion 432g intersect as shown in FIG. The decoration can be shown to the player.

  In addition, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated from each other in the front-rear direction (the direction in which the central axis line CL extends), the effect operation unit 400 is separated from the first button decoration part 411a. By the second button interior decoration portion 432g, a three-dimensional geometric pattern with depth can be shown to the player, and the decoration including the inside of the operation button 410 can be enjoyed.

  Furthermore, in the production operation unit 400, since the first button decoration part 411a and the second button decoration part 432g are separated in the front-rear direction, if the position of the player's eyes moves, the unevenness of the first button decoration part 411a Since the degree of overlap between the line and the concavo-convex line of the second button interior decoration portion 432g changes, a moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  In this way, the effect operation unit 400 provides the player with a three-dimensional decoration with movement by the first button decoration part 411a of the operation button 410 and the second button decoration part 432g of the operation button decoration member 432. Since it can be shown, a player's interest can be attracted strongly and it can be set as the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal power.

  Further, the production operation unit 400 is within the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412) and behind the operation button inner decoration member 432, the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, and the operation button. The upper inner decoration board 435 and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are arranged, and by emitting a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, the operation button inner decoration member 432 in the operation button 410 emits light. Can be decorated. That is, the operation button 410 can be illuminated and decorated by the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436. The LEDs mounted on the front surfaces of the operation button left inner decoration board 433, the operation button right inner decoration board 434, the operation button upper inner decoration board 435, and the operation button lower inner decoration board 436 are as shown in FIG. When viewed from the direction in which the central axis CL extends, the operation button 410 is disposed inside the cylindrical main body 413a of the button base 413, so that light from them does not leak outside the main body 413a. Only the inside of the operation button 410 can be appropriately decorated with light emission.

  In addition, the rendering operation unit 400 has the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 in the decorative substrate unit 420 behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are decorated with light emission by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. Can do. As shown in FIG. 52, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are formed of a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be appropriately decorated for light emission.

  Further, the rendering operation unit 400 has the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer decorative board behind the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415. 423 2nd LED423b is arrange | positioned, The frame side lens 417 can be light-decorated by making these 2nd LED422b and 423b light-emit. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  In addition, in the rendering operation unit 400, a frame top lens decoration substrate 437 in the base unit 430 is disposed behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and a plurality of elements are mounted on the front surface of the frame top lens decoration substrate 437. By emitting the LED, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated. A flat light-shielding wall 431c projects forward from the lower side of the base unit 430 where the frame top lens decorative substrate 437 of the unit base 431 is attached to the vicinity of the rear of the lower end of the frame top lens 418. The light from the LED on the top lens decoration substrate 437 does not leak to the operation button 410 or the frame side lens 417 side, and only the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 can be decorated with good light emission.

[3-4g. Overall Configuration of Second Embodiment of Production Operation Unit]
Next, the second rendering operation unit 400A, which is the second embodiment of the rendering operation unit 400, will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 64A is a front view of a second effect operation unit that is different from the effect operation units of FIGS. 48 to 63, and FIG. 64B is a right side view of the second effect operation unit. FIG. 65A is a perspective view of the second performance operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 65B is a perspective view of the second performance operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends. FIG. 67 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line GG in FIG. FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view taken along line HH in FIG. 69A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in FIG. 64B, and FIG. 69B is an enlarged view of a portion A in FIG. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the second effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. FIG.

  The second effect operation unit 400A can be attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit 320 in place of the effect operation unit 400 described above. Similar to the effect operation unit 400, the second effect operation unit 400A can be pressed by the player and can present an effect image to the player. Hereinafter, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the same components as those in the effect operation unit 400 will be described with the same reference numerals.

  The second rendering operation unit 400A has a circular outer shape and a transparent central portion excluding the outer periphery, and an operation button 410 that can be pressed by the player and surrounds the outer periphery of the operation button 410. A frame-shaped frame unit 415 attached to the operation unit attachment portion 326a, a decorative substrate unit 420 disposed behind the operation button 410 and capable of illuminating and decorating the outer peripheral edge of the operation button 410 and the frame unit 415; The second base unit 450 is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and the operation button 410 and the decorative board unit 420 are attached to the front surface. The second base unit 450 is visible from the player side through the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect table that can be displayed and display effect images And apparatus 460A, a buffer unit 510 which is attached to the lower surface of the second performance display device 460A door frame side, and a.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a second effect operation unit relay board 515 attached to the right side surface in front view of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the surface of the second effect operation unit relay board 515. A relay board cover 516 attached to the right side surface in front view of the door frame side second effect display device 460A so as to cover it. The second effect operation unit relay board 515 and the relay board cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  The second effect operation unit relay board 515 includes an operation button left outer decoration board 422, an operation button right outer decoration board 423, a vibration motor 424, a press detection sensor 454, a frame top lens decoration board 482, a switching drive motor 492, a projector 500, In addition, the connection between the rotation detection sensor 507 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed.

[3-4g-1. Manual operation button]
The operation buttons 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 72A is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 72B is an exploded perspective view of the operation buttons of the second effect operation unit as seen from the rear. FIG. The operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape is slightly smaller in diameter than the height in the vertical direction of the dish unit 320, and the center side excluding the outer peripheral edge is formed transparent. The operation button 410 has a transparent button lens 411 formed in a curved surface shape (a shape of a part of a substantially spherical surface) so that the outer periphery is circular and the center side bulges forward, and the outer peripheral edge of the button lens 411. An annular button frame 412 attached to the front side, and a cylindrical button base 413 attached to sandwich the outer periphery of the button lens 411 on the rear side of the button frame 412 The configuration is substantially the same as the operation button 410 of the operation unit 400.

  A specific difference is that the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410 of the effect operation unit 400 are different from the pattern of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411 and the guide boss of the button base 413. The shape of the part 413c is different.

  More specifically, as shown in the figure, the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 in the second effect operation unit 400A has one vertex toward the center of the button lens 411 at a portion in contact with the inner periphery of the button frame 412. And a button lens 411 in the truss-like pattern in which a plurality of rows of triangles and a triangle having one apex toward the opposite side of the center are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction over the entire circumference. A right triangle pattern comprising a bottom side facing the center side, a side extending from both ends of the base side to the center side of the button lens 411, and a hypotenuse extending from the tip of the side to the center of the base side And a hypotenuse of the right triangle pattern, a side extending from the center of the truss-like triangle base to the center side of the button lens 411 longer than the right triangle pattern, and a tip of the side And varying isosceles triangle pattern constituted by the side extending to the tip of the hypotenuse of each triangle-shaped pattern, in which is formed.

  That is, the first button decoration portion 411a is configured by a combination of a plurality of triangles. In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, each triangle which comprises the 1st button decoration part 411a has faced the direction from which each surface differs, and is formed in the polyhedron shape. Thereby, since the front surface side of the button lens 411 is formed in a smooth curved surface shape, the back surface side is formed in a polyhedral shape in the portion of the first button decoration portion 411a, so the first button decoration portion 411a. In this part, the plate thickness of the button lens 411 changes in a complicated manner, and the light passing through this part is irregularly refracted. Accordingly, at the site of the first button decoration portion 411a, a geometric pattern in which a plurality of triangles are combined can be shown to the player, and at the same time, the rear member can be made difficult to see due to irregular refraction.

  The guide boss portion 413c in the button base 413 of the second effect operation unit 400A is formed in a cylindrical shape with the rear opened. The guide boss portion 413c is inserted into the holding hole 451d of the second base unit 450, and the button shaft 452 held in the holding hole 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 inside the cylindrical shape. Is slidably inserted. In this example, the operation button 410 is attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction by the button shaft 452 of the second base unit 450 inserted from behind into the guide boss portion 413c.

[3-4g-2. Frame unit]
The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The frame unit 415 is attached from the front side to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320 so as to surround the outer periphery from the front side of the operation button 410, and decorates the outside of the operation button 410. The frame unit 415 has an outer shape that matches the front end side of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a.

  The frame unit 415 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the frame unit 415 of the effect operation unit 400, and is given the same reference numerals and will not be described in detail.

[3-4g-3. Decorative board unit]
The decorative board unit 420 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 57, FIG. 69 to FIG. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the second base unit 450 below the frame unit 415, and can decorate the second button decorative portion 411b of the operation button 410 and the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 with light emission. The vibration can be applied to the second effect operation unit 400A.

  The decorative substrate unit 420 includes a C-shaped substrate base 421 whose upper side is open, an operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 and an operation button right outer decorative substrate 423 attached to the front surfaces of the left and right sides of the substrate base 421, respectively. A vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front portion of the substrate base 421, and a motor cover 425 attached to the front surface of the substrate base 421 so as to cover the front side of the vibration motor 424.

  The decorative board unit 420 of the second presentation operation unit 400A has the same configuration as the decoration board unit 420 of the presentation operation unit 400, and is given the same reference numerals and detailed description thereof is omitted.

[3-4g-4. Second base unit]
The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a perspective view of the second base unit of the second effect operation unit as seen from the front. The second base unit 450 of the second effect operation unit 400A has the operation button 410 attached so as to be able to advance and retreat in the front-rear direction, the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached, and is attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415. It is what

  The second base unit 450 includes a unit base 451 attached to the rear side of the frame unit 415, and protrudes from the front surface of the unit base 451. The second base unit 450 is rearward in the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410. Column-shaped button shafts 452 that are slidably inserted from each other, and the operation button springs through which the four button shafts 452 are inserted and the rear ends of the guide boss portions 413c of the operation buttons 410 are urged forward. (Not shown) and three press detection sensors 454 that are attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 and detect the three detection pieces 413d of the button base 413 in the operation buttons 410, respectively.

  The unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 includes an annular main body 451a, a cover 451b that protrudes hemispherically from the inner periphery of the main body 451a to the rear, and a direction perpendicular to the front surface of the main body 451a. A through-hole 451c that passes through the cover portion 451b in the front-rear direction with a substantially quadrangle that extends vertically when viewed, four holding holes 451d that are recessed from the front surface of the main body portion 451a to the rear, and a main body portion 451a. An upper bearing portion 451e that is recessed in a semicircular shape (U-shape) from the front to the rear at the upper portion, and a semicircular shape coaxially with the upper bearing portion 451e from the front to the rear at the lower portion of the main body portion 451a. The lower bearing portion 451f that is recessed (U-shaped) and the upper front surface of the main body portion 451a are formed on the left and right sides of the upper bearing portion 451e, and the screen unit 470 rotates. And a, a pair of rotation restricting portion 451g to regulate.

  The annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 has an inner periphery and an outer periphery that are substantially the same size as the substrate base 421 of the decorative substrate unit 420 formed in a C shape. The decorative board unit 420 is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a. The cover portion 451b is formed to have a size that can be accommodated without contacting when the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is rotatably mounted by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f. Yes. The through hole 451c is formed in a size that allows the projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A to pass from behind.

  The four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 are formed at positions corresponding to the four guide boss portions 413c of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 at the upper, lower, left and right corners of the front surface of the main body portion 451a. These holding holes 451d are formed so that the inner diameter is larger than the outer diameter of the guide boss portion 413c, and the guide boss portion 413c can be inserted. In these four holding holes 451d, a button shaft 452 is mounted coaxially with the central axis. The front end of the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d protrudes forward from the front surface of the main body 451a. By inserting the button shaft 452 attached to the holding hole 451d into the cylindrical guide boss portion 413c of the operation button 410, the operation button 410 is attached to be slidable in the front-rear direction via the guide boss portion 413c. Can do.

  Of the four holding holes 451d, the upper left holding hole 451d is counterclockwise with respect to the center of the unit base 451 from a center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410). It is formed at a position rotated about 30 degrees in the direction. Of the four holding holes 451d, the upper right holding hole 451d is clockwise from the center line extending vertically through the center of the unit base 451 (the center of the operation button 410) with respect to the center of the unit base 451. It is formed at a position rotated about 47 degrees in the direction of. On the other hand, the two holding holes 451d arranged on the lower side of the four holding holes 451d are respectively formed at positions opposite to the center of the unit base 451 with respect to the upper two holding holes 451d. .

  In addition, operation button springs (not shown) are respectively inserted into the four holding holes 451d, and the front end of these operation button springs comes into contact with the rear end of the guide boss portion 413c, whereby the operation button springs are operated via the guide boss portion 413c. 410 is urged forward.

  The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 are formed in a U-shape that is open at the front and extends rearward. In the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, the centers of the portions extending in a semicircular arc shape are coaxially located. The upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f are inserted into the door frame side second effect display device 460A from the front, and the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are inserted from the front side. Is attached to the front surface of the main body 451a, so that the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A can be rotatably supported.

  The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 has their respective front surfaces passing through the central axis of the semicircular portion of the upper bearing portion 451e whose extension line (surface) is recessed backward in a U shape. It is formed in such a manner that it is separated in the circumferential direction by a predetermined angle about the central axis. The pair of rotation restricting portions 451g regulates the rotation range of the screen unit 470 when the stopper 475b of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470 is in contact with the second effect operation unit 400A. Yes. In the present embodiment, the rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted to an angle range of 90 degrees by the pair of rotation restriction portions 451g.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the magnet is each embed | buried in a pair of rotation control part 451g, and it contact | abuts to the rotation control part 451g by magnetizing with the iron plate attached to the stopper 475b. The stopper 475b is difficult to be separated from the rotation restricting portion 451g. Accordingly, the screen unit 470 is in the first position with the main screen 471 facing forward, or the sub-screen 472 is directed forward with the magnet in the rotation restricting portion 451g and the iron plate of the stopper 475b. The screen unit 470 can be held in any of the positions, and the movement of the screen unit 470 to be rotated by the pressing operation of the operation button 410 or the vibration by the vibration motor 424 or the like is suppressed to the door frame side. The effect image by the second effect display device 460A can be enjoyed in a good state.

  The three press detection sensors 454 are attached to the front surface of the main body 451 a of the unit base 451 at positions corresponding to the three detection pieces 413 d of the button base 413 on the operation button 410. More specifically, three pressing detection sensors 454 are left on the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451, one on the lower left side of the upper left holding hole 451d and the other on the lower right side of the upper right holding hole 451d. Are respectively attached to the lower right side of the lower left holding hole 451d. The three press detection sensors 454 are attached at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction around the center of the unit base 451. These three press detection sensors 454 can detect the three detection pieces 413 d of the operation button 410.

[3-4g-5. Door frame side second effect display device]
The door frame side second effect display device 460A of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A is attached to the second base unit 450, and can display the effect image to the player through the transparent portion of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display device 460A includes a screen unit 470 attached to the second base unit 450 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending vertically by the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f, and the second base unit 451A. An upper bearing member 480 attached to the upper front portion of the unit 450 and rotatably attached to the upper side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450, and attached to the lower front portion of the second base unit 450. And a lower bearing member 485 that rotatably attaches the lower side of the screen unit 470 in cooperation with the second base unit 450.

  Further, the door frame side second effect display device 460 </ b> A rotates the screen unit 470 and is attached to the upper part of the second base unit 450 and the cover unit 451 b of the second base unit 450. The projector 500 that is disposed and capable of projecting and displaying an effect image on the screen unit 470 from the rear, and the projector 500 are attached, and the rear surface of the unit base 451 is attached so as to cover the cover portion 451b of the second base unit 450 from the rear side. A box-shaped projector mounting member 505 that is open at the front, and is mounted so as to cover the operation gear member 475 of the screen unit 470 from above on the left side of the rotation drive unit 490 at the top of the second base unit 450. Upper cover 506 and upper part And two rotation detecting sensor 507 for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470 is attached to the bar 506 (rotational position), and a.

[3-4g-5a. Screen unit]
The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A is attached to the second base unit 450 so as to be rotatable about the axis extending vertically, and the effect image is projected from the projector 500. The effect image can be displayed (projected) so as to be visible from the player.

  The screen unit 470 has a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 that is milky white and translucent, and a disc shape with one end of the main screen 471 in the axial direction as a part of the outer periphery. A sub-screen 472 that is curved so as to bulge outward in the direction, milky white and translucent, and protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the axial center of both ends of the main screen 471 outward in the direction perpendicular to the axis. The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474, the working gear member 475 which is attached to the tip of the upper shaft member 473 and has gear teeth 475a formed over substantially the outer circumference, and the sub-screen 472. A transparent sub-screen decoration member 476 (see FIG. 74, FIG. 75, etc.) formed in a relief shape imitating a predetermined character (skull), and a sub-screen A sub-screen decoration board 477 (see FIG. 75 and the like) on which a plurality of LEDs 477a are mounted on the surface facing the sub-screen 472 attached to the back side of the sub-screen 472, and the sub-screen 472 on the opposite side of the main screen 471 A semicircular arc-shaped peripheral decoration member 478 that extends short from the end of the main screen 471 toward the central axis of the main screen 471.

  The semi-cylindrical main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 has a radius smaller than the inner diameter of the annular main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The main screen 471 has an axial length that is approximately 4/3 times the semi-cylindrical radius. The main screen 471 is decorated so that both ends in the axial direction are edged by the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472 and the peripheral decorative member 478.

  The sub-screen 472 is formed in a circular shape whose outer shape matches the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 when viewed from the direction in which the central axis extends (see FIG. 74B). . The sub-screen 472 is formed in an annular shape with a predetermined width from the outer periphery to the center side, and includes a peripheral decorative portion 472a in which a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped irregularities are arranged in the circumferential direction, and the inner side of the peripheral decorative portion 472a is closed. And a curved screen portion 472b. The peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472 is formed in a truncated cone shape so that the inner peripheral side protrudes in a direction away from the main screen 471. The screen portion 472 b bulges in a spherical shape having a radius larger than the radius of the semi-cylindrical main screen 471 in a direction away from the main screen 471. A through-hole is formed in the screen portion 472b of the sub-screen 472, and a sub-screen decoration member 476 is attached so as to close the hole.

  The upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 are inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, respectively, and are rotatably mounted.

  The actuating gear member 475 is engaged with the second transmission gear 495 of the rotation drive unit 490 and protrudes outward from one of the circumferential ends of the gear teeth 475a and the gear teeth 475a. And a detecting piece 475c protruding in a flat plate shape from the opposite side to the stopper 475b at the circumferential end of the gear tooth 475a. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 is located in the recess 481a of the upper bearing member 480 that is recessed in an arc shape with the axis of the upper shaft member 473 as the center in the state assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. The rotation range of the screen unit 470 is restricted by coming into contact with the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 located at both ends in the recess 481a.

  Although not shown in detail, an iron plate is attached to a portion of the stopper 475b that comes into contact with the rotation restricting portion 451g, and this iron plate can be magnetically attached to a magnet embedded in the rotation restricting portion 451g. It is like that.

  The screen unit 470 can rotate between a first position with the main screen 471 facing forward and a second position with the sub screen 472 facing forward. The detection piece 475c is detected by a rotation detection sensor 507 attached to the upper cover 506.

  The sub screen decoration member 476 is attached to the screen portion 472 b in the sub screen 472. The sub-screen decoration member 476 is formed in a relief shape imitating a skull with a transparent member, and the thickness of the sub-screen decoration member 476 is changed in a complicated manner. It has become difficult. In addition, although detailed illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the character of "PUSH" is formed in the relief which imitated the sub screen decoration member 476 in the shape of a skull.

  The sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is attached to the back side of the sub-screen 472 so that a gap is formed between the sub-screen 472 and a plurality of LEDs 477a on the front side (side facing the sub-screen 472). Has been implemented. The sub-screen decoration substrate 477 has an outer shape smaller than that of the sub-screen decoration member 476 and has a white surface. By causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 to emit light, the sub-screen decoration member 476 and the sub-screen 472 can be decorated with light emission. More specifically, the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 emits the LED 477a so that the “eye” portion of the skull and the “PUSH” character portion can be strongly illuminated.

  In addition, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is disposed relatively close to the sub-screen 472, and does not include a member that diffuses light between the sub-screen decoration 477 and the LED 477a. The player can recognize the point light source of the LED 477a. Further, the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 can block light from the projector 500. Therefore, the projector 500 can project the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 on the sub-screen 472.

  The peripheral decorative member 478 is formed in the same shape as a part of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472, and a plurality of quadrangular pyramid irregularities are arranged in the circumferential direction of the arc as in the peripheral decorative portion 472a. .

[3-4g-5b. Upper bearing member and lower bearing member]
The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are configured to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f that are opened forward in the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. It is attached to the front surface of 451a. Further, the upper bearing member 480 and the lower bearing member 485 are in a state where the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 are respectively inserted from the front into the upper bearing portion 451e and the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451. By attaching to the front surface of the unit base 451, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474 can be rotatably attached to the second base unit 450.

  The upper bearing member 480 includes a bearing member 481 attached to the upper portion of the body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front side of the upper bearing portion 451e whose front side is open, and a bearing member And a frame top lens decoration substrate 482 attached to the upper front surface of 481. The bearing member 481 has a recess 481a that is recessed in an arc shape from the rear surface to the front so that the center in the left-right direction is deepest. The concave portion 481a of the bearing member 481 in the upper bearing member 480 is recessed in an arc shape centering on the axis of the upper shaft member 473 of the screen unit 470 in the state assembled to the second rendering operation unit 400A. The stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 in the unit 470 is inserted and disposed, and a pair of rotation restricting portions 451g of the unit base 451 are located at both ends of the arc of the recess 481a. Due to the concave portion 481a that is recessed in an arc shape, the stopper 475b of the operating gear member 475 can be favorably rotated between the pair of rotation restricting portions 451g.

  The frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface side, and is positioned behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415 in a state assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A. ing. Thus, the frame top lens 418 can be decorated with light emission by causing the LED of the frame top lens decoration substrate 482 to emit light.

  The lower bearing member 485 is formed in a substantially flat plate shape, and is attached to the front surface of the main body portion 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 so as to close the front of the lower bearing portion 451f. The lower shaft member 474 is attached to the front surface of the unit base 451 in a state where the lower shaft member 474 of the screen unit 470 is inserted into the lower bearing portion 451f of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450. Can be mounted rotatably.

[3-4g-5c. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 490 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The rotation drive unit 490 is attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450 and can drive the screen unit 470 to rotate. The rotation drive unit 490 includes a unit case 491 attached to the upper surface of the unit base 451 and having a hollow inside. A spur gear-like drive gear (not shown) fixed to the rotation shaft of the switching drive motor, and a spur gear-shaped first gear meshed with the drive gear and rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. The transmission gear (not shown) meshes with the first transmission gear and can mesh with the gear teeth 475a of the operating gear member 475 in the screen unit 470, and is rotatably mounted in the unit case 491. A second transmission gear 495 having a spur gear shape.

  In the state where the rotation drive unit 490 is assembled to the second effect operation unit 400A, the second transmission gear 495 meshes with the gear teeth 475a of the operation gear member 475 in the screen unit 470. The rotation drive unit 490 rotates the switching drive motor 492 so that the screen unit 470 extends forward and backward through the drive gear, the first transmission gear, the second transmission gear 495, and the gear teeth 475a. It can be rotated.

[3-4g-5d. projector]
The projector 500 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The projector 500 is disposed in a hemispherical cover portion 451 b of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450, and is attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 through a projector attachment member 505. The projector 500 can project and display the effect image on the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 by irradiating the effect image toward the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470.

  The projector 500 includes a cubic projector main body 501 attached to the projector attachment member 505, and a lens unit 502 that projects forward from the projector main body 501 in a cylindrical shape and irradiates an effect image forward from the front end.

  In the projector 500, the rear portion of the projector main body 501 is attached to the projector attachment member 505, and the lens portion 502 and the projector main body 501 are disposed in the cover portion 451b through the through hole 451c of the unit base 451 from the rear side. Installed as follows.

  The projector 500 can project an effect image over substantially the front surface of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472 of the screen unit 470, and can project and display still images and moving images as the effect image. The projector 500 is a commercially available liquid crystal projector, and has an autofocus function.

[3-4g-5e. Projector mounting member]
The projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. The projector mounting member 505 is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the projector 500 is mounted inside and mounted on the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450. The projector attachment member 505 can be attached to the rear side of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, thereby covering the cover portion 451 b of the unit base 451 and the rear side of the projector 500.

  The projector mounting member 505 has a bottom wall extending in the horizontal direction and a rear wall extending in the vertical direction, so that the projector 500 can be mounted in an inclined state so as to coincide with the inclination of the operation button 410. . A plurality of slits 505a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed on the rear wall of the projector mounting member 505, and heat released from the projector 500 can be discharged to the outside through the slits 505a.

  A second rendering operation unit relay board 515 and a relay board cover 516 are attached to the right side surface of the projector mounting member 505 in front view.

[3-4g-5f. Upper cover and rotation detection sensor]
The upper cover 506 and the rotation detection sensor 507 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper cover 506 is attached to the upper surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 so as to cover the upper part of the operating gear member 475 of the screen unit 470. The rotation detection sensors 507 are for detecting the rotational position of the screen unit 470, and are attached to the lower surface of the upper cover 506 in a state of being separated from each other.

  Although not shown in detail, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are attached at positions that are separated from each other by a rotation angle of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction around the rotation axis of the screen unit 470. The detection piece 475c of the member 475 can be detected. Specifically, the two rotation detection sensors 507 are the detection piece 475c when the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 is in the first position and the second position where the sub screen 472 is in the front. The time detection piece 475c can be detected respectively. Based on the detection signal of the detection piece 475c by these two rotation detection sensors 507, the rotation drive of the switching drive motor 492 of the rotation drive unit 490 is controlled.

[3-4g-6. Buffer unit]
The buffer unit 510 of the second effect operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The buffer unit 510 is attached to the lower surface of the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and reduces the impact when the second effect operation unit 400A is hit from above, so that the dish unit cover in the dish unit 320 is provided. 326 is transmitted to the bottom plate portion 326i.

  The buffer unit 510 is in contact with an elastically deformable flat plate-shaped buffer member 511 whose upper surface is in contact with the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A, and the lower surface of the buffer member 511. And a buffer base 512 that is mounted so as to be relatively close to the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505.

  The buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 has a flat plate-like main body portion 512a that comes into contact with the lower surface of the buffer member 511, and leg pieces that protrude downward from the left and right ends of the main body portion 512a when viewed from the front and extend in the front-rear direction. 512b. The leg piece portion 512 b of the buffer base 512 is in contact with the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326 i of the plate unit cover 326 in the plate unit 320 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  In this buffer unit 510, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or hit, the projector mounting member 505 mounted on the base unit 430 compresses the buffer member 511 in the buffer unit 510. Move downwards. The shock is absorbed by compressing the buffer member 511. When the projector mounting member 505 further moves downward, the lower surface of the projector mounting member 505 contacts the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a of the buffer base 512. Since the main body portion 512a has a gap formed between the left and right leg pieces 512b and the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, the projector mounting member is in contact with the upper surface side of the main body portion 512a. When 505 moves further downward, the flat plate-like main body portion 512a is bent, and the impact can be absorbed by the bending of the main body portion 512a. Further, when the projector mounting member 505 moves downward, the lower surface of the main body portion 512a bent downward contacts the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 326i of the dish unit cover 326, and further bending of the main body portion 512a is restricted. The impact is transmitted to the dish unit cover 326. In this way, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly hit from above, the impact can be absorbed in multiple stages, and the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415 and the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit cover 326 are absorbed. It is possible to prevent an undue force from acting on 326a and the like and to prevent them from being damaged.

[3-4g-7. Effects of the second stage operation unit]
The operational effects of the second performance operation unit 400A will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 74A is an explanatory view of the second effect operation unit as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the main screen of the screen unit facing forward, and FIG. 74B is a sub view of the screen unit. It is explanatory drawing which looked at the 2nd production operation unit from the direction where the central axis of the operation button has extended in the state which turned the screen ahead. 75 (a) is a cross-sectional view taken along line JJ in FIG. 74 (a), and FIG. 75 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line KK in FIG. 74 (b). FIG. 76 (a) shows the second rendering operation unit with the main screen facing forward, as viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion, button frame, etc. of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be shown, (b) shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing. FIG. 77 (a) shows the second rendering operation unit viewed from the direction in which the central axis of the operation button extends with the sub-screen facing forward, and is hidden by the first button decoration portion, button frame, etc. of the operation button. It is explanatory drawing which shows the site | part which is going to be shown, (b) shows the site | part which is going to hide by the 1st button decoration part of an operation button, a button frame, etc. in sectional drawing of the 2nd production operation unit of the state of (a). It is explanatory drawing.

  The second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment changes the decoration in the operation button 410 or changes the operation button 410 according to the game state that changes when the game ball is driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. The effect image can be displayed in 410 and the player can be entertained, and the player can be operated by operating the operation button 410 so that the player can participate in the effect presented to the player. is there.

  The second rendering operation unit 400 </ b> A has an overall height substantially the same as the height of the lower portion of the through-hole 111 of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. The second presentation operation unit 400 </ b> A has a full width slightly larger than 1/3 of the full width of the door frame 3. The second effect operation unit 400A is arranged at the center in the left-right direction below the game area 5a (the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110) in the front view.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the upper part of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326 in the dish unit 320. The second performance operation unit 400 </ b> A is attached to the dish unit 320 between the lower end of the leg piece part 512 b of the buffer base 512 of the buffer unit 510 and the upper surface of the bottom plate part 326 i of the dish unit cover 326 of the dish unit 320. In addition, a gap is formed. That is, the second rendering operation unit 400A is attached only to the upper part with respect to the dish unit 320, and is attached in a suspended state.

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the front surface of the frame unit 415 (the surface formed by the inner periphery of the front end of the central opening 416a of the frame body 416) is parallel to the inclined surface of the front end opening of the effect operation unit attachment portion 326a. It is installed to become. Thereby, in the second effect operation unit 400A, the central axis CL (see FIG. 67) of the transparent operation button 410 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical shape) is a vertical line. It is inclined at an angle of 63 degrees to move upward as it goes forward. As a result, when a player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1 in order to play a game using the pachinko machine 1, the head of the player is placed above the dish unit 320 (second effect operation unit 400A). Since the game board 5 is located in front of the center of the game area 5a, the central axis CL of the operation button 410 passes near the head of the player. Therefore, when the player drops his / her line of sight from the game area 5a to the second effect operation unit 400A (operation button 410), the operation button 410 is as possible as the front view (projection view from a direction parallel to the central axis CL). Thus, the operation button 410, the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the operation button 410, and the like can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, the button shafts 452 held in the four holding holes 451d of the unit base 451 in the second base unit 450 are slid on the four cylindrical guide boss portions 413c of the operation buttons 410, respectively. It is movably inserted and is urged forward by an operation button spring (not shown). In a normal state (a state where the operation button 410 is not pressed), the second effect operation unit 400A causes the front end of the flange portion 413b of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 to be in the frame unit 415 by the urging force of the operation button spring. The frame main body 416 is in contact with a portion in the vicinity of the central opening 416a on the rear surface.

  In the normal state, the second effect operation unit 400A has a central side (center axis CL side) from the vicinity of the inner periphery of the button frame 412 of the operation button 410 to the front from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 of the frame unit 415. It protrudes. In other words, in the transparent button lens 411 that bulges forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) in the operation button 410, a portion that protrudes forward from the inner periphery (inside) of the button frame 412 is formed. The frame unit 415 protrudes forward from the central opening 416a of the frame body 416 (see FIG. 67 and the like).

  Incidentally, in the present embodiment, the diameter of the central opening 416a of the frame main body 416 in the frame unit 415 is about 15 cm, and the button lens 411 (the front end) with respect to the central axis CL direction of the operation button 410 is the frame unit. It protrudes about 4 cm forward from the front surface of 415.

  In a normal state, when the player presses the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation button 410 moves rearward along the central axis CL against the urging force of the operation button spring. When the rear end of the operation button 410 comes into contact with the front surface of the main body 451a of the unit base 451 of the second base unit 450, the backward movement is restricted and the backward movement of the operation button 410 is stopped. When the player presses the operation button 410, the button lens 411 bulging forward in a curved surface shape (substantially spherical shape) is pressed.

  The operation button 410 has a very large outer diameter compared to the operation buttons for production provided in the conventional pachinko machine, so the periphery of the button lens 411 away from the center is pressed. There is a high possibility of being. More specifically, while the operation buttons for effects in the conventional pachinko machine are attached so that the central axis extends substantially parallel to the vertical line, the operation of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment is performed. Since the button 410 is attached with the central axis CL inclined with respect to the vertical line, when the player presses the operation button 410 from above like the conventional pachinko machine, the button 410 is separated from the central axis CL of the operation button 410. The part will be pressed (see FIG. 61).

  By the way, the operation buttons for performance in the conventional pachinko machine are formed with a flat surface on which the player presses, so when the operation button is enlarged with the flat part being pressed When pressing the part off the center of the operation button, the surface to be pressed is tilted so that the pressed part is retracted first, and the operation button cannot be receded straight, There is a possibility that the pressing operation cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A of the present embodiment has a curved surface shape (a part of a substantially spherical surface) in which a portion (button lens 411) pressed by the player bulges forward. Therefore, when a pressing operation is performed at a position away from the center of the operation button 410, the force is distributed over the entire operation button 410, making it difficult for the operation button 410 to tilt, and the operation button 410 moves straight back. can do. Therefore, no matter which position on the front side of the operation button 410 is pressed, the operation button 410 can be smoothly retracted without tilting, so that the pressing operation can be reliably detected and the operation button 410 is pressed. The operation to operate can be fully enjoyed.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has the vibration motor 424 attached to the lower front surface of the substrate base 421 in the decorative substrate unit 420, and as described above, the second effect operation unit 400A is suspended. Since only the upper part is attached to the production operation unit attachment part 326a of the dish unit cover 326, when vibration is generated by rotating the weight 424a by the vibration motor 424, vibration is generated at a part farthest from the attached part. As a result, the entire second performance operation unit 400A can be vibrated greatly (strongly), and vibrations can be transmitted to the player who is touching the second performance operation unit 400A. Further, since the vibration motor 424 is disposed immediately below the position where the player can relatively press the button (near the upper part of the operation button 410), strong vibration is applied to the player who presses the operation button 410. Can be transmitted, and the player can be surprised and entertained.

  Furthermore, the second effect operation unit 400A is attached to the dish unit cover 326 in a suspended state, and the projector mounting member 505 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A and the bottom plate of the dish unit cover 326. A buffer unit 510 is disposed between the upper surface of the portion 326i. The buffer unit 510 includes an elastically deformable buffer member 511, and a gap is formed between the main body portion 512 a with which the buffer member 511 is in contact with the upper surface and the bottom plate portion 326 i of the dish unit cover 326. Therefore, when the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is strongly pressed or struck down, the impact is caused in multiple stages by elastic deformation (compression) of the buffer member 511 or bending of the main body 512a of the buffer base 512. Can be absorbed, and it can be avoided that an excessive force acts on the mounting portion 416e of the frame unit 415, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a of the dish unit cover 326, etc., and the second rendering operation unit 400A or the like is damaged. Can be prevented. Therefore, even if the operation button 410 or the frame unit 415 is pressed or hit with a strong force when the player is presented with an effect of pressing the operation button 410 of the second effect operation unit 400A, the operation is not performed. Since the button 410, the second performance operation unit 400A, and the like are not damaged, it is possible to avoid the interruption of the game due to the damage, to suppress the lowering of the player's interest, and to make the damage difficult. An increase in the burden on the game hall side can be suppressed.

  In addition, since the button lens 411 of the operation button 410 to be pressed by the player is formed in a curved surface shape projecting forward (a part of the shape of a substantially spherical surface), compared with a flat plate shape. In addition to high strength and rigidity, even if it is strongly struck, the impact can be distributed over the entire button lens 411, making it difficult to break.

  In the second effect operation unit 400A, since the button lens 411, the frame side lens 417, and the frame top lens 418 are made of transparent members, the first button decoration portion formed on the back side thereof. The decoration by unevenness, such as 411a and the 2nd button decoration part 411b, can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) (refer FIG. 63). In addition, in the part where the uneven decoration is formed, the light is refracted in a complicated manner because the plate thickness is changed, so that the rear side is difficult to see through the part where the uneven decoration is formed. .

  Since the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a extending from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 to the center side of the button lens 411 of the operation button 410, a plurality of the first button decoration portions 411a are provided. It is possible to make it difficult to see the rear at the outer peripheral portion of the portion that is the inside of the button lens 411 by the uneven decoration combined with the triangle. Behind the portion where the first button decoration portion 411a is formed (backward in the direction of the central axis CL), the inner peripheral surface of the body portion 413a of the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and the door frame side second effect display device A gap between the outer periphery of the screen unit 470 of 460A is located, but the first button decoration portion 411a located in front of the gap from the front side (player side) to the outside or rear side of the screen unit 470 This member can be made difficult to see. Thereby, even if the operation button 410 capable of being pressed is provided with the door frame side second effect display device 460A, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the operation button 410 from deteriorating. It is possible to prevent discomfort and to arrange the door frame side second effect display device 460A in the transparent operation button 410 without any problem, and to improve the appearance of the operation button 410.

  More specifically, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration part 411a, the second button decoration part 411b, and the button frame 412 of the button lens 411 in the operation button 410, and the second effect display unit 460A. The second base unit 450, the upper shaft member 473, the lower shaft member 474, and the like that are on the rear side (back side) outside the outer periphery of the main screen 471, the sub screen 472, etc. from the player side through the transparent button lens 411. It is formed so that it cannot be seen. Specifically, in the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the top and bottom outside of the main screen 471, the left outside of the peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub screen 472, and the right of the peripheral decorative member 478 The outer part (the cross hatched part surrounded by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 76) is hidden from the player side.

  On the other hand, in the second position with the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the outer portion of the annular peripheral decorative portion 472a of the sub-screen 472 (the cross-hatched portion surrounded by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 76). ) Is hidden from the player side. As described above, since the operation button 410 includes the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412, and the like, it is difficult to see the outside and the back side of the main screen 471 and the sub screen 472. It is possible to hide, and the appearance of the operation button 410 and by extension, the second performance operation unit 400A as a whole can be improved.

  In the first position where the main screen 471 is facing forward, the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b of the button lens 411, the button frame 412 and the like, the screen portion 472b of the sub screen 472. In addition, the sub-screen decoration member 476, the upper shaft member 473, and the lower shaft member 474 are difficult to see (see FIG. 76). This makes it difficult for the player to notice the presence of the sub-screen 472, the main screen 471 being rotatable, etc., so that when the screen unit 470 is rotated to switch from the main screen 471 to the sub-screen 472, A movement exceeding the player's expectation is performed in the button 410, so that a strong impact can be given to the player.

  Further, in the second position where the sub-screen 472 faces forward, the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft are moved by the first button decoration portion 411a, the second button decoration portion 411b, the button frame 412 and the like of the button lens 411. The member 474 is difficult to see (see FIG. 77). This makes it difficult for the player to notice that the sub-screen 472 (sub-screen decoration member 476) can rotate, so that the impact when the sub-screen 472 (screen unit 470) is rotated can be increased. The player can be entertained.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a center side from the inner periphery of the button frame 412 in the button lens 411 that can visually recognize the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the rear side of the operation button 410. The door frame side second effect display that is provided with a polyhedral first button decoration portion 411a that is a combination of a plurality of triangular surfaces within a predetermined width range and that is disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410. The device 460A includes a peripheral decoration portion 472a of a sub-screen 472 in which a plurality of square weights are arranged, and a peripheral decoration member 478. Thereby, the decoration (first button decoration part 411a) made of a triangle arranged on the front side and the decoration made of a quadrangle arranged on the rear side (the peripheral decoration part 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) overlap each other so as to intersect. As a result, the player can show a complicated geometric pattern to the player, improve the appearance, and suppress a decrease in the interest of the player.

  Further, as described above, the first button decoration part 411a mainly composed of a triangle, the peripheral decoration part 472a mainly composed of a quadrangle, and the peripheral decoration member 478 are separated from each other in the front-rear direction. As the position moves, the overlapping state changes, so that the geometric patterns that appear to overlap can be changed and the moving decoration can be shown to the player, and the three-dimensional decoration with a depth can be displayed to the player. Can be shown to the player and entertain the player.

  Further, in the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410, the screen unit 470 is rotated by driving the switching drive motor 492 so that the main screen 471 is directed forward, or the sub screen. 472 can be directed forward, and the decoration composed of a plurality of squares can be changed. More specifically, in the state where the main screen 471 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the peripheral decorative portion 472a and the peripheral decorative member 478 are separated from each other in the horizontal direction and extend vertically. A geometric pattern decoration in which the decoration composed of a plurality of square pyramids arranged in a row vertically intersects the decoration composed of a plurality of triangles arranged in a ring shape of the first button decoration portion 411a of the button lens 411. Can be shown to the player. On the other hand, in the state where the sub-screen 472 is directed forward, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), the peripheral decoration part 472a is in an annularly extending state, and the decoration is composed of a plurality of square weights arranged in an annular shape. However, it is possible to show the player the decoration of the geometric pattern that overlaps the decoration made of a plurality of triangles arranged in a ring shape of the first button decoration portion 411a in the button lens 411. Accordingly, by rotating the screen unit 470, the decoration (physical decoration) of the operation button 410 can be changed. Therefore, the player's interest can be attracted to the operation button 410 by the decoration change, The change can cause the player to suggest the arrival of a chance, etc., and the player can be entertained to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has a screen (a main screen 471 and a sub screen 472) that can be switched on the door frame side second effect display device 460A provided in the operation button 410. Since the unit 470 and the projector 500 that projects and displays the effect image on the screen unit 470 are provided, an effect image completely different from the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device can be displayed, which has a strong impact on the player. You can entertain and entertain. More specifically, the screen unit 470 includes a semi-cylindrical main screen 471 and a sub-screen 472 having a disc-shaped relief-shaped sub-screen decoration member 476 in the center, and the center of the upper shaft member 473 and the lower shaft member 474. A rotation angle of 90 degrees around the axis is provided in the circumferential direction.

  In the door frame side second effect display device 460A, in the first position with the main screen 471 of the screen unit 470 facing forward, the semi-cylindrical center axis is positioned so as to extend in the left-right direction, When viewed from the front, it looks like a quadrangle (rectangle) extending vertically (see FIG. 74 (a)). When the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 disposed behind the main screen 471, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the main screen 471 (see FIG. 75A), and is translucent milky white. The effect image projected from the front side can be viewed through the main screen 471. Since the main screen 471 is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape with a smooth surface, the effect image is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. Accordingly, the display screen of the general liquid crystal display device is flat, whereas the display screen of the main screen 471 is curved in a semi-cylindrical shape. It can be recognized that it is different from the above, and the player can be surprised, the player can be noticed on the main screen 471, and the entertainment image projected and displayed on the main screen 471 can be enjoyed be able to.

  On the other hand, when the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is in the second position, the disc-shaped central axis substantially coincides with the central axis of the operation button 410, and the circular operation button 410 is viewed from the front. A sub-screen decoration member 476 that imitates a skull appears in the center (see FIG. 74 (b)). In this state, when the effect image is irradiated forward from the projector 500 arranged at the rear, the effect image is projected on the rear surface of the sub-screen 472. By the way, a flat and non-transparent sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is attached to the rear side of the sub-screen 472, so that the effect image (light) emitted from the projector 500 is applied to the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. As a result, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is projected onto the center of the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 (see FIG. 75B). Therefore, on the sub-screen 472, the effect image from the projector 500 is projected and displayed on the outer peripheral portion excluding the central portion on which the shadow of the sub-screen decorative substrate 477 is projected. At this time, if the LED 477a mounted on the front surface of the sub-screen decoration board 477 is caused to emit light, the central portion of the sub-screen 472 can be illuminated and decorated by the light, and the sub-screen provided in the center of the sub-screen 472 is provided. The screen decoration member 476 can be decorated with light emission. Further, by causing the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration board 477 to emit light, the shadow of the sub-screen decoration board 477 projected onto the rear surface of the sub-screen 472 by the light from the projector 500 can be made difficult to see. The entire side can be brightly decorated.

  The door frame side second effect display device 460A causes the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration board 477 to emit light while the sub-screen 472 of the screen unit 470 is directed forward, and produces an effect image (moving image) forward from the projector 500. When irradiated, an effect image is displayed on a portion of the sub-screen 472 where the shadow of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477 is not projected, that is, on a portion outside the sub-screen decoration member 476 made of a decoration imitating a skull. The sub-screen decoration member 476 that is the inside of the sub-screen is decorated with light emission by the LED 477a of the sub-screen decoration substrate 477. In this state, the outer side of the light emitting decoration of the fixed sub-screen decoration member 476 is decorated with the effect image (moving image), and the decoration effect different from the light emitting decoration of the decoration member in the past pachinko machine is given. The player can be shown to the player, and a strong impact can be given to the player. At the same time, the player can be strongly focused on the sub-screen 472. In this state, the light of the LED 477a shines brighter (with high brightness) than the brightness of the effect image inside the effect image, and thus a partially high-brightness effect image that cannot be achieved by a conventional liquid crystal display device. Can be displayed, the player's interest can be strongly attracted, and an effect image that makes the player more enjoyable can be displayed.

  In this way, the second effect operation unit 400A includes the first button decoration portion 411a of the operation button 410 and the decoration (the peripheral decoration portion 472a and the peripheral decoration member 478) of the screen unit 470 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A. Therefore, the player can show a decoration with movement and a three-dimensional feeling to the player, so that the player's interest can be strongly attracted and the pachinko machine 1 with high appeal can be obtained.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A can irradiate light such as an effect image to the front of the sub-screen decorative board 477 having the LED 477a mounted on the front surface behind the operation button 410 (inside the button frame 412). The door frame side second effect display device 460A having the projector 500 is provided, and the inside of the operation button 410 can be satisfactorily decorated with the door frame side second effect display device 460A.

  In addition, the operation button left outer decorative substrate 422 in the decorative substrate unit 420 is located behind the second button decorative portion 411b facing the frame opening 412a of the button frame 412 located near the outer periphery of the second effect operation unit 400A and the operation button 410. The first LED 422a and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decoration board 423 are arranged, and the six second button decoration portions 411b of the operation button 410 are illuminated and decorated by causing the first LEDs 422a and 423a to emit light. be able to. As shown in FIG. 68, the first LED 422a of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the first LED 423a of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 include a cylindrical main body 413a in the button base 413 of the operation button 410 and a frame unit. 415 is located between the cylindrical inner cylinder portion 416d of the frame main body 416, and the light from the first LEDs 422a and 423a does not leak to the inside of the main body portion 413a or the outer side of the inner cylinder portion 416d. Only the second button decoration portion 411b of the button 410 can be appropriately decorated for light emission.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A is arranged on the rear side of the frame side lens 417 facing the six outer peripheral openings 416b of the frame body 416 in the frame unit 415, and the second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the operation button right outer The second LED 423b of the decorative substrate 423 is disposed, and the frame side lens 417 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the second LEDs 422b and 423b to emit light. The second LED 422b of the operation button left outer decorative board 422 and the second LED 423b of the operation button right outer decorative board 423 are disposed between the cylindrical inner cylinder 416d of the frame main body 416 of the frame unit 415 and the outer periphery of the frame main body 416. The light from the second LEDs 422b and 423b does not leak to the inside of the inner cylindrical portion 416d or the outside of the frame main body 416, and only the frame side lens 417 of the frame unit 415 can be appropriately decorated to emit light. .

  Further, in the second effect operation unit 400A, a frame top lens decoration substrate 482 of the upper bearing member 480 in the door frame side second effect display device 460A is arranged behind the frame top lens 418 of the frame unit 415, and the frame By emitting the plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the top lens decoration substrate 482, the frame top lens 418 can be favorably decorated.

  Further, the second effect operation unit 400A has display screens having different forms by rotating the screen unit 470 of the door frame side second effect display device 460A disposed on the inner rear side of the operation button 410. An effect image can be displayed by switching to the main screen 471 or the sub screen 472, and an effect that cannot be achieved by a conventional pachinko machine in which the shape of the display screen changes (changes) can be presented to the player. , You can entertain the player with a strong impact.

[3-5. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 530 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 78 to 81. 78A is a front view of the door frame left side unit in the door frame, FIG. 78B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 78C is the rear view of the door frame left side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 79 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 80 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit as seen from the back. 81 is a cross-sectional view taken along line LL in FIG. The door frame left side unit 530 covers the front side of the door frame left side upper decorative substrate 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative substrate 162 (door frame left side decorative substrate 160) on the upper side of the dish unit 320. It is attached to the front left part on the left side of the through hole 111 in 100. The door frame left side unit 530 is for decorating the left side of the through hole 111 of the door frame base 110 when viewed from the front.

  The door frame left side unit 530 includes a band plate-like left unit base 531 extending vertically and attached to the front side of the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a left unit base 531 A transparent strip-shaped left unit diffusing lens member 532 attached to the front surface and a translucent material disposed in front of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 and having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) and a left unit decorative lens member mounted on the front upper part of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member, projecting forward in a cylindrical frame shape and extending vertically The decorative base 534 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the left unit base 531 from the front side of the left unit decorative lens member. The left unit lower decorative base 535 that protrudes forward in a frame shape shorter than the decorative base 534 and the front end side of the left unit decorative lens member from the front side of the left unit upper decorative base 534 and the left unit lower decorative base 535 are covered. A transparent left unit decorative cover 536 attached to the front side of the left unit base 531 and a plurality of decorative members 537 attached to the front side of the left unit decorative cover 536 are provided.

  The left unit base 531 of the door frame left side unit 530 is formed in a shallow box shape with the rear side opened, and has a plurality of openings 531a penetrating front and rear in the front surface. As illustrated, the plurality of openings 531a include a circular hole and a quadrangular hole extending vertically. In the left unit base 531, the LEDs 161a and 162a mounted on the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 (the door frame left side upper decorative board 161 and the door frame left side lower decorative board 162) are provided from a plurality of openings 531a. It is attached to the front left side of the door frame base 110 so as to face forward. Each opening 531a of the left unit base 531 is formed so that each LED 161a, 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 is positioned at a substantially vertical center when assembled in the door frame 3. The left unit base 531 is formed of an opaque member.

  The left unit diffusion lens member 532 is formed of a transparent member, and is divided into an upper diffusion lens member 532A and a lower diffusion lens member 532B. The left unit diffuser lens member 532 includes a circular lens portion 532a having a circular shape in front view corresponding to the circular opening 531a in the left unit base 531, and a square having a rectangular shape in front view corresponding to the rectangular opening 531a. A lens portion 532b. The door frame left side unit 530 is assembled to the door frame 3 so that the respective LEDs 161a and 162a of the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the center of the circular lens portion 532a and the square lens portion 532b. Is formed.

  The circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 is formed in a convex lens shape with smooth front and rear surfaces. By this circular lens portion 532a, the light from the LEDs 161a and 162a disposed on the rear side can be irradiated forward in the form of dots. With the light irradiated forward from the circular lens portion 532a, the circular decorative portion of the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated.

  The rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 includes a central diffusing reflection portion 532c that is recessed backward in a conical shape at the center of the front surface, and a front diffusing lens portion 532d that is formed outside the central diffusing reflection portion 532c on the front surface. An input lens portion 532e that bulges backward in a curved surface shape at the center of the rear surface (immediately after the central diffuse reflection portion 532c), and forward as the distance from the input lens portion 532e increases as a whole outside the input lens portion 532e on the rear surface. And a front reflecting portion 532f that is inclined so as to move.

  The front diffusing lens portion 532d of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the central diffusive reflecting portion 532c. More specifically, the front diffusing lens portion 532d has a cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction, and the groove portion is recessed backward in an arc shape, and the mountain portion between the grooves is forward. It swells in an arc shape, and the front surface is formed in a smooth wave shape. The front diffusing lens portion 532d is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary.

  The front reflecting portion 532f of the rectangular lens portion 532b is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 532e. The plurality of grooves are recessed in a V shape from the rear to the front, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed in a saw-like shape in which the cross-sectional shape when cut along the radial direction is formed in a triangular shape in which a peak portion between the grooves is pointed backward. The front reflecting portion 532f is formed such that the groove and the mountain portion move forward as the distance from the center increases. Further, the front reflecting portion 532f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately positioned in the circumferential direction, with the radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction as a boundary. The radially extending lines divided in the circumferential direction coincide with the radially extending dividing lines in the front diffusion lens portion 532d.

  When the rectangular lens portion 532b is assembled to the door frame 3, the LEDs 161a and 162a corresponding to the door frame left side decorative board 160 are positioned immediately after the input lens portion 532e.

  In the rectangular lens unit 532b, light emitted forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is input from the input lens unit 532e into the rectangular lens unit 532b. Since the input lens portion 532e bulges back in a curved surface (convex lens shape), the light spreading forward from the LEDs 161a and 162a is refracted so as to travel in parallel forward, and the input light Almost all can be led to the conical central diffuse reflection portion 532c. The light guided to the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative substrate 160 in a direction perpendicular to the front and rear axes by the inclined conical surface of the central diffuse reflection portion 532c. In other words, the light beam is reflected so as to diffuse in the direction of the light and travels in the rectangular lens portion 532b from the center side toward the outside along the front surface thereof. The light reflected by the central diffuse reflection part 532c travels from the center side to the outside (in the direction away from the center line of the central diffuse reflection part 532c) over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens part 532b in the front-rear direction.

  When the light reflected from the center side toward the outside substantially parallel to the front surface of the door frame left side decorative board 160 reaches the saw-like front reflection part 532f, the front side of the front reflection part 532f moves forward. Reflect to the side. At this time, since the front reflecting portion 532f is inclined so that the rear surface moves forward as it moves away from the central diffuse reflecting portion 532c, the thickness in the front-rear direction of the rectangular lens portion 532b decreases as it moves away from the center. (See FIG. 81). As a result, the light reflected toward the outside over the entire thickness of the rectangular lens portion 532b in the central diffuse reflection portion 532c is sequentially forwarded by the front reflection portion 532f as it goes outward from the center side. Can be reflected.

  The light reflected forward by the front reflecting portion 532f is irradiated forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b through the front diffusion lens portion 532d. At this time, since the front diffusion lens portion 532d has a wavy cross section, the light reflected forward by the front reflection portion 532f can be diffused in various directions, and the square lens portion 532b. It is possible to irradiate the front (the rear surface of the left unit decorative lens member) with light substantially uniformly from the front surface.

  In the front lens unit 532d and the front reflection unit 532f, the rectangular lens unit 532b is formed by dividing a plurality of concentric circular grooves by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves with the dividing lines as a boundary. Since the concentric arc-shaped grooves are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction by shifting in the radial direction, the light irradiated forward from the front surface of the square lens portion 532b has the density of the concentric striped pattern. It is possible to avoid becoming light and to irradiate light with more uniform light and shade forward. As a result, the multi-sided decorative part in front of the rectangular lens part 532b in the left unit decorative lens member can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  A left unit decorative lens member (not shown) is formed along the front surface of the left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member is positioned in front of the circular decorative portion formed at the front position of the circular lens portion 532 a of the left unit diffusion lens member 532 and the square lens portion 532 b of the left unit diffusion lens member 532. And a multi-sided decoration part formed on the part. The circular decorative portion is formed in a shape including a plurality of triangular ribs in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a columnar portion whose front surface extends shortly before and after the depression. The polyhedral decorative part has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of triangular polyhedrons arranged in the vertical direction on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. It is formed in such a shape. The circular decorative portion and the multi-surface decorative portion are formed in the same shape as the circular decorative portion 561a and the multi-surface decorative portion 561b of the right unit decorative lens member 561 in the door frame right side unit 550.

  The left unit decorative lens member can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent left unit decorative cover 536. The left unit decorative lens member has a multi-sided decorative portion forward from the rectangular lens portion 532b of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 by light irradiated from the circular lens portion 532a of the left unit diffusing lens member 532 to the front of the circular decorative portion. Each light is illuminated and decorated.

  The left unit upper decoration base 534 is a quadrangular shape whose front view extends vertically, and is formed in a rectangular tube shape extending forward and backward. The left unit upper decorative base 534 is inclined so that a portion constituting the lower surface on the outer periphery protrudes downward from the front end side toward the rear end side, and a lower portion of the portion penetrates back and forth. The left unit upper decoration base 534 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed in a U shape whose front view is opened upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is inclined to the rear end so that the upper side from the center in the vertical direction at the front end moves rearward as it goes upward. The left unit lower decoration base 535 is formed of a light-impermeable member.

  The left unit decorative cover 536 extends up and down over the entire height of the door frame left side unit 530. The left unit decoration cover 536 is bent so that the middle part in the vertical direction is recessed backward, and the lower part is bent backward along the front end of the left unit upper decoration base 534, The upper part of the unit-shaped decorative base 535 is bent back so that the upper part is bent backward, and the lower end of the upper character-like part is connected to the upper end of the lower character-like part. And a linear portion.

  The left unit decoration cover 536 has upper and lower ends attached to the front surface of the left unit upper decoration base 534 and the front surface of the left unit lower decoration base 535, respectively. The left unit decorative cover 536 is formed of a transparent member, and the left unit decorative lens member disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decoration member 537 extends short up and down, and is attached to the front surface of the left unit decoration cover 536 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative member 537 is formed of an opaque member.

[3-6. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 550 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference mainly to FIGS. 82A is a front view of the door frame right side unit in the door frame, FIG. 82B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 82C is the rear view of the door frame right side unit. It is the perspective view seen from. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit as seen from the back. FIG. 85 is a cross-sectional view taken along line MM in FIG. 86A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line NN in FIG. 82A, and FIG. 86B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line OO in FIG. 82A. The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the right side of the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 320.

  The door frame right side unit 550 includes a box-shaped right unit base 551 extending vertically and attached to the right side of the through-hole 111 in front of the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100, and a front surface of the right unit base 551. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is attached to the front side of the right side of the right side of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and extends in the vertical and front-rear directions. A transparent flat plate-shaped right unit left diffusing lens member 553, a sheet-like right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side surface of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and a right unit left decorative member A transparent flat plate-like right unit left cover attached to the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 so as to cover the left side of 554. Includes a over 555, the.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 550 includes a right diffuser and a right unit left diffusing lens from the front center of the front of the right unit base 551 on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 552 and on the right side of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. A transparent flat plate-like right unit right diffusing lens member 556 attached to the member 553 and extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and attached to the right side of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and decorated. A sheet-like right unit right decorative member 557, and a transparent flat plate-like right unit right cover 558 attached to the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 so as to cover the right side of the right unit right decorative member 557. Yes.

  Furthermore, the door frame right side unit 550 is disposed between the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and extends in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction in which the front and right sides are opened. A box-shaped light-impermeable right unit left light-shielding member 559 and a light-opaque light attached to the left side of the right unit right light-diffusing lens member 556 so as to close the open right side of the right unit left light-shielding member 559. And a flat right unit right light-shielding member 560.

  The door frame right side unit 550 is attached to the front ends of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, and has a translucent right having a polyhedral decoration at the front end. The unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front surface of the right unit base 551 so as to cover the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561 and the front end sides of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. A frame-shaped right unit decoration base 562 penetrating front and rear, a transparent right unit cover 563 attached to the front side of the right unit decoration base 562 so as to close a front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562, and a right unit cover And a plurality of decorative members 564 attached to the front side of 563. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side unit 550 is attached so as to vertically penetrate the right unit base 551, and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 and the door frame of the door frame top unit 570. A connection cable for connecting the top unit relay board 589 is provided.

  The right unit base 551 of the door frame right side unit 550 is a quadrangular shape whose front view is elongated vertically, and is formed in a box shape with a square tube shape that is short in the front-rear direction and closed in the vicinity of the center in the front-rear direction. Has been. The right unit base 551 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed in a strip shape extending vertically. The door frame right side decorative board 552 is mounted on the left side of the front left-right center of the plurality of left LEDs 552a, on the front side of the right LED 552b mounted on the right side of the left-right center, and mounted on the front side of the left-right center. A plurality of middle LEDs 552c. The left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is for illuminating the right unit left decorative member 554 via the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Further, the right LED 552b is for illuminating the right unit right decorative member 557 via the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c is for decorating the right unit decorative lens member 561 with light emission.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is formed with white on both front and rear sides. The door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is divided into an upper door frame right side upper decorative substrate 552A and a lower door frame right side lower decorative substrate 552B. Although illustration is omitted, the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B is connected to the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100, and the door frame right side upper decorative board 552A is the door frame right side lower decorative board 552B. It is connected to the.

  The right unit left diffusing lens member 553 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 553a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 553b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 553a to the right in front view, and A right unit left decorative member on the left side of the main body 553a when viewed from the front side of the main body 553a, and a plurality of cutouts 553c that are cut in a square shape from the right end of the rear wall 553b to the left when viewed from the front. A receiving recess 553d that is shallowly recessed to receive 554, a plurality of input lens portions 553e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a, and a right side surface in front view of the main body portion 553a. And a plurality of side reflecting portions 553f arranged in the vertical direction so that the input lens portion 553e is in the center in the vertical direction.

  The main body portion 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a C-chamfered shape and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward It is formed in the shape which inclines so that it may move to. 86. As shown in FIG. 86, the main body 553a is moved to the right from the rear end side toward the front, as shown in FIG. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 553a protrudes more forward than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall portion 553b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the right end thereof extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The left end of the rear wall portion 556b of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is in contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 553b.

  A plurality of notches 553c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. In the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative board 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 553c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The housing recess 553d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer peripheral shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit left decorative member 554. Thereby, the right unit left decorative member 554 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 553e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 553a in the vertical direction at a predetermined interval. More specifically, the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 553e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes rearward and the rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. A region. These input lens portions 553e are respectively positioned immediately before the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the left LED 552a can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 553a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 553f are provided in the vertical direction. Each side reflecting portion 553f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by a radially extending line centering on the input lens portion 553e. The plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are such that, in each groove, the surface near the input lens portion 553e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 553a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 553e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 553a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 553f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that the cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 553e is such that the mountain portion between the grooves faces the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 553f is formed such that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, the light emitted forward from the left LED 552a of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 enters the main body 553a of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 553e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 553e is concavely curved forward, the input lens portion 553e is refracted so that light from the left LED 552a spreads by the curved surface. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  Since the main body portion 553a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 553a moves to the right as viewed from the front, the door frame The light irradiated from the left LED 552a mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 553a from the input lens portion 553e hits the flat left surface in the main body 553a. However, the direct light from the left LED 552a is not emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside due to the incident angle with respect to the left surface of the main body portion 553a, and is reflected to the side reflecting portion 553f side by the inner surface of the left surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 553e into the main body portion 553a is reflected leftward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 553f, and outward from the left surface of the main body portion 553a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (rightward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 553f) of the main body 553a, but the right unit left light-shielding member 559 disposed on the right side of the main body 553a is white. Since it is a member, the left surface of the right unit left light shielding member 559 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit left light shielding member 559 is irradiated to the left side through the main body 553a. . Therefore, from the left surface of the main body portion 553a, the light reflected leftward by the side surface reflection portion 553f in the main body portion 553a and the left surface of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 are irradiated to the right from the side surface reflection portion 553f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 553a is irradiated leftward, the right unit left decorative member 554 attached to the left side of the main body portion 553a can be decorated with light emission with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflecting portion 553f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light emitted from the left surface of the main body portion 553a to the outside (left) is prevented from becoming light having the density of a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the left. As a result, the right unit left decorative member 554 accommodated in the accommodation recess 553d on the left surface of the main body 553a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 is formed of a transparent member, side reflection is formed on the opposite side from the left side (the side on which the housing recess 553d is formed) of the main body 553a. A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the portion 553f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit left decorative member 554, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 553f of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit left decorative member 554 is visible. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 553f.

  The right unit left decoration member 554 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 or the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit left cover 555 protects the outer surface of the right unit left decorative member 554 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left diffusing lens member 553, and has the same configuration. More specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 556a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, and a rear wall that protrudes in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 556a to the left in the front view. A portion 556b, a plurality of cutout portions 556c that are cut out in a square shape from the left end side in front view of the rear wall portion 556b to the right, and are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction; An accommodation recess 556d that is shallowly recessed to accommodate the unit right decoration member 557, a plurality of input lens portions 556e that protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a, and a front view of the main body portion 556a. And a plurality of side surface reflecting portions 556f arranged in the vertical direction so that each input lens portion 556e is in the center in the vertical direction on the left side.

  The main body portion 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle that extends vertically is obliquely cut out in a chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward The outer shape of the main unit 553a of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 is substantially the same. 86. As shown in FIG. 86, the main body 556a is entirely moved with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so as to move leftward as viewed from the rear end side toward the front. Slightly inclined. The front end of the main body 556a projects forward more largely than the front end of the door frame left side unit 530 in a state assembled to the door frame 3.

  The rear wall 556b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 556b extends to the center of the right unit base 551 in the left-right direction. The right end of the rear wall portion 553b of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 contacts the left end of the rear wall portion 556b.

  A plurality of notches 556 c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552 c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. The plurality of notches 556c are formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of notches 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, a rectangular opening that penetrates forward and backward through the notch 553c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the notch 556c of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the opening, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 can be favorably decorated with light emission by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c.

  The housing recess 556d has a flat bottom surface, and the outer shape substantially matches the outer shape of the right unit right decorative member 557. Thereby, the right unit right decorative member 557 can be accommodated.

  The plurality of input lens portions 556e protrude rearward from the rear end surface of the main body portion 556a at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. Specifically, the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed substantially at the center in the vertical direction when the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is divided into six equal parts in the vertical direction. Although not shown in detail, the input lens portion 556e is recessed toward the front so as to be curved in a spherical shape from a rectangular parallelepiped portion in which a vertically extending quadrangle protrudes backward and a rear surface of the rectangular parallelepiped portion. A region. These input lens portions 556e are positioned immediately before the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. Thereby, the light from the right LED 552b can be input so as to be diffused widely in the main body 556a.

  A plurality (six) of side reflecting portions 556f are provided in the vertical direction. Each of the side surface reflecting portions 556f is formed by a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves that are divided in the circumferential direction by lines extending radially around the input lens portion 556e. The plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves are such that, in each groove, the surface near the input lens portion 556e is inclined with respect to the surface of the main body portion 556a, and the surface far from the input lens portion 556e is the main body portion. It extends perpendicularly to the surface of 556a, and the deepest part is formed in an arc shape. The side reflecting portion 556f is formed in a sharp triangular shape such that the cross-sectional shape when cut in the radial direction centering on the input lens portion 556e is such that the peak portion between the grooves faces the center side. The whole is formed in a saw shape. Further, the side reflecting portion 556f is formed so that the groove portions and the mountain portions are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction with a radial line dividing the plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves in the circumferential direction as a boundary. ing.

  In the right unit right diffusing lens member 556, the light irradiated forward from the right LED 552b of the door frame right side decorative board 552 enters the main body 556a of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 from the rear surface of the input lens portion 556e. Incident. Since the rear end of the input lens portion 556e is recessed in a curved shape toward the front, it is refracted so that the light from the right LED 552b spreads by the curved surface, and each input lens portion 556e in the main body portion 556a. Will diffuse radially forward from the center.

  The main body portion 556a is slightly inclined with respect to a line extending vertically from the front surface of the door frame right side decorative board 552 so that the entire body portion 556a moves to the left as viewed from the front as it goes forward. The light irradiated from the right LED 552b mounted on the front surface of the right side decorative board 552 and incident on the main body 556a from the input lens portion 556e hits the flat right surface in the main body 556a. However, the direct light from the right LED 552b is not emitted from the left surface of the main body 556a to the outside because of the incident angle with respect to the right surface of the main body 556a, but is reflected to the side reflecting portion 556f side by the inner surface of the right surface. It becomes.

  Then, the light incident forward from the input lens portion 556e into the main body portion 556a is reflected rightward when viewed from the front by hitting the saw-like side surface reflection portion 556f, and outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a. It will be irradiated. Light is also emitted outward (leftward in front view) from the right surface (side surface reflection portion 556f) of the main body 556a, but the right unit right light shielding member 560 disposed on the left side of the main body 556a is white. Therefore, the right surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 is brightly illuminated, and the indirect light reflected by the right unit right light shielding member 560 is irradiated to the right side through the main body 556a. . Therefore, from the right surface of the main body portion 556a, the light reflected to the right by the side surface reflection portion 556f in the main body portion 556a and the right side of the right unit right light shielding member 560 are irradiated to the left from the side surface reflection portion 556f. Since the light that has been reflected and passed through the main body portion 556a is irradiated to the right, the right unit right decorative member 557 attached to the right side of the main body portion 556a can be illuminated and decorated with good brightness. it can.

  Further, in the side reflecting portion 556f, the concentric circular grooves are divided by a plurality of radially extending lines, and then the concentric arc-shaped grooves are shifted in the radial direction with the dividing line as a boundary. Are alternately arranged in the circumferential direction, so that the light radiated outward from the right surface of the main body portion 556a (right) is prevented from becoming light having the density of a concentric striped pattern. It is possible to irradiate light with more uniform light to the right. Thereby, the right unit right decoration member 557 housed in the housing recess 556d on the right surface of the main body 556a can be illuminated and decorated substantially uniformly.

  Since the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is formed of a transparent member, the side reflection formed on the opposite side from the right side of the main body 556a in the front view (the side where the housing recess 556d is formed). A pattern composed of a plurality of concentric arc-shaped grooves of the part 556f and a radially extending line can be visually recognized. Therefore, when a transparent portion is formed in the right unit right decorative member 557, the pattern of the side reflecting portion 556f of the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 can be visually recognized through the transparent portion, and the transparent in the right unit right decorative member 557 is transparent. This part can be decorated by the side reflection part 556f.

  The right unit right decoration member 557 is formed in a thin sheet shape, and the decoration such as the manufacturer logo of the pachinko machine 1 and the logo in accordance with the concept of presentation presented to the player on the game board 5 is translucent. It is given to have. The right unit right cover 558 protects the outer surface of the right unit right decorative member 557 when assembled to the door frame right side unit 550. The right unit right decorative member 557 and the right unit right cover 558 are formed substantially symmetrically with the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit left cover 555. Further, the decoration applied to the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 may be the same decoration or different decorations.

  The right unit left light-shielding member 559 is formed in substantially the same shape in side view as in the side view of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit left light shielding member 559 is formed in a shallow box shape with the front and right sides open. The right unit left light-shielding member 559 includes a flat plate-like main body portion 559a extending in the vertical direction and the front-rear direction, a rear wall portion 559b protruding in a flat plate shape from the rear side of the main body portion 559a to the right in front view, The wall portion 559b is cut out to the left from the right end side in front view in a square shape, and a plurality of cutout portions 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and the body portion 559a extends from the right surface to the right and is rearward. A plurality of flat plate-like reinforcing portions 559d extending from the wall portion 559b to the front end of the main body portion 559a.

  The main body 559a of the right unit left shading member 559 has a shape in a side view in which the upper corner of the front end of the quadrangle extending vertically is cut obliquely in a chamfered shape, and the lower side is directed upward as it goes forward. The outer shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 is substantially the same shape as the main body portions 553a and 556a.

  The rear wall 559b is assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the left end of the rear wall 559b extends to the right side from the substantially horizontal center of the right unit base 551. The left surface of the right unit right light shielding member 560 comes into contact with the right end of the rear wall portion 559b.

  A plurality of notches 559c are formed at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction, and a part thereof corresponds to the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552. The plurality of notches 559c are formed at positions corresponding to the notches 553c and 556c of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. Therefore, in the state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, the middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 faces forward from the plurality of notches 559c, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 emits light well by the plurality of middle LEDs 552c. Can be decorated.

  The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d are provided as a pair of a pair of reinforcing portions 559d that are substantially the same height as the left and right widths and are spaced apart in the vertical direction, and are separated by a predetermined distance in the vertical direction. Each set of reinforcing portions 559 d is formed at a position behind the decorative member 564 attached to the right unit cover 563. The plurality of reinforcing portions 559d increase the overall strength and rigidity of the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit right light shielding member 560 has a shape in a side view such that the upper corner of the front end side of the quadrangle extending vertically is obliquely cut out in a chamfered shape, and the lower side moves upward as it goes forward. It is formed in an inclined shape, and is formed in substantially the same shape as the main body portion 559 a in the right unit left light shielding member 559. The right unit right light-shielding member 560 closes the right-side opening opened to the right of the right unit left light-shielding member 559 formed in a shallow box shape in a state assembled to the door frame right side unit 550.

  The right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are each formed of a white member. As shown in FIG. 86, the right unit left light-shielding member 559 and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are assembled to the door frame right side unit 550, and the main body 559a and the right unit right light-shielding member 560 are connected to the right unit. The left diffuser lens member 553 and the right unit right diffuser lens member 556 are disposed so as to be close to the main body portions 553a and 556a. As a result, the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are separated from each other in the left-right direction, forming a space extending in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction with a predetermined width in the left-right direction. . Through the space formed between the main body 559a of the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560, light emitted forward from the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 is transmitted to the right unit decoration. Irradiate the rear side of the lens member 561.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are formed of a light-impermeable member, and irradiate forward from the left LED 552a, the middle LED 552c, and the right LED 552b on the door frame right side decorative board 552, respectively. The right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 corresponding to the left LED 552a, the right LED 552b, and the right unit decorative member 561, respectively. Only the middle LED 552c can be decorated.

  Further, the right unit left light shielding member 559 and the right unit right light shielding member 560 are arranged on the rear side of each divided space because the internal space is divided into four in the vertical direction by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d. The middle LED 552c of the door frame right side decorative substrate 552 can prevent light from interfering with each other, and a portion located in front of each space of the right unit decorative lens member 561 , Each can be independently illuminated. That is, on the front end side of the door frame right side unit 550, it can be divided into a plurality of (four) regions in the vertical direction and each can be decorated with light emission independently.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is formed in a shape along the front end shape of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a circular decorative portion 561a that is formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a polyhedral decorative portion 561b that extends vertically and has a plurality of polyhedrons. The circular decorative portion 561a is formed in a shape in which a plurality of triangular ribs are provided in the circumferential direction on the outer periphery of a cylindrical portion whose front surface is short and extends shortly before and after. The polyhedral decorative portion 561b has a plurality of quadrangular pyramid-shaped portions arranged in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rectangular parallelepiped extending vertically, and a plurality of polyhedrons composed of a plurality of triangles on the left and right sides of the rectangular parallelepiped portion in the vertical direction. It is formed in the shape as provided.

  More specifically, the right unit decorative lens member 561 includes a plurality of circular decorative portions 561a and a multi-surface decorative portion 561b divided into four by three sets of reinforcing portions 559d in the right unit left light shielding member 559. In the three parts from the top in the part located in the front, one multi-face decoration part 561b is arranged on each of the upper and lower sides of the circular decoration part 561a arranged in the center in the vertical direction, and in the lowermost part, the multi-face decoration Only the portion 561b is formed.

  The right unit decorative lens member 561 is attached to the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556. The right unit decorative lens member 561 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the transparent right unit cover 563. The right unit decorative lens member 561 is decorated with light emission by the LED 552c in the door frame right side decorative board 552 arranged on the rear side.

  The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a cylindrical frame shape penetrating in the front-rear direction. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed in a shape along the shape of the front end and the upper end of the right unit left diffusion lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusion lens member 556. The right unit decorative base 562 is formed so as to be able to cover both the left and right outer sides near the front end of the right unit left diffusing lens member 553 and the right unit right diffusing lens member 556 and the left and right sides of the right unit decorative lens member 561. When assembled in the door frame right side unit 550, the front end of the right unit decorative lens member 561 slightly protrudes forward from the front end of the right unit decorative base 562. The right unit decoration base 562 is formed of an opaque member.

  The right unit cover 563 is formed so that the front end opening of the right unit decoration base 562 can be closed. The right unit cover 563 is formed of a transparent member, and the right unit decorative lens member 561 disposed on the rear side can be viewed from the front side.

  The decorative member 564 extends short in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the right unit cover 563 at a predetermined interval in the vertical direction. The decorative member 564 is formed of an opaque member. The three decorative members 564 divide the right unit cover 563 (the right unit decorative lens member 561) into four parts in the vertical direction.

  The door frame right side unit 550, when assembled to the door frame 3, projects in a large plate shape forward than the door frame left side unit 530, and projects slightly forward from the front end of the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320. Yes. The door frame right side unit 550 includes a right unit left decorative member 554 and a right unit right decorative member 557 provided on the left and right sides of the protruding left side, and a right unit decorative lens member 561 provided on the front end, respectively. And can be decorated with light emission.

  Since the door frame right side unit 550 is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in an island facility of the game hall, the door frame right side unit 550 is adjacent to the right side of the pachinko machine. An effect like a partition can be exhibited. As a result, a player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can have an illusion that he / she is playing in a private room, and the game can be played in a relaxed atmosphere without hesitation of other players around. Can do.

  Moreover, since the door frame right side unit 550 protrudes greatly forward, even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1 in the game hall installed with the pachinko machine 1 side by side, The pachinko machine 1 can be conspicuous in a game hall in which a large number of pachinko machines are arranged. Therefore, when the right unit left decorative member 554 and the right unit right decorative member 557 on the left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 are light-decorated, the book can be viewed from a distance even if it is not located near the front of the pachinko machine 1. The presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be notified, and the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player can be obtained.

  Further, in the door frame right side unit 550, when a defect such as ball clogging or an error occurs in the pachinko machine 1, the right unit left decorative member 554, the right unit right decorative member 557, and the right unit decorative lens on both the left and right sides. By causing the member 561 and the like to be decorated with light emission in a unique manner, it is possible to immediately notify and recognize the occurrence of the malfunction to the staff of the game hall, and to respond quickly to the malfunction. Therefore, the interruption of the game of the player can be solved at an early stage, and the player can be frustrated and the decrease in the interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-7. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 570 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 to 90 and the like. 87 (a) is a front view of the door frame top unit in the door frame, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit viewed from the front, and (c) is a view of the door frame top unit from the back. It is a perspective view. FIG. 88 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit as seen from the back. 90 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line PP in FIG. The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the upper side of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 and above the through-hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 570 is attached to the left and right sides of the center base 571 and the center base 571 attached to the center in the left-right direction above the through hole 111 on the front surface of the door frame base 110 of the door frame base unit 100. A pair of side bases 572 attached to the front surface of the door frame base 110, a pair of upper speakers 573 respectively attached to the front surfaces of the pair of side bases 572, and the center in the left-right direction project forward. A pair of openings 574a penetrating forward and backward at a front position of the pair of upper speakers 573 in a box shape with the rear open, and from a position closer to the center in the left-right direction than the pair of openings 574a to the vicinity of the center A plurality of (three each on the left and right) slips extending in each direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction and spaced apart from each other. The unit main body 271 that has 574b and is attached to the front side of the central base 571 and the pair of side bases 572 and the front side of the pair of upper speakers 573, respectively, and closes the pair of openings 574a. And a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal attached to the rear side of the unit main body 271.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 and is attached to the rear side of the top middle decorative member 576 and the top middle decorative member 576. A door frame top middle decorative board 577 having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face thereof, and a plurality of slits 574b respectively attached to the front face of the unit main body 271, and the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 being closed. A plurality of transparent flat plate-like light guide members 578 extending from the vicinity to the vicinity of both left and right ends of the unit main body 271 across the opening 574a, and a top middle decorative member 576 on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top left decorative lens member 579 and the top left decorative lens member 579 that are respectively attached to the left and right sides and respectively cover the front surfaces of a plurality of (three) light guide members 578. The top right decorative lens member 580, the top left decorative lens member 579, and the top right decorative lens member 580 are respectively attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front side thereof, and the openings 574a from both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. And a top middle left decorative member 581 and a top middle right decorative member 582 that extend to the vicinity of the center side end portion.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the inside of the left and right side surfaces of the unit main body 271, and LEDs are respectively mounted at portions facing the left and right outer ends of the plurality (three) light guide members 578. The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, and a plurality of (three) slits 574b formed on the left and right sides of the center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the unit main body 271 pass therethrough. A pair of board bases 585 attached to the respective parts, and doors which are attached to the front surfaces of the pair of board bases 585 and have a plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a mounted at positions behind the slits 574b of the unit main body 271. Frame top middle left decorative board 586, door frame top middle right decorative board 587, door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and And a, a pair of light blocking members 588 which are respectively attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 at the front side of the door frame top right in decorative substrate 587.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 is attached to the central base 571 so as to cover the door frame top unit relay board 589 attached to the front surface of the central base 571 in the unit main body 271 and the front surface of the door frame top unit relay board 589. The relay board cover 590 attached, the upper cover 591 attached to the unit body 271 so as to close the upper opening 574c of the unit body 271, and the unit so as to close the lower opening 574d of the unit body 271. A lower cover 592 attached to the main body 271.

  The center base 571 of the door frame top unit 570 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose front view extends to the left and right. The central base 571 is formed in a box shape opened rearward, and has a plurality of irregularities on the front surface. The pair of side bases 572 are attached to the left and right ends of the central base 571, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the front surfaces of the side bases 572, respectively. The pair of upper speakers 573 are attached to the door frame top unit 570 in an oblique manner so that the front surfaces of the pair of upper speakers 573 move rearward on the side close to the center in the left-right direction of the door frame top unit 570. The pair of upper speakers 573 are full-range cone type speakers capable of outputting sound in a wide frequency band.

  The unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the lower part in the vicinity of the left and right ends of a quadrangle extending left and right bulges downward when viewed from the front. In other words, the unit main body 271 is formed in such a shape that the shape of the front view is cut out of a quadrangle extending left and right by a trapezoid that is narrowed upward from the lower end side. The unit main body 271 has a rectangular shape in plan view extending from side to side and a portion having about 1/2 of the full width (length in the left and right direction) around the center in the left and right direction on the front end side of the rectangle. The trapezoid protruding forward and the quadrangle protruding short forward with the front end side of the trapezoid as a long side are formed in a combined shape. Accordingly, the unit main body 271 is a line in which both sides of a portion projecting forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front face connect the left-right end portion of the unit main body 271 and the left-right end portion of the front end of the front-projecting portion. It is located behind (it is depressed).

  In the unit main body 271, openings 574 a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions on the front surface from the both ends in the left-right direction to positions outside the portions protruding forward. Further, the unit main body 271 has a plurality of slits extending in the vertical direction at a predetermined height in the left and right directions and penetrating in the front-rear direction, in a portion extending obliquely forward from the front portion of the trapezoidal portion. 574b is formed. The plurality of slits 574b extend from the vicinity of the front end of the portion extending obliquely forward to the front surface of the unit main body 271 to the vicinity of the opening 574a. The plurality of slits 574b are formed on the both sides of the center of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction so as to be spaced apart from each other by three.

  Further, the unit main body 271 has an upper opening 574c squarely cut from the rear end to the front at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface, and a lower opening 574d cut from the rear end to the front in the left-right direction on the lower surface. It is equipped with. The upper opening 574c of the unit main body 271 is closed by the upper cover 591. The lower opening 574d is closed by the lower cover 592.

  Further, the unit main body 271 includes a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f extending vertically at both left and right ends. The top left decorative portion 574e has a front surface formed at a position substantially the same as the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The top right decorative portion 574f is formed such that the front surface thereof is positioned forward of the front surface of the portion where the opening 574a is formed. The unit main body 271 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle decorative member 576 is attached to the front end of a portion protruding forward at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the unit main body 271. The top middle decorative member 576 has a front pentagonal shape that is bent so that the central part of the lower side of the substantially square is positioned downward, and extends outward from the upper ends of the left and right sides of the pentagon. It is formed in a shape such as a combination of a substantially right triangle connecting the tip of the side and the lower ends of the left and right sides of the side pentagon. The top middle decorative member 576 is inclined such that the front pentagonal portion moves rearward as it goes downward. The top middle decorative member 576 is formed in a three-dimensional shape as a whole and has translucency.

  The front middle decorative board 577 of the door frame is rearward of the top middle decorative member 576 in a state in which the front surface is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward along the front surface of the deformed pentagonal portion of the top middle decorative member 576. Mounted on the side. The door frame top middle decorative board 577 has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and the top middle decorative member 576 can be decorated with light emission by emitting these LEDs.

  The light guide member 578 is formed of a transparent member. The light guide member 578 is formed in a shape along the shape on both the left and right sides of the front end of the portion projecting forward on the front surface of the unit main body 271. When the side close to both ends in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271 is described as the end side, and the side close to the center as the center side, the light guide member 578 is a straight part that extends straight from side to side toward the center side. 578a, and an arc portion 578b extending in an arc shape having a large radius so as to move forward from the end portion on the center side of the straight portion 578a toward the center side. The light guide member 578 has a depth in the front-rear direction smaller than the height in the vertical direction at the straight portion 578a, and a depth in the front-rear direction larger than the height in the vertical direction at the arc portion 578b. The light guide member 578 is formed such that the vertical portion 578a has a constant height in the vertical direction, and the arc portion 578b is formed so that the height in the vertical direction decreases toward the center. In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the straight portion 578a is positioned immediately before the opening 574a of the unit main body 271, and the arc portion 578b closes the slit 574b of the unit main body 271 from the front. Yes.

  The light guide member 578 includes a diffuse reflection portion 578c formed of a saw-like unevenness formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, a diffusion input portion 578d formed of a plurality of unevenness formed on the rear surface side of the arc portion 578b, It has.

  In the state where the light guide member 578 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, the outer ends of the left and right directions face the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584. At the same time, the diffusion input portion 578d faces the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587. When light from the LEDs 583a and 584a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 584 or the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 is incident on the light guide member 578 from the ends on both outer sides in the left-right direction, the light enters the direct portion 578a. The inside of the straight portion 578a is sequentially reflected forward from the end portion by the diffuse reflection portion 578c formed on the rear surface of the straight portion 578a, and light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the straight portion 578a. A top left decorative lens member 579 or a top right decorative lens member 580 is disposed in front of the light guide member 578, and a portion that is in front of the straight part 578a is decorated with light emission.

  The light guide member 578 receives light from the LEDs 586a and 587a of the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 from the diffusion input portion 578d formed on the rear surface of the arc portion 578b. Then, the light is diffused widely into the arc portion 578b by the unevenness of the diffusion input portion 578d, and the light is irradiated forward from the entire front surface of the arc portion 578b. Thereby, the part located in front of the circular arc part 578b in the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission.

  As described above, the light guide member 578 includes the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative board 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative board 586, or the door frame top right decorative board 584 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587. The light from the LEDs 584a and 587a can be guided, and the top left decorative lens member 579 or the top right decorative lens member 580 arranged in front can be illuminated and decorated in a good (uniform) state.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 is attached to the front surface of the unit body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the left side of the front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction. The top left decorative lens member 579 has three decorative lens portions 579a that accommodate the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and the upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 579a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top left decorative lens member 579 extends from the left end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the right end of the top left decorative portion 574e of the unit body 271. That is, the top left decorative lens member 579 decorates substantially the entire left side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top left decorative lens member 579 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 583a and 586a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 so as to cover the front of the three light guide members 578 arranged on the right side of the front surface of the unit main body 271 in the left-right direction. The top right decorative lens member 580 has three decorative lens portions 580a that house the three light guide members 578 independently from the front. The decorative lens portion 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is formed in a shape that follows the light guide member 578, and covers the front surface and upper and lower surfaces of the light guide member 578. On the front surface of each decorative lens portion 580a, projections and depressions of a square frustum projecting forward are arranged in a row on the left and right.

  The top right decorative lens member 580 extends from the right end of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570 to the left end of the top right decorative portion 574f of the unit body 271. That is, the top right decorative lens member 580 decorates substantially the entire right side of the top middle decorative member 576 in the door frame top unit 570. The top right decorative lens member 580 is illuminated and decorated by the LEDs 584a and 587a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 587 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 via the three light guide members 578.

  The top middle left decorative member 581 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top left decorative lens member 579 between the left opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle left decorative member 581 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 579a of the top left decorative lens member 579 in the assembled state in the door frame top unit 570, and the front center side is the top left side. The decorative lens member 579 projects forward from the front surface. The top middle left decorative member 581 is formed of an opaque member.

  The top middle right decorative member 582 is attached to the front surface of the unit main body 271 from the front of the top right decorative lens member 580 between the right opening 574a on the front surface of the unit main body 271 and the top middle decorative member 576. The top middle right decorative member 582 is mounted so as to fill the space between the three decorative lens portions 580a of the top right decorative lens member 580 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the center of the front side is closer to the top right. The decorative lens member 580 protrudes forward from the front surface. The top middle right decorative member 582 is formed of an opaque member.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 583 is attached to the inside of the left side surface (top left decorative portion 574e) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 583a is mounted facing rightward. On the door frame top left decorative substrate 583, an LED 583a is mounted at a position facing the left end surfaces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the left front surface of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 583a can each emit light independently. A portion of the top left decorative lens member 579 positioned in front of the left opening 574a of the unit main body 271 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578 is set by the LED 583a of the door frame top left decorative substrate 583. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The door frame top right decorative board 584 is attached to the inside of the right side surface (top right decorative portion 574f) in the unit main body 271 with the surface on which the LED 584a is mounted facing leftward. On the door frame top right decorative substrate 584, an LED 584a is mounted at a position facing the right end surfaces of the three light guide members 578 attached to the front surface on the right side of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center (see FIG. 90). ). The three LEDs 584a can each emit light independently. A portion of the top right decorative lens member 580 positioned in front of the right opening 574a of the top right decorative lens member 580 is connected to the LED 584a of the door frame top right decorative substrate 584 via the straight portions 578a of the three light guide members 578. Can be decorated with luminescence.

  The pair of substrate bases 585 are attached to the rear side of the unit body 271 where the plurality of slits 574b are formed. The pair of substrate bases 585 are formed substantially symmetrical to each other. The substrate base 585 includes a substantially square side wall having sides extending in the vertical and front and back directions, a rear wall having a rectangular shape in front view extending rightward and leftward from the rear side of the side wall, and a front end of the upper side of the side wall. The upper wall of a substantially right triangle connecting the upper side of the side wall and the rear wall with the line connecting the upper side of the side wall as the hypotenuse, and the lower side of the side wall and the rear wall on the opposite side of the upper wall And a bottom wall of a right triangle, and is formed in a triangular prismatic box shape in which the upper and lower hypotenuses are open. The substrate base 585 is attached to the unit main body 271 so that the opened part is closed by the unit main body 271. The substrate base 585 is attached with the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 or the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 so that the opened part is closed.

  The door frame top center left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open portion from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the left side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. It is done. The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585 so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center side in the left-right direction of the unit body 271. Inclined state. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is a surface of a portion where the front side of the door frame top unit 570 is formed with three slits 574b on the left side of the unit body 271 in the left-right direction center. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  The door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 has a plurality of LEDs 586 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 586a face forward from the three slits 574b on the left side of the center of the unit body 271 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle left decorative board 586 emits a plurality of LEDs 586a to emit and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top left decorative lens member 579 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the substrate base 585 so as to close a box-shaped open portion from the front in the substrate base 585 attached to the rear side on the right side of the left and right center of the unit main body 271. It is done. The door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is attached to the front surface of the substrate base 585, so that the front surface moves forward as it moves toward the center in the left-right direction of the unit main body 271. Inclined state. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 is assembled to the door frame top unit 570, and the front surface thereof is the surface of the portion where the three slits 574b on the right side from the center in the left-right direction of the unit body 271 are formed. It becomes a state substantially parallel to.

  The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 has a plurality of LEDs 587 a mounted at positions corresponding to the three slits 574 b of the unit main body 271. As a result, the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 is in a state in which the plurality of LEDs 587a face forward from the three slits 574b on the right side of the center of the unit main body 271 in a state assembled to the door frame top unit 570. The door frame top middle right decorative board 587 emits a plurality of LEDs 587a to emit light and decorate a portion near the top middle decorative member 576 of the top right decorative lens member 580 via the arc portion 578b of the light guide member 578. be able to.

  The pair of light shielding members 588 are attached to the rear side of the front surface of the unit main body 271 at a position between the door frame top middle left decorative board 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the unit main body 271. The pair of light shielding members 588 are formed so as to be substantially bilaterally symmetrical with each other by an opaque member. The light shielding member 588 is provided between the upper and lower sides of the plurality of LEDs 586a and 587a on the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586 and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 arranged in correspondence with the three slits 574b in the unit main body 271. Partitioning. By this light shielding member 588, light can be guided forward by the light guide member 578 only by the LEDs 586a and 587a located immediately after the respective light guide members 578, and the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative member can be guided. The decorative lens portions 579a and 580a of the lens member 580 can be appropriately decorated with light emission in a state where they are independent of each other.

  The door frame top unit relay board 589 is attached to the front surface of the central base 571. The door frame top unit relay substrate 589 includes a pair of upper speakers 573, a door frame top middle decorative substrate 577, a door frame top left decorative substrate 583, a door frame top right decorative substrate 584, a door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and a door. The connection between the frame top middle right decorative board 587 and the door body relay board of the door frame base unit 100 is relayed. The door frame top unit relay board 589 is connected to the door body relay board via a connection cable (not shown) provided in the door frame right side unit 550. The front side of the door frame top unit relay board 589 is covered with a relay board cover 590.

  The door frame top unit 570 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction, and is curved so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 are curled backward. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have an illusion that only the top middle decorative member 576 protrudes greatly forward, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the pachinko machine 1.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 that decorate the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576 disposed at the center, and the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576. It is formed so as to extend from both sides to a top left decorative portion 574e and a top right decorative portion 574f formed at the left and right ends of the unit main body 271. Thereby, the front upper part of the door frame 3 can be entirely decorated by the door frame top unit 570.

  At this time, in the door frame top unit 570, the front surface is protected by a speaker cover 575 made of punching metal behind each of the left and right ends near the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The speaker cover 575 faces the front from between the three decorative lens portions 579a and 580a that are separated from each other above and below the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. The player can listen to the sound output from the left and right upper speakers 573 in a good state, and can enjoy high-quality stereo sound.

  Further, the door frame top unit 570 includes a door frame top left decorative substrate 583 and a door frame top right decorative by a plurality of light guide members 578 provided on the rear side of the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580. Light from the substrate 584, the door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586, and the door frame top middle right decorative substrate 587 can be guided to the top left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580, and the top left decorative lens member The entire front surface of 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with good light emission. Therefore, the door frame top unit 570 can decorate the entire front surface of the upper part of the door frame 3 including the front of the left and right upper speakers 573 with light emission.

[3-8. Effect of door frame]
The effects of the door frame 3 will be described. The door frame 3 in the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment has the through-holes 111 penetrating through the door frame base 110 in the door frame base unit 100 in the front and rear directions and in the vertical and horizontal directions as compared with the conventional pachinko machine. The vertical height of the plate unit 320 and the door frame top unit 570 is reduced in accordance with the enlargement of the through-hole 111, and the horizontal width of the door frame left side unit 530 and the door frame right side unit 550 Is made smaller. Thereby, the front surface of the game board 5 (game area 5a) attached to the main body frame 4 can be seen as widely as possible from the player (front) through the through-hole 111 (glass unit 190). This corresponds to the game board 5 having a wide game area 5a.

  The door frame 3 has a production operation unit 400 (second production operation unit 400A) having a large hemispherical operation button 410 at the center in the left-right direction of the dish unit 320 bulging forward on the lower side of the through-hole 111. The front surface of the lower half (the lower side of the upper plate 321) on both the left and right sides of the production operation unit 400 (the front surface of the front plate lower decorative portion 326c) is recessed so as to bend backward (the plate unit). 320, a shape curved in a concave shape so that the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the rendering operation unit 400 are positioned rearward than a straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of 320 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the rendering operation unit 400. ing. As a result, the production operation unit 400 attached to the front surface at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 320 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the production operation unit 400 is highlighted and shown to the player. It is possible to pay attention to the production operation unit 400.

  The door frame 3 tilts the presentation operation unit 400 disposed on the front surface of the dish unit 320 below the through-hole 111 so that the large hemispherical transparent operation button 410 faces obliquely upward and forward. Therefore, when the player sits in front of the pachinko machine 1, the operation button 410 faces the player's head (face), and the player drops his line of sight and moves the rendering operation unit 400. When viewed, the operation button 410 can be seen in a state substantially close to the front, the large and round operation button 410 can be visually recognized strongly, and an expectation can be enhanced for the effect using the operation button 410. At the same time, the effect image displayed on the door frame side effect display device 460 arranged in the transparent operation button 410 can be visually recognized in a good state, and the effect image can be sufficiently enjoyed. Maseru can be.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes an operation button 410 having a diameter substantially the same as the overall height of the plate unit 320 and bulging forward, so that when the operation button 410 is operated, the hand frame can be moved by a short distance. Any part of the operation button 410 can be touched, and “fast pressing” of the operation button 410 can be performed relatively easily. In addition, since the operation button 410, which has a large diameter and bulges forward, is mounted in an inclined state, it can be pressed from above like the operation buttons of a conventional pachinko machine, and can be operated to the left or right. The operation button 410 can be operated satisfactorily or from the front, and the operation buttons 410 having good operability can be more enjoyed.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is mounted with the stage operation unit 400 in a suspended state by the dish unit 320 and includes a vibration motor 424 that generates vibration at the lower part of the stage operation unit 400. When vibration is generated by rotating the vibration motor 424 in accordance with the state, strong vibration can be transmitted to the player's hand touching the upper part of the operation button 410, and the player can be surprised by the operation button. The production using 410 can be further enjoyed.

  Furthermore, since the door frame 3 is provided with a large operation button 410 (production operation unit 400) over the entire height of the plate unit 320 in the center of the front surface of the plate unit 320, the upper plate 321 is compared with a conventional pachinko machine. Because the lower plate 322 underneath is inconspicuous, it can make it easier for players who are familiar with conventional pachinko machines to recognize that they are clearly different, and appeal to the players strongly. A powerful pachinko machine 1 can be obtained.

  Further, the door frame 3 is formed so that the lower plate 322 wraps around the rear side of the production operation unit 400 with respect to the lower plate opening 326d that is opened on the left side of the production operation unit 400 on the front surface of the plate unit 320. Therefore, the volume of the lower plate 322 can be increased with respect to the size of the lower plate opening 326d, and a sufficient number of game balls can be secured in the lower plate 322. In addition, since the rear part of the lower plate 322 wraps around to the rear side of the production operation unit 400, when the player puts his left hand into the lower plate 322 or puts his / her finger on the lower plate opening 326d. Since it becomes difficult for the fingertips to touch the wall behind the lower plate 322, it is possible to make it difficult to give the player a sense of incongruity, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game and to increase the size of the lower plate opening 326d. Compared to this, it can be recognized by tactile sense that the volume of the lower plate 322 is large.

  Further, the door frame 3 has a lower tray ball supply port 323c through which game balls from the upper plate 321 are discharged to the lower plate 322, and a bottom for pulling out the game balls of the lower plate 322 into a dollar box or the like below the plate unit 320. The countersunk hole 322a is arranged linearly in the front-rear direction, and is arranged on the right outside of the lower dish opening 326d in the front view (on the right side of the left end of the frame unit 415 of the rendering operation unit 400). That is, the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a are connected to the rendering operation unit 400, the rendering operation unit mounting portion 326a (the right outer side of the lower tray opening 326d) in the tray unit cover 326, and the front end of the lower tray cover 340. Since the lower dish ball supply port 323c and the lower dish ball removal hole 322a are not visible from the player side, the appearance of the dish unit 320 (pachinko machine 1) can be refreshed. The appearance of the pachinko machine 1 can be improved.

  Further, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball hole 322a opened in the lower plate 322 because the lower plate ball hole 322a is disposed in front of the lower plate ball supply port 323c (directly in front). Then, as soon as the game ball released from the upper plate 321 or the like to the lower plate 322 enters the lower plate 322, it is discharged from the lower plate ball removal hole 322a to a lower dollar box or the like. At this time, since the player cannot see the lower tray ball supply port 323c and the lower tray ball removal hole 322a, the flow of the game balls discharged from the upper tray 321 and the like through the lower tray 322 to the dollar box is also included. I can't see it. Accordingly, the player can have an illusion that the game ball on the upper plate 321 or the game ball discharged from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 is full is directly discharged to the dollar box. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the game ball to feel the annoyance passing through the lower plate 322, and to reduce the interest by dedicating the player to the game (gaming operation of the game ball, production image, etc.). it can.

  In addition, the door frame 3 has a lower plate ball removal hole 322a disposed at the front left side of the lower plate ball supply port 323c in the lower plate 322, and the lower plate 322 standing on the right side of the lower plate ball removal hole 322a. Since the raised wall portion is obliquely curved so as to face the direction of the lower dish ball removal hole 322a, the game balls supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 are directly It can be guided to the punching hole 322a, or can be indirectly guided to the lower dish ball punching hole 322a by being reflected on the right wall. Thereby, in a state where the lower dish ball hole 322a remains open, the game ball supplied from the lower dish ball supply port 323c to the lower dish 322 is an area on the left side of the lower dish ball hole 322a in the lower dish 322. Since it can be discharged downward from the lower tray ball removal hole 322a without entering the lower tray first region A1, the lower side of the lower plate 322 is displayed without showing the player the game balls circulating in the lower tray 322. The game ball can be discharged downward (dollar box), and the same effects as described above can be achieved.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a lower plate opening 326d of the plate unit cover 326 facing the front of the lower plate 322 between the effect operation unit mounting portion 326a (the effect operation unit 400) and the lower speaker opening 326e. Therefore, even if the player puts his hand on the lower plate opening 326d or puts his hand on the lower plate 322, the front of the lower speaker port 326e is not blocked by the player's hand. The sound from the speaker 921 in the substrate unit 900 can be output well forward, and the sound from the pachinko machine 1 can be enjoyed. In addition, when the player puts his hand in the lower plate 322 or approaches the lower plate 322, the player can feel the vibration caused by the heavy bass from the speaker 921 output forward from the lower speaker port 326e, and the game Entertainers and suppress the decline of interest.

  Moreover, since the door frame 3 is provided with the door frame right side unit 550 which is plate-like and protrudes forward from the right side of the through-hole 111, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door Since the frame right side unit 550 can exert an effect such as a partition between the pachinko machine adjacent to the right side, the player who plays with the pachinko machine 1 can play in a private room. The game can be played in a relaxed atmosphere without bothering other players around you.

  Furthermore, the door frame 3 can be light-decorated on the front end and both left and right sides of the door frame right side unit 550 that is plate-like and protrudes greatly forward, so that the game hall installed with the pachinko machines 1 arranged side by side Even if the pachinko machine 1 is not located in front of the pachinko machine 1, the presence of the pachinko machine 1 can be informed from a distance such as from the side along the island facility, and the pachinko machine has a high appeal to the player. Machine 1 can be used.

  Further, the door frame 3 includes a top middle decorative member 576 that protrudes forward at the center in the left-right direction in the door frame top unit 570 on the upper side of the through-hole 111, and the front surfaces on both the left and right sides of the top middle decorative member 576, A shape that is recessed so as to squeeze backward (the top middle decorative member in the door frame top unit 570 rather than the straight line connecting the front ends of the left and right ends of the door frame top unit 570 and the front ends of the left and right ends of the top middle decorative member 576 576 is formed in a concavely curved shape so that the front surfaces of the left and right sides of 576 are located rearward. As a result, only the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 appears to protrude greatly forward, so that the player can make the top middle decorative member 576 stand out and emphasized. The medium decorative member 576 can be strongly noted.

  By the way, a pair of upper speakers spaced apart from each other are provided on the upper part of the door frame in the conventional pachinko machine, and the two upper speakers are conspicuous. On the other hand, the door frame 3 according to the present embodiment has a pair of upper portions whose front surfaces are protected by speaker covers 575 made of punching metal at both left and right ends in the door frame top unit 570 attached to the upper side of the through-hole 111. In addition to the speaker 573, a top left decorative lens member 579 and a top right decorative lens member 580 extending from the left and right sides of the center top middle decorative member 576 to the left and right ends through the front of the speaker cover 575 are provided. The entire front surface of the left decorative lens member 579 and the top right decorative lens member 580 can be decorated with light emission. Thereby, since the front upper part of the door frame 3 can be decorated as a whole, the pair of upper speakers 573 become inconspicuous in the upper part of the door frame 3, and the decoration clearly different from the conventional pachinko machine is given. The pachinko machine 1 can be recognized by the player at a glance, and the player can enjoy a high-quality stereo sound by the pair of upper speakers 573. it can.

  As described above, the door frame 3 of the present embodiment includes the effect operation unit 400 attached to the dish unit 320 and the top middle decorative member 576 of the door frame top unit 570 on the lower side and the upper side of the through-hole 111. , Because it protrudes forward in the center in the left and right direction, it can show the player a unified decoration up and down so that the virtual line passing through the center in the left and right direction is conspicuous, and by the decoration of sophisticated feeling The pachinko machine 1 can be made more conspicuous than other pachinko machines and has a high appealing power.

  Further, the door frame 3 projects the top middle decorative member 576 and the effect operation unit 400 of the door frame top unit 570 disposed vertically at the center in the left-right direction, and thus the top middle decorative member 576. When the lighting operation unit 400 is decorated with light emission, the player can show a light emission line that extends vertically at the center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the door frame 3, and the player's line of sight is arranged in the center in the left-right direction. It can be guided to the operation button 410 or the like of the effect operation unit 400.

[4. Overall structure of main frame]
The main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. FIG. 91 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 92 is a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 93 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. FIG. 94 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 of the present embodiment is formed in a box shape with the front opened, and the game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein. The body frame 4 is attached to the frame-like outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall at the top and bottom of the front left side front end so that it can be opened and closed, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. It is attached so that it can be opened and closed.

  The main body frame 4 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped main body frame base 600 that can be partially inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the main body frame base 600. Attached to both the upper and lower ends on the left side of the front view and rotatably attached to the outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 and the door frame of the door frame 3 respectively. A main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and a main body frame side lower hinge member 640 to which the lower side hinge member 150 is rotatably attached, respectively, and a reinforcing frame 660 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600 when viewed from the front. .

  The main body frame 4 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 600, and a ball launcher 680 for driving a game ball into the game area 5a of the game board 5; A locking unit 700 that locks between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 and between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and is attached to the rear side along the front side and the left side of the main body frame base 600. An inverted L-shaped payout unit 800 for paying out a game ball to the cage player side, a substrate unit 900 attached to the lower rear portion of the main body frame base 600, and an openable / closable attachment to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. And a back cover 980 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 600.

[4-1. Body frame base]
As shown in FIGS. 91 to 94, the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment is formed in a rectangular shape whose front view extends vertically. The main body frame base 600 penetrates back and forth within a range of about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end, and a game board insertion slot 601 into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side, A game board placement part 602 that forms the lower side of the board insertion slot 601 and on which the game board 5 is placed, and protrudes upward from the center in the left-right direction of the game board placement part 602 and is located at the left and right of the lower end of the game board 5 And a game board restricting portion 603 for restricting rearward movement.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 has a launching device mounting portion 604 for mounting a ball launching device 680 formed on the lower right side of the game board mounting portion 602 in front view, and a right side of the launching device mounting portion 604 in front view. A cylinder insertion port 605 that passes through the front and rear and through which the key cylinder 710 of the locking unit 700 is inserted and a door of the board unit 900 that passes through the front and rear from the left and right center of the game board mounting portion 602 to the left and the lower side. A connecting opening 606 that faces the frame relay board 911 forward, and a circular shape that penetrates forward and backward on the lower left side of the game board placement part 602 when viewed from the front, and faces the speaker unit 920 in the board unit 900 forward. A speaker opening 607.

  Further, the main body frame base 600 extends in a plate-like shape from the right side of the game board insertion slot 601 to the rear, so that the locking unit 700 is attached to the right side, and the back cover 980 is rotatable at the rear end. A rear extension 608 is provided. The main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 is formed in the vicinity of the upper and lower ends at the left end of the front view on the rear surface, and the upper hinge attachment for attaching the main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 is provided. A portion 609 and a lower hinge attaching portion 610.

  The main body frame base 600 is attached to an opening cover 615 that closes the connection opening 606 so as to be opened and closed, and to be pivotable to a position slightly lower on the left side from the center of the game board mounting portion 602 when viewed from the front. And a game board lock member 616 capable of restricting the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion slot 601.

[4-2. Main body frame side upper hinge member and main body frame side lower hinge member]
The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 and the main body frame side lower hinge member 640 are attached to the upper hinge attaching portion 609 and the lower hinge attaching portion 610 of the main body frame base 600.

  The main body frame side upper hinge member 620 includes an upper hinge main body 621 in which a rear portion of a flat plate member extending horizontally is bent downward in an L-shape, and projects upward in a cylindrical shape from the front end of the upper hinge main body 621. The main body frame upper hinge pin 622 that is pivotally supported by the cage outer frame side upper hinge member 60 and the upper hinge main body 621 pass through the left side of the main body frame upper hinge pin 622 when viewed from the front, and the door frame side upper hinge member 140 is pivotally supported. And an upper hinge hole 623 for the door frame. The body frame side upper hinge member 620 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 609 of the body frame base 600 at a portion bent downward in the upper hinge body 621.

  The main body frame side lower hinge member 640 penetrates vertically at the front end of the lower hinge first main body 641 and the lower hinge first main body 641 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate member is bent upward in an L shape. A lower hinge hole for outer frame (not shown) pivotally supported by the outer frame side lower hinge member 70 of the outer frame 2 and a horizontally extending flat plate disposed above the lower hinge first main body 641 The lower hinge second main body 643 whose rear part is bent in an L shape upward, and the front end of the lower hinge second main body 643 vertically penetrates the door frame side lower hinge member 150 of the door frame 3. The door frame hinge hole 644 for supporting the door frame and the door frame hinge hole 644 in the horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 643 extend from the left end to the upper side and extend upward from the left end. A regulating piece 645 for regulating the rotation range of .

  The lower hinge second body 643 is configured such that a horizontally extending portion is spaced upward from a portion of the lower hinge first main body 641 that extends horizontally, and a portion bent upward is a lower hinge first body. It is in contact with the front surface of the portion bent upward of the main body 641. The body frame side lower hinge member 640 is attached to the lower hinge attachment portion 610 of the body frame base 600 at a portion bent upward from the lower hinge first body 641 and the lower hinge second body 643.

[4-3. Reinforcement frame]
The reinforcing frame 660 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The reinforcing frame 660 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 600. The reinforcing frame 660 has a U-shaped cross-sectional shape in plan view with an open right side, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. Further, the reinforcing frame 660 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion slot 601 of the main body frame base 600 from moving forward and downward behind the portion extending rightward from the front end. A set of left positioning members 661 are attached so as to be spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction.

  The reinforcement frame 660 can reinforce the hinge side (left side in front view) of the main body frame base 600 and enter the main body frame 4 (game board 5) from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent unauthorized insertion of tools.

[4-4. Ball launcher]
The ball launcher 680 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91, 93 and 94. The ball launcher 680 is a device for driving a game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the tray unit 320 into the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4. In the ball launching device 680, the strength of the game ball is changed in accordance with the rotation angle of the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 at the lower right front corner of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 680 is attached to the rear launching surface 681 of the flat plate-like launching base 681 attached to the launching device attaching portion 604 of the main body frame base 600 and the launching base 681 on the rear surface in the front view. A firing solenoid 682 consisting of a rotary solenoid penetrating and extending forward, a ball striking rod 683 having a base end attached to the rotation shaft of the firing solenoid 682, and a slanting upper left extension from the vicinity of the tip of the ball striking rod 683 And a launch rail 684 attached to the front surface of the launch base 681 and capable of rolling a game ball.

  In this ball launching device 680, a game ball is supplied from the ball feed unit 250 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 684, and a game ball is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 684. When the handle 302 is turned, the firing solenoid 682 is driven with a strength corresponding to the turning angle, and the game ball is hit by the hitting ball 683. Then, the game ball hit by the hit ball 683 is guided to the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 684 and is driven into the game area 5a.

  If the hit game ball does not reach the game area 5a due to the strength of the game ball, the space between the launch rail 684 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002). From the lower foul cover unit 270 to the foul ball receiving port 275, passes through the foul cover unit 270, and is discharged to the lower plate 322.

[4-5. Locking unit]
The locking unit 700 of the main body frame 4 in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The locking unit 700 of the present embodiment is attached to the main body frame base 600 of the main body frame 4 and can lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2. The locking unit 700 is attached to the right side surface of the rear extension 608 of the main body frame base 600 and extends vertically. The locking unit 700 protrudes forward from the unit base 701 and can be locked to the door frame 3. A door frame ridge 702, a plurality of outer frame ridges 703 projecting rearward from the unit base 701 and latchable with the outer frame 2, and projecting in a columnar shape from the bottom of the unit base 701 to the front, A protrusion protrudes from the front end portion in a direction perpendicular to the axis, and the rotation of the cylinder lock 211 is transmitted by engaging with the rotation transmitting member 212 of the opening / closing cylinder unit 210 of the door frame 3, and the door according to the rotation direction of the key. A key cylinder 710 that unlocks either the frame collar 702 or the outer frame collar 703.

[4-6. Dispensing unit]
The payout unit 800 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the dispensing unit viewed from the back. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main structure and viewed from the back. FIG. 99 (a) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit of the payout unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 99 (b) is a perspective view of the ball guiding unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 100 is an exploded perspective view of the ball guiding unit. FIG. 101A is a perspective view of the payout unit of the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 101B is a perspective view of the payout device as seen from behind. FIG. 102 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the front, and FIG. 103 is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing device as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 104 (a) is a front view of the dispensing device, and FIG. 104 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line Q-Q in FIG. FIG. 105 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state where the ball removal passage is closed by the ball removal movable piece in the dispensing device, and FIG. 105 (b) is an illustration showing a state where the ball removal passage is opened by the ball removal movable piece. It is.

  FIG. 106 (a) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit in the payout unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 106 (b) is a perspective view of the upper full ball path unit as seen from the back. FIG. 107 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 107 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the upper full sphere path unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. is there. Further, FIG. 108 (a) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit in the payout unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 108 (b) is a perspective view of the lower full tank path unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 109 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 110 is an exploded perspective view of the lower full sphere path unit as seen from the rear. Further, FIG. 111 (a) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is closed in the lower full sphere path unit, and FIG. 111 (b) is an explanatory view showing a state where the guideway opening / closing door is open. . FIG. 112 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the foul cover unit of the door frame and the lower full ball path unit. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the payout unit.

  As shown in FIGS. 95 and 96, the payout unit 800 of the present embodiment is attached to the upper side of the payout unit base 801 and an inverted L-shaped payout unit base 801 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600. The tank tank 802 stores a game ball supplied from an island facility of a game hall (not shown) in a box shape that is open to the left and right and is attached to the payout unit base 801 below the ball tank 802. And a tank rail 803 extending to the left and right for guiding the game ball in the cage ball tank 802 leftward as viewed from the front. In the tank rail 803, the game balls are guided to the left, and are aligned in two rows in the front-rear direction by a ball leveling member 804 (see FIG. 113) that hangs down from above.

  The payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 on the upper left side when viewed from the front, and guides a game ball from the tank rail 803 downward in a meandering manner, and below the ball guide unit 820. A payout device 830 that is detachably attached to the payout unit base 801 and that pays out the game balls guided by the ball guide unit 820 one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950. And. From the tank rail 803 to the payout device 830, game balls circulate in two rows, and from the payout device 830, game balls are paid out one by one.

  Further, the payout unit 800 is attached to the rear surface of the payout unit base 801 and guides the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 downward, and the game balls according to the storage state of the game balls on the upper plate 321 in the tray unit 320. Is discharged from either the normal discharge port 850d or the full tank discharge port 850e, and is discharged from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full ball path unit 850 attached to the lower end of the dispensing unit base 801. Normal guidance path 861 that guides the game ball forward from the front end to the through-ball passage 273 of the door frame 3, guides the game ball released from the full tank outlet 850e to the front of the door frame 3 from the front end. The full tank guide path 862 for guiding to the full tank receiving port 274, and the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are arranged on the main body frame. And a, a lower full sphere path unit 860 having a taxiway door 863 to be opened or closed in response to opening and closing of the door frame 3 against.

[4-6a. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 820 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100. FIG. The ball guiding unit 820 includes a box-shaped front case 821 that extends vertically and has a rear side open, a box-shaped rear case 822 that is attached to the rear side of the front case 821 and has a front side open, and a front case 821 and the rear case 822, and a flat partition plate 823 that partitions the front case 821 and the rear case 822. The front and rear ends of the partition plate 823 penetrate the front case 821 and the rear case 822. A rod-shaped shaft member 824 that is attached, and a pair of movable piece member front 825 and a rear piece of the movable piece member that are rotatably attached by the shaft member 824 and are disposed in the front case 821 and the rear case 822, respectively. 826 and a ball breakage detection sensor 827 which is attached in the front case 821 and can detect the rotational position of the pair of movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. To have.

  The front case 821 has a ball guide inlet 821a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that opens at a position to the right of the bottom center in the left-right direction so that the game ball can pass through. 821b, and a ball guide inlet 821a and a ball guide outlet 821b are connected to each other, and a guide passage 821c through which a game ball can flow is provided. The guide passage 821c includes an introduction portion 821d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 821a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the front case 821 from the introduction portion 821d. The detection portion 821e extends straight downward to the vicinity, and the meandering portion 821f extending in a meandering manner from the detection portion 821e with the left and right widths of the front case 821. Further, the front case 821 includes a notch 821g on the right side wall of the detection portion 821e in the guide passage 821c.

  The rear case 822 includes a ball guide inlet 822a that is open at the upper part of the right side so that a game ball can pass therethrough, and a ball guide outlet that is open so that the game ball can pass through at a position to the right of the bottom center in the left-right direction. 822b, a ball guide inlet 822a and a ball guide outlet 822b, and a guide passage 822c through which a game ball can flow. The guide passage 822c includes an introduction portion 822d that extends obliquely from the ball guide entrance 822a to the vicinity of the left end at a small angle with respect to the horizontal, and a center of height along the left side of the rear case 822 from the introduction portion 822d. The detection unit 822e extends straight down to the vicinity, and the meandering unit 822f extends in a meandering manner from the detection unit 822e with the left and right widths of the rear case 822. The rear case 822 includes a notch 822g on the right side wall of the detection unit 822e in the guide passage 822c.

  The rear case 822 is substantially symmetrical to the left and right with respect to the front case 821, and is formed so that the guide passage 821c and the guide passage 822c are aligned in the front-rear direction when assembled in the ball guide unit 820. Yes.

  The shaft member 824 has front and rear ends attached to positions below the upper ends of the notches 821g and 822g in the front case 821 and the rear case 822 and outside the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  The movable piece member front 825 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 825a extending vertically, a shaft hole 825b penetrating forward and backward at the upper end of the right side surface of the movable piece 825a, and the movable piece 825a. An extension portion 825c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 825a at a right angle to the right surface of the movable piece 825a, and connecting the extension portion 825c and the movable piece 825a, extends in a fan shape around the shaft hole 825b. A connecting portion 825d, a weight attaching portion 825e that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d and the upper portion of the connecting portion 825d, and has a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction, and an extending portion 825c A detection piece 825f that extends outward from the right-hand tip and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and a flat extension outward from a position near the movable piece 825a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d. Is provided with a stopper piece 825g, the.

  When the movable piece member front 825 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 825b, the weight attaching portion 825e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 825d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 825b. The movable piece 825a extends obliquely downward from the shaft hole 825b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 825d is inserted into the notch portion 821g of the front case 821, the lower end of the movable piece 825a protrudes into the guiding passage 821c, and the stopper piece 825g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance channel | path 821c (detection part 821e). When the stopper piece 825g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 821c, the lower end of the movable piece 825a is restricted from rotating further in the direction protruding into the guide passage 821c (left direction in front view). Further, when the movable piece member front 825 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 825a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 821c (right direction in the front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 825a becomes the guide passage 821c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 825f in front of the movable piece member 825 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 821c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The movable piece member rear 826 includes a flat plate-like movable piece 826a extending vertically, a shaft hole 826b penetrating forward and rearward at the upper end of the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and a movable piece 826a. The extension portion 826c extending rightward from the upper end of the movable piece 826a at right angles to the right surface of the movable piece 826a, and the extension portion 826c and the movable piece 826a are connected to each other and extend in a fan shape around the shaft hole 826b. A connecting portion 826d, a weight attaching portion 826e having a through hole that protrudes outward from the vicinity of the center of the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d and the upper portion of the extending portion 826c, and a through hole extending in the front-rear direction, The detection piece 826f that extends outward from the right end to the outside and can be detected by the ball breakage detection sensor 827, and extends from the position near the movable piece 826a on the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d to the outside in the form of a flat plate. Is provided with a stopper piece 826g, the.

  When the movable piece member rear 826 passes the shaft member 824 through the shaft hole 826b, the weight attaching portion 826e protruding from the outer periphery of the connecting portion 826d is rotated by its own weight so as to be positioned immediately below the shaft hole 826b. Then, the movable piece 826a extends obliquely downward from the portion of the shaft hole 826b. Therefore, in the assembled state of the ball guiding unit 820, the connecting portion 826d is inserted into the notch 822g of the rear case 822, the lower end of the movable piece 826a protrudes into the guiding passage 822c, and the stopper piece 826g It will be in the state contact | abutted to the outer wall of the guidance path 822c (detection part 822e). When the stopper piece 826g abuts against the outer wall of the guide passage 822c, the lower end of the movable piece 826a is restricted from further rotating in the direction protruding into the guide passage 822c (left direction in front view). Further, when the movable piece member rear 826 rotates the lower end of the movable piece 826a in a direction approaching the wall of the guide passage 822c (right direction in front view), the left side surface of the movable piece 826a is moved to the guide passage 822c. It matches the inner surface. In this state, the detection piece 826f after the movable piece member 826 is in a non-detection state with respect to the ball breakage detection sensor 827. That is, when there is a game ball in the guide passage 822c, the ball break detection sensor 827 is not detected.

  The ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment is supplied with a plurality of game balls arranged in a line in the front and rear directions by the tank rail 803, and the front case 821 and the rear case in a state where the plurality of game balls are arranged in a line. By 822, it is possible to guide to the lower dispensing device 830 in two rows before and after (see FIG. 113). At this time, since the front case 821 and the rear case 822 are partitioned by the partition plate 823, the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c do not interfere with each other and flow well. Can do.

  Further, when the game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c of the ball guide unit 820, the game ball comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, and the movable pieces 825a and 826a are moved. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 rotate in a direction coinciding with the wall surfaces of the guide passages 821c and 822c. Thereby, the detection pieces 825f and 826f before the movable piece member 825 and the detection piece 825f and 826f after the movable piece member 826 are in a non-detection state with respect to the ball break detection sensor 827, and it can be seen that there is a game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c.

  When the game ball is paid out by the payout device 830 on the downstream side of the ball guidance unit 820, the game balls in the guide passages 821c and 822c flow downstream. When a game ball flows through the guide passages 821c and 822c, the momentum of the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is increased, and the game ball flowing through the introduction portions 821d and 822d is movable pieces above the detection portions 821e and 822e. It bounces back to the side of 825a, 826a and comes into contact with the movable pieces 825a, 826a. Since the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate due to the abutment of the game ball, the movable pieces 825a and 826a vibrate between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the notches 821g and 822g of the guide passages 821c and 822c. It is possible to remove dust, dust, etc., and the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be rotated favorably by their own weight or the like.

  In addition, the ball guiding unit 820 detects the game balls flowing through the respective guide passages 821c and 822c by the separate movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826, respectively, and the movable piece member front 825 and Since each of the detection pieces 825f and 826f after the movable piece member 826 is detected by one ball breakage detection sensor 827, when there is no game ball in any of the guide passages 821c and 822c, The movable pieces 825a and 826a of the movable piece member 825 or the movable piece member 826 are rotated so as to protrude into the guide passages 821c and 822c. The Therefore, since it is possible to detect a shortage of the game ball at an early stage, it is possible to quickly replenish the game ball and shorten the time when the game is interrupted as much as possible, thereby reducing the interest of the player. Can be suppressed.

  Further, the weight of the movable piece member front 825, the movable piece member rear 826, and the weight is obtained by screwing and attaching a metal screw as a weight to the weight attaching portions 825e, 826e of the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826. Thus, the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be easily rotated in the direction of protruding into the guide passages 821c and 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust or dirt does not get caught between the lower end of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a problem that the movable pieces 825a and 826a do not rotate.

  As described above, the ball guiding unit 820 of the present embodiment has the movable piece front 825 and the movable pieces 825a and 826a behind the movable piece member 826 projecting into the guide passages 821c and 822c through which the game balls flow due to their own weight. By attaching weights made of metal screws to weight attachment portions 825e, 826e on the opposite side of the surface that comes into contact with the game ball, the movable piece member 825 and the movable piece member rear part 826 are moved according to their own weight and weight weight. The lower end side of 825a, 826a can be easily rotated (projected) into the guide passages 821c, 822c. Further, since the upper ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a are rotatably attached to the outside of the guide passages 821c and 822c, and the lower end side protrudes into the guide passages 821c and 822c, the dust in the guide passages 821c and 822c. And dust do not adhere to the upper and lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, even if the movable pieces 825a and 826a rotate to the wall side of the guide passages 821c and 822c, dust, dust, or the like does not bite between the lower ends of the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the wall. The movable pieces 825a and 826a (the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826) can be prevented from rotating.

  Further, since the metal screw as the weight is screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e formed as the through holes, the weight is not affected even if the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 are rotated frequently. The movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 (the weight attaching portions 825e and 826e) are not detached from each other, and the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be maintained in a good state for a long time. . Moreover, since the weight can be easily attached to the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attachment portions 825e and 826e, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified. The cost associated with the assembly of the pachinko machine 1 can be reduced.

  Further, in the guide passages 821c and 822c, introduction portions 821d and 822d for guiding the game ball toward the movable pieces 825a and 826a are provided on the upstream side of the portion where the movable pieces 825a and 826a protrude inside. Since the game balls flow in the guide passages 821c and 822c, the game balls come into contact with the movable pieces 825a and 826a. Therefore, the movable pieces 825a and 826a can be vibrated by the contact of the game balls. Accordingly, the vibrations of the movable pieces 825a and 826a can remove dust or dirt that is sandwiched or invaded between the movable pieces 825a and 826a and the walls of the guide passages 821c and 822c. The front piece 825 and the rear piece 826 of the movable piece can be favorably rotated.

  Therefore, since the movable piece member front 825 and the movable piece member rear 826 can be rotated well, the state (presence / absence) of the game ball in the guide passages 821c and 822c can be detected reliably, and the game ball It is possible to suppress the occurrence of problems due to erroneous detection or the like. In addition, even if the game balls supplied to the payout device 830 disappear from the guide passages 821c and 822c, the presence or absence of the guide passages 821c and 822c can be reliably detected via the movable pieces 825a and 826a. The game ball can be replenished to the player, and the time at which the game is interrupted can be shortened as much as possible, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the player.

[4-6b. Dispensing device]
A payout device 830 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 101 to 105. The payout device 830 has a box shape with the rear side open, a payout entrance 831a that is open to allow the game ball to pass in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, and an opening that allows the game ball to pass near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout outlet 831b, a ball outlet 831c that is open so that a game ball can pass therethrough in the vicinity of the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout passage 831d through which the payout inlet 831a and the payout outlet 831b communicate with each other. , And a front box 831 having a ball discharge passage 831e which branches from the middle of the payout passage 831d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 831c and through which game balls can flow, and is attached to the rear side of the front box 831. A box-like opening that is open at the front side, a payout entrance 832a that is open to allow the game ball to pass through in the center in the left-right direction on the top surface, and a game ball near the left end in front view on the bottom surface. A payout outlet 832b that is open to allow passage, a ball outlet 832c that is open so that a game ball can pass therethrough in the vicinity of the right end of the front view on the bottom surface, and a payout inlet 832a and a payout outlet 832b that are connected to each other. There is a possible payout path 832d, and a rear box 832 having a ball discharge path 832e that branches from the middle of the payout path 832d and communicates with the ball discharge outlet 832c and through which game balls can flow.

  The payout device 830 is attached to the front side of the front box 831 and has a shallow box-like front cover 833 that is open on the rear side, and is attached to the front box 831 so that the rotary shaft passes through the front box 831. The payout motor 834 extending into the front cover 833, the drive gear 835 attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 834, and the drive gear 835 meshing with the front box 831 and the front cover 833 are rotatable. A spur gear-shaped intermediate gear 836 attached to the intermediate gear 836, a driven gear 837 meshing with the intermediate gear 836, the driven gear 837 penetrates rotatably, the front end is attached to the front cover 833, and the rear A shaft member 838 having an end passing through the front box 831 and attached to the rear box 832, a shaft member 838 passing through the shaft member 838 and rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832. Discharge vanes 839 that are disposed in the passages 831d and 832d and rotate integrally with the driven gear 837, and blade rotation detection sensors 840 that are attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 and detect the rotation of the discharge vanes 839. And.

  Further, the dispensing device 830 is attached between the front box 831 and the rear box 832, and has a flat partition plate 841 that partitions the dispensing path 831 d of the front box 831 and the dispensing path 832 d of the rear box 832, and the front box 831. And a rear box 832, a payout detection sensor 842 that detects a game ball discharged by the rotation of the payout vane 839 and discharged from the payout outlets 831 b and 832 b, payout passages 831 d and 832 d, and a ball discharge passage 831e and 832e are pivotally attached by a front box 831 and a rear box 832 at a portion where the ball extraction passage 831e and 832e can be closed. A ball removal lever 844 that is slidably attached to the upper part of the right side of the box 832 in a front view so that the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated or cannot be rotated; It is equipped with a.

  The payout passage 831d of the front box 831 extends obliquely to the lower right as viewed from the front so as to go from the payout inlet 831a to the ball outlet 831c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It bends so as to extend vertically and bends substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 of the left and right widths of the front box 831 from the left end. It is bent in a crank shape so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 831b at a height of about 1/4 from the bottom with respect to the total height of the front box 831, and extends vertically to the payout outlet 831b. Dispensing vanes 839 are arranged in the portion of the dispensing passage 831d that is bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball removal passage 831e further extends a portion extending obliquely from the discharge inlet 831a to the lower right in the discharge passage 831d, and is about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the front box 831. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the front box 831 is formed at the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 831f that protrudes rearward in a portion extending vertically toward the payout outlet 831b in the payout passage 831d. And a lever attachment portion 831g for attaching the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 extends obliquely to the lower right in front view so as to go from the payout inlet 832a to the ball outlet 832c, and is downward at a height of about 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It bends so as to extend vertically to the left, and is bent so as to extend substantially horizontally to the left near the center of the total height, and then extends vertically downward again at about 1/3 from the left end with respect to the left and right widths of the rear box 832. It is bent in a crank shape and extends vertically to the payout outlet 832b so as to be positioned immediately above the payout outlet 832b at a height of about 1/4 of the total height of the rear box 832. Dispensing blades 839 are arranged at portions of the dispensing passage 832d that are bent in a crank shape.

  On the other hand, the ball discharge passage 832e further extends a portion of the discharge passage 832d that obliquely extends from the discharge inlet 832a to the lower right, and is approximately 1/3 from the upper surface with respect to the total height of the rear box 832. It branches off to the height near the center.

  Further, the rear box 832 is formed on the upper part of the right side surface when viewed from the front, and a guide shelf 832f that protrudes forward as it goes downward in a portion that extends vertically toward the payout outlet 832b in the payout passage 832d. And a lever attachment portion 832g for attaching the ball release lever 844 so as to be slidable up and down.

  The discharge passages 831d and 832d and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 are formed in the same shape. The payout passages 831d and 832d are partitioned by a partition plate 841 up to the upstream side of the portion where the payout vanes 839 are arranged. Further, a payout detection sensor 842 is attached between the guide shelves 831f and 832f and the payout outlets 831b and 832b. That is, the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 831d of the front box 831 and the game balls that have circulated through the payout passage 832d of the rear box 832 are moved back and forth between the front box 831 and the rear box 832 by the respective guide shelves 831f and 832f. It is brought close to the boundary and detected by one payout detection sensor 842.

  The driven gear 837 is a spur gear-like gear portion 837a meshing with the intermediate gear 836, and projects radially from the rear surface of the gear portion 837a at an angular interval of 60 degrees, and can be detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 840. A plurality of detection pieces 837b, and a connecting portion 837c that protrudes in a cylindrical shape from the center of the gear portion 837a to the rear and has an unevenness on the peripheral surface of the rear end and can be connected to the discharge vane 839. .

  The discharge vane 839 extends in a cylindrical shape in the front and rear direction, and protrudes in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a at a constant interval from the front end of the base cylinder portion 839a. The plurality of (three) front blades 839b and the front blades 839b from the rear end of the base tube portion 839a are alternately projected in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the base tube portion 839a at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. 3) Rear blade 839c and a connected portion that protrudes forward from the front end of the base cylindrical portion 839a in a cylindrical shape and that has concavities and convexities that can be connected to the connecting portion 837c of the driven gear 837 on the peripheral surface of the front end. 839d.

  Three front blades 839b and three rear blades 839c of the discharge blade 839 are provided at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the rear blades 839c are arranged around the front blades 839b so as to be staggered. It is offset outward at an angle of 60 degrees in the direction and extends outward. The payout blade 839 of the present embodiment is connected by a circular arc that is recessed toward the center between the three front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), and the diameter of the circular arc is the same as or slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball. Thereby, between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c), a ball housing portion 839e capable of housing only one game ball is formed.

  Further, the three front blades 839b and the rear blades 839c are formed such that the outer diameter D1 of the base cylinder portion 839a is 1 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In addition, the diameter D2 centered on the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a up to the position closest to the axis of the base cylinder portion 839a in the arc portion (sphere receiving portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (rear blade 839c) Is formed about 0.3 to 0.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball. That is, the depth [(diameter D1−diameter D2) / 2] from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c to the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e is 0.1-0. It is supposed to be 4 times.

  Therefore, it is possible to hold about 3/10 (between 1/4 and 1/3) of the outer periphery of the game ball by the arc portion (the ball housing portion 839e) between the front blades 839b (the rear blades 839c). it can. In other words, a depth of about 1/5 (1/7 to 1/4) of the outer diameter of the game ball can be accommodated. Thereby, the game balls in the payout passages 831d and 832d can be quickly accommodated between the front blades 839b (rear blades 839c) (the ball housing portion 839e).

  With the dispensing blade 839 of the present embodiment, the front blade 839b is located in the dispensing passage 831d of the front box 831 and the rear blade 839c is located in the dispensing passage 832d of the rear box 832 with the dispensing device 830 assembled. The game balls in the payout paths 831d and 832d can be paid out, respectively. In addition, the payout blade 839 is disposed in a portion bent in a crank shape below the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832 in the payout passages 831d and 832d. Specifically, in the payout passages 831d and 832d, the center of rotation of the payout vane 839 is located immediately below a portion extending vertically downward from near the center of the total height of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the portion of the discharge passages 831d and 832d bent in a crank shape, the wall (inner wall) on the side far from the discharge blade 839 is centered on the rotation center of the discharge blade 839, and from the outer periphery of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c. It is formed in a circular arc shape separated by a distance S smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the distance S is 0.7 to 0.9 times the outer diameter of the game ball. In other words, the distance from the most recessed portion of the ball housing portion 839e to the arc-shaped portions of the payout passages 831d and 832d is 1.03 to 1.1 times the outer diameter of the game ball. .

  As a result, when the game ball flowing down on the payout vane 839 comes into contact with the outer peripheries of the front vane 839b and the rear vane 839c, the payout device 830 passes through the bent portion of the payout passages 831d and 832d in a crank shape. Cannot be discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b. On the other hand, when the game ball is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e, the game ball moves along with the rotation of the dispensing vane 839, and can pass through the portion bent in the crank shape of the dispensing passages 831d and 832d, and from the dispensing outlets 831b and 832b Released downwards.

  In the payout device 830, the diameter D1 of the front blade 839b and the rear blade 839c is about 1.2 to 1.4 times the outer diameter of the game ball, and the ball housing portion 839e has a diameter 1 of the game ball. Since the depth of / 7 to ¼ is accommodated, the time required to accommodate the game ball can be shortened while reducing the outer diameter of the payout vane 839 as much as possible. Thereby, even if the payout blade 839 is rotated rapidly, the game ball can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 839e and sent to the payout outlets 831b and 832b. Accordingly, the number of game balls to be paid out per unit time can be increased as compared with the conventional case, and the time required for paying out game balls can be shortened.

  The ball-removable movable piece 843 extends in a plate shape in the vertical and front / rear direction, and a lower portion is bent to form a body shape in a front view, and extends in a cylindrical shape in the front / rear direction at the upper end of the main body portion 843a. A shaft tube portion 843b whose both ends are rotatably attached to the front box 831 and the rear box 832 respectively, a projecting portion 843c projecting from the upper portion of the outer side surface of the main body portion 843a, and a main body portion 843a. A weight attaching portion 843d (see FIG. 105) including a through-hole penetrating in the front-rear direction in a lower portion bent in a square shape.

  In the state where the dispensing device 830 is assembled, the ball removal movable piece 843 is oriented so that the lower portion of the main body portion 843a extends obliquely to the lower left when viewed from the front, and the upper cylindrical tube portion 843b is disposed to eject the front box 831 and the rear box 832. In the passages 831d and 832d, it is possible to turn at a position that extends obliquely from the pay-out entrances 831a and 832a to the lower right in the front view, and slightly outside the wall on the right in the front view that is slightly above the part that bends downward. Installed on.

  In the normal state, the payout device 830 of the present embodiment is configured such that the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward, and the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 contacts the protrusion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843 from the right side in front view. It touches. As a result, the ball removal movable piece 843 is restricted from turning counterclockwise when viewed from the front (see FIG. 105A).

  In this normal state, in the main body portion 843a bent in the shape of a square of the ball extraction movable piece 843, the upper side extends vertically from the bent portion, and the lower side of the bent portion is diagonally lower left in front view. It extends to. And the lower end of the main-body part 843a is located in the vicinity of the site | part which the payout channel | paths 831d and 832d and the ball extraction channel | paths 831e and 832e branch. Therefore, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed by the ball removal movable piece 843 (main body portion 843a), and the surface facing the left side of the main body portion 843a forms a part of the wall of the discharge passages 831d and 832d. doing.

  The ball removal movable piece 843 of the present embodiment is formed such that, in a normal state, the center of gravity of the ball removal movable piece 843 is located on the left side of the vertical line passing through the center of the shaft tube portion 843b. Although a force to rotate counterclockwise as viewed from the front acts on the anti-clockwise rotation by the ball removal lever 844, the normal state is maintained.

  When the ball removal lever 844 is slid upward from the normal state, the lower portion of the ball removal lever 844 moves away from the protrusion 843c of the ball removal movable piece 843, and the ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Movement restrictions are lifted. Accordingly, the ball removal movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise by its own weight so that the center of gravity is located immediately below the shaft cylinder portion 843b. The ball removal movable piece 843 rotates counterclockwise until the lower right side surface of the main body portion 843a contacts the left surface of the member forming the right side surface of the front box 831 and the rear box 832. (See FIG. 105 (b)). Accordingly, the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are opened, and the game ball that has entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a comes into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843 in the middle of the payout passages 831d and 832d. The ball removal movable piece 843 is rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the front to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, and flows through the opened ball removal passages 831e and 832e and is released downward from the ball removal outlets 831c and 832c. The Rukoto.

  In the present embodiment, since the ball removal movable piece 843 includes the weight attachment portion 843d, the ball attachment lever 844d is slid upward by screwing and attaching a weight made of a metal screw to the weight attachment portion 843d. Thus, when the restriction of the counterclockwise rotation in front view is released, the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 protrudes into the ball removal passages 831e and 832e due to the weight of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the weight of the weight. It is possible to facilitate rotation in a direction (counterclockwise in a front view).

  Further, in a normal state where the ball removal lever 844 is slid downward to close the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, a game ball that has entered from the payout inlets 831a and 832a enters the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Since the contact is made, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be vibrated by the contact of the game ball. Accordingly, dust or dirt sandwiched or invaded between the lower end of the ball removal movable piece 843 and the inner surfaces of the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be removed by the vibration of the ball removal movable piece 843. It is possible to prevent the ball removal movable piece 843 from becoming unable to rotate by biting or dust.

  Further, since a metal screw as a weight can be screwed into and attached to the weight attaching portion 843d that is a through hole, the weight is removed from the ball-moving movable piece 843 even if the ball-moving movable piece 843 rotates frequently. The ball removal movable piece 843 can be maintained in a good state over a long period of time without being disengaged from the (weight attaching portion 843d). Further, since the weight can be easily attached to the ball removing movable piece 843 simply by screwing the metal screw into the weight attaching portion 843d, the labor for attaching the weight can be simplified, and the pachinko machine 1 can be assembled. The cost which concerns on can be reduced.

  By the way, if the ball removal passages 831e and 832e are closed for a long time by the ball removal movable piece 843, fine dust adheres to the rotation shaft of the ball removal movable piece 843 or the rotation shaft rusts, and the ball The extraction movable piece 843 may become difficult to rotate. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the game balls that have entered from the payout entrances 831a and 832a are brought into contact with the main body portion 843a of the ball removal movable piece 843. Therefore, the ball removal passage 831e is formed by the ball removal movable piece 843. , 832e from the closed state, when the ball release lever 844 for releasing the closure is slid upward to release the lock, the game ball comes into contact with the ball release movable piece 843, so that the impact of the contact The ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated, and the ball removal passages 831e and 832e can be reliably opened.

  Therefore, when the ball removal lever 844 is operated to open the ball removal passages 831e and 832e, the ball removal movable piece 843 can be rotated favorably, so that the game ball can be removed with certainty. The workability during maintenance and the like can be improved.

[4-6c. Upper full ball path unit]
The upper full ball path unit 850 of the payout unit 800 in this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to a position below the dispensing device 830 in the dispensing unit base 801. The upper full ball path unit 850 is attached to the dispensing unit base 801 and has a box-shaped upper full base 851 whose rear side is opened, and is attached to the rear side of the upper full base 851 and has its front side opened. A box-shaped upper full tank cover 852 and a discharge device pressing member 853 which is rotatably attached to the rear side of the upper full cover 852 and can press the discharge device 830 upward are provided.

  Further, the upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper payout ball receiving port 850a that is open upward so that a game ball can pass through from the left and right center to the left when viewed from the front, and the right and left from the center when viewed from the front and from the center. Is formed between the upper full base 851 and the upper full cover 852 which are opened upward so that game balls can pass therethrough and received by the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. An upper sphere storage passage 850c having a predetermined size for the game balls to circulate, a normal discharge port 850d opened downward at a position immediately below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c, and an upper sphere storage A full tank discharge port 850e opening downward at a portion excluding the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the passage 850c, a normal discharge port 850d and a full tank discharge port 850e And a, and a partition piece 850f, which partitions the lower portion into left and right in the upper sphere reservoir passage 850c protrudes upward from between.

  The upper full ball path unit 850 includes an upper ball passage 850g that guides a game ball that has entered from the upper ball removal inlet 850b downward, and an upper portion that opens downward at the lower end of the upper ball removal passage 850g. A ball outlet 850h. The upper full sphere path unit 850 has a normal discharge port 850d, a full tank discharge port 850e, and an upper ball discharge outlet 850h arranged in order from the left side when viewed from the front and opened downward. The upper full ball path unit 850 includes a back cover attachment portion 854 for attaching the back cover 980 to the right end of the upper full base 851.

  When the upper full ball path unit 850 is assembled to the payout unit 800, the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is located immediately below the payout outlets 831b and 832b of the payout device 830, and the upper ball discharge inlet 850b. However, it is located directly under the ball outlets 831c and 832c of the dispensing device 830. Further, the upper full sphere path unit 850 is assembled in the dispensing unit 800, and the normal discharge port 850d, the full tank discharge port 850e, and the upper ball discharge outlet 850h are the normal guide path of the lower full sphere path unit 860. 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball-out guide path 865 are respectively opened immediately above the rear end openings (see FIG. 113).

  In the upper full ball path unit 850, the game balls that have been paid out by the payout device 830 and discharged downward from the payout outlets 831b and 832b enter the upper ball storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. In a state where the normal discharge port 850d at the lower end of the upper sphere storage passage 850c is not closed, a game ball that has entered the upper sphere storage passage 850c from the upper payout ball receiving port 850a is opened directly below the upper payout ball receiving port 850a. The normal discharge port 850d is discharged.

  When the inside of the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls, the game balls cannot be stored, and when the normal guide path 861 of the lower full ball path unit 860 is filled with game balls, the normal release is performed. The outlet 850d is closed. In this state, when a game ball enters the upper ball storage passage 850c, it is stored above the normal discharge port 850d. Then, when the amount of the game ball stored on the upper side of the normal discharge port 850d becomes higher than that of the partition piece 850f, the game ball newly entering the upper ball storage passage 850c gets over the partition piece 850f and becomes full. It will be discharged downward from the tank discharge port 850e, and will be sent to the lower plate 322 through the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860.

  As described above, the upper full sphere path unit 850 automatically drops the game balls paid out from the payout device 830 from the upper plate 321 according to the storage amount of the game balls in the upper plate 321 in the door frame 3. It can be distributed to the dish 322.

[4-6d. Lower full ball path unit]
The lower full sphere path unit 860 of the payout unit 800 in the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 860 is attached to the lower side of the upper full path path unit 850 in the payout unit base 801. The lower full-ball path unit 860 guides the game balls released from the normal discharge port 850d of the upper full-ball path unit 850 forward and guides the game balls from the front end to the through-ball path 273 of the door frame 3. A full tank guide path 862 that guides the game ball released from the full tank discharge port 850e of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward and guides the game ball from the front end to the full tank reception port 274 of the door frame 3; A guideway opening / closing door 863 that opens and closes the front end openings of the guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 according to the opening / closing of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal path 861 and the full tank guideway 862. And a closing spring 864 biasing in a direction to close the front end opening.

  Further, the lower full ball path unit 860 guides the game ball released from the upper ball exit 850h of the upper full ball path unit 850 forward, and moves on the board unit base 910 of the board unit 900 from the center right end in the front-rear direction. And a lower ball extraction guide path 865 for discharging to the bottom.

  In the lower full ball path unit 860, a normal guide path 861, a full tank guide path 862, and a lower ball guide path 865 are arranged in order from the left side to the right side in a front view. The normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 have rear ends that open upward. The normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 have a width in which a plurality of game balls are arranged on the left and right sides, and extend forward to the vicinity of the front end of the main body frame 4 so that the front end side is lowered. Further, the full tank guide path 862 extends forward at a position lower than the normal guide path 861. As shown in the drawing, the normal guiding path 861, the full tank guiding path 862, and the lower ball guiding path 865 are formed by an upper case 866 and a lower case 867 that can be divided vertically.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is rotatably attached to a portion between the normal guideway 861 and the full guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867 and is rotated clockwise by a closing spring 864. It is energized. More specifically, a full tank guide path 862 that opens to the right of the front end opening of the normal guide path 861 in front view at the front end of the lower full sphere path unit 860 is one game for the normal guide path 861. It is placed at a position lower by the height of the sphere. The guideway opening / closing door 863 is attached to the lower side of the normal guideway 861 and to the left side of the full tank guideway 862 so as to be rotatable about an axis extending in the front-rear direction.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 includes a disk-like base portion 863a that is rotatably mounted, a first door plate portion 863b that extends obliquely from the base portion 863a to the upper left side and that can close the front end opening of the normal guideway 861. A second door plate portion 863c extending rightward from the base portion 863a and closing the front end opening of the full guide path 862, and an extending portion 863d extending from the base portion 863a obliquely to the lower left side in a flat plate shape. And an operating protrusion 863e that protrudes forward from the front surface of the distal end of the extending portion 863d and that can contact the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3.

  Here, closing the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 means that it is not necessary to seal the openings, and it is sufficient that the game ball cannot pass. The operating protrusion 863e is formed in a short arc shape with the base 863a as the center when viewed from the front, and the front end surface is inclined so as to protrude forward as it approaches the end in the counterclockwise direction. doing.

  The guideway opening / closing door 863 is urged clockwise by a closing spring 864, and the second door plate portion 863 c is located from below the front end opening of the full tank guideway 862 at the front end of the lower case 867. By contacting the boss portion 867a protruding forward, the clockwise rotation is restricted.

  In the lower full tank path unit 860 of the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, and the front end of the lower full tank path unit 860 is a through ball passage 273, a full tank receiving port 274, and a door opening / closing door in the foul cover unit 270 of the door frame 3. It is attached at a position facing the contact portion 281 (see FIG. 112). Since the guide path opening / closing door 863 is not in contact with the operating protrusion 863e when the door frame 3 is open with respect to the main body frame 4, the guide path opening / closing door 863 is biased by the closing spring 864. Thus, the second door plate portion 863c is stopped in a state where the second door plate portion 863c is in contact with the boss portion 867a of the lower case 867. In this state, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c are positioned in front of the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, and close the front end openings (FIG. 111). (See (a)). Accordingly, in this state, the game balls in the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 cannot move forward from the front end opening. Game balls will not spill from the road 862.

  When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the door opening / closing contact portion 281 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 comes into contact with the front end surface of the operation protrusion 863 e of the guide path opening / closing door 863, thereby operating the door frame 3. Due to the inclination of the front end surface of the protrusion 863e, a force acts to rotate the guide path opening / closing door 863 in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 864. As a result, the first door plate portion 863b and the second door plate portion 863c, which have closed the front end openings of the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862, rotate in a direction away from the front end opening, and the normal guide path 861 In addition, the front end opening of the full tank guide path 862 is opened (see FIG. 111B). In this state, as shown in the figure, the first door plate portion 863b is positioned below the front end opening of the normal guide passage 861, and the second door plate portion 863c is positioned above the front end opening of the full tank guide passage 862. .

  In the state where the front end openings of the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are opened, the door frame 3 is completely closed with respect to the main body frame 4, and the normal guiding path 861 and the full tank guiding path 862 are filled. The through-ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 of the foul cover unit 270 in the door frame 3 are located on the front side of the front end opening of the guide path 862, and the normal guide path 861 and the full tank guide path 862 are penetrated from the side. A game ball can be delivered to the ball passage 273 and the full tank receiving port 274 side.

  In this way, the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made different in the vertical direction, and the front end openings of the normal guideway 861 and the full tank guideway 862 are made by turning the guideway opening / closing door 863. Since opening and closing is performed, the operation range of the guideway opening / closing door 863 can be made as narrow as possible, and the opening / closing mechanism of the normal guideway 861 and the full-way guideway 862 can be downsized. Therefore, the space for other members can be relatively widened, and the internal space of the pachinko machine 1 can be used more effectively.

  The payout unit 800 of the present embodiment has more game balls from the payout device 830 in a state where the upper plate 321 of the door frame 3 is filled with game balls and the game balls cannot be released to the upper plate 321. Is paid out, the game balls can be stored until the inside of the normal guiding path 861 of the lower full tank path unit 860 is filled with game balls. When a game ball is further paid out from the payout device 830 in a state where the normal guiding path 861 is full of game balls, the game ball is normally released in the upper ball storage passage 850c of the upper full ball path unit 850. If it stays above the outlet 850d and exceeds the partition piece 850f, it will circulate to the full tank outlet 850e side, and the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full ball path unit 860 from the full tank outlet 850e, The payout of game balls through the foul cover unit 270 to the lower plate 322 is automatically switched. Thereafter, when the game balls are further paid out from the payout device 830 and the lower plate 322 is filled with the game balls in addition to the upper plate 321, the foul cover unit 270 is not able to supply the game balls to the lower plate 322. A game ball is stored in the storage passage 277. When the movable piece 278 is rotated by the storage of the game ball in the storage passage 277 and detected by the full tank detection sensor 279, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are full of game balls. And the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 is temporarily stopped until the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279 is released.

  Note that the stop of the game ball payout by the payout device 830 with respect to the detection of the movable piece 278 by the full tank detection sensor 279, for example, the game ball is stored until the movable piece 278 is detected in the storage passage 277 of the foul cover unit 270. In such a state, it is possible to fill the upstream storage passage 277, the full tank guide path 862 of the lower full sphere path unit 860, and the upper sphere storage path 850c of the upper full tank path unit 850. When the game ball is paid out, the payout of the game ball by the payout device 830 may be stopped. As a result, more game balls can be stored than in conventional pachinko machines, so that in a game state in which a large number of game balls are paid out, such as in a big hit game state, the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322 are obtained by paying out the game balls. It is possible to reduce the need to worry about being filled with game balls, and to entertain the player by focusing on the big hit gaming state.

[4-7. Substrate unit]
The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 94. The board unit 900 of the main body frame 4 includes a board unit base 910 that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600, and a speaker for bass that is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 600 on the left side when viewed from the front of the board unit base 910. A speaker unit 920 having 921, a power supply board box 930 that is attached to the right side of the front view on the rear side of the board unit base 910 and accommodates a power supply board therein, and is attached to the rear side of the speaker unit 920. The interface control board box 940 in which the interface control board is housed, and the payout control board 951 that is mounted across the power supply board box 930 and the interface control board box 940 and controls the payout of the game ball is housed inside. A payout control board box 950 .

  The board unit 900 includes a door frame relay board 911 attached to the front face of the board unit base 910 so as to face forward from the connection opening 606 of the main body frame base 600. This door frame relay board 911 relays the connection between the payout control board 951, the main control board 1310, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the door body relay board attached to the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3. Is for. The payout device 830 is controlled by the payout control board 951 housed in the payout control board box 950.

[5. Overall configuration of game board]
Next, the overall configuration of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 119 and the like. FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board 5. FIG. 115 is a diagram illustrating a path through which game balls are distributed by the distribution member 2011. FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating the flow of game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011. FIGS. 117 and 118 are distribution to the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011. It is a figure explaining the flow of the played game ball. FIG. 119 is an explanatory view showing, in an enlarged manner, a portion of the function display unit in a state where the game board is attached to the pachinko machine.

  The game board 5 has a game area 5a in which a game ball is driven when the player operates the handle 302 of the handle unit 300. In addition, the game board 5 has a front component member 1000 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has an outer shape that is substantially rectangular when viewed from the front, and is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000. A board-like gaming panel 1100 to be partitioned, a substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the gaming panel 1100, and a game ball attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 by driving a game ball into the gaming area 5a. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 for controlling the game content. A plurality of obstacle nails that come into contact with the game ball are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) in a portion that is in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 that is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel A peripheral control unit attached to the rear side of 1100, and a game board side effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image. ing. A game board side effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the game board 5, and a peripheral control unit is attached to the rear surface of the game board side effect display device 1600.

  The gaming panel 1100 is formed so that the outer periphery is slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and holds the outer periphery of the transparent flat panel panel 1110 and the panel plate 1110. And a frame-like panel holder to which a rear unit is attached on the rear surface. The back unit is attached to the rear side of the panel holder and is attached to the rear side of the back box with a square opening on the rear wall. The display device 1600 is configured to include a lock mechanism for detachably attaching the display device 1600.

  As shown in FIG. 114, a game board side effect display device 1600 having a liquid crystal display type display area is disposed in the approximate center of the game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1. In the game board side effect display device 1600, a variation game is performed in which a plurality of types of decorative symbols respectively included in a plurality of symbol rows (three rows in the present embodiment) are variably displayed and executed in association with the variation game. Various display effects are displayed as images.

  As will be described later, the function display unit 1400 provided at the lower left of the game board 5 includes a first special symbol display 1403 including eight LEDs, a second special symbol display 1405 including eight LEDs, and the like. Has been. In the first special symbol display unit 1403 and the second special symbol display unit 1405, symbol variation is performed in which the special symbol is varied and displayed. The special symbol is a notification symbol indicating a result of determination of whether or not big hit or small hit (big hit determination). In the present embodiment, the variation game using the decorative symbol is stopped after the symbol variation for displaying the special symbol on the first special symbol display unit 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405 is started. Is executed as a single game. Hereinafter, the symbol variation performed by the first special symbol display unit 1403 may be referred to as “first side symbol variation”, and the symbol variation performed by the second special symbol display unit 1405 is denoted as “second side symbol variation”. Sometimes.

  In the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when the symbol variation is started, the jackpot determination using any of the special symbols from among a plurality of types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. Is to be selected. Then, when the big hit determination using the special symbol on the selected side is performed, the control for starting the symbol variation on the symbol display corresponding to the special symbol on the selected side based on the result of the big hit determination is performed. Is performed (main control board 1310). In the symbol variation started in this way, after maintaining the variation state for the variation time selected based on the result of the big hit determination, the big hit symbol (big hit display result), which is a special symbol stop mode that can recognize the big hit, Either a small symbol (small hit display result), which is a special symbol stop mode capable of recognizing a hit, or a special symbol stop mode (missed display result), which is a special symbol stop mode, capable of recognizing a loss. By being stopped, the player can recognize whether he / she has won a big hit, a small win or a lost game. In the case where the game is stopped in such a way that a jackpot symbol appears, a jackpot game that allows the player to acquire a prize ball is awarded. Further, when the game is stopped in a form where a small hit symbol appears, a small hit game in which a player can obtain a prize ball is awarded.

  On the other hand, the game board side effect display device 1600 is configured with a display area larger than each of the symbol displays 1403 and 1405, and each of the plurality of symbol rows (three rows in the present embodiment) in the display region. A plurality of types of decorative symbols (a plurality of types of numbers) included are displayed larger than the special symbols.

  The game board side effect display device 1600 displays display results corresponding to the display results of the symbol displays 1403 and 1405. More specifically, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1403 or the second special symbol display unit 1405, the game board side effect display device 1600 also displays a special symbol combination (all rows). In the case where a symbol combination (such as a symbol combination having the same symbol) is confirmed and stopped and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 1403 or the second special symbol indicator 1405, the game board side effect display device Also in 1600, a special symbol combination different from the big hit (such as a symbol combination in which all the symbols in the same row are the same symbol) is displayed in a fixed stop state, and the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 is shifted. When the symbols are stopped and displayed, the game board side effect display device 1600 also has a symbol combination at the time of losing (the symbols in all rows do not become the same symbol). Such as pattern combination) is determined stopped and displayed. Accordingly, the player can more easily recognize whether the player has won a big hit, won a small hit, or has lost (losed) by confirming a variable game performed on the game board side effect display device 1600. Will be able to.

  Further, in the game board side effect display device 1600, the display of variation of the decorative symbols is stopped in the order of left column → right column → middle column as viewed from the player side, and two specific columns (in this embodiment) When the same decorative design is temporarily stopped and displayed in the two left and right columns), a reach state is formed. In the present embodiment, among the plurality of symbol columns, the left column is the first stop column, the right column is the second stop column, the middle column is the third stop column, and the left and right columns form a reach state. It becomes.

  Here, “temporary stop display” can appear during a period when the special symbol is maintained in the fluctuating state on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405. This is a state in which a specific decorative design is displayed in a swinging fluctuation state within the display area of the effect display device 1600. On the other hand, “definite stop display” can appear when the special symbol is stopped on the first special symbol display 1403 or the second special symbol display 1405 or after that, and is displayed on the game board side. In the display area of the effect display device 1600, any decorative symbol does not fluctuate and is stopped.

  Although this will also be described later, the function display unit 1400 further includes a first LED including two LEDs for displaying the number of holdings relating to the reception of game balls in the first left starting port 2002a and the first right starting port 2002b. Due to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003, the special hold number display 1404, the second special hold number display 1406 composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of hold for receiving the game ball to the second start port 2004, A normal symbol display 1402 including four LEDs for displaying the normal determination result to be determined, and a normal hold display 1408 including two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the passage of the game ball with respect to the gate unit 2003 are provided. ing.

  Here, the first special reserved number display unit 1404 notifies the player of the number of jackpot determination stored on the first special symbol side that is held in an unexecuted state (hereinafter also referred to as the first reserved stored number). To do. The first reserved memory number is incremented by “1” when a game ball wins the first left starting port 2002a and the first right starting port 2002b arranged on the game board 5, while the first side symbol variation is increased. By starting, “1” is subtracted. Accordingly, when a game ball is received in the first start port 2002 within the period in which the first side symbol variation is performed, the first reserved memory number is further added and a predetermined upper limit number (first upper limit number, In this embodiment, "4") is accumulated.

  Further, the second special reserved number display 1406 notifies the player of the number of jackpot determination stored on the second special symbol side that is held in an unexecuted state (hereinafter also referred to as the second reserved stored number). Is. The second reserved memory number is incremented by “1” when a game ball wins the second starting port 2004 arranged on the game board 5, while “1” by starting the second side symbol variation. Subtracted. Therefore, when a game ball is received in the second start port 2004 within the period when the second side symbol variation is performed, the second reserved memory number is further added and a predetermined upper limit number (second upper limit number, In this embodiment, "4") is accumulated.

  Further, in the normal symbol display 1402, when it is determined whether or not it is a normal hit (normal determination), normal symbol variation is performed to vary a plurality of types of normal symbols based on the result of the normal determination. The normal symbol variation is a normal hit symbol (ordinary hit display result) which is a normal symbol stop mode capable of recognizing the normal hit after maintaining the fluctuation state for the fluctuation time selected based on the result of the normal judgment, Normally, the player is stopped in the form of one of the normal symbols that can be recognized as a normal symbol (the result of the error display). You will be able to recognize what happened. In addition, when it stops in the form which a normal winning symbol appears, the below-mentioned normal electric prize winning opening 2011 is made into an open state.

  Further, the normal hold indicator 1408 notifies the player of the number of storages of normal determination that are held in an unexecuted state (hereinafter also referred to as a general hold storage number). The number of stored general symbols is incremented by “1” when a game ball is received by the gate unit 2003 arranged on the game board 5, and is subtracted by “1” when normal symbol variation is started. Therefore, when a game ball is accepted by the gate unit 2003 within a period in which the normal symbol variation is performed, the number of the common figure holding memory is further added and a predetermined upper limit number (the common figure upper limit number, in the present embodiment). "4") is accumulated.

  In the present embodiment, the first side symbol variation and the second side symbol variation are not executed simultaneously, and the symbol variation using the special symbol (first side symbol variation or second side symbol variation). If the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are both equal to or greater than “1”, the second side symbol variation based on the second reserved memory number is executed with priority. In the present embodiment, the symbol variation using the special symbol (the first side symbol variation or the second side symbol variation) and the normal symbol variation can be executed simultaneously.

[5-1. Game board configuration]
Hereinafter, the board surface configuration of the game board will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116.
As shown in FIG. 114, a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is provided at a substantially central portion of the game area 5a in the game board 5. Further, in the area below the center role 2500 in the game area 5a, a first left start port 2002a in which a game ball driven into the left side of the center role 2500 can be received, and a lowermost end of the game area 5a And an out port 1003 for collecting the game balls that have flowed down to and discharging them from the game area 5a.

  Here, the first left starting port 2002a is open at the top, and can always receive a game ball that has been driven into the left side of the center accessory 2500. The first left starting port 2002a is disposed at a substantially central position in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and immediately below the central portion of the stage 2530 in the center accessory 2500, and the game ball released from the central portion of the stage 2530 Can be accepted with high probability. The first left start opening 2002a is provided with a first left start opening sensor 4002a for detecting an accepted game ball.

  Further, in the area on the right side of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a, a distribution member 2011 that alternately distributes the game balls that are driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500 into the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, The first right start port 2002b and the second start port 2004 that can receive the game balls that are driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 and the game balls that are driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 are allowed to pass. A gate portion 2003 is provided. In addition, in the game area 5a, the area on the lower right side of the center bonus 2500 has a general winning port 2001, a first grand prize winning port 2005, and a second winning hole through which a game ball driven to the right of the center bonus 2500 can pass. Two major winning openings 2005b are provided.

  As will be described in detail later, the distribution member 2011 is a member that alternately distributes the game balls that have been driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 into the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014. As for 2002b, the game ball distributed to the 1st channel | path 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 can be received. Similarly, game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2022 can pass through the gate portion 2003. On the other hand, the second start port 2004 is capable of receiving game balls distributed to the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011. The general winning opening 2001, the first grand winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2005b can accept game balls distributed to either the first passage 2012 or the second passage 2014 by the sorting member 2011. It is said that.

  In addition, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement (not shown) at a predetermined portion in the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100. There are obstacles around the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 provided in the right region of the object 2500, that is, around the gate portion 2003, the first right starting port 2002b, the second starting port 2004, and the second big winning port 20052005b. Nail is not planted.

[5-1-1. About sorting members]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, a description will be given of the sorting member 2011 that alternately distributes the game balls that have been driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 into the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014.
As shown in FIG. 115, the sorting member 2011 has two recesses each capable of holding a game ball, and the game ball is distributed to the first passage 2012 (see FIG. 115A). ) And a position (position shown in FIG. 115C) at which the game balls are distributed to the second passage 2014.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 115 (A), when the left concave portion of the sorting member 2011 is directed upward, the game ball that has been driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 fits into the concave portion. Get stuck. As shown in FIG. 115 (B), the game ball fitted into the left recess of the distribution member 2011 is rotated leftward by the weight of the game ball, and the first passage 2012 is rotated. It will be released to the side of. At this time, the concave portion on the right side of the sorting member 2011 is directed upward.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 115 (C), when the right concave portion of the sorting member 2011 is directed upward, the game ball that has been driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 fits into the concave portion. Include. As shown in FIG. 115 (D), the game ball fitted in the right concave portion of the distribution member 2011 is rotated rightward by the weight of the game ball, and the second passage entrance It will be discharged to the side of 2013 (second passage 2014). At this time, the left concave portion of the sorting member 2011 is directed upward.

  As described above, after the game balls that have been driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 are distributed to the first passage 2012 side, the next game balls are distributed to the second passage 2014 side. After the game balls that have been driven into the left side of 2500 are distributed to the second passage 2014 side, the next game balls are distributed to the first passage 2012 side. That is, when a game ball is thrown into the right side of the center accessory 2500, it is surely distributed alternately to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, and one of the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 is arranged. A plurality of game balls are not continuously distributed to the side.

[5-1-2. About the flow of game balls in the first passage and the second passage]
Next, the flow of game balls distributed by the distribution member 2011 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 116 is a diagram illustrating the flow of game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011. FIGS. 117 and 118 are distribution to the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011. It is a figure explaining the flow of the played game ball.

  First, the game ball that is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 passes through the right region entry sensor 4006 before reaching the sorting member 2011. As described above, the right region entry sensor 4006 is provided as a sensor for detecting that the game ball has entered the right region of the center accessory 2500, so that the first right start port 2002b, the gate portion 2003, the second start A game ball is thrown into the right side of the center accessory 2500 at a preferred time (for example, a big hit game state, a small hit game state, a short time state) at which the mouth 2004, the first big prize port 2005, and the second big prize port 2005b should be aimed. It is possible to grasp whether or not.

  As shown in FIG. 116, the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 pass through a croon 2017 formed in a funnel shape. In this way, by providing the crune 2017 before the game ball reaches the constantly driven door 2021, the game ball is distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the sorting member 2011, and then to the constantly driven door 2021. Although the distance to reach is constant, the time to reach the constant drive door 2021 is different each time. That is, it is possible not to aim at the timing when the drive door 2021 is always in the retracted state, and it is possible to prevent the timing when the ball can enter the first right start opening 2002b from being aimed.

  Next, the game ball that has passed through the croon 2017 always flows down the upper side of the driving door 2021, but when the driving door 2021 is in the retracted state, it enters the first right start port 2002b. On the other hand, when the driving door 2021 is always in the protruding state, the game ball does not enter the first right start port 2002b (the ball can enter the first right start port 2002b), It will flow down around the right side of the first right start port 2002b. That is, when the game ball flows down the upper side of the constant drive door 2021, it is noted whether or not the constant drive door 2021 is in the retracted state, that is, whether or not the ball can enter the first right start opening 2002b. be able to.

  A game ball that has entered the first right start opening 2002b side from the constantly driven door 2021 has a high probability that the first right start opening 2002b is disposed directly below the always driven door 2021. Accepted in mouth 2002b. On the other hand, the game balls that have not been received by the first right start port 2002b flow down either the left or right side of the first right start port 2002b, and the right side of the first right start port 2002b when the drive door 2021 is always in the protruding state. The game ball that has flowed down around the road will join again and flow down.

  The first right start port 2002b described above is disposed on the first passage 2012 side, and among the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the sorting member 2011, the driving door 2021 is always in the retracted state. It is possible to accept game balls that have entered inside. The first right start opening 2002b is provided with a first right start opening sensor 4002b for detecting an accepted game ball.

  The constant drive door 2021 changes into a protruding state in which the constant driving solenoid 2107 protrudes in the forward direction and a retracted state in which it is retracted in the backward direction. The evacuation state of 04 seconds is always repeated. Thus, among the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011, the time during which the constantly driven door 2021 is in the retracted state is extremely shortened compared to the time during which it is in the protruding state. About 2/100 always enters the inside of the drive door 2021 and is accepted by the first right start port 2002b. Although details will be described later, during the big hit game state, a large amount of game balls are shot on the right side of the center accessory 2500 so that the game balls enter the first big prize opening 2005. Even if it is, it can be made to enter the first right start opening 2002b during the big hit gaming state.

  Next, the game balls that have joined together without being received by the first right start port 2002b pass through the gate part 2003 with a high probability because the gate part 2003 is arranged immediately below the joining part. In this way, after the game balls that have not been received at the first right start opening 2002b join, the game balls go to the gate unit 2003, so that the game balls can be efficiently passed through the gate unit 2003. On the other hand, the game balls that have not passed through the gate portion 2003 flow down either the left or right of the gate portion 2003, and merge with the game balls that have passed through the gate portion 2003 again to flow down.

  Here, the gate portion 2003 is arranged on the first passage 2012 side, and allows the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the sorting portion seat 2011 to pass therethrough. The gate portion 2003 is disposed on the downstream side of the first passage 2012 from the first right start opening 2002b, and the first right start opening regardless of whether or not a game ball has entered the constant drive door 2021. The 1st channel | path 2012 is formed so that the game ball which was not received by 2002b may pass with high probability. Note that the gate unit 2003 is provided with a gate sensor 4003 that detects a passed game ball.

  Next, regardless of whether or not it has passed through the gate portion 2003, the merged game balls are guided to the upper side of the second starting port 2004, but the passage at that portion is in the lower left direction (opposite to the receiving port 2016). ), The vehicle does not enter the receiving port 2016 (the ball cannot enter the second starting port 2004), and flows down around the left side of the second starting port 2004. It will be.

  A game ball that has flowed down around the left side of the second start port 2004, that is, a game ball that has flowed down the first passage 2012 but did not enter the first right start port 2002b, is a second big prize port 2005b. When the opening / closing member of the second big prize opening 2005 is in the retracted state, it is received by the second big prize opening 2005b. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member of the second big prize opening 2005b is in the protruding state, the game ball is not received in the second big prize opening 2005b, and the second big prize opening 2005b is inclined in the lower left direction by the opening / closing member. Along with this, the game ball is released to the first grand prize opening 2005 side.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 117, the game balls distributed to the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) by the sorting member 2011 enter the back from the second passage entrance 2013, and the first passage It flows down the 2nd channel | path 2014 (shaded part) provided in the back side of 2012, and is discharged | emitted from the 2nd channel | path exit 2015 ahead. As shown in FIG. 118, the second passage 2014 is provided with a serrated step, but by providing such a serrated step, the distribution member 2011 causes the second passage entrance 2013 (first step). The time from when the game balls are distributed to the side of the two passages 2014) until reaching the second starter door 2022 is made different each time. That is, it is possible to prevent the timing at which the second start port 2022 is projected from being aimed, and to prevent the timing at which the second start port 2004 can be entered from being targeted.

  Next, the game ball released forward from the second passage outlet 2015 enters the reception port 2016 with a high probability since the reception port 2016 is disposed immediately below the second passage outlet 2015. On the other hand, when the game ball does not enter the receiving port 2016, the game ball does not enter the second start port 2004 (the ball cannot enter the second start port 2004). It will flow down around the right side of the receiving port 2016.

  At this time, the game ball that has entered the receiving port 2016 is guided to the second starting port 2004 side and received by the second starting port 2004 when the second starting port door 2022 is in the protruding state. On the other hand, when the second start port 2022 is in the retracted state, the game ball is not guided to the second start port 2004 side (the ball can be entered into the second start port 2004). Then, it passes through the front of the second start door 2022 in the retracted state and flows down. That is, when a game ball enters from the receiving port 2016, it may be noted whether or not the second start port 2022 is in a protruding state, that is, whether or not it is possible to enter the second start port 2004. it can. And such a game ball will join again and flow down with the game ball which flowed down detouring to the right of the receiving port 2016.

  Here, the second start port 2004 is arranged on the second passage 2103 side, and enters the game ball distributed to the second passage 2014 side by the sorting member 2011, that is, the second passage inlet 203 and enters the second passage. Among the game balls released from the passage exit 2015, the game balls enter the receiving port 2016, and the game balls induced when the second start door 2022 is in the protruding state can be received. The second start port 2004 is provided with a second start port sensor 4004 for detecting an accepted game ball.

  Further, the second start port 2022 changes between a protruding state protruding forward by the second start port solenoid 2108 and a retracted state retracted backward, and is normally in the retracted state. On the other hand, in accordance with the result of the normal determination that is drawn by detecting the passage of the game ball by the gate sensor 4003, that is, when the result of the normal determination is “per normal”, the state is changed from the retracted state to the protruding state. It is going to change. The second starter door 2022 is disposed immediately below the second passage outlet 2015 and the receiving port 2016. When the second starter door 2022 is in a protruding state, the second starting port door 2022 is discharged from the second passage outlet 2015 to receive the receiving port. The game ball that has entered 2016 can be received, and the game ball can be guided toward the second start port 2004 located on the left side of the second start port door 2022. On the other hand, when the second starter door 2022 is in the retracted state, the game ball released from the second passage outlet 2015 and entering the receiving port 2016 is not received, and passes through the front side of the second starter door 2022 as it is. Falling down.

  Next, the game balls that have flown down the second passage 2014 but have not entered the second starting port 2004 are released directly above the second major winning port 2005b, and the opening / closing member of the second major winning port 2005 is in the retracted state. In the second big prize opening 2005b. On the other hand, when the opening / closing member of the second big prize opening 2005b is in the protruding state, the game ball is not received in the second big prize opening 2005b, and the second big prize opening 2005b is inclined in the lower left direction by the opening / closing member. Along with this, the game ball is released to the first grand prize opening 2005 side.

  As described above, when the game balls are distributed to the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, it is possible to enter the first right start opening 2002b and to play the game balls to the gate portion 2003. Is possible. On the other hand, when the game balls are distributed to the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) by the sorting member 2011, it is possible to enter the second start port 2004. The game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 and the game balls distributed to the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) side are It does not join up to the top. For this reason, when game balls are distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011, it is not possible to enter the second starting port 2004, and the distribution member 2011 does not allow the second passage. When game balls are distributed to the entrance 2013 (second passage 2014), it is not possible to enter the first right start port 2002b or pass the game ball to the gate portion 2003.

  In addition, since the sorting member 2011 alternately distributes the game balls that have been driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 into the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, the first member provided on the first passage 2012 side. A chance to enter the right starting port 2002b and a chance to enter the second starting port 2004 provided on the second passage 2014 side are alternately generated. Although details will be described later, the hit determination based on the ball entering the second start port 2004 is more advantageous for the player than the hit determination based on the ball entering the first right start port 2002b (second In the hit determination based on the ball entering the starting port 2004, “small hit” is performed in most cases.), So that a plurality of game balls can continuously enter the second starting port 2004. When the situation occurs, only the hit determination that is advantageous to the player is performed, which may be disadvantageous to the game manager (hall side). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is shot on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the distribution member 2011 alternately distributes the game into the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014. Every time a game ball is struck on the right side of 2500, a chance to enter the first right start port 2002b and a chance to enter the second start port 2004 are given equally. As a result, only the hit determination that is advantageous to the player is not performed, and the game manager (hall side) is prevented from being unilaterally disadvantaged.

  In addition, when game balls are distributed to the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011, a chance to enter the first right start opening 2002b is obtained, but the drive door 2021 must be in a retracted state at all times. For example, the game ball does not enter the first right start opening 2002b and the first right start opening 2002b is not allowed to enter. On the other hand, when the game balls are distributed to the second passage 2014 side by the distribution member 2011, a chance to enter the second start port 2004 is obtained, but the second start port door 2022 is in a protruding state. Otherwise, the game ball is not guided to the second starting port 2004 side, and it is not possible to enter the second starting port 2004. That is, if the game ball is distributed to either the first passage 2012 or the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011, the game ball enters the first right start port 2002b or the second start port 2004. This is not necessarily the case, and it can be noticed with expectation until it can be determined whether or not a game ball enters the first right starting port 2002b or the second starting port 2004.

  In addition, since the sorting member 2011 alternately distributes the game balls driven to the right side of the center role 2500 into the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014, the gate portion provided on the first passage 2012 side. The chance that the game ball passes through 2003 and the chance to enter the second start port 2004 provided on the second passage 2014 side are alternately generated. Here, the second start port 2004 makes a normal determination based on the passing of the game ball through the gate portion 2003, and the second start port door 2022 protrudes when the result of the normal determination is “per normal”. The ball can be entered by changing the state. In other words, unless the game ball is allowed to pass through the gate portion 2003, the ball cannot enter the second starting port 2004. In this regard, even if the game balls are directed alternately to the gate portion 2003 and the second start port 2004, if the game ball is directed only to either the gate portion 2003 or the second start port 2004, for example, Even if the game ball passes only through the gate portion 2003, a hit determination based on the ball entering the second start port 2004 is not obtained, and even if the game ball goes only through the second start port 2004, the second The starting port 2004 cannot enter the ball without being able to enter, and the game in the short time state cannot be smoothly performed.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a game ball is shot on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the distribution member 2011 alternately distributes the game into the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014. Each time a game ball is struck on the right side of 2500, the roles of the first passage 2012 where the gate portion 2003 is disposed and the second passage 2014 where the second start port 2004 is disposed are different. ing. That is, when a game ball is thrown into the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the sorting member 2011, thereby passing the game ball to the gate portion 2003, and then swinging the game ball. By distributing the game balls to the second passage 2014 side by the minute member 2011, a chance to enter the second start port 2004 is obtained, and the game balls that are driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 are second started. It is possible to efficiently enter the mouth 2004. For this reason, even when the game balls are distributed to either the first passage 2012 or the second passage 2014 by the sorting member 2011, the playing member plays a beneficial role in advancing the game. And since a game ball does not go only to either one of the gate part 2003 and the 2nd starting port 2004, it has made it possible to perform the game in a short time state smoothly.

  In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second start port 2004, a prize ball is paid out to the player, and the number of prize balls is “1 ball”. On the other hand, in order to make a hit determination on the second special symbol side based on the ball entering the second starting port 2004, the second member is distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 and passes through the gate portion 2003. At least “two balls” of the game ball and the game ball distributed to the second passage 2014 by the distribution member 2011 and entering the second starting port 2004 are required. In addition, even when the game balls are distributed to the second passage 2014 side by the distribution member 2011, when the game balls do not enter the receiving port 2016, or when the second start door 2022 is in the retracted state The game ball never enters the second starting port 2004. Thus, the number of prize balls to be paid out at the time of entering the second starting port 2004 is set to be “2 balls” or less, which is at least required for the hit determination on the second special symbol side to be performed. Even if game balls are continuously driven into the right side of the center accessory 2500, the number of game balls held by the player is prevented from increasing.

  As shown in FIG. 114, the game balls that are driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 are distributed to either the first passage 2012 and the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) by the sorting member 2011. However, the game ball that has flowed down on either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage inlet 2013 (second passage 2014) will be released directly above the second big prize opening 2005b. The second big prize opening 2005b is provided in the lower right area of the center accessory 2500. In the lower right area, in addition to the second big prize opening 2005b, A big prize opening 2005 is provided.

  Here, the general winning opening 2001 is open at the top, and is a game ball (which is distributed to either the first passage 2012 or the second passage 2013 by the sorting member 2011) that is driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500. It may be a game ball). The general winning opening 2001 is arranged on the lower left side of the second large winning opening 2005b, and can accept a game ball emitted from the second large winning opening 2005b side. It should be noted that the general winning opening 2001 is provided with a general winning opening sensor 4020 for detecting an accepted game ball.

  The first big prize opening 2005 has an opening / closing member, and when the opening / closing member is in the retracted state, a game ball (the first passage 2012 and the first passage by the distribution member 2011) that are driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500. It may be a game ball distributed to either side of the two passages 2013.). The first big prize opening 2005 is arranged on the lower left side of the second big prize opening 2005b. When the opening / closing member of the first big prize opening 2005 is in the retracted state, the first big prize opening 2005b is from the side of the second big prize opening 2005b. The released game ball can be accepted with a high probability. In other words, the game balls distributed to either the first passage 2012 or the second passage 2013 by the sorting member 2011 can be accepted as in the second grand prize opening 2005b described later. When the opening / closing member of the mouth 2005 is in the retracted state, it is possible to efficiently enter the first big prize opening 2005 simply by driving a game ball into the right side of the center accessory 2500. The first grand prize opening 2005 is provided with a first count sensor 4005a for detecting an accepted game ball.

  The opening / closing member of the first big prize opening 2005 changes between a protruding state protruding forward by the first attacker solenoid 2109 and a retracted state retracting backward, and is normally in the protruding state. On the other hand, according to the result of the hit determination that is drawn by detecting the entrance of the game ball by the first left start port sensor 4002a, the first right start port sensor 4002b, and the second start port sensor 4004, That is, when the result of the hit determination is “big hit”, the protruding state is changed to the retracted state.

  Further, the second big prize opening 2005b has an opening / closing member, and can receive a game ball driven to the right side of the center accessory 2500 when the opening / closing member is in the retracted state. The second big prize opening 2005b is arranged near the junction of the game ball flowing down the first passage 2012 and the game ball flowing down the second passage 2013, and the opening / closing member of the second big prize opening 2005b is retracted. When in the state, the game balls distributed to either side of the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2013 by the sorting member 2011 can be received with a high probability. That is, when the opening / closing member of the second big prize opening 2005b is in the retracted state, it is possible to efficiently enter the second big prize opening 2005b simply by driving a game ball into the right side of the center accessory 2500. Note that a second count sensor 4005b for detecting an accepted game ball is provided at the second big prize opening 2005b.

  The opening / closing member of the second big prize opening 2005b changes between a protruding state protruding forward by the second attacker solenoid 2110 and a retracted state retracting backward, and is normally in the protruding state. On the other hand, according to the special lottery result that is drawn by detecting the entrance of the game ball by the second start port sensor 4004, that is, when the special lottery result is “small hit”, It changes to the evacuation state.

  Further, inside the second grand prize opening 2005b, a V prize winning device 2400 that distributes the game balls received in the second big prize winning opening 2005b to either the V prize winning opening 2411 or the discharge opening 2412 is provided. Yes. The V winning device 2400 includes a rotating body 2410 capable of holding the first game ball received in the second grand prize opening 2005b when the opening / closing member of the second big prize opening 2005b is in a retracted state, When a rotating body 2410 rotates to the right while one game ball is held on the rotating body 2410, a V winning opening 2411 that can receive the game ball is held, and one gaming ball is held on the rotating body 2410. In this state, the second grand prize opening 2005b is provided with a discharge port 2412 that allows the game ball to be discharged when the second and subsequent game balls are received.

  That is, when the first game ball is received in the second big prize opening 2005b after the opening / closing member of the second big prize opening 2005b is in the retracted state, the first game ball is moved by the rotating body 2410. On the other hand, when the second and subsequent game balls are received, the second and subsequent game balls are discharged from the discharge port 2412 without being held by the rotating body 2410. When the opening / closing member of the second big prize opening 2005b is returned to the projecting state, the rotating body 2410 is rotated clockwise by the V winning opening solenoid 2111, and one game ball held by the rotating body 2410 becomes the V winning opening. 2411. In addition, after the rotating body 2410 is rotated clockwise by the V winning opening solenoid 2111, it is returned to the position where the game ball received in the second large winning opening 2005b can be held again by rotating left. ing.

  From the above, according to the special lottery result that is drawn by detecting the entrance of the game ball by the second start port sensor 4004, that is, when the special lottery result is “small hit”, It changes to the evacuation state, and it becomes possible to accept a game ball at the second big prize opening 2005b. During this evacuation period (during the small hit game state), at least one game ball is taken into the second big prize opening. If it is possible to enter the ball 2005b, the game ball is distributed to the V winning opening 2411 by the rotating body 2410. Then, the game balls are distributed to the V winning opening 2411, and the first V winning opening sensor 4007a and the second V winning opening sensor 4007b detect the entry of the gaming balls, thereby obtaining a “big hit (a bonus hit for an object)”. Similarly to the case where the special lottery result is “big hit”, the opening / closing member of the first big prize opening 2005 is changed from the protruding state to the retracted state.

  The V prize opening 2411 is provided with a first V prize opening sensor 4007a and a second V prize opening sensor 4007b as sensors for detecting a passing game ball. In addition, the outlet 2412 is provided with an outlet sensor 4008 that detects a passing game ball. According to this, the game balls distributed to the V prize opening 2411 by the rotating body 2410 should be detected by any of the first V prize opening sensor 4007a and the second V prize opening sensor 4007b. When only one of the sensors is detected, it is determined that no game ball has entered the V prize opening 2411, thereby preventing an illegal act. Further, the total of the number of game balls detected by the first V prize port sensor 4007a and the second V prize port sensor 4007b and the number of game balls detected by the discharge port sensor 4008 is the second count sensor 4005b. It should match the number of game balls detected by, and if these do not match, it is determined that no game ball has entered the V winning opening 2411 and prevents illegal acts. doing.

  As described above, the second big prize opening 2005b and the first big prize opening 2005 arranged on the lower left side of the second big prize opening 2005b are distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the sorting member 2011. The game ball and the game ball distributed to the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) side are arranged in the flow path after joining. That is, both the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 and the game balls distributed to the second passage entrance 2013 (second passage 2014) side are the first large. It is possible to enter the winning opening 2005 and the second major winning opening 2005b. For this reason, although it is the structure by which the game ball is distributed to either the 1st channel | path 2012 and the 2nd channel | path entrance 2013 (2nd channel | path 2014) by the distribution member 2011, distribution by the distribution member 2011 is carried out. As with the configuration of a normal gaming machine that does not enter (the gaming machine that enters the first big prize opening 2005 or the second big prize opening 2005b by the game ball being struck), the second big game that is opened in the big hit gaming state It is not hindered to enter the winning opening 2005b or the first big winning opening 2005 which is opened in the small hit gaming state. In other words, by preventing the player from unilaterally suffering the disadvantage that it is difficult to enter the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2005b, in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state The game can be performed smoothly.

[5-2. Previous component]
Next, the front component member 1000 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The front component member 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, and has an inner shape penetrating in a front-rear direction in a substantially circular shape. The outer periphery of the game area 5a is defined by the inner periphery of the inner shape. The front component member 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower left side to the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front, and extends to the upper right side through the center upper end in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. An inner rail 1002 that is arranged substantially along the outer rail 1001 inside the front component member 1000 and extends in an arc shape from the center lower part in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left part in the front view, and a game on the right side in front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 An out guiding portion 1003 that is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in front view to the right side of the front component member 1000. The right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component member 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component member 1000, and the upper portion being curved inward of the front component member 1000, and the upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail 1001 is connected to the upper end of 1001, and a stop portion 1006 with which a game ball rolling along the outer rail 1001 contacts is provided.

  Further, the front component member 1000 is pivotally supported on the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and has a closed position and a front-view clock extending upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close the space between the front rail and the outer rail 1001. A backflow prevention member that is rotated by a spring (not shown) so as to be able to rotate only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened by rotating in the rotating direction and to return to the closed position side. 1007.

  Further, the front component member 1000 includes an outer side of the vicinity of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extend substantially vertically from the lower end, a lower side of the out guiding part 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and an outer side of the right rail 1005. Each part includes a security recess 1008 that is recessed rearward from the front end. When the gaming board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1008 has a rear protruding piece 202 that protrudes rearward of the security cover 200 in the door frame 3. It will be inserted. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 200 and the game board 5 (the front component member 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear protrusion piece 202 of the security cover 200 and the security recess portion 1008 of the front component member 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire enters the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 200 and the front structural member 1000 from below the front of the board 5, it will be blocked by the rear protrusion 202 and the security recess 1008. The unauthorized tool can be prevented from entering the game area 5a.

[5-3. Game panel]
Next, the gaming panel 1100 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. The gaming panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 having an outer periphery formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component member 1000 and formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel board 1110. And a frame-like panel holder that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000 and has a rear unit attached to the rear surface thereof.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as acrylic resin, polycarbonate resin, polyarylate resin, or methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder (game panel 1100), and is the minimum necessary thickness that can be sufficiently retained even when the obstacle nail is installed on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is mounted ( 8 to 10 mm). In this example, panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel holder of the gaming panel 1100 has a size that includes the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder is formed of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin).

  Moreover, the panel holder is provided with the out port 1126 which has penetrated back and forth in the site | part used as the lowest position in the game area | region 5a. In the panel holder, the lower rear side of the out port 1126 has the same width as the out port 1126 and is recessed forward to the lower end.

  When the gaming panel 1100 is attached to the rear side of the front component member 1000, the panel holder out port 1126 is opened to the rear side of the front guide member 100. Thereby, the game ball that has flowed down to the lower end of the game area 5a is guided to the rear out port 1126 by the out guiding unit 1003, and is discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126.

[5-4. Substrate holder]
Next, the substrate holder 1200 will be described. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape that is open at the top and front, and is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The board holder 1200 can cover the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side in a state assembled to the game board 5. Thereby, it is possible to receive all of the game balls discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1126 and the game balls discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit, and formed on the bottom surface. It is possible to discharge from the discharge unit 1201 downward.

[5-5. Main control board unit]
Next, the main control unit 1300 will be described. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 for controlling game contents, game ball payout, and the like, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. .

  The main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, the sealing mechanism is then destroyed to open the main control board box 1320. The main control board box 1320 can be opened and closed. Therefore, by observing the trace of opening and closing, it is possible to discover unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent against unauthorized actions on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  Note that the various board boxes 930, 950, 1320, 1520, and 3042 including the main control board box 1320 are all provided as transparent members so that visual confirmation from the outside is possible. Yes. That is, as will be described later, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, the surface of the payout control board 951 in the payout control board box 950 and the main control board 1310 in the main control board box 1320 are inferior in fraud suppression performance. Since a mounting area is provided, it is important to secure such transparency in order to obtain various functions and effects related to fraud countermeasures described later.

[5-6. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 1400 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the lower left corner of the front component member 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be viewed from the front (player side) through the through-hole 111 of the door frame 3 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 displays a gaming state (game situation), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like using a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 119, the function display unit 1400 has a status indicator 1401 composed of one LED for displaying a gaming state, and four LEDs for displaying a normal lottery result drawn by passing a game ball with respect to the gate unit 2003. The normal symbol display 1402 made up of, the normal hold display 1408 made up of two LEDs for displaying the number of holds relating to the passage of the game ball with respect to the gate 2003, and the game ball received at the first starting port 2002 are selected by lottery. The first special symbol display 1403 composed of eight LEDs for displaying the first special lottery result, and the first special reservation composed of two LEDs for displaying the number of suspensions relating to the acceptance of the game balls to the first starting port 2002 From the number indicator 1404 and the eight LEDs that display the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game balls to the second starting port 2004 A second special symbol display 1405, a second special reservation number display 1406 comprising two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the acceptance of the game ball to the second starting port 2004, and the first special lottery result or the first A round indicator 1407 comprising three LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening / closing pattern of the first big prize opening 2005 and the second big prize opening 2005b when the two special lottery results are “big hit”, etc. Mainly prepared.

  In this function display unit 1400, the number of symbols, symbols, etc. can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, and blinking the LEDs provided.

[5-7. Peripheral control unit]
Next, the peripheral control unit will be described. The peripheral control unit is attached to the rear side of the game board side effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box of the back unit. The peripheral control unit includes a peripheral control board 1510 that controls an effect presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a peripheral control board box 1520 that houses the peripheral control board 1510. Yes. Although not shown, the peripheral control board 1510 includes a peripheral control unit for controlling a light emission effect, a sound effect, a movable effect, and the like, and an effect display control unit for controlling the effect image. .

[5-8. Game board side effect display device]
Next, the game board side effect display device 1600 will be described with reference to FIG. The game board side effect display device 1600 is disposed in the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via a back box of a back unit. Specifically, the game board side effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box. The game board side effect display device 1600 can be viewed from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. This game board side effect display device 1600 is a full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight, and can display still images and moving images.

[6. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board that performs various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 120 to 123. 120 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, FIG. 121 is a block diagram showing the continuation of FIG. 120, and FIG. 122 is the payout control board, CR unit and frequency constituting the main board. FIG. 123 is a schematic diagram of various detection signals input / output to / from a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball that relays an electrical connection with a display board, FIG. 123 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 120, and FIG. FIG. 125 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU, and FIG. 125 is a block diagram around the sound source built-in VDP in the liquid crystal display control unit.

  As shown in FIG. 120, the pachinko machine 1 has a first control unit MCG that performs control related to a game including payout of prize balls, in addition to generation processing of a power source for control (for example, +5 V, etc.) And a second control unit SCG that performs an effect relating to a game proceeded by the first control unit MCG.

  More specifically, the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment employs a structure in which various controls are shared by preparing a plurality of substrates, and the main control substrate 1310 is used as the first control unit MCG. The payout control board 951 and the power supply board 931 are provided, and the peripheral control board 1510 is provided as the second control unit SCG. Hereinafter, in describing the control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, first, the first control unit MCG will be described in the order of the main control board 1310, the payout control board 951, and the power supply board 931. 2 The controller SCG (peripheral control board 1510) will be described.

[6-1. Main control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game controls a power-on process executed when the power is turned on and a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, as shown in FIG. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor that has a built-in ROM for storing various control programs such as a main control program for controlling a game operation and a command, a ROM for storing various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A main control input circuit 1310b to which a detection signal from the detection switch is input, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., and a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e for monitoring a sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure of a predetermined voltage, It has been.

  The main control MPU 1310a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Further, a watchdog timer 1310af (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT 1310af”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. In this non-volatile RAM, a unique ID code with a unique code (a code that exists only in the world) for identifying an individual by the manufacturer that manufactured the main control MPU 1310a is stored in advance. Since the ID code once attached is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 1310a can take out and refer to the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM.

  The main control MPU 1310a also uses a hardware random number circuit 1310an (hereinafter referred to as "main control built-in") to update a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state among various random numbers related to the game. A hard random number circuit 1310an ”). The main random number circuit 1310an with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, a numerical range of a value 0 to a maximum value 32767 is preset as a minimum value), A predetermined value is not fixed as the initial value (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and the circuit configuration is such that a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main random number built-in hard random number circuit 1310an first sets a clock signal (input to the main control MPU 1310a as an initial value within a predetermined numerical range). Based on the clock signal output from the main control crystal oscillator (to be described later), other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and all values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted. When the process is completed, one value in the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and other values in the predetermined numerical range are not duplicated at high speed based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a wins the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an at the time of acquiring a value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit 1310an. It is set as a random number for judgment.

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control input circuit 1310b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a main control system reset to be described later. The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type in which an emitter terminal is grounded with a ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. Main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function without a reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310ca with a reset function is reset when information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like is reset by a main control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit 1310cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset described later is not input. That is, the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function does not reset the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by the main control system reset described later, and thus the information is output to the information. The signal based on this is comprised as a circuit from which the various output terminals are output.

  114, a first left start port sensor 4002a that detects a game ball that has entered the first left start port 2002a, and a first right start port sensor that detects a game ball that has entered the first right start port 2002b. 4002b, a second starter sensor 4004 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starter 2004, a magnetic detection sensor 4024 that is attached to the back unit 3000 shown in FIG. A first count sensor 4005a that detects a game ball that has entered the first prize opening 2005, a second count sensor 4005b that detects a game ball that has entered the second big prize opening 2005b, and a game that has entered the general prize opening 2001 In the area on the right side of the general winning opening sensor 4020 that detects the ball, the gate sensor 4003 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate portion 2003, and the center accessory 2500 A right region entrance sensor 4006 for detecting a game ball that has entered, a V winning port sensor 4007a and a V winning port sensor 4007b for detecting game balls distributed to the V winning port 2411 in the second large winning port 2005b, A detection signal from the discharge port sensor 4008 that detects a game ball distributed to the discharge port 2412 in the winning port 2005b (not distributed to the V winning port 2411) is a panel relay board 4161 attached to the game board 5. And it is input into the input terminal of the predetermined | prescribed input port of main control MPU1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. A signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a through the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function based on the detection signals from these switches, so that the main control output circuit with reset function is output. A control signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d via the panel relay board 4161 from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d. By outputting a drive signal to the solenoid 2110 or outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, the panel relay board 4161 from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. And via the function display unit 1400, a first special symbol display 1403, a second special symbol display 1405, a first special reserved number display 1404, a second special reserved number display 1406, a normal symbol display 1402, a status display. A drive signal is output to the display unit 1401 and the round display unit 1407.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, thereby performing payout control from the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function. By outputting various information about the game (game information) to the board 951, or by outputting a signal (power failure clear signal) from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit 1310ca with reset function, A signal (power failure clear signal) is output from the control output circuit 1310ca to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In the present embodiment, the first left start port sensor 4002a, the first right start port sensor 4002b, the second start port sensor 4004, the first count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, the gate sensor 4003, and the right area portion entry. The sensor 4006, the first V prize port sensor 4007a, the second V prize port sensor 4007b, and the discharge port sensor 4008 use non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switches, whereas the general prize port sensor 4020 includes Uses a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch. This is because game balls frequently enter the first left starting port 2002a, the first right starting port 2002b, and the second starting port 2004, and frequently pass through the gate unit 2003 and the right region unit entering sensor 4006. The detection of a game ball by the first left start port sensor 4002a, the first right start port sensor 4002b, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the right region entry sensor 4006 also frequently occurs. For this reason, long-life proximity switches are used for the first left start port sensor 4002a, the first right start port sensor 4002b, the second start port sensor 4004, the gate sensor 4003, and the right region entry sensor 4006. In addition, when a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2005b are opened, and game balls frequently enter, Since game balls are frequently distributed to the V winning port 2411 and the outlet 2412 in the winning port 2005b, the first count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, the first V winning port sensor 4007a, and the second V winning port sensor 4007b. The detection of the game ball by the discharge port sensor 4008 also frequently occurs. For this reason, game balls are frequently detected by the first count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, the first V prize port sensor 4007a, the second V prize port sensor 4007b, and the discharge port sensor 4008. Therefore, a proximity switch having a long life is also used for the count sensor 4005. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensor 4020 does not occur frequently in the general winning opening 2001 in which game balls do not frequently enter. For this reason, the general winning opening sensor 4020 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function, thereby controlling payout from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function. Various commands are transmitted to the board 951 as serial data. When the payout control board 951 completes normal reception of various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 951 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a receives various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 951 as serial data by the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the input from the main control input circuit 1310b to the predetermined serial input port Various commands are received as serial data at the terminal. When the main control MPU 1310a completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, a main control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the effect (main payout ACK signal). The signal is output to the circuit 1310ca, and a signal (main payment ACK signal) is output from the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca to the payout control board 951.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits, as serial data, various commands relating to control of game effects and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit 1310cb having no reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit 1310cb without reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  The power supply board 931 for supplying various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. .) BC0 (see FIG. 132). With this capacitor BC0, the main control MPU 1310a can store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even when the power is shut off. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM are stored in the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the operation switch 954 when an operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 described later is operated within a predetermined period from the time of turning on the power. Is output from the payout control board 951 and input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and when this occurs, the main control MPU 1310a completely erases it from the main control built-in RAM. (Clear).

[6-2. Dispensing control board]
Of the first control unit MCG, a payout control board 951 that controls the payout of game balls and the like is, as shown in FIG. 121, a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls relating to payout, and an operation switch 954 that also has various functions. And an error LED display 860b for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1. Further, the operation switch 954 having a function as a RAM clear switch is described as a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 1310a based on a detection signal output by being operated. A RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in.

[6-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 121, a payout control unit 952 that performs various controls relating to payout controls power-on processing that is executed when the power is turned on, and pays out game media that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs including a payout control program for controlling the operation, ROM for storing various commands, RAM for temporarily storing data, etc., a payout control MPU952a, and detection from various detection switches for payout A payout control input circuit 952b to which signals are input, a payout control output circuit 952c for outputting various signals to an external substrate, etc., and a drive signal to be output to the payout motor 834 of the payout device 830 shown in FIG. For exchanging various signals between the payout motor drive circuit 952d and the CR unit 6. It includes a CR unit output circuit 952e of the. The payout control MPU 952a includes a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing fraud, and the like are also incorporated.

  The payout control program is controlled by the payout control MPU 952a so that various information (game information) related to games and various commands related to payouts from the main control board 1310 are serially received as main payout serial data reception signals via the payout control input circuit 952b. Receive serial data with. Also, the payout control program generates a frame state 1 command (corresponding to the first error occurrence command) triggered by the occurrence of an error in the game ball payout operation, or operates the operation switch 954 as an error release unit. Based on the signal (detection signal), a 16-bit (2 bytes) error cancellation navigation command (corresponding to the first error cancellation command) is created, and the error occurrence command and the error cancellation navigation command are respectively transmitted to the payer serial data. As a serial signal, a signal is output to the reception port of the main control board 1310 via the payout control I / O port 952b (command transmission means). In addition, the payout control program is provided after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on, that is, after the payout control unit main process is executed or the payout control unit timer interrupt process is executed to start payout control. When an error occurs with respect to the operation, the error is canceled based on a detection signal generated in response to the operation of the operation switch 954, and output of warning information corresponding to the error is stopped (error cancellation control means).

  The payout control program outputs a door frame opening command (first door opening command) when a detection signal (door frame opening detection signal) associated with the opening operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618. When a detection signal (body frame opening detection signal) accompanying the opening operation is input from the body frame opening switch 619, a body frame opening command (first body frame opening command) is output. On the other hand, when the detection signal (door frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the door frame opening switch 618, the payout control program receives a door frame closing command (first door frame closing command). When a detection signal (main body frame closing detection signal) accompanying the closing operation is input from the main body frame opening switch 619, a main body frame closing command (first main body frame closing command) is output.

  The payout control input circuit 952b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information whose detection signals from various detection switches are input to the various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 952b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. That is, the payout control input circuit 952b does not reset the information based on the detection signals from the various detection switches input to the various input terminals by a payout control system reset described later, and thus the various signals based on the information The circuit is configured to be output from the output terminal.

  The payout control output circuit 952c is configured as an open collector output type in which the emitter terminal is grounded to the ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to the various input terminals. A payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function having a reset function in which a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the received information is provided, and a payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function having no reset function in which no reset terminal is provided. And is composed of. The payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is input. That is, the payout control output circuit 952ca with a reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like by a payout control system reset described later. Is configured as a circuit that does not output any signal from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset described later is not input. In other words, the payout control output circuit 952cb without a reset function includes the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external substrate or the like, and is not reset by a payout control system reset described later. The signal based on this is configured as a circuit that outputs from its various output terminals.

  Out-of-ball detection sensor 827 for detecting the out-of-game ball in the supply passage of the in-ball supply unit 820 of the out-of-payment unit 800 and out-of-game detection sensor 842 for detecting the game ball released from the out-out exits 831b and 832b of the out-feed device 830. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 840 that detects the rotation of the payout blade 839 is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b. In the following description, the blade rotation detection sensor 840 is simply referred to as the rotation detection sensor 840 for the sake of explanation.

  The detection signals from the door frame opening switch 618 for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the main body frame opening switch 619 for detecting the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are sent to the payout control input circuit 952b. To the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a.

  Further, a detection signal from a full tank detection sensor 279 that detects whether the storage space of the foul cover unit 270 shown in FIG. It is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the substrate 931 and the payout control input circuit 952b.

  The payout control MPU 952a receives various commands relating to payout from the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b in the serial data system at the input terminal of the serial input port, or the operation signal (detection of the operation switch 954). Signal) is output to the main control board 1310 via the payout control input circuit 952b. When the payout control MPU 952a has successfully received various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, a payout control output with a reset function is sent from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting to the circuit 952ca, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function 952ca to the main control board 1310.

  Also, the payout control MPU 952a sends various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the serial output port to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function as serial data, thereby providing the payout control without reset function. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the output circuit 952cb to the main control board 1310. When the main control board 1310 completes normal reception of various commands from the payout control board 951 as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal to that effect (main payout ACK signal) to the payout control board 951. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b.

  In addition, the payout control MPU 952a outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 834 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, so that the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function is output. Is output to the payout motor drive circuit 952d, the drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is indicated by an error LED indicator from the output terminal of the predetermined output port. By outputting a drive signal for display on 860b to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, the drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function to the error LED display 860b.

  The error LED indicator 860b is a segment indicator, and displays the state of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED indicator 860b include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is informed that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it is indicated that “connection is abnormal” (specifically, with the main control board 1310). The fact that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 951 is notified, and when the number “1” is displayed, it is “out of the ball” (specifically, out of the ball) Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 827, a notification is made that there is no game ball in the supply passage of the payout device 830, and when the number “2” is displayed, it means that “ball is seen” (specifically, Is based on a detection signal from the rotation detection sensor 840, and the payout rotator and the game ball are meshed in the vicinity of the entrance at the entrance of the distribution space communicating with the supply passage of the payout device 830, making it difficult for the payout rotator to rotate. Number) When “3” is displayed, the fact that it is a “payout detection sensor error” (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 842 based on a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 842) is notified. When the number “5” is displayed, the fact that it is a “retry error” (specifically, the fact that the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value) is notified, and the number “6” When it is displayed, it is “full” (specifically, the game ball in which the accommodation space of the foul cover unit 270 is stored is full based on the detection signal from the full detection sensor 279) When the number “7” is displayed, it means that “CR is not connected” (the electrical connection is cut off from either the payout control board 951 to the CR unit 6). When the number “9” is displayed, it is “in stock (awarded ball stock (not paid out))” (specifically, the number of game balls that have not been paid out is determined in advance). That the number of balls has been reached).

  Further, the payout control MPU 952a outputs the number of game balls actually paid out from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function, thereby outputting the payout control output circuit 952ca with reset function. The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 784 through a resistor (not shown).

Also, the payout control board 951 outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 784 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal board 784 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (infrared LEDs and photo ICs are built in), and a game hall (hole) is provided via the plurality of photocouplers. ), The number of game balls, and various information (game information, content of error relating to game ball payout operation, or the fact that there was an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in (1).
The external terminal board 784 and the hall computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hall computer via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hall computer to The computer is prevented from malfunctioning or failing, and from the hall computer to the main control board 1310 for proceeding the game via the external terminal board 784 of the pachinko machine 1 and the payout control board 951 for controlling the payout etc. An abnormal voltage is applied to cause malfunction or failure. The hall computer monitors the game of the player by grasping the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

  The ball lending request signal for the game ball from the ball lending button 328 and the return request signal for the prepaid card from the return button 329 are first the frequency display board 365, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the lending device connection terminal board for game balls etc. It is input to the CR unit 6 via the 869. The CR unit 6 transmits a signal designating the number of game balls to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 951 through the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869, and this signal is transmitted to the CR unit. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 952a via the input / output circuit 952e. In addition, the CR unit 6 updates the remaining level of the prepaid card inserted according to the number of rented game balls, and displays a signal for displaying the remaining level on the sphere rental return display unit 330. The equal lending device connection terminal board 869, the main door relay terminal board 880, and the frequency display board 365 are output, and this signal is input to the ball rental return display section 330. Further, the CR unit lamp 365d adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330 is supplied with the supply voltage from the CR unit 6 via the game ball rental device connecting terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. ing.

  The power supply board 931 for supplying various voltages to the payout control board 951 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 132) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the payout control board 951 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. Yes. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 952a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) in the power-off process even when the power is shut off. Various kinds of information stored in the payout control built-in RAM are stored in the payout control MPU 952a via the payout control input circuit 952b when the operation switch 954 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. The payout control MPU 952a input to the input terminal of the input port determines as a RAM clear signal for completely erasing the information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and triggered by this from the payout control built-in RAM by the payout control MPU 952a. It is completely erased (cleared). This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function, and is output to the main control board 1310 from the payout control output circuit 952cb without reset function.

[6-2-2. Exchange of various signals with game ball rental device connection terminal board]
Here, the exchange of various signals between the payout control unit 952 and the CR unit 6 and the exchange of various signals between the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 122, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 relays the electrical connection between the CR unit 6 and the payout control board 951, as well as the CR unit 6 and the frequency display board 365. (To be precise, the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 is electrically connected to the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880. The CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected, the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880 are electrically connected, and the main door relay Terminal board 880 and frequency display board 365 are electrically connected). Between the board of the CR unit 6 and the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, between the gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the payout control board 951, gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay. The board between the terminal board 880 and the board between the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869 and the frequency display board 365 are electrically connected by wiring (harness), respectively. In addition, AC24V, which will be described later, from the power supply board 931 is supplied to the CR unit 6 via a gaming ball rental device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 generates a predetermined voltage VL (in this embodiment, DC +12 V (DC +12 V, hereinafter referred to as “+12 V”)) from the supplied AC 24 V by a built-in voltage generation circuit (not shown) together with the ground LG. The ball is supplied to the payout control board 951 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869, and is supplied to the frequency display plate 365 through the game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and the main door relay terminal plate 880. .

  The frequency display board 365 has a ball lending button 328 that is a push button switch mounted on the component surface at a position corresponding to the ball lending button 328, and a push button switch at a position corresponding to the return button 329 of the lending unit 360. A return button 329 is mounted, and a ball lending return display unit 330 that is a segment display is mounted at a position corresponding to the remaining lending display unit 363 of the lending unit 360.

  The ball rental button 328 and the return button 329 are electrically connected to the ground LG from the CR unit 6 via a game ball rental device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. When the ball lending button 328 is pressed, the ball lending button 328 is switched on (ON), and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted to the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game It is inputted to the CR unit 6 through a ball lending device connection terminal board 869. When the return button 329 is pressed, the return button 329 is switched on (ON), and the return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is connected to the main door relay terminal board 880 and a rental device such as a game ball. The signal is input to the CR unit 6 through the terminal board 869.

  The ball rental return display unit 330 includes three segment indicators arranged in a line, and the three-digit segment indicator is driven by a so-called dynamic lighting system that sequentially drives each one-digit segment indicator. The digit segment display is controlled to turn on. With such lighting control, the ball rental return display unit 330 displays the remaining amount of the prepaid card inserted into the CR unit 6 or displays an error of the CR unit 6. The ball rental return display unit 330 includes digit signals DG0 to DG2 (a total of three signals) for designating a one-digit segment indicator among the three-digit segment indicators, and the designated one-digit segment indicator. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G (7 signals in total) for designating the contents to be displayed by turning on the LED, and the lending device connection terminal plate 869 such as a game ball from the CR unit 6 and the main door relay terminal When input via the board 880, according to the input digit signals DG0 to DG2 and segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G, a one-digit segment indicator is sequentially emitted, and these three-digit segment displays. The contents of the light emitted from the container can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363.

  A CR unit lamp 365 d is mounted on the frequency display board 365 adjacent to the ball rental return display unit 330. The CR unit lamp 365d is supplied with a predetermined voltage VL from the CR unit 6 via a game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 and a main door relay terminal plate 880. The predetermined voltage VL is input to the CR unit 6 as a ball lending available signal TDL through a current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 via the CR unit lamp 365d. The CR unit 6 creates a predetermined voltage VL from the AC 24 V supplied from the power supply board 931 by the built-in voltage creation circuit, and the ball lending button 328 and the return button 329 are in a valid ball lending state. Controls the logic of the ball lending available signal TDL to cause the CR unit lamp 365d to emit light, and this light emission can be visually recognized through the lending remaining display portion 363. The segment drive signals SEG-A to SEG-G are input to the ball lending return display unit 330 through the current limiting resistor mounted on the gaming ball lending device connection terminal board 869.

  In the CR unit 6, the ball lending button 328 is pressed and the ball lending operation signal TDS from the ball lending button 328 is transmitted from the frequency display plate 365 via the main door relay terminal plate 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. When inputted, the ball rental request signal BRDY is output to the payout control board 951 (payout control MPU 952a) via the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The CR unit 6 performs a single payout operation start request signal for paying out a predetermined number of rented balls (in this embodiment, 25 balls, corresponding to 100 yen as an amount) in one payout operation. Is output to the payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) via the gaming ball lending device connection terminal plate 869. The payout control board 951 (the payout control MPU 952a) to which BRDY and BRQ are input, sends EXS, which is a signal for informing that one payout operation has been started or ended, to a lending device connection terminal board 869 such as a game ball. Through the terminal, the PRDY, which is a signal for outputting to the CR unit 6 or notifying that the payout operation for paying out the ball is possible or impossible, is connected to a lending device connection terminal board such as a game ball. Or output to the CR unit 6 via 869. In addition, for example, when a store clerk or the like of the hall is preset in the CR unit 6 so that a game ball of 200 yen is paid out when the ball lending button 328 is pressed, one payout operation is performed. Is performed twice in succession, and when 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, 25 balls for 100 yen are paid out, and 50 balls for a total of 200 yen are paid out. Become.

  In the CR unit 6, the return button 329 is pressed, and a return operation signal RES from the return button 329 is input from the frequency display board 365 via the main door relay terminal board 880 and the game ball lending device connection terminal board 869. The prepaid card is discharged from an insertion slot (not shown) and returned. The returned prepaid card stores the remaining amount obtained by subtracting the amount corresponding to the number of game balls paid out as a result of the ball lending button 328 being pressed.

[6-3. Power supply board 931]
Next, the power supply board 931 in the first control unit MCG will be briefly described. The power supply board 931 is supplied from the Pachinko Island facility, and can be electrically connected to or disconnected from AC 24 volts (AC24V), and a power supply controller 935 that generates various power supplies. The launch control unit 953 performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 of the hit ball launcher 650 shown in FIG. 5 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 of the ball feed unit 250 shown in FIG.

[6-3-1. Power control unit]
The power controller 935 operates the power switch 934 to improve the power factor of the power rectified by the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a that rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC 24V) supplied from the pachinko island facility and the synchronous rectifier circuit 935a. Power factor improving circuit 935b, smoothing circuit 935c for smoothing the power whose power factor has been improved by power factor improving circuit 935b, and various direct currents for supplying the power smoothed by smoothing circuit 935c to various substrates A power generation circuit 935d for generating a power supply.

[6-3-2. Launch control unit]
A launch control unit 953 that performs launch control by the launch solenoid 682 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 255 mainly includes a launch control circuit 953a. The firing control circuit 953a includes an operation signal from a handle rotation detection sensor 307 that electrically adjusts the strength (launch strength) of launching a game ball toward the game area 5a according to the rotational position of the handle 302, and a palm on the handle 302. And a single button operation sensor 312 for detecting whether or not the game ball launching (launching) is forcibly stopped by the player's will and a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 310 for detecting whether or not the finger is touching. The detection signal from is input via the handle relay terminal plate 315. In addition, when the CR unit 6 and the game ball lending device connection terminal plate 869 are electrically connected to each other, the launch control circuit 953a receives a CR connection signal to that effect via the payout control board 951. .

  The firing control circuit 953a performs control to adjust the drive current for launching (launching) the game ball toward the game area 5a based on the operation signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 307 and to output it to the firing solenoid 682. On the other hand, by outputting a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 255 via the handle relay terminal plate 315, the ball feeding member of the ball feeding unit 250 receives one game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, Control is performed to send the game ball received by the ball feeding member to the ball hitting device 650 side.

[6-4. Peripheral control board]
For the first control unit MCG, the peripheral control board 1510 of the second control unit SCG performs effect control based on various commands from the main control board 1310 as shown in FIG. 19, the display control drive board 4450 for drawing the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control unit 1511 for exchanging control commands and various information (various data), the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door. A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that controls the drawing of the frame-side effect display device 460 and controls the sound and sound effects that flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, calendar information that specifies the date, hour, minute, and second A real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as “RTC”) control unit 4165 that holds time information for specifying the And a, and volume adjustment volume 1510a be adjusted by turning operation of the knob portion volume such as music or sound effects flowing from Part speaker 573.

[6-4-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 123, the peripheral control unit 1511 that performs effect control controls the peripheral control MPU 1511a as a microprocessor and the power-on process executed when the power is turned on, and after a predetermined time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Various control programs such as a sub-control program that is executed and controls the production operation, a peripheral control ROM 1511b that stores various data, various control data, and various schedule data, and a VDP 1512a built in a sound source of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. Various information continued across the peripheral control unit steady process executed each time a blank signal is input (for example, schedule data for defining a screen to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600, and light emission modes such as various LEDs) Manage schedule data etc. Peripheral control RAM 1511c for storing information, etc., and various types of information continued across days (for example, information for managing a history of occurrence of a big hit gaming state, information for managing special performance flags, etc.) ) And a peripheral control external watchdog timer 1511e (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control external WDT 1511e”) for monitoring whether or not the peripheral control MPU 1511a is operating normally. I have.

  Peripheral control RAM 1511c can retain the stored content only for the time when power is restored immediately after a momentary power failure occurs, and power is cut off for a long time (when a long-time power interruption occurs) The peripheral control SRAM 1511d is supplied with backup power by a large-capacity electrolytic capacitor (not shown) provided on the power supply board 931 (hereinafter referred to as “electrolytic capacitor for SRAM”). Thus, the stored contents can be held for about 50 hours. Since the SRAM electrolytic capacitor is provided on the power supply board 931, when the game board 5 is removed from the pachinko machine 1, the backup power is not supplied to the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Therefore, the peripheral control SRAM 1511d You lose the contents because you can't hold it.

  The peripheral control external WDT 1511e is a timer for monitoring whether or not the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control. When this timer expires, it is reset by hardware. That is, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is reset when a clear signal for clearing the timer of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e is not output to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period (until the timer expires). When the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e within a certain period, the peripheral control external WDT 1511e can restart the timer count of the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, so that no reset is applied.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like, and upon receiving various commands from the main control board 1310, based on these various commands, each decorative board of the game board 5 The game board side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to a plurality of LEDs etc. provided in the lamp is outputted from the serial I / O port for lamp driving board via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown). The game board side motor drive data to be sent to the drive board 4170 or to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 is serialized for the motor drive board. The signal is transmitted from the I / O port to the motor drive board 4180 via the peripheral control output circuit, or the dial drive motor 414 provided on the door frame 3 is electrically connected. Door side motor drive data for outputting a drive signal to the general drive source from the frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port to the peripheral control output circuit, frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 The door-side light emission data for transmitting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via The frame decoration drive amplifier board LED serial I / O port transmits the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the peripheral control output circuit, the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are input to the serial I / O port for the main control board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Further, from the detection signal from the rotation detection switch for detecting the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the pressure detection switch for detecting the operation of the press operation unit 405 provided in the effect operation unit 400. Is serialized by a door-side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, and the serialized presentation operation unit detection data is transmitted from the door-side serial transmission circuit to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. , The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, and the peripheral control input circuit, are input to the rendering operation unit detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 1511a.

  Detection signals from various detection switches (for example, photo sensors, etc.) for detecting the original positions and movable positions of various movable bodies provided on the game board 5 are on the game board side (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180. Serialized by the serial transmission circuit, and this serialized movable body detection data is input from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a via the peripheral control input circuit. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 1511a exchanges various data between the peripheral control board 1510 and the motor drive board 4180 by switching the input / output of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a has a built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”). It is diagnosed whether or not.

[6-4-1a. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 1511a that is a microcomputer will be described. As shown in FIG. 124, the peripheral control MPU 1511a is centered around the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa, and includes a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 1511ac, a peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and peripheral control various serial I. / O port 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, peripheral control analog / digital converter (hereinafter referred to as peripheral control A / D converter) 1511ak, and the like.

  Peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads / writes various data to / from peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab and peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac via internal bus 1511ah, while peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, Various data are read from and written to the various peripheral control parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control CPU core 1511aa reads various data from the peripheral control ROM 1511b via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h, while reading from the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d. Various data are read and written via the internal bus 1511ah, the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad, and the external bus 1511h.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes storage devices such as a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, a peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, and a peripheral control various parallel I. / O port 1511ag and a dedicated controller for independently transferring data between devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak and the like without using the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. ~ It has four channels called DMA3.

  Specifically, the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac includes a storage device of a peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a, various peripheral control serial I / O ports 1511ae and a built-in peripheral control WDT 1511af built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. In order to transfer data independently between the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag and the input / output devices such as the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa. In addition, the peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab reads / writes from / to the storage device via the internal bus 1511ah, while the peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511. g, and the peripheral control A / D converter input and output devices such as 1511Ak, via the peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and peripheral bus 1511Ai, reading and writing.

  The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac is a storage device such as a peripheral control ROM 1511b, a peripheral control RAM 1511c, and a peripheral control SRAM 1511d, which is externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, and various peripheral control serial I / Os built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Without the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa between the devices such as the O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak and the like. In order to transfer data independently, peripheral control bus controller 1511ad and external bus 1511h are connected to storage devices such as peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control SRAM 1511d. The peripheral control serial I / O port 1511ae, the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, the peripheral control various parallel I / O port 1511ag, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak, etc. Reading and writing are performed via the control bus controller 1511ad and the peripheral bus 1511ai.

  The peripheral control bus controller 1511ad controls the internal bus 1511ah, peripheral bus 1511ai, and external bus 1511h to control the central processing unit of the peripheral control MPU core 1511aa, peripheral control built-in RAM 1511ab, peripheral control ROM 1511b, peripheral control RAM 1511c, and peripheral control Various devices such as a storage device such as SRAM 1511d and peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511ae, peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag, and peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak It is a dedicated controller that exchanges various data between them.

  Peripheral control various serial I / O port 1511ae includes a lamp drive board serial I / O port, a motor drive board serial I / O port, a frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, and a frame decoration drive amplifier board LED. Serial I / O port, frame decoration drive amplifier board motor serial I / O port, main control board serial I / O port, and rendering operation unit information acquisition serial I / O port.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 1511af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is running out of control, and when this timer is up, a hardware reset is performed. It has become. That is, if the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa resets if it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period (until the timer expires). Will take. When the peripheral CPU core 1511aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 1511af within a certain period, the peripheral control CPU core 1511aa can restart the timer count and therefore does not reset.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag output various latch signals such as a game board side motor drive latch signal and a door side motor drive light emission latch signal, and also output a clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT 1511e, The detection signals from various detection switches for detecting the original position and movable position of various movable bodies provided on the board 5 are serialized by a game board side serial transmission circuit (not shown) provided on the motor drive board 4180, and this serial The movable body information acquisition latch signal for receiving the converted movable body detection data from the serial transmission circuit on the game board side by the serial I / O port for the motor drive board of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output. This LED is a high-intensity white LED and serves as a confirmation notification lamp for informing that the occurrence of the big hit gaming state has been confirmed. In the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag are electrically connected directly, the path between the LED and the peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ag is shortened. Therefore, it is possible to take noise countermeasures for lighting control of the LED having a significant meaning in games. The LED lighting control is executed in a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, and other LEDs and the like other than the LED are executed in a peripheral control unit steady process described later. It has become.

  The peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is electrically connected to the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance value is changed by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the resistance at the rotation position of the knob portion is changed. The voltage divided by the value is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted to a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, the values of 1024 levels are divided into seven and managed as substrate volumes 0-6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a, which will be described later) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion.

  In this embodiment, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 or a content related to a game effect is notified. (For example, to make the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 more powerful, or to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player). The notification sound also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part. The volume can be adjusted by controlling a liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (a sound source built-in VDP 1512a described later) by a program. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, production sounds such as music and sound effects that flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound. Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, there is a possibility that the screen unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 will be rendered more powerful, or a game state that is advantageous to the player may be entered. You can also announce that it is expensive.

[6-4-1b. Peripheral control ROM]
The peripheral control ROM 1511b stores in advance various control programs, various data, various control data, and various schedule data for controlling the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the RTC control unit 4165, and the like. The various schedule data includes screen generation schedule data for generating screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, light emission mode generation schedule data for generating light emission modes of various LEDs, music And sound generation schedule data for generating sound effects and the like, and electric drive source schedule data for generating a drive mode of an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid. The screen generation schedule data is configured by arranging screen data for defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of the screens to be drawn on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is specified. Has been. The light emission mode generation schedule data is configured by arranging light emission data defining the light emission modes of various LEDs in time series. The sound generation schedule data is configured by arranging sound command data in time series, and defines the order in which music and sound effects flow. The sound command data includes an output channel number for instructing which output channel to use among a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later, and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. A track number for instructing which of the plurality of tracks in the built-in sound source is to incorporate sound data such as music and sound effects is defined. The electrical drive source schedule data is configured by arranging drive data of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids in time series, and defines the operation of electrical drive sources such as motors and solenoids.

  Various control programs stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be read out and executed directly from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, or copied to various control program copy areas in the peripheral control RAM 1511c described later when the power is turned on. Some are read and executed. In addition, various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b may be directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some of which are copied in the above are read out.

  In addition, the peripheral control ROM 1511b, as one of various control programs for controlling the RTC control unit 4165, corrects the luminance of the game board side effect display device 1600 according to the usage time of the game board side effect display device 1600. A brightness correction program is included. This brightness correction program corrects a decrease in brightness due to aging of the game board side effect display device 1600 when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. The date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, the current date and time, the luminance setting information, and the like are acquired from the built-in RAM of the RTC control unit 4165 described later, and the acquired luminance setting information is based on the correction information. To correct. This correction information is stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b. As will be described later, the luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, The brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is set is included. For example, the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on and the current date and time From the date when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, when six months have already passed, the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the brightness When the brightness of the LED included in the setting information is 75% and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on, the correction information acquired for this 75% is used. On the game board side, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the brightness adjustment information included in the brightness setting information so that the brightness is further increased by 5%. When December has already passed since the date when the effect display device 1600 was first turned on, the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b, and the LED included in the brightness setting information When the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on at a luminance of 75%, the luminance setting is set so that the luminance is 85% which is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired with respect to this 75%. Based on the brightness adjustment information included in the information, the brightness of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted to light up.

[6-4-1c. Peripheral control RAM]
As shown in FIG. 124, the peripheral control RAM 1511c externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a is a backup that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. The management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca, and the peripheral control ROM 1511b Control data copy area 1511cd for storing a copy of various control programs exclusively, and various data, various control data, and various schedule data stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b Control data copy area 1511ce for storing a copy of the information, and backup non-management for storing information not updated as a backup among various information updated by executing various control programs A target work area 1511cf is provided.

  When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on (including when power is restored due to a momentary power failure or power failure), the value 0 is forcibly written to the backup unmanaged work area 1511cf and cleared to zero. For the management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc, the power-on state command (see FIG. 146) from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on starts the RAM clear effect. And a game state (for example, an instruction to start an effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 127 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on). Sometimes it is cleared to zero.

  The backup management target work area 1511ca is effect information (1fr) that is various information updated in the peripheral control unit steady process that is executed each time a V blank signal is input from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 described later. ) Is stored exclusively as a backup target, and production information (1 ms) which is various information updated in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt described later occurs is backed up. Bank 0 (1 ms) that is stored exclusively as a target. Here, the names of Bank0 (1fr) and Bank0 (1 ms) will be briefly described. “Bank” is a minimum management unit representing the size of a storage area for storing various information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. In addition, “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511cb to the backup second area 1511cc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. As described later, “(1fr)” indicates that when the sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (one frame) to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460, the peripheral control MPU 1511a. Since the V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be received from the peripheral control MPU 1511a is output to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, every time the V blank signal is input, in other words, one frame (1 frame) Since the peripheral control unit steady process is executed every time, “Bank 0”, “Bank 1”, “Bank 2”, “Bank 3”, and “Bank 4” are respectively added (effect information (1fr) and an effect described later) The backup information (1fr) is also used in the same meaning). As described later, “(1 ms)” indicates that “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3”, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank3”, and the like are executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. And “Bank 4”, respectively (the effect information (1 ms) and the effect backup information (1 ms) described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Bank0 (1fr) includes a lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, a frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, a reception command storage area 1511cac, an RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad, and a schedule data storage area 1511cae. Etc. are provided. In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 5 is provided. Is stored in the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting to a plurality of LEDs provided on each decoration board of the door frame 3 This is a storage area in which door side light emission data STL-DAT for outputting a signal is set. In the reception command storage area 1511cac, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received and the received various commands are stored. The RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad is an RTC control unit 4165 (an RTC 4165a described later). Various information acquired from the TC built-in RAM 4165aa) is set in a storage area, and the schedule data storage area 1511cae corresponds to the received command based on the command received from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a). This is a storage area in which various schedule data are set. In the schedule data storage area 1511cae, some schedule data copied from the peripheral control ROM 1511b to the various control data copy area 1511ce are read and set, and various schedule data are directly read from the peripheral control ROM 1511b. Some are set.

  Bank 0 (1 ms) includes a frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf, a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag, a movable body information acquisition storage area 1511 cah, and a presentation operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 cai, and A drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak and the like are provided. In the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf, door side motor drive data STM-DAT for outputting a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a dial drive motor 414 provided in the door frame 3 is stored. This is a storage area to be set, and a motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is used to output a drive signal to an electric drive source such as a motor or solenoid for operating various movable bodies provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area where the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set. The movable body information acquisition storage area 1511cah is provided in the game board 5 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the game board 5. This is a storage area in which various information obtained by acquiring the original position and the movable position of various movable bodies is set, and an effect operation unit information acquisition storage area 1511 is set. ai includes various pieces of information (for example, a presentation operation) obtained from the rotation (rotation direction) of the dial operation unit 401 and the operation of the pressing operation unit 405 based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the presentation operation unit 400. A storage area in which rotation (rotation direction) history information of the dial operation unit 401 created based on detection signals from various detection switches provided in the unit 400, operation history information of the pressing operation unit 405, and the like is set. Yes, in the drawing state information acquisition storage area 1511cak, when the presentation display drive board 4450 receives drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a of the peripheral control board 1510 and determines that the received drawing data is abnormal data, Peripheral control board 1510 and effects based on a LOCKN signal, which will be described later, output to convey the effect A storage area in which various information acquired defect frequency and bug occurrence between connection of the shown drive substrate 4450 is set.

  In addition, Bank0 (1fr) lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa and frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab, and Bank0 (1ms) frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. The motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is divided into two areas, a first area and a second area, respectively.

  In the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa, when the peripheral control unit steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. When the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data storage area 1511caa. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is set in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT set in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data storage area 1511caa.

  When the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab has the door-side emission data STL in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. When -DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door-side emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board-side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. Each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the door side light emission data STL-DAT is alternately set in the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. The For example, when the door side light emission data STL-DAT is set in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side LED transmission data storage area 1511cab in the current peripheral control part steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side light emission data STL-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board LED transmission data storage area 1511cab. It has become.

  The frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf is connected to the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later is executed. When the side motor drive data STM-DAT is set and the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side motor drive data STM is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. -DAT is set, and each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the door side is connected to the first area and the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf. Motor drive data STM-DAT is set alternately. The peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. For example, in this peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT is stored in the second area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511 caf. When set, the door side motor drive data STM-DAT set in the first area of the frame decoration drive amplifier board side motor transmission data storage area 1511caf when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process was executed. The process is based on this.

  When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag is set with the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. When the next peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag, Each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately set in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is executed. For example, in the current peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is set in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511 cag. Sometimes, when the previous peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT set in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data storage area 1511cag. It is like that.

  Next, the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc that store specially copied production information which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511ca will be described. In the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc, two pairs of two banks as one pair are managed as one page. Production information (1fr), which is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, is produced as production backup information (1fr) every time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). In addition, production information (1 ms) which is the content stored in Bank 0 (1 ms), which is a storage area normally used, is copied to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac. As the production backup information (1 ms), the peripheral control DMA controller 15 is added to the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc every time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. It is copied to the high speed by 1ac. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511cb, Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) are one pair, Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) are one pair, and a total of two pairs are managed as one page. ing. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr) match. Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  The backup second area 1511cc is managed as one page with a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. The contents stored in Bank0 (1fr), which is a storage area that is normally used, are the peripheral control DMA in Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1frame). The memory that is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms), which is a storage area that is normally used, is stored every time a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs. The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the data to Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 (1 ms) at high speed. The consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) match. Bank3 (1 ms) and Bank4 ( It carried out by whether or not the contents of the ms) are the same.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the backup first area 1511cb has one pair of Bank1 (1fr) and Bank2 (1fr), and one pair of Bank1 (1ms) and Bank2 (1ms). It is an area to manage as a page, and the backup second area 1511cc has a total of two pairs, with Bank3 (1fr) and Bank4 (1fr) as one pair and Bank3 (1ms) and Bank4 (1ms) as one pair. This is an area for management as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and end of each page, that is, at the beginning and end of the backup first area 1511cb and backup second area 1511cc.

  In the present embodiment, the production information (1fr) that is the content stored in Bank0 (1fr) that is a storage area that is normally used is the production control information (1fr), and the peripheral control unit for each frame (1frame). Every time the steady process is executed, the contents are copied to the backup first area 1511cb and the backup second area 1511cc at high speed by the peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac and stored in Bank0 (1 ms) which is a storage area normally used. The production information (1 ms) is the backup first area 1511 cb and the backup second area 1511 cc each time the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interruption process is executed every time a 1 ms timer interruption occurs as production backup information (1 ms). Peripheral control Although designed to be copied at a high speed by the MA controller 1511Ac, a program for executing a fast copy from these peripheral control DMA controller 1511Ac are common. That is, in this embodiment, the production information (1fr) and the production information (1 ms) are managed by a common management method (execution of a common program).

[6-4-1d. Peripheral control SRAM]
A peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a includes a backup management target work area 1511da that exclusively stores information to be backed up among various information updated by executing various control programs. A backup first area 1511db and a backup second area 1511dc are provided for storing a copy of various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da. The contents stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d are the power-on state commands from the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on (including when power is restored due to an instantaneous power failure or power failure) (see FIG. 146) Is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the operation switch 954 shown in FIG. 120 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on. Is not cleared to zero. This is completely different from the point that the backup management target work area 1511ca, the backup first area 1511cb, and the backup second area 1511cc of the peripheral control RAM 1511c are cleared to zero. Further, if the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. It has come to be. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, each content (item) stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d (for example, the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state) The contents (items) stored in the peripheral control RAM 1511c are not displayed at all, and cannot be cleared in the setting mode. This point is also completely different between the peripheral control RAM 1511c and the peripheral control SRAM 1511d.

  The backup management target work area 1511da is production information (SRAM) that is various information continued across days (for example, information for managing the history of occurrence of the big hit gaming state and special production flag management) Information) and the like are stored in a dedicated manner as a backup target. Here, the name of Bank 0 (SRAM) will be briefly described. As described above, “Bank” is a minimum management unit indicating the size of a storage area for storing various types of information. The subsequent “0” means that the storage area is normally used for storing various information updated by executing various control programs. That is, “Bank 0” means that the size of the storage area that is normally used is the minimum management unit. “Bank1,” “Bank2,” “Bank3,” and “Bank4” provided in an area from the backup first area 1511db to the backup second area 1511dc, which will be described later, are in the same storage area as “Bank0”. It means having a size. Since “(SRAM)” is a backup target of various information stored in the peripheral control SRAM 1511d externally attached to the peripheral control MPU 1511a, “Bank0”, “Bank1”, “Bank2”, “Bank3” , And “Bank 4”, respectively (effect information (SRAM) and effect backup information (SRAM) to be described later are also used in the same meaning).

  Next, the backup first area 1511db and backup second area 1511dc that store specially copied production information (SRAM), which is various information stored in the backup management target work area 1511da, will be described. The backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc are managed with two banks as one pair, and this one pair as one page. Production information (SRAM), which is the content stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area used normally, is production backup information (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). The peripheral control DMA controller 1511ac copies the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc at high speed. The consistency of one page is determined by whether or not the contents of two banks constituting the page match.

  Specifically, in the backup first area 1511db, Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank1 (SRAM) and Bank2 (SRAM) match.

  In the backup second area 1511dc, Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) are managed as one pair, and this one pair is managed as one page. The contents stored in Bank 0 (SRAM), which is a storage area that is normally used, are stored in the peripheral control DMA in Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) each time the peripheral control unit steady process is executed for each frame (1 frame). This page is copied at high speed by the controller 1511ac, and the consistency of this page is determined by whether or not the contents of Bank3 (SRAM) and Bank4 (SRAM) match.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the backup first area 1511db is an area for managing Bank 1 (SRAM) and Bank 2 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. 1511 dc is an area for managing Bank 3 (SRAM) and Bank 4 (SRAM) as one pair, and managing this one pair as one page. Different ID codes are stored at the beginning and the end of each page, that is, at the beginning and the end of the backup first area 1511db and the backup second area 1511dc.

[6-4-2. Liquid crystal display controller]
A liquid crystal display control unit 1512 that performs drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460 and sound control such as music and sound effects flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is as shown in FIG. In addition, a sound source for controlling sound such as music and sound effects is built in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in sound source”) and drawing control of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is performed. Sound source built-in VDP (Video Display Processor) 1512a and various sound data such as music and sound effects in addition to various character data on the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 Liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b for storing data, and serialized music, sound effects, etc. as audio data Audio data transmission IC 1512c to be transmitted toward the decoration drive amplifier board 194, and door frame side effect display attached to the right side of the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 with the serialized drawing data to the door frame side effect display device 460. Serial data output from door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d which is arranged near the lower part of device 460 and transmitted toward effect display drive board 4450 housed in dish unit 320, and peripheral control MPU 1511a of peripheral control unit 1511 In addition to the signal output from the differential circuit 1512e that differentiates the LOCKN signal output request data into a plus signal and a minus signal and the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the signal from the difference circuit 1512e And the signal from the differential circuit 1512e When the signal is input, the circuit is connected so as to transmit this signal. On the other hand, when the signal from the differential circuit 1512e is not input, the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is transmitted. And a forced switching circuit 1512f for circuit connection. The liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b displays, for example, annular image data used for displaying a ring-shaped display object (annular display object), and an operation menu background image described later as sprite data used for displaying a screen or an image described later. Operation menu background image data to be used, selection display object image data used for displaying at least one selection display object described later, tone adjustment background image data used for displaying a volume adjustment screen including a volume scale described later, and a volume adjustment icon described later In addition to volume setting icon image data used for display, display of main body frame rear surface image data and service mode screen used for display of main body frame rear image in which the position of each part on the rear surface of main body frame 4 can be viewed when viewed from the player Service mode screen image data used for breaks, breaks used to display break timer setting screens Timer setting screen image data, and, during breaks screen image data used for displaying the break in the screen is stored. Note that the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b also stores suggestion display object image data used for displaying the suggestion display object for prompting the user to operate the pressing operation unit 405 (operation unit) of the effect operation unit 400.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 extracts screen generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the top screen data of the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is stored in the peripheral control ROM 1511b or the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control unit 1511. After being extracted from the control data copy area 1511ce and output to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data is triggered by the input of the V blank signal described later. The next screen data following the first screen data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in accordance with the screen generation schedule data set in the storage area 1511cae and has a built-in sound source. Output to VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a converts the screen data arranged in time series into the screen generation schedule data according to the screen generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae every time the V blank signal is input. In addition, the first screen data is output to the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source one by one.

  Also, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data at the head of the sound generation schedule data corresponding to the command from the main control board 1310 from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c. Extracted and set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, the head sound command data of the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae is the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the peripheral After extracting from the various control data copy area 1511ce of the control RAM 1511c and outputting it to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the schedule data recording is triggered by the input of the V blank signal. In accordance with the sound generation schedule data set in the area 1511cae, the next sound command data following the head sound command data is extracted from the peripheral control ROM 1511b of the peripheral control unit 1511 or the various control data copy areas 1511ce of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and the sound source Output to the built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the sound command data arranged in time series in the sound generation schedule data according to the sound generation schedule data set in the schedule data storage area 1511cae, and the V blank signal is input. Each time, the head sound command data is output to the built-in sound source VDP 1512a one by one.

[6-4-2a. Sound source built-in VDP]
When the screen data is inputted from the peripheral control MPU 1511a in addition to the above-mentioned built-in sound source, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives a game board from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b based on the inputted screen data as shown in FIG. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is generated by extracting the side character data and the upper plate character data and generating sprite data. VRAM for this purpose is also built-in (hereinafter referred to as “built-in VRAM”). The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs the drawing data for the game board side effect display device 1600 out of the drawing data generated on the built-in VRAM to the game board side effect display device 1600 from the channel CH1 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Drawing data is transmitted from the channel CH2 via a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and an effect display drive board 4450 stored in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3. By outputting (transmitting) to the door frame side effect display device 460, the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are synchronized.

  The drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, whereas the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay. The terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display which is disposed in the vicinity of the lower side of the door frame side effect display device 460 attached to the right side of the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3 and is stored in the plate unit 320. It is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the drive substrate 4450. As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display apparatus 1600 as described above, so that the peripheral control board 1510 and the game board side effect display apparatus 1600 Although the wiring length required for the route from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600 is short by being attached to the game board 5, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 is the peripheral data as described above. The peripheral control board 1510 is attached to the game board 5 because it is output from the control board 1510 to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. On the other hand, the effect display drive board 4450 is housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The length of the wiring required for the route from the channel CH2 to the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, so that it is extremely susceptible to noise. Become. For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d uses “V-by-One ( By adopting a differential communication called “registered trademark”, the system is less susceptible to noise.

  The channel CH1 uses a serial differential interface called LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling), while the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data output from the channel CH2 is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Serialized by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 4610d and housed in a peripheral control output circuit (not shown), a frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, a peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the effect display drive board 4450. The various serialized signals are restored to parallel signals in the effect display drive board 4450 and output to the door frame effect display device 460.

  As described above, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a outputs the screen data for one screen (one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 to the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, Based on the input screen data, character data is extracted from the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b to create sprite data and displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 (1 Frame data) is generated on the built-in VRAM, and among the generated drawing data, image data for the game board side effect display device 1600 is output from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and the door frame side The image data for the effect display device 460 is illustrated from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Send. That is, “screen data for one screen (for one frame)” means drawing data for one screen (for one frame) displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. This is the data to generate above.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a outputs drawing data for one screen (for one frame) from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and also displays image data for the door frame side effect display device 460 from the channel CH2. Output to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. (Transmission) outputs a V blank signal to the peripheral control MPU 1511a indicating that the screen data from the peripheral control MPU 1511a can be accepted. In this embodiment, since the frame frequency (number of screen updates per second) of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is set to approximately 30 fps per second, a V blank signal is output. The interval is about 33.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). The peripheral control MPU 1511a is configured to execute a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process to be described later when this V blank signal is input. Here, the interval at which the V blank signal is output varies somewhat depending on the liquid crystal sizes of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. In addition, even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control MPU 1511a and the sound source built-in VDP 1512a are mounted, the interval at which the V blank signal is output may slightly change.

  The sound source built-in VDP 1512a employs a frame buffer method. In this “frame buffer method”, drawing data for one screen (one frame) to be drawn on the screens of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is held in a frame buffer (built-in VRAM). The drawing data for one screen (one frame) held in the frame buffer (built-in VRAM) is output to the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460.

  Further, when the sound command data described above is input from the peripheral control MPU 1511a based on a command from the main control board 1310, the sound source built-in VDP 1512a receives music stored in the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b as shown in FIG. By extracting sound data such as sound and sound effects and controlling the built-in sound source, sound data such as music and sound effects are incorporated into the track according to the track number specified in the sound command data and used according to the output channel number An output channel is set, and music, sound effects and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 are serialized and output as audio data to the audio data transmission IC 1512c.

  Note that the sound command data also includes a sub-volume value for adjusting the volume of the track in which the sound data is incorporated. In addition to the sub-volume value for adjusting the sound data and the volume of the sound, the sound data of the notification sound and the sound volume for notifying the clerk of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 and the fraud to the pachinko machine 1 are adjusted. Subvolume value to be included. Specifically, for the production sound, the substrate volume adjusted by rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a described above is set as the sub volume value, and for the notification sound, the volume adjustment is performed. The maximum volume is set as the sub-volume value without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the volume 1510a. The sub-volume value of the effect sound can be adjusted by shifting to a setting mode (to be described later) by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400.

  The sound designation data also includes a master volume value for adjusting the volume of the output channel, and a plurality of output channels in the built-in sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a include a plurality of sound channels in the built-in sound source of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Of the tracks, the sound data of the production sound built into the track to be used is combined with the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound built into the track to be used. Actually, it is amplified to a master volume value which is a volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, and the amplified effect sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

  In the present embodiment, the master volume value is set to a constant value, and the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 is amplified to the master volume value when the volume of the combined effect sound is the maximum volume. Is set to the maximum allowable volume. Specifically, for the production sound, among the multiple tracks, the sound data of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used and the sub-volume value that adjusts the volume of the production sound incorporated in the track to be used The set volume adjustment volume 1510a is rotated to adjust the substrate volume, and the synthesized volume of the effect sound is actually set to the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. The amplified production sound is serialized and output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data. For the notification sound, the sound data of the notification sound incorporated in the track to be used and the use Volume adjustment buttons set as sub-volume values to adjust the volume of the notification sound built into the track to be played The volume of the combined notification sound is actually the volume flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by combining the maximum volume without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob portion of the knob 1510a. It amplifies to the master volume value, serializes the amplified notification sound, and outputs it to the audio data transmission IC 1512c as audio data.

  Here, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the control for playing the notification sound in order to notify the clerk or the like of the hall of the occurrence of the malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or the illegal act on the pachinko machine 1 is briefly described. To explain, first, the sub volume value of the track in which the production sound is incorporated is forcibly set to mute, the sound data of the track in which this production sound is incorporated, the sub volume value set for the mute, and the notification sound Is synthesized with the sub-volume value in which the volume of the notification sound is set to the maximum volume, and the volume of the combined effect sound and the volume of the notification sound is actually combined with the speaker 921. And the master volume value that is the volume flowing from the upper speaker 573, and the amplified production sound and notification sound are serialized to obtain audio data. And it outputs the audio data transmitted IC1512c as data.

  That is, as for the sound that actually flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, only the notification sound of the maximum volume flows. At this time, since the effect sound is muted, the effect sound proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data described above, although it does not flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. In the present embodiment, the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 for a predetermined period (for example, 90 seconds), and when the predetermined period elapses, the notification sound is forcibly set to mute until now. The volume of the effect sound that is proceeding according to the schedule data is set again as the sub-volume value by adjusting the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to be rotated (at this time, the dial operation of the effect operation unit 400 is performed). If the adjustment is made by moving to the setting mode by operating the unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405, the adjusted volume is set to the sub-volume value of the adjusted production sound) and flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573. It has become.

  In this way, when the production sound is flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, when the notification sound flows in order to inform the hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1, Although the sound volume is muted and the notification sound flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the effect sound that has been muted proceeds in accordance with the sound generation schedule data. When it stops flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, the production sound does not start to flow again from the point where the notification sound starts to flow, but progresses according to the sound generation schedule data until a predetermined period has passed since the notification sound started to flow. It starts to flow again from.

[6-4-2b. Liquid crystal and sound control ROM]
As shown in FIG. 125, the liquid crystal and sound control ROM 1512b is used to draw the game board side character data for drawing in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460. The upper plate side character data is stored in advance, and various sound data such as music, sound effects, notification sounds, and notification sounds are also stored in advance.

[6-4-2c. Audio data transmission IC]
When the audio data transmission IC 1512c receives the serialized audio data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the audio data transmission IC 1512c converts the right audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal as differential serial data and outputs a peripheral control output circuit and frame peripheral relay (not shown). A peripheral control output circuit (not shown) is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and as differential serial data with the left audio data as a positive signal and a negative signal. Then, the frame is transmitted to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 via the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882. Thereby, music, sound effects, etc. adapted to various effects are reproduced in stereo from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  The audio data transmission IC 1512c outputs audio data as serial data of the left and right differential methods between the boards extending from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194, for example, a positive signal of the left audio data, Even when the negative signal is affected by noise, the frame decoration drive amplifier board 194 combines the noise component riding on the plus signal and the noise component riding on the minus signal into one left audio data. Since noise components are canceled by canceling each other, noise countermeasures can be taken.

[6-4-2d. Transmitter IC for door frame side production]
As shown in FIG. 125, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. As described above, the channel CH2 uses a parallel interface. The drawing data is composed of three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals, a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal. Each of the green video signal and the blue video signal is composed of 8 bits and a total of 24 bits. In the present embodiment, the red video signal, the green video signal, and the blue video signal that can be input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are 6 bits each, for a total of 18 bits, and therefore the upper 6 bits in each video signal are the door frame. It is input to the side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Since the lower 2 bits are extremely weak color information that is difficult for human eyes to discriminate, the lower 2 bits including the weak color information are invalidated although they are output from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a.

  Three video signals such as a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, and three synchronization signals such as a horizontal synchronization signal, a vertical synchronization signal, and a clock signal, which are drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. Are input to the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d receives three video signals, a red video signal, a green video signal, and a blue video signal, a horizontal synchronization signal, and a vertical synchronization signal. The signal and the three synchronization signals, the clock signal, are serialized into a differential serial signal (serial data) called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of THINE ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. These various signals are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 around the frame. Terminal plate 868, near the door relay terminal plate 882, and transmitted to effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  As described above, the drawing data output from the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a is output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the game board side effect display device 1600, and therefore the path from the channel CH1 to the game board side effect display device 1600. Although the length of the wiring required for the (first path) is short, the drawing data output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a includes the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the door from the peripheral control board 1510. Since it is output (transmitted) to the door frame side effect display device 460 via the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the frame 3, the route from the channel CH 2 to the door frame side effect display device 460 (first) The length of the wiring required for the second path) is extremely longer than the length of the wiring required for the first path. The effect of the noise is extremely susceptible.

  Specifically, since the door frame 3 is pivotally supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 1, it is opposite to the locking unit 700 shown in FIG. 5 along the open side of the main body frame 4. On the closed side which is the side, for example, on the side of the main body frame 4 such as the effect display drive board 4450 accommodated in the dish unit 320 provided in the door frame 3 from the peripheral control board 1510 provided in the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 It is necessary to pass various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side. However, on the closed side of the main body frame 4, in addition to the payout device 830, the game balls paid out by the payout device 830 can be guided to the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320, and the upper plate 321 is a game ball. A full tank branching unit 770 that can branch and guide the paid-out game ball to the lower plate 322 side when the tank is full is arranged. Also, below the main body frame 4, a payout unit 800 shown in FIG. 5 is arranged in which the power supply board 931 and the like shown in FIG. As described above, various wirings for electrically connecting the various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and the various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side are drawn near the dispensing device 830, the full tank branching unit 770, the power supply substrate 931, and the like. In addition to the noise caused by driving the payout motor 834 provided in the payout device 830, the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island equipment where the pachinko machine 1 is installed and noise caused by electrostatic discharge due to the game ball It is in an environment where it receives noise etc.

  For this reason, for the channel CH2 in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than that of the channel CH1, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 provides “ By adopting a differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)”, the mechanism is less susceptible to noise. In this embodiment, a door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, As described above, the differential 1-pair cable is used as the wiring for electrically connecting the transmitter and the receiver, and this differential 1-pair cable is composed of two wires. Is not a parallel line provided in parallel, but a twisted pair cable. This twisted pair cable is a cable in which two wires are twisted together, and is also called a twisted pair wire.

  Here, the case where a parallel line is adopted as a differential one-pair cable for electrically connecting a transmitter and a receiver will be briefly described. For the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending the drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 Even if it is a mechanism that is difficult to be affected by noise by adopting a differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Co., Ltd., it is only due to electrostatic discharge of a game ball with such a hardware configuration. When serial data on parallel lines is affected by noise, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., an effect display stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 For door frame side effects on drive board 4450 Since the noise is not canceled (removed) when it is received by the shiver ICSDIC0, the serial data is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 in an affected state, and is output from the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP1512a. The drawing data to be received is received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 as being disturbed different from the normal one. In the display area of the door frame side effect display device 460, a so-called sand storm-like image is displayed. There is a problem that it cannot be recognized at all.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the door frame side provided on the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the channel CH2 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a in which the length of the wiring for sending drawing data is extremely longer than the channel CH1 of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a. In the transmitter IC1512d for production, the differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. is adopted to make it difficult to be affected by noise, and in addition to such hardware configuration Even if differential serial data is affected by noise that enters the wiring, a twisted pair cable that can cancel (remove) the noise on the receiving side is electrically connected between the transmitter and the receiver. It was adopted as a differential 1 pair cable. As a result, even if serial data is affected in the twisted pair cable due to noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the game ball, noise entering the power supply line supplied from the pachinko island facility where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, etc., the door frame Since the noise is canceled (removed) when receiving by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the third dish unit 320, the channel of the sound source built-in VDP 1512a The drawing data output from CH2 is reliably received by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 provided in the effect display drive substrate 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 and output to the door frame side effect display device 460. By doing so, in the door frame side effect display device 460, the liquid crystal display control unit 151 Image source built VDP1512a has generated a can be reliably displayed. By canceling (removing) the noise, it is possible to prevent the door frame side effect display device 460 from displaying an image that makes it impossible to recognize what the image is like a sandstorm. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play due to the influence of noise.

  In this embodiment, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 are provided. The frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 are interposed between the connections between the transmitter and the receiver, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. This is because the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 are not configured integrally, but a structure in which the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4 after being assembled separately is adopted. After the operation of attaching the door frame 3 to the door 4, electrically connect various wirings such as harnesses and twist cables from various boards provided on the door frame 3 side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side. Thus, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various substrates provided on the door frame 3 side can be electrically connected. With such a configuration, after the door frame 3 is opened from the main body frame 4 and various wirings are removed, the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 can be maintained by removing the door frame 3 from the main body frame 4. If the problem that occurred in the door frame 3 cannot be resolved, another door frame 3 ′ is attached to the main body frame 4 instead of the defective door frame 3, and the door frame 3 By electrically connecting various wirings from various substrates provided on the 'side to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 provided on the main body frame 4 side, various substrates provided on the main body frame 4 side and various types provided on the door frame 3' side The substrate can be electrically connected.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 employs differential communication called “V-by-One (registered trademark)” of Zain Electronics Co., Ltd. In addition to this hardware configuration, even if differential serial data is affected by noise that enters the wiring, the receiver cancels (removes) the noise. The twisted-pair cable that can be used as a differential one-pair cable that electrically connects the transmitter and the receiver. Specifically, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882 and the effect display drive. The board 4450 and the board 4450 are each electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, while the power supply wiring and other lines for transmitting various signals are electrically connected by a harness. Thereby, in addition to the video transmission wiring pattern for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d, the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, A power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns for transmitting various other signals are mixed. For this reason, the above-described video transmission wiring patterns are formed on the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 by being separated from the power supply wiring pattern and various signal wiring patterns by a predetermined dimension. Since the route from the transmitter to the receiver spans a plurality of relay terminal plates such as the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, the video transmission formed on the plurality of relay terminal plates is used. Between the input and output of the wiring pattern, there is a problem that a part of the signal for transmitting the serial data by the differential method transmitted by the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d is reflected and becomes noise, or the output level of the signal is lowered. Will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, impedance matching is performed on the video transmission wiring patterns formed on the plurality of relay terminal boards.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, between the peripheral control board 1510 and the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, between the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the peripheral door relay. Between the board of the terminal board 882 and the production display drive board 4450, each is electrically connected by a twisted pair cable, whereas in the wiring for transmitting power supply wiring and other various signals, each is electrically connected by a harness. Although one of the twisted pair cables is red and the other is gray, the wiring that supplies power is red and the other multiple wirings are gray. . Note that the power supply wiring may be yellow instead of red.

[6-4-2e. Forced switching circuit, differential circuit]
Signals output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d are sent to the forced switching circuit 1512f, the peripheral control output circuit (not shown), the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868, the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882, and the tray unit 320 of the door frame 3. It is transmitted to the stored effect display drive board 4450. The forced switching circuit 1512f includes LOCKN signal output request data which is serial data output from the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Is differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differencing circuit 1512e. The differential circuit 1512e serializes the LOCKN signal output request data into a differential serial signal (serial data). This LOCKN signal output request data is displayed during the period when the start-up screen at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in the state of waiting for the customer, and the game board side effect display device 1600 demonstrates. During the period of time, the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the door frame side effect receiver IC SDIC0 described later provided in the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3; Is transmitted as an operation confirmation request of the door frame side effect display device 460 in order to confirm whether or not there is a problem in the connection between the transmitters, that is, between the transmitter and the receiver. The forcible switching circuit 1512f is connected to the circuit so as to transmit the two signals that are differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal in the differentiation circuit 1512e, while transmitting the two signals. When the two signals differentiated into the plus signal and the minus signal are not inputted in the merging circuit 1512e, the circuit configuration is such that the circuit is connected so as to transmit the signal outputted from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Has been. As a result, when two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are input in the differential circuit 1512e, the two signals are connected to each other so as to transmit the two signals. The peripheral control board 1510 transmits the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868, the peripheral door relay terminal board 882, and the effect display drive board 4450 housed in the plate unit 320 of the door frame 3, while the differential circuit 1512e When two signals differentiated into a plus signal and a minus signal are not input, a circuit is connected so as to transmit a signal output from the door frame side effect transmitter IC 1512d. Signals output from the IC 1512d are transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 to the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868 and the peripheral door relay terminal board 8. 2, and transmitted to the effect display driving board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3. The peripheral control MPU 1511a is performing a demonstration by the game board side effect display device 1600 during a period when the start-up screen when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600, or in a waiting state. In the period, the LOCKN signal output request data is transmitted toward the effect display drive board 4450 (actually, the differential circuit 1512e provided in the peripheral control board 1510) housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3.

  The effect display drive board 4450 housed in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3 receives various serialized signals when receiving a serial signal (serial data) from the peripheral control board 1510 by the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 described later. The liquid crystal module circuit 4450V that restores the signal to a parallel signal and outputs the parallel signal to the door frame side effect display device 460 is mainly configured.

  When receiving the drawing data from the sound source built-in VDP 1512a and determining that the received drawing data is abnormal data, the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 transmits a LOCKN signal to be described later to the peripheral door relay terminal board 882. Then, the data is output to the peripheral control board 1510 via the frame peripheral relay terminal board 868. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Peripheral control MPU 1511a, based on the input LOCKN signal, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, generates an image for informing that effect by controlling sound source built-in VDP 1512a and outputs it to game board side effect display device 1600. Is displayed on the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and notified.

  Further, when the door frame side effect receiver ICSDIC0 determines that the two received signals are LOCKN signal output request data, the LOCKN signal described later is transmitted to the peripheral door relay terminal plate 882 and the frame peripheral relay terminal plate 868. Via the peripheral control board 1510. The LOCKN signal is input to the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 of the peripheral control board 1510 via a peripheral control input circuit (not shown) of the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, the peripheral control MPU 1511a determines that there is no problem in the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is input as a response signal to the transmission of the LOCKN signal output request data. 320, it can be determined that there is no problem with the effect display drive board 4450 housed in 320, but there is a problem with the connection between the transmitter and the receiver when the LOCKN signal is not input. It is determined that a defect has occurred in the effect display drive board 4450 stored in the dish unit 320 of the door frame 3, and a notification image (for example, “a defect has occurred in the upper dish side liquid crystal display device” is reported. Please call the store clerk. ”) Is controlled by the VDP1512a with built-in sound source. In addition to being output to the display device 1600, a notification sound indicating that effect (for example, “a defect has occurred in the upper plate side liquid crystal display device”) is output to the audio data transmission IC 1512c by controlling the VDP 1512a with built-in sound source. As a result, a notification sound flows from the speaker provided in the door frame 3. Thereby, notification can be performed by the notification image displayed in the display area of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the notification sound that repeatedly flows from the speaker or the like provided on the door frame 3. At this time, all of the LEDs for light emitting decoration provided in the door frame 3 and the various LEDs mounted on various decoration boards provided in the game board 5 may be lit.

[6-4-3. RTC control unit]
As shown in FIG. 123, the RTC control unit 4165 that holds calendar information that specifies the date and time and time information that specifies the hour, minute, and second is configured with an RTC 4165a as the center. The RTC 4165a has a built-in RAM 4165aa that holds calendar information and time information (hereinafter referred to as “RTC built-in RAM 4165aa”). The RTC 4165a is supplied with power from a battery 4165b (in this embodiment, a button battery is used) as a driving power source and a backup power source for the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. That is, the RTC 4165a is not supplied with any power from the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1), but is supplied with power from the battery 4165b independently of the peripheral control board 1510 (pachinko machine 1). Thereby, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, the RTC 4165a can update and hold calendar information and time information by supplying power from the battery 4165b.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control unit 1511 acquires calendar information and time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC 4165a, sets the information in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c, and stores the acquired calendar information and time information. An effect based on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 can be unfolded. Examples of such effects include a Christmas tree or reindeer screen on December 25 on the game board side effect display device 1600 and door frame side effect display device 460, or a New Year countdown on New Year's Eve. The screen to be executed may be unfolded on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460. Calendar information and time information are set at the time of factory shipment.

  In addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores and holds LED brightness setting information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. Yes. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains luminance setting information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa and adjusts the luminance of the backlight by PWM control when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is LED type. . The luminance setting information includes luminance adjustment information for adjusting the range of the luminance of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, from 100% to 70% in increments of 5%, and the currently set game. The brightness of the LED which is the backlight of the board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is included.

  In addition to the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa stores the calendar information, time information, and brightness setting information as date, time, hour, minute, and second information that is first stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa. Input date information is also stored.

  When the backlights of the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 are mounted with a cold cathode tube type, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs the ON / OFF control of the backlight or only ON. It is supposed to be.

  Various information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa, such as calendar information, time information, luminance setting information, and input date / time information, is set in the production line of the gaming machine manufacturer. In the production line, for example, in order to perform various tests such as a display test of the game board side effect display device 1600, the year when the input date information is input on the production line as the date and time when the game board side effect display device 1600 was first turned on. Set to the date and time of manufacture, which is the date and time.

  Thus, in addition to calendar information and time information, the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa has brightness setting information and input date / time information when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type. In addition, it is possible to store and hold information that needs to be maintained independently of the model information of the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the probability of occurrence of a big hit gaming state with low probability or high probability).

  Also, the brightness setting information stored in the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa may be too bright for the backlight brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 set at the date of manufacture depending on the environment of the hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. It may be too dark. Therefore, by operating the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400, the mode can be shifted to the setting mode and the backlight luminance can be adjusted to a predetermined luminance. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side production display device 1600 is in the waiting state and the demonstration operation is performed, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the calendar information and time information can be reset, or the backlight brightness of the game board side effect display device 1600 can be set as desired. Or adjust the brightness. The adjusted desired luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is overwritten (updated) as the luminance of the LED stored in the luminance setting information.

  In the setting mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the above-described brightness correction program, so that when the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is an LED type, the game board side effect is provided. The luminance decrease due to the secular change of the display device 1600 is corrected. The peripheral control MPU 1511a obtains input date / time information from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, specifies the date / time when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, and specifies calendar information and time for specifying the year / month / day. Time information that specifies minutes and seconds is acquired, the current date and time are specified, and the brightness range of the LED, which is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600, is adjusted in increments of 5%. Brightness setting information including brightness adjustment information for performing and the brightness of the LED that is the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 that is currently set. The acquired luminance setting information is corrected based on correction information stored in advance in the peripheral control ROM 1511b.

  For example, if the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on and the current date and time, and June has already passed since the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, When the corresponding correction information (for example, 5%) is acquired from the peripheral control ROM 1511b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the brightness of the LED included in the brightness setting information is 75%, the 75% The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 5%, which is the correction information acquired with respect to. And when the game board side effect display device 1600 is first turned on, December has already passed, and the peripheral control ROM 15 When the corresponding correction information (for example, 10%) is acquired from 1b and the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is turned on when the luminance of the LED included in the luminance setting information is 75%, The luminance of the backlight of the game board side effect display device 1600 is adjusted based on the luminance adjustment information included in the luminance setting information so that the luminance is further increased by 10% which is the correction information acquired in this way. Light.

  The current date and time may be specified by acquiring calendar information for specifying the date and time and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second directly from the RTC built-in RAM 4165aa of the RTC control unit 4165, or a peripheral described later. Current calendar information set in the calendar information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 in the RTC information acquisition storage area 1511cad of the peripheral control RAM 1511c in the current time information acquisition process of step S1002 in the control unit power-on process And the current time information set in the time information storage unit and updated by the system of the peripheral control board 1510 may be acquired to identify the current date and time.

[6-4-4. Volume adjustment volume]
As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a can adjust the volume of music, sound effects, and the like flowing from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by rotating the knob portion. As described above, the volume adjustment volume 1510a is configured such that the resistance value can be changed by rotating the knob portion, and the electrically connected peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak is connected to the knob portion. The voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position is converted from an analog value to a digital value, and converted into a value in 1024 steps from 0 to 1023. In the present embodiment, as described above, the values of the 1024 steps are divided into seven and managed as the substrate volumes 0 to 6. The substrate volume 0 is set to mute, the substrate volume 6 is set to the maximum volume, and the volume is set to increase from the substrate volume 0 toward the substrate volume 6. The liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a) is controlled so that the volume is set to the substrate volume 0 to 6, and music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573.

  In this way, music and sound effects flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by adjusting the volume based on the turning operation of the knob portion. In the present embodiment, as described above, in addition to music and sound effects, a notification sound for notifying a hall clerk or the like of the occurrence of a malfunction of the pachinko machine 1 or an illegal act against the pachinko machine 1 or a game effect. (E.g., to produce a more powerful screen on the game board side effect display device 1600, or to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to a game state advantageous to the player) Etc.) also flows from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573, but the notification sound and notification sound flow without depending on the volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part. The volume up to the maximum volume can be adjusted by controlling the liquid crystal display control unit 1512 (sound source built-in VDP 1512a) by a program.

  The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from the mute to the maximum volume, unlike the substrate volume divided into the above seven stages. Thus, for example, even when a hall clerk or the like rotates the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a to set the volume to a low level, production sounds such as music and sound effects that flow from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 However, when a malfunction occurs in the pachinko machine 1 or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the volume of the production sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent the hall clerk or the like from becoming difficult to notice the occurrence of a malfunction or the player's cheating due to the notification sound.

  Also, based on the current board volume set by volume adjustment based on the turning operation of the knob part, the volume of the advertisement sound is reduced so as not to interfere with the music and sound effects. In addition to music and sound effects, the screen displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600 and the door frame side effect display device 460 is rendered more powerful, which is advantageous for the player. It is also possible to announce that there is a high possibility of shifting to the gaming state.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by turning the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, the dial operation unit 401 of the effect operation unit 400 and the like. By operating the pressing operation unit 405, it is possible to shift to the setting mode and adjust the volume of music and sound effects. When the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 is operated within a predetermined time after the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. In addition, when the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period when the game board side production display device 1600 is in the waiting state and the demonstration operation is performed, the setting mode is performed. Is displayed on the game board side effect display device 1600. By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Specifically, the peripheral control A / D converter 1511ak converts the voltage divided by the resistance value at the rotational position of the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a from an analog value to a digital value. Thus, by adding or subtracting a predetermined value according to the operation of the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400, the value of the substrate volume can be increased or decreased. Yes. This adjusted volume is set and updated as a sub-volume value for a track in which sound data of effect sound such as music or sound effect is incorporated among a plurality of tracks in the sound source of the built-in sound source VDP 1512a. However, it is not reflected in the adjustment of the volume of the notification sound or notification sound described above.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the volume of music or sound effects is adjusted by directly rotating the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a, and the dial operation unit 401 or the press operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400. There are two methods of adjusting the volume of music and sound effects by increasing or decreasing the value of the substrate volume by adding or subtracting a predetermined value in accordance with the above operation. Since the volume adjustment volume 1510a is mounted on the peripheral control board 1510, it is necessary to make the main body frame 4 always open from the outer frame 2. Then, the hall clerk can turn the knob of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. However, at the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, it may be difficult for the player to hear the music or sound effect, or may be loud for the player to feel the music or sound effect. Therefore, within a predetermined time after the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 are operated, or a demonstration is performed by the game board side production display device 1600 in a waiting state. When the dial operation unit 401 or the pressing operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 is operated during the period being performed, a screen for performing the setting mode is displayed on the game board side production display device 1600, By operating the dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of the effect operation unit 400 according to the setting mode screen, the volume of music and sound effects can be adjusted to a desired volume. Thus, the player can adjust the volume of the music and sound effects to a desired volume. Therefore, when the volume of the hall clerk feels low and it is difficult to hear the music and sound effects, the production operation unit 400 The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to increase the volume to a desired level. When the volume adjusted by the hall clerk feels loud and music or sound effects are felt, the production operation unit The dial operation unit 401 and the pressing operation unit 405 of 400 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 1 is not playing a game, the state is continued for a predetermined time, and when the game board side effect display device 1600 is repeatedly demonstrationd (for example, 10 times). The volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and playing the game last time is canceled, and the volume is initialized. In the initialization of the volume, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk, that is, the volume adjusted by the hall clerk by directly rotating the knob portion of the volume adjustment volume 1510a. As a result, if it is difficult to hear the music or sound effect by adjusting the volume adjusted by the player who was sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1 last time and adjusting the volume, this time, the player is seated on the front of the pachinko machine 1. A player who plays a game can operate the dial operation unit 401 and the press operation unit 405 of the production operation unit 400 to increase the volume to a desired level, and sits on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and plays a game last time. If the player feels loud and the music and sound effects are noisy, the player who sits on the front surface of the pachinko machine 1 and plays a game this time will have the dial operation unit 401 of the production operation unit 400 or the like. The pressing operation unit 405 can be operated to reduce the volume to a desired level.

[7. Various commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129. 126 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 127 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board. FIG. 127 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 127, and FIG. 129 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board. First, a prize ball command that is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board will be described, and then various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board will be described and received by the main control board. Various commands from the payout control board will be described.

[7-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 detects from various winning switches such as the general winning port sensor 4020, the first starting port sensors 4002a and 4002b, the second starting port sensor 4004, and the count sensor 4005 shown in FIG. When the signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 and the CR unit 6 (communicating with the pachinko machine 1 and driving the payout motor 834 of the pachinko machine 1 (payout device 830) to the upper dish 321 and the lower dish 322, which are storage dishes, 126 (a device that pays out game balls as rental balls) is electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. Command balls 10H to 1EH (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared as prize ball commands transmitted from 1310 to the payout control board 951, and one prize ball is designated in the command 10H, and the command 11H is designated. In the example, two prize balls are designated, and in the command 1EH, 15 prize balls are designated. The payout control board 951 controls the payout of game balls by driving the payout motor 834 for the designated number of prize balls.

  Also, a pachinko machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that directly pays out game balls as lending balls to the upper plate 321 and the lower plate 322) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall). 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 126 (b), the payout control board 951 from the main control board 1310. Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared as the prize ball commands to be transmitted to the command. One prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,... 15 spheres are designated. The payout control board 951 controls the payout of game balls by driving the payout motor 834 for the designated number of prize balls.

As a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, a command 30H is prepared as shown in FIG. 126 (c), and the self check is designated in the command 30H.
By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in this embodiment, the payout control board 951 confirms the connection state with the CR unit 6.

[7-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 1510 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 127 and 128, a status indicating the type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and And a mode showing variations of performance having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 127 and FIG. 128, the various commands are related to special figure 1 tune production, special figure 2 tune production, jackpot, power-on, general tune production, ordinary electric role production, notification display, status Classified into display and other.

[7-2-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment Production Related]
The special figure 1 synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 4002 shown in FIG. 127. As shown in FIG. 127, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 1403 is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronized effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronized effect end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command (variation pattern command) is an instruction to start the special figure synchronous production with the production pattern (variation pattern) designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designation command is off, specific jackpot, The non-specific big hit is designated, the special figure 1 synchronized production end command is for instructing the special figure 1 synchronized production end, and the variable state designation command is for instructing the gaming state. The gaming state is composed of a time-short state instructing that it is a time-short state and a non-time-short state (normal game state) instructing that it is not in a time-short state. Here, in the short time state, for example, the normal symbol display unit 1402 variably displays the time for displaying the normal symbols variably, compared to the non-short time state (normal game state), and stops and displays the light emission pattern corresponding to the normal lottery result. As a result, the number of stops displayed in the normal lottery result by the normal lottery to be described later in a predetermined time is increased compared to the non-temporary state, and the period during which the second start door 202202 is projected is set to the non-shortened state (normal Compared to the gaming state), it is possible to obtain a special symbol lottery opportunity without reducing the number of possessed balls by increasing the acceptance rate (entrance rate) of the gaming balls to the second starting port 2004 (in other words, in other words) Then, as compared with the non-time-short state, the determination as to whether or not the second start port 2022 is to be protruded is increased, and when the second start port 2022 is to be protruded, the second start By lengthening the duration of the protruding operation of the mouth door 2022, a game ball acceptance rate of the second start hole 2004 state of increasing (ball entrance ratio)). Even when the time-short state is ended and the normal gaming state (non-time-short state) is controlled when the second start-up door 2022 is in the projecting state, the second start-up port 2004 is set in advance. When a predetermined number of game balls are not received, the protruding state can be maintained even after the normal game state (non-time-short state) is controlled. However, when the predetermined closing condition (a predetermined number of game balls have been accepted or a predetermined opening time has elapsed) is satisfied in the normal gaming state (non-time-short state), the maintained protrusion is maintained. The state ends and the evacuation state is established.

  However, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, even when controlled in the short-time state, the game ball is placed in the winning opening such as the first right starting port 2002b or the second starting port 2004 when it is hit right. When the expected value of winning ball that is expected to be paid out based on the acceptance of the award is compared with the amount of holding ball required to obtain the expected value of winning ball Is set to be larger. Therefore, it can be said that it is desirable for a player not to perform a new launch of a game ball in a situation where, for example, the number of holds for jackpot determination has reached an upper limit when controlled in a short-time state. .

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 variation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 1 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the special symbol command control process in step S16 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[7-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 shown in FIG. 120. As shown in FIG. 147, the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 1405 is composed of commands named special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronized production start command (variation pattern command) instructs the start of the special figure synchronous production with the production pattern (variation pattern) designated in the mode. The non-specific big hit is designated, and the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect instructs the end of the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S120 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[7-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 127, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a grand prize opening 1 open Nth display, a big prize opening 1 closing display, a big prize opening 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit opening display, a small hit count display, and a command with the names of small hit ending. These commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is for instructing the start of the jackpot opening, and the winning prize opening 1 opening Nth display command is starting during the opening of the winning prize opening 1 of the 1st to 15th rounds (the first winning prize opening 2005 Nth time) The command indicating that the winning prize opening 1 is closed is instructed during the opening of the round, or the opening of the opening is started. ), And the winning prize 1 count display command indicates that the number of game balls counted from 0 to 10 is counted (the first count sensor 4005a shown in FIG. The number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2005 is transmitted, and the big hit ending command instructs the start of the big hit ending. Handle display command is an indication of a big hit pattern information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (when the second big winning opening 2005b is being opened or opened at the small hit). The small hit count display command is a small hit medium / large winning opening winning effect (a game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 2005b during the small hit is detected by the second count sensor 4005b. The small hitting ending command is an instruction to start the small hitting ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the jackpot opening command is transmitted at the start of the jackpot opening, and the winning prize opening 1 opening Nth display command is the first winning prize opening 1 (round 1-15 winning prize opening) The winning prize 1 closing display command is sent when the 1st winning opening 1 is closed (the closing of the 1st winning opening 2005), and the 1 winning count is displayed. The command is generated when the first prize opening 1 is opened and when the count to the first prize opening 1 is changed (when the first big prize opening 2005 is opened and the game ball that has entered the first big prize opening 2005 is received by the first count sensor 4005a. Is detected, the jackpot ending command is transmitted when the jackpot ending starts, and the jackpot symbol display command is displayed when the jackpot is opened (the first It is sent to open at the time) of the winning port 2005.

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (when the second big winning opening 2005b is opened at the small hit), and the small hit count The display command is transmitted at the time of winning the small hitting medium winning prize opening (when the game ball that has entered the second big winning opening 2005b during the small hitting is detected by the second count sensor 4005b), the small hitting ending command Is transmitted at the start of the small hit ending. These various commands are actually transmitted in the special symbol command control process of step S16 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[7-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 127, the power-on classification includes commands at the time of power-on and a command named as a main control return destination at power-on. These various commands are assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The power-on state command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the gaming state. The power-on status command is used when the power-on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure) of the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. When the operation switch 954 is operated to clear the RAM, information indicating that, and when the power is turned on (in addition to when the power is turned on, including when the power is restored due to a power failure or a momentary power failure )), The information indicating which state is restored in the time-saving state and the non-time-saving state, and the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine. The model code of this pachinko machine, for example, when creating so-called max type, middle type, and sweet digital type, what kind of game is copyrighted, what kind of game specifications (for example, probability variation occurs) In addition to the game specification that the state continues until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability variation occurs when the number of changes of the special symbol is limited (for example, 30 times or 70 times). (So-called ST machine) or the like). In other words, the information on the model code of the pachinko machine is used to specify the series code for identifying which type is the max type, middle type, or sweet digital type indicating the model type, and the copyright of the work. Copyright code and game specifications (for example, if a probability change occurs, that state will continue until the next jackpot game state occurs, and the probability change with a limited number of special symbol changes) And a game specification code for specifying a game specification (ST machine, etc.).

  The main control return destination command at power-on indicates the return destination of the main control board 1310 itself. When the power is turned on, the main control return destination command includes information for instructing the driving state of the second starter solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. And information to be instructed.

  The transmission timing of the power-on status command and the power-on main control return destination command is as follows: When the main control board is powered on Is also included.) Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when it recovers from a power failure or a momentary power interruption, the power-on state command and the main power-on A control return destination command is transmitted.

[7-2-5. General drawing related production]
The general figure synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 shown in FIG. 120, and, as shown in FIG. 127, the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 shown in FIG. The command 1402 is composed of commands with the names of general drawing synchronization production start, universal symbol designation, universal drawing synchronization production end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The general pattern synchronization production start command (general pattern variation pattern command) instructs the general pattern synchronization production start with the production pattern specified in the mode (normal pattern variation pattern). A big hit and a non-specific big hit are designated, the ordinary figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the ordinary figure synchronization effect, and the change state designation command is for instructing the gaming state. Note that, as described above, the gaming state is composed of a time-short state instructing that it is a time-short state and a non-time-short state (normal game state) instructing that it is not in a time-short state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the general symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the start of normal symbol variation, the general symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the general symbol synchronization effect start, and the general symbol synchronization effect end command is It is transmitted when the normal symbol fluctuation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is fixed), and the variable state designation command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the normal symbol command control process in step S17 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[7-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric role effect is related to the second start door 2022 that is advanced and retracted by the driving of the second start solenoid 2108 shown in FIG. 120, and the classification is as shown in FIG. It is composed of commands named Opening, Opening of Public Electricity, and Ending per General-purpose Map. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The opening command per base map is an instruction to start the opening per base map, and the general electric power open display command is a start during open general power (the second start door 2022 is driven forward by driving the second start solenoid 2108). The ending command per universal map indicates the start of ending per universal map.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per base map is transmitted at the start of the opening per base map, and the general power open display command is displayed when the general power is open (the second start door 2022 is the second start opening solenoid 2108). The ending command per universal map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. These various commands are actually transmitted in the normal symbol command control process in step S17 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[7-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 128, the notification display section is composed of commands named as winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic detection switch abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned “6 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The winning anomaly display command is used when a winning ball is entered in the first winning hole 2005 or the second winning hole 2005b when the winning point is won other than during the big hit (the condition device is operating). When the game ball is detected by the count sensor 4005), a prize abnormality notification command is instructed, and the connection abnormality display command is, for example, a path between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. In this case, the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 1310, the first start port sensors 4002a and 4002b, and the second start. When a disconnection / short circuit of the electrical connection with the mouth sensor 4004, the first count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, etc. occurs, a disconnection / short circuit abnormality indication is displayed. Is intended to instruct the start, the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is for instructing the start of magnetic detection switch abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 4024 shown in FIG. 120.

  Further, the door opening command is sent from the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal (opening signal) from the door frame opening switch 618 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the opened state, the door opening notification is instructed, and the door frame closing command is based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. When it is in the state, it is instructed to end the door opening notification. On the other hand, the main body frame opening command is sent from the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal (open signal) from the main body frame opening switch 619 input via the payout control board 951 shown in FIG. In the open state, the main body frame close command is sent to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame open switch 619. In the closed state, the main body frame opening notification is instructed to end.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, a winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a prize winning opening other than during a big hit (when the condition device is operating), and a connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 1310 to the payout control board 951. Is transmitted when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 951 at the time of command transmission, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display commands are the first start port sensors 4002a and 4002b, the second start port sensor 4004, the first It is transmitted when any of the count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, etc. is disconnected or short-circuited, and the magnetic detection switch abnormality display command is transmitted when abnormality of the magnetic detection sensor 4024 is detected. The door opening command is transmitted when the door opening is detected (when the door frame 3 is in an open state with respect to the main body frame 4 based on the detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618), and the door is opened. The frame closing command is transmitted when door closing is detected (when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 based on a detection signal from the door frame opening switch 618). The body frame release command is transmitted when the body frame release is detected (when the body frame 4 is opened to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the body frame release switch 619). The frame closing command is transmitted when the main body frame closing is detected (when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 619). Note that these various commands are actually transmitted in the switch process in step S12 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[7-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 128, the status display section is composed of commands named frame status 1 command (corresponding to error occurrence command), error canceling navigation command (corresponding to error canceling command), and frame status 2 command. Yes. These various commands are assigned a status of “7 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The frame status 1 command, the error canceling navigation command, and the frame status 2 command are commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) transmitted from the payout control board 951, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. . When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, as shown in FIG. 128, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 1310a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 951, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted when the error cancellation navigation is performed. And when the frame state changes. The frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command that have been shaped are actually transmitted in the switch process of step S12 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[7-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 128, the test-related classification includes various commands named test. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). And is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the peripheral control unit 1511, the liquid crystal display control unit 1512, the lamp driving board 4170, the motor driving board 4180, and the frame decoration shown in FIG. 123). Inspects various substrates such as the drive amplifier substrate 194).

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, when it recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure, and when the operation switch 954 of the payout control board 951 is operated, the main control side game control which will be described later will be described. A test command is transmitted in the initialization process of step S1 in the process.

[7-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 128, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, special symbol type prefetch, variation pattern prefetch, gate passing, normal symbol memory, normal It consists of commands with the names of symbol type prefetching and common pattern variation pattern prefetching. These various commands are assigned a status of “9 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specifications of the pachinko machine 1).

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect, and when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002a, 2002b based on the detection signals from the first start opening sensors 4002a, 4002b. The start of the production and the start of the production when the game ball enters the second starting port 2004 based on the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 4004, respectively. The command is for instructing the state transition from the variation shortening operation state to the variation shortening non-operation state, and the special symbol 1 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbol 1 reservations (the game balls at the first start ports 2002a and 2002b And the first special symbol display unit 1403 of the function display unit 1400 informs the number of balls that have not yet been used for the special symbol variable display (the number of holdings). The special symbol 2 storage command is 0 to 4 special symbol 2 reservations (the game ball enters the second start port 2004 and the special symbol 2 1 is displayed on the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400. The special symbol type pre-read command is used to display the special symbol 1 hold on the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400 so as to display the variation of the special symbol. Before use, the display result by the first special symbol display unit 1403 based on the special symbol 1 hold is read ahead and the special symbol 2 hold is the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400. Before using the special symbol 2 to display the change of the special symbol, the display result by the second special symbol display unit 1405 based on the special symbol 2 reservation is stored. The change pattern prefetch command is used for prefetching before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the special symbol change display in the first special symbol display 1403 of the function display unit 1400. Before the special symbol 2 hold is used in the second special symbol display 1405 of the function display unit 1400 to display the fluctuation of the special symbol. , The change pattern used for the change display of the special symbol based on the special symbol 2 hold in advance is designated. The gate passing command is for instructing the passing of the game ball to the gate unit 2003, and the normal symbol storage command is 0 to 4 normal symbol holding (the game display ball passes the gate unit 2003 and the function display unit The normal symbol display 1402 informs the number of spheres (the number of holdings) that are not yet used for the normal symbol fluctuation display 1402, and the normal symbol type pre-read command indicates that the normal symbol holding is the normal symbol of the function display unit 1400. Before the display 1402 is used to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the display result by the normal symbol display 1402 based on the normal symbol hold is designated in advance. As for the figure variation pattern prefetch command, the normal symbol hold is used for the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display unit 1402 of the function display unit 1400. A, it is used to specify the read-ahead to widely view the variation pattern to be used in variable display of normal symbol based upon the normal symbol reserved.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is as follows. Or when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004), mainly from the speaker 921 shown in FIG. 5 and the upper speaker 573 shown in FIG. The change shortening operation end designation command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed after digesting the specified number of change reductions (after the stoppage stop period has elapsed). The memory command is used when the number of reserved balls for special symbol 1 changes (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002a, 2002b and the number of held balls increases, The special symbol 2 memory command is sent when the number of reserved symbols for the special symbol 2 is changed (when the number of reserved symbols is decreased by using the symbol display 1403 to display the variation of the special symbols). Sent when the ball enters the ball and the number of holds increases, or when the number of holds decreases by using the special symbol display on the second special symbol display 1405) The look-ahead command is transmitted when the number of special symbols 1 and 2 holding balls increases (when a game ball enters the first starting port 2002a, 2002b or the second starting port 2004 and the number of held balls increases), the fluctuation pattern The prefetch command is transmitted immediately after the transmission of the special symbol type prefetch command. These various commands are actually transmitted in the special symbol command control process of step S16 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  In addition, the gate passing command is transmitted when the game ball passes to the gate unit 2003, and the normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol operation holding ball number change (the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the number of holdings increases. Or when the number of reserved symbols is decreased by using the normal symbol display unit 1402 to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol), the normal symbol type look-ahead command is used when the number of reserved symbols for normal symbol operation increases ( When the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003 and the number of holds increases, the common pattern variation pattern prefetch command is transmitted immediately after the normal symbol type prefetch command is transmitted. These various commands are actually transmitted in the normal symbol command control process in step S17 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is given at the start opening winning (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2002a, 2002b based on the detection signals from the first start opening sensors 4002a, 4002b, When a game ball enters the second start port 2004 based on a detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004), a message is transmitted from the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 mainly to notify that effect. However, how the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 123 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko machine. For example, the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment is of a specification that is used for monitoring the presence or absence of fraud in addition to notifying the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by voice. On the other hand, in other pachinko machines, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 1510 simply receives the start opening prize command and does not notify the speaker 921 and the upper speaker 573 by voice.

[7-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 951 received by the main control board 1310 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 129, each command from the payout control board 951 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2, and includes frame state 1, error release navigation, Priorities are set in the order of frame state 2.

  For the frame status 1 command (corresponding to an error occurrence command), a ball breakage, a full tank, a connection abnormality and a CR non-connection in 50 or more stocks are prepared, and bit 0 (B0, “B”) in the ball breakage. Represents a bit.) Is set to 1; when full, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1; in more than 50 stocks, bit 2 (B2) is set to 1; A value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and a value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  The error clearing navigation command (corresponding to the error clearing command) is provided with a sphere ball, a payout detection sensor error and a retry error. In error, the value 1 is set in bit 3 (B3), and in retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, the “payout detection sensor error” indicates whether or not a failure of the payout detection sensor 842 shown in FIG. 127 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that a game ball that is not consistent with the retry operation has been repeatedly paid out. Bit (B0), bit (B1), and bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command have a value 0 for B0, a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B5, a value 1 for B6, The value 0 is set in B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. Bit 1 (B1) to Bit 7 (B7) of the frame status 2 command include a value 0 for B1, a value 0 for B2, a value 0 for B3, a value 0 for B4, a value 1 for B5, a value 1 for B6, and The value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame status is changed, and during error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes.

[8. Game contents]
Next, game contents by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the game ball stored in the upper plate 321 of the plate unit 320 is obtained by the player rotating the handle 302 of the handle unit 300 disposed in the lower right front corner of the door frame 3. The game board 5 is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game with the game ball is started. A game ball that has been driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a flows down either on the left side (left-handed) or on the right side (right-handed) of the center accessory 2500 depending on the strength of the game. The strength of the game ball can be adjusted according to the amount of rotation of the handle 302. The game ball can be driven more strongly as it is rotated in the clockwise direction. A game ball can be shot at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) are planted on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) in a predetermined gauge arrangement at appropriate positions, so that the game balls are used as obstacle nails. By abutting, the flow-down speed of the game ball is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball so that the movement can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail, a windmill (not shown) that rotates when the game ball abuts is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball that is thrown into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view of the outermost surface of the center accessory 2500 from the highest position, it abuts against a plurality of obstacle nails (not shown) The area on the left side of the center actor 2500 will flow down. Then, when a game ball flowing down the left region of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2520 that is open to the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, the game ball is supplied from the warp outlet 2522 to the stage 2530.

  The game ball supplied to the stage 2530 rolls on the stage 2530, moves back and forth, and is released forward. When a game ball is released from the center of the stage 2530 into the game area 5a, the first left start port 2002a is located immediately below, and is therefore accepted with high probability into the first left start port 2002a. When a game ball is received in the first left starting port 2002a, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. The

  When the game ball rolling on the stage 2530 is released into the game area 5a from other than the center, it flows down toward the first left starting port 2002a. The game ball released from the stage 2530 of the center accessory 2500 into the game area 5a may be received by the first left starting port 2002a.

  By the way, when the game ball that has flowed down to the left side of the center object 2500 does not enter the warp inlet 2520, there is a possibility that it will be moved toward the center in the left-right direction by an obstacle nail or the like and received by the first left starting port 2002a. .

  On the other hand, when the game ball that is driven into the upper portion of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest part of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right hit), On the downstream side, a region (specific region) in which the first right starting port 2002b, the second starting port 2004, the gate portion 2003, and the like are provided flows down. In addition, a distribution member 2011 that distributes game balls alternately to the first passage 2012 and the second passage 2014 is provided on the upstream side of the specific area, and the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 by the distribution member 2011. Can be received at the first right starting port 2002b and passed through the gate portion 2003, and the game balls distributed to the second passage 2014 by the sorting member 2011 can be received at the second starting port 2004. It is supposed to be.

  When the right-handed game ball passes through the gate portion 2003 in this manner, a normal determination is made on the main control board 1310. In this normal determination, if the winning symbol is won and the corresponding symbol is shown in the normal symbol fluctuation, the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 moves forward and protrudes to the player side (protruding) The game ball that has passed through the receiving port 2016 is received by the second starting port door 2022 and can be received by the second starting port 2004. When a game ball is received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls is paid out to the upper plate 321 from the payout device 830 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 951. .

  In addition, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, when the winning is per ordinary drawing, the second starting opening door 2022 of the second starting opening 2004 is moved backward after the normal symbol stops in the manner per ordinary drawing. Thus, the second start port door 2022 of the second start port 2004 enters the game board 5 (retracted state). However, even if the predetermined time has not elapsed since the second start door 2022 was moved to the protruding state, a predetermined upper limit number (1 ball in this example) of game balls Is received by the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 is retreated at that time and moved to the retracted state so that the game ball cannot be received by the second starting port 2004. Become.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 according to this embodiment, when a game ball is received at the first start port (first left start port 2002a, first right start port 2002b) or the second start port 2004, The control board 1310 determines whether or not to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, “big hit gaming state”, “small hit gaming state”, “short time state”, etc.) (first special The symbol side or the second special symbol side) is performed. In addition, when winning the big hit in the hit determination, the jackpot type is determined based on the symbol random number (hereinafter also referred to as symbol random number (first special symbol random number, second special symbol random number)) acquired at the time of entering the ball, A gaming privilege (a jackpot gaming state or a gaming state after the jackpot gaming state) corresponding to the determined type of jackpot (determined jackpot type) is given. Similarly, when winning a small hit in the hit determination, the type of small hit is determined based on the symbol random number (hereinafter also referred to as symbol random number (first special symbol random number, second special symbol random number)) acquired at the time of entering the ball. And a gaming bonus corresponding to the determined type of small hit (determined small hit type) (after a big hit gaming state, a big hit gaming state executed when winning a V in the small hit gaming state, after the big hit gaming state Game state).

  When the hit determination is performed, a special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) is variably displayed for the variation time selected based on the result of the hit determination, and then the symbol mode corresponding to the result ( By stopping the special symbol with a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol), the player can be recognized. As a result, if the stopped special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is not the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol, the starting condition for the next hit determination is satisfied, and the main control board 1310 is satisfied. In FIG. 5, the hit determination having the highest digestion rank is digested (executed) among the special symbols (first special symbol or second special symbol) held in an unexecuted state.

  On the other hand, if the stopped special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is a big hit symbol, a big hit gaming state in which a prize can be obtained by the player is performed on the main control board 1310. . When executing the jackpot gaming state, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the jackpot gaming state is generated is generated. When this opening period ends, a predetermined number of rounds determined in advance according to the determined jackpot type (in this embodiment, when the first special symbol is a jackpot symbol, 10 rounds or 15 rounds, second round The first big prize opening 2005 is opened with the upper limit of 15 rounds (if the special symbol is a big win symbol) as an upper limit (the first big prize opening 2005 is made to be able to accept a game ball). One round game is performed until the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, once), and a predetermined number ( The maximum number of winnings: 9 balls in this example) is released until a winning game is won, or until a specified time (round gaming time: 28.5 seconds in this example) elapses. In the round game, a round effect is performed. When the round game of the specified number of rounds ends, an ending period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) in which an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot gaming state is generated is generated, and when the ending period ends, the jackpot gaming state ends. Is done.

  Further, if the stopped special symbol (in this example, the second special symbol) is a small hit symbol, a small hit gaming state in which a prize can be obtained by the player is performed on the main control board 1310. When executing the small hit gaming state, first, an opening period in which an opening effect indicating the start of the small hit gaming state is generated is generated. When the opening period ends, the second grand prize opening 2005b is opened (the second big prize opening 2005b is in a state in which a game ball can be received). In the embodiment, the upper limit is set to 1). During a single open game, a predetermined number of game balls (9 open balls in this example) are won in the second large winning opening 2005b or a predetermined time (open game time: 28 in this example). .5 seconds). In the opening game, an opening effect is performed. Then, when the specified number of open games has ended, an ending period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) in which an ending effect indicating the end of the small hit gaming state is generated is generated. When the ending period ends, the small hit gaming state Is terminated.

  Further, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, the big hit gaming state may be continuously generated after the small hit gaming state is ended. Specifically, it is determined on condition that a game ball wins in the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hit gaming state and the winning game ball is distributed to the internal V winning opening 2411 (V winning). The predetermined number of rounds determined in advance according to the type of small hit (in this embodiment, 10 rounds if the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, 15 if the second special symbol is a big hit symbol) A round game in which the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened with the upper limit of (round) as an upper limit is performed. For this reason, in the above ending effect at the end of the small hit gaming state, not only the end of the small hit gaming state is shown, but a game ball has entered the V winning opening 2411 inside the second big winning opening 2005b. It is also indicated whether or not the big hit gaming state is continued from the small hit gaming state. When the big hit gaming state is continuously generated after the end of the small hit gaming state, the small winning gaming state in which the second big winning opening 2005b is opened becomes one round, and the number including this one round Until the number of round games reaches the specified number of rounds (from the second round to the fifteenth round), a round game in which the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened is performed.

  Further, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, except for a part when the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, the main control board 1310 is controlled to be in a short time state after the big hit gaming state. That is, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game ball is in the V winning opening 2411 when the second special symbol is a big hit symbol or during the small hit gaming state executed based on the second special symbol being a small hit symbol. In the case where the game is distributed, the time is controlled to be always reduced after the big hit gaming state. In this time-short state, the result of the normal determination as to whether or not it is easier to win the game ball in the second start port 2004 is derived as compared with a non-time-short state (such as a normal game state) in which the time-short state has not occurred. The fluctuation time of normal symbol fluctuation is shortened. Also, in the short-time state, when the normal determination is won per common figure, the second start-up door 2022 of the second start-up port 2004 moves forward and backward (advance / retreat operation) with an advancing / retreating pattern different from the non-time-saving state. It has become.

  In the present embodiment, when winning in a non-time-saving state per win, the advance / retreat pattern in which the second start port door 2022 of the second start port 2004 moves back and forth in a short advance / retreat mode (in this example, 0.2 seconds). On the other hand, when A is performed, and when winning in the time-saving state, the second start opening door 2022 of the second start opening 2004 moves back and forth in a long advance / retreat mode (6 seconds in this example). Is done. In other words, the second start opening door 2022 of the second start opening 2004 operates in an advantageous manner for the player in the short-time state, as compared with the non-short-time state, the total projecting time corresponding to one normal drawing is long. Is set to For this reason, in the short-time state, compared to the non-time-short state, the second start port door 2022 of the second start port 2004 is in a state in which the entrance rate is improved so that the second start port 202 is easily moved to the protruding state. When a game ball is received at the second starting port 2004, normal symbol variation is easily performed according to the normal determination. In the case of the pachinko machine 1 of this example, if a right-handed hit is made continuously in the short-time state, if at least one game ball is continuously received, the second starting port 2004 is accepted. Even if the player continues to make a right-hand hit when winning the game, the game ball is rarely accepted by the second starting port 2004.

  In addition, the short-time state according to this embodiment ends when the symbol variation of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, once) after the end of the big hit gaming state. . Similarly, when the game ball enters the V winning port 2411 inside the second large winning port 2005b, which is the small special symbol (small hit A, small hit B, small hit C) on the second special symbol side. When the symbol variation of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, once) after the end of the big hit gaming state, the game ends.

  In addition, the specification with the pachinko machine 1 in this embodiment is as follows. Eight kinds of numbers from [1] to [8] are adopted as decorative symbols, and [222] [333] [444] [555] [666] [777] [888], small hits as big hit symbols [111] is adopted as the symbol. Moreover, 1/300 is prescribed | regulated as the winning probability of the jackpot on the 1st special symbol side and the 2nd special symbol side. The winning probability per small hit on the first special symbol side is defined as 0/300, and the winning probability per small hit on the second special symbol side is defined as 299/300. 1/20 is defined as the winning probability per standard figure. As for the number of game balls to be awarded, there are three game balls for the first left start opening 2002a, the first right start opening 2002b, and the second start opening 2004, the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning prize. Fifteen are defined for the mouth 2005b. Further, as the advancing / retreating pattern A in which the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 moves back and forth in a short advance / retreat mode, the second starting port door 2022 operates once in a projecting state and operates in a projecting state. A mode in which the protruding state is maintained until 20 ms elapses from is specified. Further, as the advancing / retreating pattern B in which the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 moves forward and backward in a long forward / backward manner, the second starting port door 2022 operates once in a projecting state and operates in a projecting state. The mode which maintains a protrusion state until 6s passes from is prescribed | regulated. In addition, “one ball” is defined as the upper limit number of winnings that is the retreat condition of the second start opening door 2022 of the second start opening 2004. Further, in each round game in the big hit game state, “1” is set as the number of times the first big winning opening 2005 is opened, and “9 balls” is set as the maximum number of winnings. Also, in the small hit gaming state, “1” is defined as the number of times the second large winning opening 2005b is opened, and “9 balls” is defined as the maximum number of winnings.

  In this way, in the non-time-short state, the winning of the game ball to the second start port 2004 hardly occurs, and the game ball is received to the first start port (first left start port 2002a, first right start port 2002b). Based on the above, the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. The game executed in this non-time-short state is a normal game, and hereinafter referred to as a normal mode.

  When a game ball is received in the first start port (first left start port 2002a, first right start port 2002b) in the normal mode (non-time-short state), the main control board 1310 performs a hit determination, and the hit determination makes a big hit If it is won, after determining the jackpot type related to whether or not to control to the short-time state after the big hit gaming state, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the symbol mode according to the result of the hit judgment (big hit symbol, lose The first special symbol is stopped at symbol). At this time, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, the big hit gaming state is performed.

  When the big hit type is not controlled after the big hit gaming state, the normal mode (non-time saving state) is continued after the big hit gaming state. On the other hand, when the big hit type is one that controls to the short time state after the big hit gaming state, it is controlled to the short time state after the big hit gaming state.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, a special symbol (the first left starting port 2002a (the first left starting port 2002a, the first right starting port 2002b)) and the second starting port 2004 are received based on the reception of game balls. The first left starting port 2002a (the first left starting port 2002a, the first right starting port 2002b) and the period between the start of the change display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol and the stop of these symbols When a game ball is received at the second start port 2004, the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) cannot be displayed in a variable manner, so the special symbol (first special symbol, Until the variable display of the second special symbol) stops, the start of the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is suspended. The number of reserved memories of the variable display of the special symbols to be held (first special symbol, second special symbol) is the first left starting port 2002a (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b) and second Up to four upper limits for each of the start openings 2004, and more than that, the first left start opening 2002a (the first left start opening 2002a, the first right start opening 2002b) and the second start opening 2004 are game balls. Even if is accepted, the start of the change display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is not suspended and discarded. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall side by accumulating reservations.

  The variation display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed under direct control by the main control board 1310. The variable display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) on the function display unit 1400 is a combination of LEDs that are lit after a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off for a predetermined time and then turned on. The result of the change display of the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is indicated by (a symbol aspect corresponding to the result of the hit determination).

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 and suggests the result of the hit determination as an effect image. The effect image that suggests the result of the hit determination in the effect display device 1600 is a display in which each symbol row is changed in a state where three symbol rows composed of a plurality of symbols are displayed side by side and displayed in a variable manner. The columns are sequentially stopped and displayed, and each symbol row is stopped and displayed so that the symbols of the three symbol rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the result of the hit determination. When the result of the hit determination is other than “losing”, after the three symbol sequences are stopped and each symbol is stopped and displayed, a confirmed image suggesting the result of the hit determination is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and lottery An advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state, a small hit gaming state, etc.) according to the result of the hit determination made.

  Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the result of the hit determination by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation unit 400 in the door frame 3 is displayed in accordance with the result of the lottery determination. Operation buttons 410, door frame side effect display device 460, various decorative bodies of center accessory 2500, various decorative bodies of the back unit, rear back movable movable effect unit, back upper left movable motion effect unit, back left movable motion effect unit, back top It is possible to perform a light-emitting effect, a movable effect, a display effect, etc. by appropriately using a middle movable effect unit, a front-bottom front movable effect unit, etc., and it is possible to entertain a player by various effects. , It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, even if there is a first reserved memory number that is the number of stored hit determinations on the first special symbol side that is held in an unexecuted state, When there is a second reserved memory number that is the number of stored hit determinations on the second special symbol side that is held, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in preference to the variation display of the first special symbol. It has become. In addition, during the big hit gaming state, because it is not controlled to the time-short state (it is controlled to the non-time-short state), the result of the determination (ordinary determination) whether or not it is based on the passing of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 As a result, even if the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed, and the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 moves forward / backward, the forward / backward mode is a short forward / backward mode in which the game ball is hardly accepted into the second starting port 2004. The winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 hardly occurs. As a result, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the normal mode (non-temporary state) and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, in most cases, after the big hit game state, the first special symbol is first. Will be displayed in a variable manner.

  Further, in this example, the first special symbol variation time in the short time state is displayed with a long variation time (120 seconds in this example) longer than the normal variation time regardless of the result of the hit determination. . The state where the first special symbol is variably displayed with the long variation time in the short time state is a state where the right to win the second special symbol (winning right) can be obtained. That's it. Then, during the chance mode in which the first special symbol is variably displayed with the long variation time, a game aimed at passing the game ball to the gate portion 2003 is performed.

  As described above, when the game ball passes through the gate portion 2003, it is determined whether or not the game ball is hit (normal determination), and the normal symbol is variably displayed based on the determination result. When the stop pattern of the normal symbol is the symbol per symbol, the second starter door 2022 is controlled to be in the protruding state, and the game ball can be received in the second starter 2004. When the game ball is received in 2004, the second reserved memory number which is the number of memory of the hit determination on the second special symbol side is increased.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, one of the big hit and the small hit is always obtained as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a small hit is made as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side, even if one game ball is accepted in the second big prize opening 2005b during the small hit gaming state. One of them is surely distributed to the V prize opening 2411. In this example, if the player continues to make a right hit in the small hit game state, the second big prize opening 2005b is controlled so that at least one game ball can be received. In other words, if the result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side is a small hit, it will be a big hit in most cases. It can be said that the company has acquired the right to win big (winning right). In other words, the state in which the game ball is received at the second start port 2004 and the second reserved memory number is present is a state in which a right (winning right) that is substantially a big win is acquired.

  Then, the first special symbol is stopped in the symbol mode (big hit symbol, lost symbol) corresponding to the result of the hit determination when the long variation time has elapsed after the first special symbol variation display is started. At this time, if the first special symbol is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the jackpot game state is performed, and if there is a second reserved memory number after the jackpot game state, it shifts to a winning right exercise time described later, and after the jackpot game state, If the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side when starting the big hit gaming state when there is no two pending memory number is to control to the short state after the big hit gaming state, continue the chance mode and the first special symbol If the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side when starting the big hit gaming state when there is no second reserved memory number and the second holding memory number is not controlled, it should not be controlled to the short time state after the big hit gaming state Exit chance mode and switch to normal mode. On the other hand, if the first special symbol is stopped at the losing design when the long variation time has elapsed since the start of the first special symbol's variation display, if there is a second reserved memory number, it will shift to the winning right exercise time, If there is no second reserved memory number, the chance mode is terminated and the normal mode is entered.

  As described above, the winning right exercising time is shifted when there is a second reserved memory number, and a game for variably displaying the second special symbol is performed. As described above, one of the big hit and the small hit is always obtained as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side. In the case of winning, it is a state in which the right (winning right) that is substantially a big hit has been acquired. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is executed for the second reserved memory number at the winning right exercise time.

  Specifically, the second special symbol is first variably displayed when the winning right exercise time is shifted. Then, if the symbol mode at the time of the stoppage of the second special symbol is a jackpot symbol, the jackpot gaming state in which the first big winning opening 2005 is opened according to the determined jackpot type is executed, and the second special symbol is stopped. If the symbol pattern at the time is a small winning symbol, the small winning game state is executed to make the second big prize opening 2005b acceptable to the game ball, and the gaming ball winning the second big prize opening 2005b wins the V prize. A jackpot gaming state in which the first big winning opening 2005 is opened on condition that the game is distributed to the mouth 2411 is executed.

  In this example, it is unlikely that at least one ball is controlled in the second big prize opening 2005b by accepting a right-hand hit during the small hit gaming state, so that the game is executed in the small hit gaming state. The big hit gaming state executed when the ball ends the small hit gaming state without being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 or when the symbol pattern at the time of the stoppage of the second special symbol becomes the big hit symbol. In the case where the big hit gaming state executed based on the fact that the game balls are distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit gaming state, the right to win is determined on the condition that there is a second reserved memory number. Continue exercise time.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the game ball is awarded V in the small hit gaming state executed when the second special symbol is the big hit symbol or when the second special symbol is the small hit symbol. When the game is distributed to the mouth 2411, the time is always controlled after the big hit gaming state. Therefore, based on the fact that the game ball is finished in the small hit game state without being distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit game state, or that the symbol pattern at the time of the stoppage of the second special symbol is a big hit symbol. When the executed big hit gaming state ends, and when the executed big hit gaming state ends based on the fact that the game balls are distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit gaming state, the second reserved memory number If there is not, a short time condition occurs again and the mode is shifted to the chance mode.

  Thus, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the chance mode is an advantageous state over the normal mode by starting the game in the normal mode, winning the big hit during the normal mode, and generating a short time state after the big hit gaming state. If you win the normal judgment during the chance mode, it will be advantageous for the player who loops between the winning right time and the chance mode, and if the normal judgment is not won during the chance mode, the normal mode from the chance mode Fall into a disadvantageous situation for the player.

[9. Control processing of main control board]
Next, an example of control processing executed by the main control board 1310 (particularly the main control MPU 1310a) will be described. FIG. 131 (a) is a flowchart showing a procedure of control processing performed by the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310 when the pachinko machine 1 is turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (a), the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment first has various registers and main control built-in as the processing of step S1 on the condition that the operation switch 954 is operated. The data stored in the RAM is initialized. The operation switch 954 is provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the main body frame 4 is opened. In addition, the operation switch 954 outputs a clear signal to the main control board 1310 according to an operation before a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed since the power is turned on, and the main control MPU 1310a receives the clear signal when the power is turned on. If it is determined, initialization processing (step S1) is executed to initialize various registers and data stored in the main control built-in RAM.

  Although not shown, in this example, when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off, a backup process is executed in which information indicating the progress of the game (for example, various flags) is stored in the main control built-in RAM. If the operation switch 954 is not operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the information stored in the main control built-in RAM is referred to in the backup process without executing the initialization process (step S1). A recovery process for recovering the state according to the information is executed. Further, when the operation switch 954 is operated when the power to the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the initialization process is executed without executing the recovery process to set the pachinko machine 1 to the initial state. Further, when the initialization process is executed, the gaming state is controlled to a non-time-saving state.

  Next, as a process in step S2, a random number that is a number to be updated within a predetermined numerical range is updated. That is, in the main control board 1310 according to this embodiment, special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) used for the lottery process for the display mode when the variable symbol display is stopped, and the special symbols. Reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600 in response to the variable random number used for the lottery process for the predetermined time (variation time) required for the variable display control of the game, and the variable display of the special symbol. Reach random numbers used for lottery processing of whether or not, the design random numbers (first design random number, the first design random number used to determine the type of jackpot if it is determined to be a big hit based on the special random number 2 random numbers), a random number counter that holds random numbers such as a random number (ordinary random number) that is used in a lottery process for winning a win that triggers the operation of the second start door 2022 It is equipped with a motor.

  In this example, a common reach random number is used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, that is, when a start winning is made at the first start port (first left start port 2002a, first right start port 2002b). Even when the start winning prize is received at the second start port 2004, the reach random number is obtained from the same counter that updates the reach random number. May be made to differ in the execution ratio of reach production by acquiring from different counters, the first reach determination table corresponding to the first special symbol as the reach determination table to be compared with the acquired reach random number, and the second Differentiating the execution ratio of reach production by providing a second reach determination table corresponding to special symbols and set with a determination value different from the first reach determination table It may be so.

  In the process of step S2, the counter operation of the random number counter is performed in such a manner that only the random numbers (variable random numbers) not related to the winning of these random numbers are updated. Note that after the processes of steps S1 and S2 are performed in this way, only the process of step S2 is basically repeated. However, in this embodiment, for example, the following timer interrupt control is performed every 4 ms.

  FIG. 131 (b) is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for timer interrupt control periodically performed by the main control MPU 1310 a of the main control board 1310.

  As shown in FIG. 131 (b), in this interrupt control, a register saving process is first performed as the process of step S11. Next, in step S12, the gate sensor 4003, the first left start port sensor 4002a, the first right start port sensor 4002b, the second start port sensor 4004, the first count sensor 4005a, and the second count. Detection signals from various sensors such as the sensor 4005b and the general winning a prize opening sensor 4020 are input. Next, as a process in step S13, a random number update process for updating the value of the random number counter that generates the random number is performed. In the process of step S13, among the random numbers, the random number counter is updated in such a manner that the random numbers (special random numbers, normal random numbers) related to the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the special symbols and the normal symbols are updated. The operation is performed.

  Then, after the random number is updated in this way, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the special symbol process processing including the lottery processing concerning the display mode at the time of stopping the variable symbol variable display as the processing of step S14. Execute. This special symbol process will be described later, but here, basically, a special symbol process flag (first special symbol process flag, second symbol) indicating the progress of the game stored in the main control built-in RAM. The corresponding process is selectively executed based on the special symbol process flag).

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a normal symbol process including a lottery process for winning a win as an operation trigger of the second start door 2022 as the process of step S15. Even in this normal symbol process, basically, the corresponding processing is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag indicating the progress of the game.

  When the special symbol process (step S14) and the normal symbol process (step S15) are performed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 then performs the special symbol process as step S16. Then, processing for transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM to the peripheral control board 1510 or the like is performed. Next, as a process of step S17, a process of transmitting a command set in a predetermined area of the main control built-in RAM in the normal symbol process process to the peripheral control board 1510, for example, is performed.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs an information output process of outputting data such as hit information supplied to the hall management computer, for example, as a process of step S18.

  Then, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the process of step S19 as the first left start port sensor 4002a, the first right start port sensor 4002b, the second start port sensor 4004, and the first When detection signals such as the count sensor 4005a, the second count sensor 4005b, and the general prize opening sensor 4020 are in an on state, the payout control to the payout control board 951 is made so that a prize ball corresponding to the signals is paid out to the player. A prize ball process for outputting a command is executed. As a result, the payout control MPU 952a mounted on the payout control board 951 outputs a drive signal from the payout motor drive circuit 952d to the payout motor 834, and pays out a prize ball to the player. In this example, when the game ball wins the first left start port 2002a and the first left start port sensor 4002a is turned on, and when the game ball wins the first right start port 2002b and the first left “3 balls” when the right start port sensor 4002b is turned on, “1 ball” when the game ball is won at the second start port 2004 and the second start port sensor 4004 is turned on. When a game ball wins the first grand prize opening 2005 and the first count sensor 4005a is turned on, “14 balls”, a game ball wins the second big prize opening 2005b and the second count sensor 4005b is turned on. Then, “14 balls”, when a game ball is won in the general winning port 2001 and the general winning port sensor 4020 is turned on, “10 balls” are paid out to the player.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes a storage process for checking increase / decrease in the number of reserved storages as the process of step S20. Next, as a process of step S21, a test terminal process that is a process of outputting a test signal for enabling the control state of the pachinko machine 1 to be confirmed outside the gaming machine is executed. After that, the drive control of the actuator that operates constantly is performed (step S22), the contents of the register are restored (step S23), and the control is finished when the interrupt permission state is set (step S24). It becomes.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 mS. In this embodiment, the game control process is executed by an interrupt process by a timer. However, in the interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred may be set. However, in this case, the game control process is executed in the main process.

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the special symbol process (step S14).

  Now, assuming that the random numbers used in various lottery processes have been updated (step S13), as shown in FIG. 132, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first has the first start port sensor (first The detection signals from the left start opening sensor 4002a and the first right start opening sensor 4002b) are in the ON state (the ball enters the first start opening (the first left start opening 2002a and the first right start opening 2002b)). (Step S31), a first start port passing process such as obtaining the first special random number of the first special symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the first special symbol storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Is executed (step S32). Also, on condition that the detection signal from the second start port sensor 4004 is in an ON state (the ball enters the second start port 2004) (step S33), the second special random number of the second special symbol is set to the random number. A second start-pass passage process such as obtaining from the counter and storing it in the second special symbol holding storage area of the main control built-in RAM is executed (step S34).

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a big hit execution flag indicating that control is being made to the big hit gaming state is set (step S35). If the big hit execution flag is set, the big hit gaming state is set. The big hit control process (step S40) for performing the above control is executed. In the big hit control process, when the result of the lottery process (the result of the hit determination and the contents of the big hit type) about the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped becomes a mode suggesting “10R big hit”. , After the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 4005a detects that nine game balls have won the first big prize opening 2005 The process of controlling the open / close pattern to be repeated 10 times to the 10R jackpot gaming state is executed, and the result of the lottery processing (the result of the hit determination and the content of the jackpot type) regarding the display mode when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped is “ When it becomes a mode suggesting “15R big hit”, after the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or 9 game balls are placed in the first big prize opening 2005. It was winning executes a process of controlling the 15R jackpot gaming state repeating 15 times the opening and closing pattern to be closed when it is detected by the first counting sensor 4005a.

  In the big hit control process, the opening control of the first big winning opening 2005 is performed, and then the time-short flag setting process is executed. The time reduction flag is a flag indicating that the time reduction control (control executed in the time reduction state) is being executed, and is set when the big hit gaming state based on the big hit based on the time reduction control after the big hit gaming state ends, which will be described later. It is reset by the first special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 143 or the second special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 146 described later. In this way, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, the number of time reductions is set to once, and after the big hit gaming state, the time reduction control is started and the change display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is executed once. When it is done, the time-shortening control is ended.

  Further, if the big hit execution flag is not set, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the small hit execution flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is controlled is set (step S36). If the winning execution flag is set, a small hit control process (step S41) for controlling the small hit gaming state is executed. In the small hit control process, when the result of the lottery process for the display mode at the time when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped becomes a mode that suggests “small hit”, the second big prize opening 2005b is set for a predetermined period ( For example, after the opening, or when the second count sensor 4005b detects that one game ball has been won in the second big prize opening 2005b, a process of closing is executed. In addition, when a game ball won in the second grand prize opening 2005b enters the V prize opening 2411, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) by controlling to the big hit gaming state. When the first count sensor 4005a detects that nine game balls have been won later or in the first big prize opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern to be closed is controlled to be changed to the 15R big hit game state which is repeated 14 times.

  The main control MPU 1310a also displays a second special hold number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the second special symbol hold storage area if neither the big hit execution flag nor the small hit execution flag is set. On the condition that the value of “0” is “0” (step S37), the first special symbol process process including the lottery process relating to the display mode at the time of stopping the variable display of the first special symbol is executed (step S38). On the condition that the value of the second special reserved number counter indicating the number of second special random numbers stored in the two special symbol reserved storage areas is not “0” (step S37), when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped A second special symbol process process including a lottery process according to the display mode is executed (step S39). Thus, in this example, when the value of the second special reserved number counter is not “0”, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed.

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first start port passage process (step S32).

  Now, in the process of step S31, the first left start port sensor 4002a is in an on state, and a game ball has entered the first left start port 2002a, or the first right start port sensor 4002b. Is in the on state and it is determined that a game ball has entered the first right start port 2002b, as shown in FIG. 133, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs step S41. First, the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number are acquired from the random number counter.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 obtains the counter value by the first special reserved number counter indicating the number of first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area from the main control built-in RAM, Based on the counter value, it is determined whether or not the first reserved storage number is “4” which is the maximum value (upper limit value) (step S42). In the process of step S42, if it is determined that the first reserved memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S43- The process of S45 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S43, the first special reservation number counter is incremented (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S44, the first special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the first special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S41. And finish the process.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 displays the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol based on the first special random number, the reach random number, the first symbol random number, and the variable random number acquired in step S41. Whether or not the game is a big hit, if the big win is reached, the type of the big hit, otherwise the reach effect is executed as the game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or the type type of the game effect to be executed ( After performing the effect pre-determination process for determining the pre-determination information such as the variation pattern type) before starting the variable display according to the start winning (step S45), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S42 that the first reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the first special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S43 to S45, the first special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, when the first reserved memory number changes based on the game ball entering the first start port (first left start port 2002a, first right start port 2002b), the above storage process (step S20) changes A command (first hold number designation command 0 to 4) for instructing one hold storage number is set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the first reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the first reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect preliminary determination process (step S45). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the production pre-determination process, the pre-determination table (not shown) and the random number acquired in step S41, specifically, the first special random number, the first symbol random number, the reach random number, the fluctuation Whether or not it is a big hit by comparing with a random number, if it is a big hit, the type of big hit, if it is not a big hit, execute or execute a reach effect as a game effect executed on the main liquid crystal display device 1600 The mode type of the game effect to be specified is specified (step S61).

  And the specified prior determination information (whether or not it will be a big hit, if the big hit, the type of big hit, if not big hit, whether to execute the reach effect as a game effect executed in the main liquid crystal display device 1600, Depending on the type of game effect to be executed, etc., the type of special random number obtained (first special random number), and the number of reserved memories stored (the value of the number of pending counters) corresponding to the acquired special random number Set a prior judgment command. For example, in the effect predetermination process related to the first special symbol executed in step S45 of the first start port passage process, the specified predetermination information and the first special random number are acquired, and the first reserved memory number (first 1 special reserved number counter value) and a first special symbol pre-determination command corresponding to the value (step S62).

  Then, in the special symbol command control process (step S16), a pre-determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, whereby a start opening (first left start opening 2002a, first 1 Either one of the right starting port 2002b), whether or not the display result of the change display of the special symbol based on the generated starting winning a prize is added to the jackpot, in addition to the number of stored stored corresponding to the starting port, In the case of a big win, if it is not a big win, a reach effect is executed as a game effect executed by the effect display device 1600, or prior determination information such as a type type of a game effect to be executed is included in the start prize The peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can be grasped before starting the corresponding variation display.

  When the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the preliminary determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the preliminary determination information indicated by the received preliminary determination command. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a first reserved storage area for storing pre-determination information relating to the variable display of the first special symbol.

  Further, the first reserved storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the first determination (first) storage in advance determination information indicated by the received previous determination command. Store sequentially from the area. When the advance determination command is received when the advance determination information is stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the advance determination information notified to the (n + 1) th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. And when the first variation pattern command for notifying the start of variation display of the first special symbol is received, the advance stored in the first storage area of the first reserved storage area in accordance with the received first variation pattern command Discard the determination information and move the prior determination information stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area (to the reserved storage area) Shift the stored prior decision information). Thereby, the preliminary determination information of the first special symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the suspension of the start of the variable display has occurred, and is discarded in order from the earliest preliminary determination information.

  In this way, when the variable display control is put on hold, the big display expectation degree (pseudo-winning probability) of the variable display control is maintained even though the variable display control is maintained in an unexecuted state (pending state). )) In advance, for example, can be notified at a predetermined timing such as when a new output of the hold display or a shift display of the hold display according to the hold display. .

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second start port passage process (step S34).

  If it is determined in the process of step S33 that the second start port sensor 4004 is in an on state and a game ball has entered the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first acquires the second special random number, the reach random number, the second symbol random number, and the variable random number from the random number counter as the process of step S51.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 acquires the counter value by the second special reserved number counter from the main control built-in RAM, and the second reserved memory number is the maximum value based on the counter value. 4 "is determined (step S52). In the process of step S52, when it is determined that the second reserved memory number is not the maximum value, the following steps S53 to S53 are performed to newly put the variable display control of the second special symbol on hold. The process of S54 will be performed. That is, first, as the process of step S53, the second special hold number counter is counted up (added by 1). Next, as the processing of step S54, the second special symbol reserved storage area corresponding to the counter value by the second special reservation number counter in the storage area of the main control built-in RAM is used as the random number acquired in step S51. And finish the process.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S52 that the second reserved memory number is the maximum value, the variable display control of the second special symbol is not newly reserved. That is, by ending the process without executing the processes of steps S53 to S54, the second special symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  Further, when the second reserved memory number changes based on the game ball entering the second starting port 2004, a command (second reserved number designation) instructing the second reserved memory number in the storage process (step S20). Commands 0 to 4) are set and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4140. The peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510 displays the second reserved memory number on the effect display device 1600 based on the reception of the second reserved number designation commands 0 to 4.

  FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol process (step S38). The first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process and the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process are the same program modules, and are random numbers used for the determination. Since only the table is different, only the first special symbol process executed in step S38 of the special symbol process will be described here. In the first special symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the first special symbol process flag. As a result of the comparison with the first special random number in the hit determination process (step S105), which will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that it is a small hit, the hit determination process executed in the first special symbol process process, The hit determination process executed in the two special symbol process processes may be a separate process, and control may be performed so that the process related to the small hit is not executed in each process process in the first special symbol process process.

1. First special symbol in which the first special random number stored in the main control built-in RAM is read out, and a lottery process is performed on the display mode when the variation control of the first special symbol is stopped based on the read first special random number Normal processing (step S80)
2. First special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) in which the determination process of the first special symbol variation control stop mode is performed based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variable control stop )
3. About the variation mode of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display unit 1403 based on the variable random number and the variation mode of the effect display executed on the production display device 1600 corresponding to the first special symbol. First variation pattern setting process in which a lottery process or the like is performed (step S82)
4). First special symbol variation processing that waits until the first special symbol display on the first special symbol display 1403 is stopped (step S83).
5. The first special symbol display unit 1403 displays the first special symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the display mode when the first special symbol variation control is stopped. First special symbol stop process for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol (step S84)

  The first special symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the first special symbol normal processing (step S80) should be performed in the processing of step S1 (see FIG. 131).

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol normal process (step S80).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 137, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first executes step S101. As the process, it is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the first special symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the first special hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the first special symbol that is in the hold state, it is stored in the first special symbol hold storage area of the main control built-in RAM as the process of step S102. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers (for example, the first special random number, the first design random number, the reach random number, and the variable random number) related to the display mode of the first special symbol, Read from. Next, as the processing of steps S103 and S104, the first special reserved number counter is counted down and the first special stored in each storage area of the first special symbol reserved storage area of the main control built-in RAM. A random number (first special random number, first symbol random number, reach random number, variable random number) related to the display mode when the variable display of symbols is stopped is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the first special symbol reserved storage area has four storage areas (first special symbol reserved storage area a to first special symbol reserved storage area d), and the first start port (first left start port) 2002a, first random starting port 2002b), random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start winning are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the first special symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that occurred first). become. Similarly, the second special symbol holding storage area has four storage areas (second special symbol holding storage area a to second special symbol holding storage area d), and according to the occurrence of the start winning at the second starting port 2004. The random numbers extracted in this manner are stored in order from the first (first) area. Then, if a starting prize occurs when random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the variable display start condition based on the random number stored in the storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read out and stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. Various random numbers are moved to the (N−1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. As a result, the order in which the suspension of the variable display control of the second special symbol has occurred is stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable display control is released in order from the earliest suspension (the suspension that has occurred first). become.

  And after that, as a process of step S105, based on the read first special random number of the first special symbol, a hit determination process which is a lottery process for the big hit or the small hit is performed. Thereafter, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81) (step S106), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the hit determination process (step S105).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes a hit determination table and a special random number (first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process or second special symbol normal process) shown in FIG. The read second special random number) is compared (step S114).

  As shown in FIG. 139A, the hit determination table is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is provided for each type of special random number (first special random number, second special random number). In the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the first special random number, one type of first special random number matches the big hit determination value indicating that the big win is won, and 299 types of first special random numbers are The first special random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with a loss determination value indicating a loss (big hit probability; 1/300). In the present example, in the second special symbol process executed in step S39 of the special symbol process, one type of second special random number is included in the hit determination table referred to for comparison with the second special random number. The second special random number matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won, and the second special random number of 299 types different from the jackpot determination value matches the jackpot determination value indicating that the jackpot has been won. Are associated with each other (big hit probability: 1/300, small hit probability: 299/300). That is, in the hit determination table that is referred to for comparison with the first special random number, it is not determined as a small hit, but is determined to be either a big hit or a loss. In the hit determination table referred to for comparison, it is always determined that either the big hit or the small hit is made.

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 includes the hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process or the second special symbol read in the second special symbol normal process). As a result of the comparison with the (random number), if it is determined that it is a big hit (step S115), a big hit flag indicating that the fluctuation is won is set (step S116), and the hit determination process is terminated.

  Further, as a result of comparison between the selected hit determination table and a special random number (the first special random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process or the second special random number read in the second special symbol normal process), When it is determined that a small hit is made (step S117), a small hit flag indicating that the change is won for the small hit is set (step S118), and the hit determination process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if neither the big win nor the small win is won, that is, if it is determined to be lost, the reach determination table is compared with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119).

  A reach determination table (not shown) is stored in the main control built-in ROM, and is used when the gaming state is the short-time state, and when the gaming state is the non-short-time state, the non-time reduction And a reach determination table in a state. In the reach determination table in the short-time state, the reach reaches the reach determination value indicating that one type of reach random number reaches, and the reach determination value indicates that 71 types of reach random numbers do not reach. Each random number is associated.

  In addition, the reach determination table in the non-short-time state matches the reach determination value indicating that five types of reach random numbers including the same reach random number set in the reach determination table in the short-time state reach, The reach random numbers are associated with each other so that the 67 types of reach random numbers match the reach determination value indicating that the reach is not reached. As described above, in this embodiment, in the non-short-time state, the reach determination value indicating the reach is higher than that in the short-time state.

  If the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the selected reach determination table with the reach random number read in step S102 (step S119) and determines that the reach is lost (step S120), the fluctuation is detected. A reach flag indicating reach is set and the process is terminated (step S121).

  FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process (step S81).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop symbol setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 140, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first The result of the lottery process of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, that is, the result of the hit determination process (step S105) is determined. The lottery processing result is determined by determining whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131).

  If the jackpot flag is set in step S131, the main control MPU 1310a selects the jackpot symbol determination table shown in FIG. 139 (B) and selects the first symbol random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process. By comparing with the selected jackpot symbol determination table, the jackpot symbol as a mode (stop symbol of the first special symbol) at the time of stopping the variable control of the first special symbol is determined (step S132).

  As shown in FIG. 139 (B), the jackpot symbol determination table is associated with a symbol random number (first symbol random number, second symbol random number) according to the determination result (10R big hit A, 10R big hit B, 15R big hit). It is remembered in the form. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of jackpot by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired symbol random number. The jackpot symbol determination table of this example is set so that the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the first symbol random number is different from the determination probability of the jackpot type determined based on the second symbol random number. doing.

In particular,
1. After the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 4005a detects that nine game balls have won the first big prize opening 2005. By repeating the opening / closing pattern 10 times, the game ball is controlled to a 10R big hit gaming state in which the game ball can enter the first big prize opening 2005 (easy) and is controlled to a short time state after the big hit gaming state is finished.
2. After the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 4005a detects that nine game balls have won the first big prize opening 2005. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 10 times, the game ball is controlled to a 10R big hit gaming state in which the game ball can enter the first big prize opening 2005 (easy) and is controlled to a non-short-time state after the big hit gaming state is finished.
3. After the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 4005a detects that nine game balls have won the first big prize opening 2005. By repeating the opening and closing pattern 15 times, the game ball is controlled to a 15R big hit game state that can enter the first big prize opening 2005 (easy), and after the big hit game state is finished, it is controlled to a short time state 15R big hit

  In the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the first symbol random number, 80 judgment values are assigned when 10R jackpot A is reached, and 20 judgment values are sorted when 10R jackpot B is reached. In other words, when a lottery result based on the first special random number is obtained as a big hit, a 10R big hit A is obtained with a probability of 80%, and a 10R big hit B is obtained with a probability of 20%. On the other hand, in the jackpot symbol determination table to be compared with the second symbol random number, when all 15 judgment values are distributed in the case of 15R jackpot, the lottery result for the jackpot is obtained by lottery based on the second special random number Will always be 15R big hit.

  In addition, when the lottery result for the big hit is obtained, the gaming state after the big hit gaming state is ended is determined according to the type of the big hit. In the big hit control process (step S40), after the big hit gaming state is controlled, the time-short flag setting process is executed based on the determination result.

  Specifically, when it is determined that a big hit of “10R big hit A” has been obtained, after the big hit gaming state for 10 rounds is executed, the state of the short time until the special symbol change is executed once When it is judged that a big hit of “10R big hit B” is obtained, after the big round gaming state for 10 rounds is executed, it is controlled to the non-time-saving state, and the big hit of “15R big hit” is obtained. When it is determined that the game has been made, the game is controlled to be in a time-saving state until the symbol variation of the special symbol is executed once after the big hit gaming state for 15 rounds is executed.

  In the first special symbol stop symbol setting process, when 10R big hit A is decided, 10R big hit A symbol is decided as big hit symbol, and when 10R big hit B is decided, 10R big hit B symbol is decided as big hit symbol. . In addition, when the 15R jackpot symbol is determined in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process shown in FIG. 144 described later, a 15R jackpot symbol is determined as the jackpot symbol.

  Also, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the lost symbol when the big hit flag is not set (step S136).

  After the stop symbol determination process is performed in this manner, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the above-described lottery result (big hit type, small hit, reach lose, or lose) as the process of step S137. A determination result notification command corresponding to each lottery result is set so that an instruction (which may be an instruction for a stop symbol form of the first special symbol) is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. After that, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first variation pattern setting process (step S82) as the process of step S138, this process is ended.

  The peripheral control MPU 1511a controls the display of the effect display device 1600 based on the received determination result notification command and the variation pattern command (the left, middle and right decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and the left decorative symbol → the right decorative symbol → the middle decorative component). Stop display in the order of the symbols (Note that the left, middle, and right decorative symbols may be changed and displayed in synchronization with the same symbol and may be stopped at the same time). Specifically, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a specifies 10R big hit A out of the big hits from the received determination result notification command as a mode (stop symbol) at the time of stoppage of decoration symbol change displayed on the effect display device 1600. Is determined to be a 10R big hit A symbol (a combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols [1] to [8] with the same symbol excluding [1]) and 10R big hit B is specified. Is determined to be a 10R big hit B symbol (a combination of the left, middle and right decorative symbols [0] to [8] with the same symbol excluding [1]), and a 15R big hit is specified. 15R big hit symbol (a combination in which the left, middle and right decorative symbols are the same symbols except [1] among the symbols [0] to [8]). In addition, when a small hit is specified, it is determined to be a small hit symbol (a combination in which the left, middle and right decorative symbols are all [1]; [111]), and a reach loss is specified when a reach loss is specified. When deciding on a losing pattern (a combination of the same symbols of the left and right decorative designs [0] to [8] and a combination of different decorative patterns; reach losing symbols), Loss design without reach (a combination of at least the left, right, and right decorative symbols among the left, middle, and right decorative symbols) and when the variation time specified by the variation pattern command has elapsed (game effect) At the end of the display), the determined stop symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the first variation pattern setting process (step S82).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first variation pattern setting process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 141, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the jackpot flag. If so (step S141), the variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of the big hit according to the type of big hit determined at step S132 of the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is selected (step S142), and the reach flag is set. If it is set (step S145), a variation pattern table (not shown) at the time of reach is selected (step S146), and if neither the big hit flag nor the reach flag is set, that is, normal loss (reach effect) If the result is a loss that does not execute, the fluctuation pattern table (Figure Not) to select (step S147).

  Then, a variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process (step S148), and the determined variation pattern is started. The variation pattern command to be notified to the control board 1510 is set, and the variation display of the first special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 1403 is started (step S149). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets a variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S150). As a result, the first special symbol display unit 1403 performs the variable display control of the first special symbol for the variation time determined in this way, and the effect display device 1600 controls the effect in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

  A plurality of types of variation pattern tables are provided for each determination result based on special random numbers (first special random number, second special random number) and symbol random numbers (first symbol random number, second symbol random number). The variation patterns set in each variation pattern table include a plurality of variation time information indicating predetermined times (variation times) required for variation display control of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Each variable random number is stored in association with each other. Thus, the main control MPU 1310a selects the selected variation pattern table and the variation random number read out in step S102 of the first special symbol normal process among the plurality of types of variation pattern tables according to the determination result based on the special random number and the symbol random number. And the fluctuation time information associated with the read fluctuation random number is obtained from this table, thereby determining the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol). As a result, the lottery process for the variation pattern of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed. The variation pattern table is stored in the main control built-in ROM.

  Further, the variation pattern table at the time of reach in this example is set so as to determine the type of reach effect to be executed by comparing a determination value indicating which reach effect is to be executed with a variable random number. . For example, 164 kinds of random numbers among 241 kinds of random numbers are set as determination values (0 to 163) indicating that any one of the normal reach effects is executed, and 59 kinds of random numbers are super reach with low expectation level Determination values (223 to 240) are set as determination values (164 to 222) indicating that any one of the effects is to be executed, and 18 kinds of variable random numbers are to execute any one of the super reach effects having a high expectation degree of jackpot. ) Is set. Super-reach production has a higher jackpot expectation than normal reach production, and when a player who wants to generate a big hit gaming state has a player's expectation for the big hit gaming state when the super reach production is executed. It is getting higher.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 139 (D), in the variation pattern table of this example, the variation time corresponding to the first special random number is set to 10 seconds to 90 seconds in the non-short-time state, and 120 seconds is set in the time-short state. As a variation time corresponding to the second special random number, 2 seconds is set in common in the non-short-time state and the short-time state.

  When the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol variation process (step S83) (step S155), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the first special symbol variation process (step S83).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 142, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S171. As the process, 1 is subtracted from the variation timer in which the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined in the lottery process (step S82) for the variation pattern is set. If it is determined that the variation time timer is 0, that is, the lottery variation time has elapsed (step S172), the process proceeds to step S173. That is, in the process of step S173, when the first special symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the first special symbol stop process (step S84), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the first special symbol stop process (step S84).

  When the first special symbol process flag indicates that the first special symbol stop process is to be performed, as shown in FIG. 143, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs step S181. As the process, the display control for causing the first special symbol indicator 1403 to display the stop symbol determined in the first special symbol stop symbol setting process is performed, and the first special symbol is displayed on the effect display device 1600. A stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S182).

  Next, when the time reduction flag is set (step S183), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the time reduction flag (step S185). As a result, when the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is displayed once, the time-shortening control is ended and the control in the non-time-saving state is started.

  Further, when the big hit flag is set (step S186), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets a big hit start command indicating that the big hit gaming state is started (step S187). The waiting time until the start of the state (the time for displaying the effect of starting the big hit gaming state) is set in the interval timer (step S188). Although not shown, in step S188, processing for setting the number of rounds corresponding to the type of jackpot to a jackpot counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. The big hit number counter is decremented by 1 every time a round is executed in the big hit control process described later, and when the big hit number counter reaches “0”, it is determined that the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has executed the prescribed round number. Control to end the big hit gaming state. Specifically, in the big hit control process described later, until the big hit number counter reaches “0”, the big prize opening opening pre-processing (step S91) and the big prize opening open process (step S92) are repeatedly executed to win the big prize. When the round is ended in the open mouth process (step S92), the big win counter is decremented by 1 and becomes “0”. Execute the control to end.

  Then, a big hit execution flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is set (step S189). The jackpot start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of jackpot. In step S187, a big hit start command (10R big hit A start command, 10R big hit B start command, 15R big hit start command) according to the big hit type (10R big hit A, 10R big hit B, 15R big hit) is set. Thereby, the effect of the big hit gaming state according to the type of the big hit designated by the big hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

  Further, the big hit running flag indicating that the big hit gaming state is being executed is, specifically, in the big winning opening opening post-processing (step S93) of the big hit control processing (step S40) when the big hit gaming state is finished. Opening and closing control of the first big prize opening 2005 according to the type of the big hit (for example, “15R big hit”, after the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the first big prize winning opening 2005 When the first count sensor 4005a detects that 9 game balls have been won, the open / close pattern that is closed 15 times is closed (open / close control that can be executed in the big hit game state). Reset. When the big hit execution flag is reset, the big hit control process (step S40) is not executed in step S35 of the special symbol process (step S14), while the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 1403 is not executed. And the second special symbol display unit 1405 can execute the variable display of the second special symbol.

  When the big hit flag is not set, that is, when the game is lost, the process proceeds to step S194 without executing the processes of steps S187 to S189.

  When the processing of step S186 to step S189 is executed, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 updates the first special symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the first special symbol normal processing which is the initial value. (Step S194), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second special symbol stop symbol setting process executed in the second special symbol process (step S39).

  As described above, the second special symbol process is a program module that is substantially the same as the first special symbol process, and except for some processes, only the random numbers and tables used for determination are different. Only processing different from the processing executed in the first special symbol process will be described.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present example, the display of the first special symbol is not included as a result of the lottery processing of the display mode when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, whereas the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. As a result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time, including the one that becomes a small hit, in the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, as a result of the lottery process of the display mode at the time of the variable display stop of the second special symbol, It is also determined whether or not. The determination of the lottery processing result is performed by determining whether or not the small hit flag is set.

  Specifically, when the big hit flag is not set (step S131a), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S133a). C) The small hit symbol determination table shown in C) is selected, and the second special symbol variation control is performed by comparing the second symbol random number read out in the second special symbol normal process (not shown) with the selected small hit symbol determination table. A small hit symbol is determined as a stop mode (stop symbol of the second special symbol) (step S134a).

  As shown in FIG. 139 (D), in the small hitting symbol determination table, symbol random numbers (second symbol random numbers) are associated with each other according to the determination results (small hitting A, small hitting B, small hitting C). It is remembered. The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines the type of the small hit by specifying the determination result associated with the acquired second symbol random number.

In particular,
1. After the second grand prize opening 2005b is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the second count sensor 4005b detects that nine game balls have won the second big prize opening 2005b. When the game balls received in the second big prize opening 2005b are distributed to the V prize opening 2411 during the small hit gaming state, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when the first count sensor 4005a detects that nine game balls have been won in the first grand prize opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern is closed 14 times, so that the game ball is Small hit A which controls to the big hit gaming state that can enter the big winning opening 2005 (easy), and controls to the short time state after the big hit gaming state ends.
2. After the second grand prize opening 2005b is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the second count sensor 4005b detects that nine game balls have won the second big prize opening 2005b. When the game balls received in the second big prize opening 2005b are distributed to the V prize opening 2411 during the small hit gaming state, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds), or when the first count sensor 4005a detects that nine game balls have been won in the first big prize opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern to be closed is repeated nine times so that the game balls Small hit B which controls to the big hit gaming state which can enter the big winning opening 2005 (easy) and controls to the short time state after the big hit gaming state ends.
3. After the second grand prize opening 2005b is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the second count sensor 4005b detects that nine game balls have won the second big prize opening 2005b. When the game balls received in the second big prize opening 2005b are distributed to the V prize opening 2411 during the small hit gaming state, the first big prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or when the first count sensor 4005a detects that nine game balls have been won in the first big prize opening 2005, the opening / closing pattern is closed four times, thereby causing the game ball to Small hit C which controls to the big hit gaming state that can enter the big winning opening 2005 (easy), and controls to the short time state after the big hit gaming state ends.

  In addition, in the small hit symbol determination table compared with the second symbol random number, when the small hit A is, 10 determination values are distributed, and when the small hit B is, the 20 determination values are distributed. When the winning C is reached, 70 judgment values are assigned. That is, if a lottery result based on the second special random number is obtained as a small hit, a small hit A is obtained with a probability of 10%, a small hit B with a probability of 20%, and a small hit with a probability of 70%. B.

  In addition, when the lottery result for the small hit is obtained, the game balls received in the second big winning opening 2005b during the small hit gaming state are distributed to the V winning opening 2411 according to the type of the small hit. A gaming state after the end of the generated big hit gaming state is determined. In the big hit control process (step S40), the big hit gaming state is controlled based on the fact that the game balls received in the second big winning opening 2005b during the small hit gaming state are distributed to the V winning opening 2411. Thereafter, a time-short flag setting process is executed based on the determination result.

  Specifically, when it is determined that a small hit of “small hit A” has been obtained, after the big hit gaming state for 15 rounds has been executed, it takes a short time until the special symbol change is executed once. When it is determined that a small hit of “Small B” has been obtained, the time is shortened until a special symbol variation of 10 rounds is executed and then the special symbol change is executed once. When it is determined that a small hit of “Small C” has been obtained, the time is shortened until a special symbol change of one special symbol is executed after the five-round big hit gaming state is executed. Controlled by the state.

  In the second special symbol stop symbol setting process, when the small hit A is determined, the small hit A symbol is determined as the small hit symbol, and when the small hit B is determined, the small hit symbol B is determined as the small hit symbol. When the small hit C is determined, the small hit C symbol is determined as the small hit symbol.

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second variation pattern setting process executed in the second special symbol process (step S39).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310, when the big hit flag is not set in the second variation pattern setting process (step S141a), and when the small hit flag is set (step S143a), A variation pattern table (not shown) is selected (step S144a).

  Then, the variation pattern to be executed is determined by comparing the selected variation pattern table with the variation random number read in the second special symbol normal process (step S148a), and the peripheral control board 1510 starts the determined variation pattern. The variation pattern command to be notified is set, and the variation display of the second special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display 1405 is started (step S149a). Further, the main control MPU 1310a sets a variation time set corresponding to the variation pattern determined to determine the variation pattern in the variation timer (step S150a). As a result, the second special symbol display 1405 performs the variation display control of the second special symbol for the variation time thus determined, and the effect display device 1600 performs the effect control in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol. Will be done.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the second special symbol stop process executed in the second special symbol process (step S39).

  When the big hit flag is not set (step S186a), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 indicates that the small hit gaming state is started if the small hit flag is set (step S190a). A small hit start command is set (step S191a), and a waiting time until the start of the small hit gaming state (time for displaying that the small hit gaming state is started) is set in the interval timer (step S192a). Then, a small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hitting gaming state is being executed is set (step S193a). The small hit start command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and is prepared individually according to the type of the small hit. In step S191a, a small hit start command (small hit A start command, small hit B start command, small hit C start command) according to the small hit type (small hit A, small hit B, small hit C) is set. . Thereby, the effect of the small hit gaming state corresponding to the type of the small hit designated by the small hit start command is executed by the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like.

  Further, the small hitting execution flag indicating that the small hit gaming state is being executed, when the small hitting gaming state is ended, specifically, the small hitting medium processing (step S41) (described later) In step S401), after opening / closing control of the second big prize opening 2005b according to the type of the small hit (for example, “small hit C”), after opening the second big prize opening 2005b for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or When the second count sensor 4005b detects that nine game balls have been won in the second major winning opening 2005b, it is reset. By resetting the small hitting execution flag, the small hit control process (step S41) is not executed in step S36 of the special symbol process (step S14), while the first special symbol display 1403 uses the first. The special symbol variation display and the second special symbol display 1405 in the second special symbol variation display can be executed.

  When the small hit flag is not set, that is, when the game is lost, the process proceeds to step S194a without executing the processes of steps S190a to S193a.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the jackpot control process (step S40). In the big hit control process, one of the following three process processes is selectively executed according to the big hit process flag.

1. The peripheral control board notifies the player that the special symbol (the first special symbol, the second special symbol) is changed to the big hit game state based on the fact that the display state when the variable display is stopped is the big hit symbol. Waiting until 1510 is performed or waiting until the next round is started Preliminary winning opening opening pre-processing (step S91)
2. The first big prize opening 2005 is controlled to be in an open state based on the fact that the special symbol variation display stop mode is a big hit symbol, or the first round is started based on the start of the next round. The first count sensor 4005a indicates that nine game balls have been won after the first grand prize opening 2005 is opened for a long time (for example, 28.5 seconds) or the first big prize opening 2005 is controlled. Processing for opening a special prize opening to be closed when detected (step S92)
3. After winning rounds, the winning prize opening opening process is waited until the peripheral control board 1510 notifies the player that the big hit gaming state is finished when all rounds are finished (step S93).
The jackpot process flag is operated to indicate that the pre-opening process for the big winning opening (step S91) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 131).

  FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hitting control process (step S41). In the small hit process, one of the following two process processes is selectively executed according to the small hit process flag.

1. Small hit start process for executing a setting process for starting the small hit gaming state (step S400)
2. Small hit-medium processing for monitoring the entry and release time of game balls in the small hit game state (step S401)

  The small hitting process flag is operated to indicate that the small hitting start process (step S400) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 131).

  FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the small hitting start process (step S400).

  The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first subtracts 1 from the interval timer indicating the waiting time until the small hit gaming state starts as the processing of step S411, and if this interval timer has not timed out (NO in step S412) ) The process is terminated without executing the subsequent processes. Note that the interval timer is set based on the fact that the small hit flag is set when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped as described above (second special symbol stop process).

  On the other hand, if the interval timer has timed out (YES in step S412), the opening time of the second big prize opening 2005b is set in the opening timer (step S413), and after the small hit opening effect command is set (step S413) S415), the second big prize opening 2005b is controlled to be in an open state (step S416).

  Thereafter, when the small hit process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the middle hit process (step S401) (step S417), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the small hitting process (step S401).

  First, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines whether or not the number of game balls received into the second big prize opening 2005b by the second count sensor 4005b has reached “9” as a process of step S421. When the number of game balls accepted into the second big prize opening 2005b has reached “9”, the process proceeds to step S427.

  If the number of game balls received in the second big prize opening 2005b in step S421 has not reached "9", the second big prize opening 2005b is controlled to the open state and then to the closed state. 1 is subtracted from the release timer indicating the release time until (step S425), and it is determined whether or not the release timer has timed out (step S426). If not timed out (NO in step S426), the subsequent processing If the process is terminated without executing the process (YES in step S426), the process proceeds to step S427.

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 resets the small hitting execution flag (step S427) and controls the open second winning prize opening 2005b to the closed state (step S428).

  At this time, if a game ball has entered the V winning opening 2411 (step S429), a 1R end command indicating that one round of the big hit gaming state is ended is set (step S430), and the big hit gaming state is started. Is set in the interval timer (step S431), and then the bonus winning flag indicating that the big hit gaming state has been entered is set based on the big hit running flag and the V winning in the small hit gaming state. (Step S432). The winning combination winning flag is used to determine whether the big hit gaming state is reached or the big hit symbol is stopped and the big hit gaming state is entered based on the fact that V winning is made during the small hit gaming state in the big hit control process (step S40). When the bonus winning flag is set, when the 15R jackpot gaming state is executed, the player is notified as if the second round of the 15R jackpot gaming state executed for 15 rounds is being executed. The player recognizes that the 15R big hit game state is executed including the small hit game state.

  Although not shown, in step S431, the number of unexecuted rounds (the number of remaining rounds when the small hit gaming state is set to one round (for example, in the V prize opening 2411) A processing for setting the number of remaining rounds 14)) to the big hit number counter indicating the remaining number of rounds is also executed. As described above, the big hit number counter is decremented by 1 every time a round is executed in the big hit control process. When the big hit number counter becomes “0”, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 sets the specified round number. It is determined that the game has been executed, and the big hit gaming state is terminated.

  When the process of step S432 is completed and when it is determined in step S429 that there is no V winning, when the small hit process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the small hit start process (step S400) (step S417), this process is terminated.

  FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol process (step S15).

  If it is determined in the process of step S801 that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is on and it is determined that a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S802, the main control MPU 1310a of the control board 1310 first executes a gate section passing process such as acquiring a normal random number of a normal symbol from the random number counter and storing it in the normal symbol holding storage area of the RAM. To do.

  Next, in the normal symbol process, one of the following five process processes is selectively executed according to the normal symbol process flag.

1. Normal symbol normal process in which a normal random number stored in the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is read out, and a lottery process is performed on the display mode when the variation control of the normal symbol is stopped based on the read normal random number (step S803).
2. Normal symbol variation pattern determination processing (step S804) in which a lottery process or the like is performed on the variation mode (variation time) of the regular symbol displayed on the ordinary symbol display based on the regular symbol random number
3. Normal symbol variation processing that waits until the variation display of the normal symbol on the ordinary symbol display is stopped (step S805).
4). The normal symbol variation display is displayed such that the normal symbol variation control stop mode determined based on the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol variation control stop mode is displayed on the normal symbol display. Normal symbol stop processing to stop (step S806)
5. When the result of the lottery process for the mode when the variable control of the normal symbol is stopped is a mode that suggests "per game", a process for controlling the game ball to be received at the second start port 2004 is executed. Normal electric accessory release processing (step S807)

  The normal symbol process flag is operated to indicate that the normal symbol normal process (step S803) should be performed in the process of step S1 (see FIG. 131).

  FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the gate section passage processing (step S802).

  Now, in the process of step S801, if it is determined that the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is in an on state and a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, as shown in FIG. In step S811, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first obtains a counter value by a normal holding number counter indicating the number of normal random numbers stored in the normal symbol holding storage area from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved symbols of the normal symbol is “4” which is the maximum value.

  In the process of step S811, when it is determined that the number of stored normal symbol symbols is not the maximum value, the following steps S812 to S814 are performed to newly put the normal symbol variable display control into the held state. Will be processed. That is, first, as the processing of step S812, the normal holding number counter is incremented (added by 1). In step S813, the normal random number and the normal variable random number are acquired from the random number counter. Then, in step S814, each random number obtained in this way is stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value by the normal holding number counter in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a.

  However, if it is determined in the process of step S811 that the number of normal symbols held is the maximum value, the normal symbol variation display control is not newly held. That is, by not executing the processing of steps S812 to S814 (not acquiring the normal random number and the normal variable random number from the random number counter), the normal symbol variable display control is not newly put on hold.

  In addition, as a gate part passage process (step S802), you may make it like another example described below. For example, if the detection signal from the gate sensor 4003 is now on and it is determined that a game ball has passed to the gate unit 2003, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the normal control. The random number and the above-mentioned normal fluctuation random number are acquired from the random number counter and stored in the temporary storage area. After that, the counter value by the above-mentioned normal holding number counter is obtained from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, and based on this counter value, it is determined whether or not the holding number of normal symbols is “4” which is the maximum value. Do. When it is determined that the number of stored normal symbols is not the maximum value, the normal number of counters is incremented (add 1) so that the variable symbol display control of the normal symbols is newly held. Then, the previously obtained ordinary random number, the ordinary variable random number (the ordinary random number, the ordinary variable random number stored in the temporary storage area) are stored in the RAM storage area of the main control MPU 1310a. Are stored in the normal symbol holding storage area corresponding to the counter value of the normal holding number counter. On the other hand, as a result of obtaining the counter value by the normal reserved number counter from the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, when it is determined that this counter value is “4” which is the maximum value (the reserved number of stored symbols of the normal symbol is If it is the maximum value), the previously acquired ordinary random number and the ordinary figure variable random number are discarded without being stored in the ordinary symbol holding storage area, and the obtained ordinary symbol fluctuation display control is newly performed. It is good also as preventing it from being suspended.

  Also, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 executes whether or not the display result of the normal symbol variation display is based on the ordinary symbol based on the ordinary random number and the ordinary variation random number acquired in step S813. Pre-determining information such as the pattern variation mode type (general pattern variation pattern type) pre-determination information is executed before starting normal symbol variation according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003. (Step S815), the process is terminated.

  FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the above-mentioned common map pre-determination process (step S815). When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 starts the general map predetermination process, it compares the general map predetermination table (not shown) with the random number acquired in step S813, specifically, a normal random number and a normal variable random number. In step S881, whether or not it is per common map is determined, and in the case of per normal map, the type per general map and the mode type of the normal symbol variation to be executed are specified.

  And the specified common figure prior judgment information (whether or not it is per common figure, if it is per common figure, the type per common figure, the mode type of the normal symbol variation to be executed, etc.), and the normal symbol hold storage The command (pre-determination command) is set according to the number (the value of the normal holding number counter).

  Then, in the above normal symbol command control process (step S17), a general symbol advance determination command is transmitted from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the generated symbol part 2003 is added to the generated gate unit 2003. Whether the display result of the fluctuation display of the normal symbol based on the passing of the game ball is per universal figure, and in the case of per common figure, the type of the normal symbol change, the type of the normal symbol variation to be executed, etc. The peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 can grasp the figure prior determination information before starting the normal symbol variation according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003.

  In addition, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 receives the general map advance determination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control MPU 1511a stores the general map advance determination information indicated by the received general map advance determination command. Yes. Specifically, the peripheral control RAM 1511c of the peripheral control MPU 1511a is provided with a general map holding storage area for storing general map preliminary determination information.

  In addition, the ordinary map storage area has 1 to 4 storage areas corresponding to the number of reserved memories, and the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives the first (pre- The data is stored in order from the first storage area. Then, when the general-purpose advance determination command is received in the n-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area, the n + 1-th (n = 1 to 3) storage area is notified when the general-purpose advance determination command is received. The general map pre-determined information is stored, and when a general pattern variation pattern command for notifying the start of normal symbol variation display is received, it is stored in the first storage area of the general map hold storage area according to the received general pattern variation pattern command. The conventional map advance determination information is discarded and the N-1 (N = 2 to 4) th storage area is stored in the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area. (Move the general map advance determination information stored in the general map hold storage area). As a result, the normal symbol advance determination information of the normal symbol is stored so as to be able to specify the order in which the normal symbol variation is suspended, and is discarded in order from the earliest common symbol advance determination information.

  In this way, when the normal symbol variation is put on hold, the normal symbol variation is maintained in an unexecuted state (pending state), but the normal symbol variation expectation level (pseudo) The winning probability) can be notified in advance, for example, at a predetermined timing such as at the time of new output of the hold display or at the time of shift display of the hold display corresponding to the hold-up. become. Specifically, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives a general symbol predetermination command indicating that the result of the lottery process (normal determination) for the normal symbol is normal hit during the chance mode, the effect suggesting that it is normal hit. If it is decided to execute an effect suggesting that it is a normal winning as a result of the lottery, a general map hold display area 1609 (FIG. 165) corresponding to the general map prior determination command is determined. The display mode of (see) is changed to a special mode different from the normal mode and displayed. In this example, a circle painted in blue is displayed as a normal display mode of the general map hold display area 1609, and a circle painted in red is displayed as a special mode different from normal. Even if the peripheral control MPU 1511a receives a general map predetermination command indicating that the result of the lottery process (normal determination) for the normal symbol is a normal loss during the chance mode, the normal control is not normal. If a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to produce an effect that suggests winning, and if it is decided to execute an effect that suggests that it is a normal winning as a result of the lottery, then The display mode of the figure hold display area 1609 is changed to a special mode and displayed. However, when a general figure predetermination command indicating that the result of the lottery process (normal determination) for the normal symbol is normal loss is received, the result of the lottery process (normal determination) for the normal symbol is normal hit. The ratio determined to execute the effect suggesting that it is a normal hit is lower than the case where the general map predetermining command indicating that the normal map is received, thereby displaying a special mode in the general map hold display area 1609. When this is done, the expectation for occurrence of a normal hit and, in turn, a big hit of the second special symbol can be improved.

  In addition, the effect suggesting that it is a normal hit is not limited to the one described above, and a special sound (for example, a picone cone etc.) is output based on the reception of the usual command in advance (for example, a normal hit) If the production suggesting this is not executed, no sound may be output, or a sound (such as pico) different from the special sound may be output), the door frame 3 or the game board 5 A special light emission pattern for lamps, LEDs, etc. provided in the lamp (if the effect that suggests a normal hit is not performed, the lamps, LEDs, etc. are not turned on, while the normal hit is suggested If you want to perform an effect that you want to perform, such as blinking a lamp or LED several times in a short time) or a special luminescent color (if you do not perform an effect that suggests that it is a normal hit) Is turned on in blue, and when performing an effect suggesting that it is a normal hit, the lamp or LED is turned on in red, etc.) Alternatively, an effect that suggests a normal hit may be executed by executing a combination of these.

  FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol normal process (step S803).

  When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol normal process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 154, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S821. It is determined whether or not there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state based on the counter value by the normal hold number counter. As a result, if it is determined that there is a variable display control of the normal symbol in the hold state, the normal symbol stored in the normal symbol hold storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is then processed as step S822. The random number stored in the earliest storage area among the random numbers related to the symbol display mode (for example, ordinary random numbers, ordinary variable random numbers) is read from the RAM. Next, as the processing of steps S823 and S824, the normal reserved number counter is counted down, and when the variable symbols of the normal symbol stored in the storage areas of the normal reserved storage area of the RAM of the main control MPU 1310a are stopped. The random number (ordinary random number, ordinary variable random number) related to the display mode is shifted in a first-in first-out (First-In First-Out) mode.

  Specifically, the normal symbol holding storage area has four storage areas 1 to 4, and the random numbers extracted according to the passage of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 are sequentially from the first (first) area. Remember. When random numbers are stored in the nth (n = 1 to 3) storage area and the game ball passes through the gate unit 2003, the extracted random numbers are stored in the n + 1th (n = 1 to 3) storage area. When the start condition of the variable display based on the random number stored in the first storage area is satisfied, various random numbers stored in the first storage area are read and the Nth (N = 2 to 4) storage area Are moved to the (N-1) th (N = 2 to 4) th storage area. Thereby, the order in which the suspension of the variable symbol display control of the normal symbol occurs can be stored in an identifiable manner, and the suspension of the variable symbol control can be released in order from the earliest suspension (the first occurrence). .

  Next, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the common figure determination table shown in FIG. 155A with the ordinary random number read in step S822 (step S828).

  The common figure determination table shown in FIG. 155 (A) is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a. Then, in the per-standard-judgment judgment table referred to for comparison with the ordinary random numbers, one kind of ordinary random number coincides with the judgment value per ordinary figure indicating that the common figure is won. The ordinary random numbers are associated with each other so as to coincide with the usual-time loss determination value indicating that the figure is lost.

  When the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 compares the normal symbol per unit determination table with the normal random number read out in step S822 of the normal symbol normal processing and determines that it is per normal symbol (step S829), A universal symbol flag indicating that the variation is won per universal symbol is set (step S830), and the normal symbol variation control stop mode (ordinary symbol stop symbol) is determined as the regular symbol symbol. (Step S831). On the other hand, if it is determined in step S829 that the normal symbol is not hit, the normal symbol losing symbol is determined as the mode (the normal symbol stop symbol) when the fluctuation control of the normal symbol is stopped (step S833).

  Then, after the lottery process for the normal symbol is performed in this way, as the process of step S834, the lottery result (indicating either one of the usual symbols or the loss) is sent to the peripheral control board 1510. Sets the common figure determination result notification command corresponding to each result. After that, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804) as the process of step S835, this process is terminated.

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation pattern determination process (step S804). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation pattern determination process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 156, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has the time reduction flag set. If this is the case (step S841), the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for the time reduction shown in FIG. 157 is selected (step S842). If the time reduction flag is set (step S841), the normal for the non-time reduction shown in FIG. A symbol variation pattern determination table is selected (step S843).

  Then, by comparing the selected ordinary symbol variation pattern determination table with the ordinary symbol variation random number read in step S822 of the ordinary symbol normal process, a variation pattern (ordinary symbol variation pattern) to be executed is determined (step S844). ), A normal symbol variation pattern command for notifying the peripheral control board 1510 of the start of the normal symbol variation in the determined regular symbol variation pattern is set, and the normal symbol variation display displayed on the ordinary symbol display unit 1402 is started ( Step S845). The peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 includes the general symbol determination result notification command set in step S834 of the normal symbol normal processing and the normal symbol variation pattern command set in step S845 of the normal symbol variation pattern determination processing. By specifying the fluctuation time from the start of the normal symbol fluctuation display to the stop of the normal symbol fluctuation display and the mode of the normal symbol fluctuation control stop (ordinary symbol stop symbol) The display of the normal symbol is started on the display device 1600, and the stop symbol of the normal symbol specified from the general symbol determination result notification command is displayed when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol specified from the normal symbol variation pattern command has elapsed. Display on the device 1600.

  Further, when the main control variation pattern is determined, the main control MPU 1310a sets a general variation time corresponding to the determined general variation pattern in the general variation timer (step S846). Thus, the effect control is performed by the normal symbol display device 1402 (the normal symbol variation display in the normal symbol display unit 1402) and the effect display device 1600 (the decorative normal symbol variation display in the normal symbol variation time) corresponding to the determined general symbol variation pattern. Will be done.

  As shown in FIG. 157, in this example, there are provided a normal symbol variation pattern determination table for time reduction and a normal symbol variation pattern determination table for non-time reduction. The normal symbol variation pattern determination table for non-temporal speeds is set so that the distribution of judgment values is different from that for the normal symbol variation time determination table for short hours, so that the regular symbol variation time for normal symbols is different. ing. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 157, the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for the short time is determined with respect to the short time loss variation pattern set to 2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time when the normal symbol is lost. While the distribution of values is set, the normal symbol variation pattern determination table for the non-temporal and short-time normal variation pattern determination table 1 and the non-temporal / temporal loss variation pattern 1 set to 4 seconds as the normal symbol variation time at the time of the loss of the normal symbol and The distribution of the judgment value is set for the non-short-time loss variation pattern 2 set to 5 seconds. That is, the normal symbol variation pattern determination table at the time reduction is set so that the variation time of the normal symbol is extremely short as compared with the normal symbol variation pattern determination table at the time reduction. The normal symbol variation pattern determination table is stored in the ROM of the main control MPU 1310a.

  When the normal symbol variation display control is started, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process proceeds to the normal symbol variation process (step S805) as the processing of step S847, End the process.

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol variation process (step S805). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol variation process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 158, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S851. In step S846, the normal time change timer set with the normal time change time is decremented by one. If it is determined that the normal symbol change time timer is 0, that is, the normal symbol change time has elapsed (step S852), the following steps S853 to S856 are performed.

  That is, first, as a process of step S853, display control for displaying the stop symbol of the normal symbol determined in the normal symbol normal process on the normal symbol display 1402 is performed, and the effect display device 1600 normally A common figure stop display command for instructing the derivation display of the display result of the decorative ordinary symbol corresponding to the symbol stop symbol is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 (step S854). In step S853, a predetermined universal symbol confirmation time (0.5 seconds in this example) is set in the universal symbol stop timer 1 as the time for maintaining the normal symbol stop symbol displayed on the normal symbol indicator 1402. (Step S855). As a result, after the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display unit 1402 is stopped, the normal symbol display unit 1402 is controlled to display the stop symbol of the normal symbol for a predetermined normal symbol confirmation time. Then, in the process of step S856, when the above-described normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol stop process (step S806), this process ends.

  FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal symbol stop process (step S806). When the normal symbol process flag indicates that the normal symbol stop process should be performed, as shown in FIG. 159, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 first performs the process of step S861. In step S855 of the normal symbol variation process, the universal symbol stop timer for which a predetermined universal symbol fixed time is set is decremented by one. When the normal symbol stop timer is 0, that is, when it is determined that the predetermined universal symbol fixed time has elapsed (step S862), the display control of the normal symbol stop symbol displayed on the normal symbol indicator 1402 is performed. Is set as a command to the peripheral control board 1510 for instructing a fixed display of the display result of the decorative normal symbol corresponding to the stop symbol of the normal symbol displayed on the effect display device 1600. (Step S863).

  And then, when the above-mentioned normal game hit flag is set (step S864), the second start port corresponding to the current game state using the normal game hit release pattern table shown in FIG. 155 (B). The advance / retreat pattern of the door 2022 is set (step S865).

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 155 (B), if the second starter door 2022 is controlled to be in a non-time-saving state at the start of opening, the advance / retreat pattern A is set as the second starter door 2022 opening pattern. To do. In other words, if the second start door 2022 is controlled to be in a non-time-short state at the start of the advance / retreat operation, the second start door 2022 is short when a lottery result based on a normal random number is obtained by lottery based on a normal random number. The advancing / retreating pattern A that performs the advancing / retreating operation in the advancing / retreating mode (0.2 seconds in this example) is executed.

  On the other hand, if the current game state is controlled to be in the short-time state at the start of the advance / retreat operation of the second start door 2022, the advance / retreat pattern B is set as the opening pattern of the second start door 2022. That is, if the second start door 2022 is controlled to be in a short time state when the advance / retreat operation is started, the second start door 2022 is moved forward and backward when a lottery result based on a normal drawing is obtained by a lottery based on a normal random number. The advancing / retreating pattern B that performs the advancing / retreating operation in the mode (6 seconds in this example) is executed.

  When the advance / retreat pattern of the second starter door 2022 is set, next, as a process of step S886, a start command per game showing that a game per game is started is set, and the normal symbol process flag is set as a normal electric role. When the process is updated to shift to the object release process (step S867), this process ends. Note that the start-per-common-command is a command transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect of the per-normal-game game in accordance with the type of per-normal instructed by the start per-multi-command is displayed on the effect display device 1600, It is executed by a lamp / LED and a speaker.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has updated the normal symbol process flag so that the process is shifted to the normal symbol normal process which is the initial value when the above normal symbol hit flag is not set in step S864. At this point (step S868), this process ends.

  FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary electric accessory release process (step S807).

  If it is determined in step S871 that the second start port 2022 is in the protruding state and the second start port 2004 is in the open state, as shown in FIG. 160, the main control is performed. When the predetermined time (the opening time of the second starting port 2004 in the advance / retreat pattern set in step S865) has elapsed since the main control MPU 1310a of the substrate 1310 started the opened state of the second starting port 2004 (step S872). When the second start port 2022 is moved backward to control the opened second start port 2004 to the closed state (step S873), this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S871 that the second start port 2022 is in the retracted state and the second start port 2004 is in the closed state, as shown in FIG. 160, the main control is performed. The main control MPU 1310a of the board 1310, when it is time to open the second starter door 2022 (step S874), advances the second starter door 2022 and closes the second starter door 2022 in the closed state. Is controlled to be in an open state (step S875), this process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S871 that it is not time to open the second start port 2004, as shown in FIG. 160, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 When the number of opening of the start port 2004 reaches a predetermined number of times (the number of opening / closing operation of the second start port door 2022 in the advance / retreat pattern set in step S865) (step S876), an end command per ordinary map is set (step S877). ). Then, when the normal symbol process flag is updated so that the process shifts to the normal symbol normal processing which is the initial value (step S878), this processing is ended. Note that the per-game end command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the end-per-map command, the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, etc. Exit.

[10. Peripheral control board control processing]
Next, processing executed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 will be described. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing a processing procedure for the control performed by the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on.

  As shown in FIG. 161, when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started, the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs an initial setting process (step S501). In the initial setting process, a process of clearing a RAM built in the peripheral control MPU 1511a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is performed. Note that interrupts are prohibited during this initial setting process, and interrupts are permitted after the initial setting process. When the initial setting process (step S501) is completed, a loop process for monitoring whether or not the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set is started (step S502).

  In this embodiment, the peripheral control MPU 1511a generates an interrupt every 2 mS and executes a 2 mS steady process. In the 2 mS steady process, a process of counting up the 16 mS progress monitoring counter (adding 1 to the 16 mS progress monitoring counter) is executed, and when the value of the 16 mS progress monitoring counter reaches 8, that is, 16 mS has elapsed. While the flag T is set, processing for resetting (setting 0) the 16 mS progress monitoring counter is executed. As described above, the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set (set) to “1” every 16 mS in the 2 mS steady process, and is normally set (reset) to “0”. If the 16 mS elapsed flag is set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is “1”), the 16 mS elapsed flag is reset (step S503), and then the 16 mS steady process is performed (step S504).

  In the 16 mS steady process, a process for controlling the effect display device 1600, the lamp / LED, the speaker, and the like is executed based on the command received from the main control board 1310. When the 16 mS steady process ends, the process returns to step S502 again, and every time the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set, that is, every 16 mS, the above steps S503 to S504 are repeated. On the other hand, if the 16 mS elapsed flag T is not set in step S502 (the 16 mS elapsed flag T is “0”), loop processing is performed until the 16 mS elapsed flag T is set.

  FIG. 162 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a 16 mS steady process executed every 16 mS in the sub-main process. In the 16 mS steady process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a executes the processes of Step S601 to Step S606. In the command analysis process in step S601, the command received from the main control board 1310 is analyzed. In the effect control process of step S602, the effect is based on receiving the variation pattern command transmitted by being set in the variation pattern setting process (step S149 of the first variation pattern setting process, the second variation pattern setting process). Control processing related to the display device 1600 is executed.

  Moreover, in the sound control process of step S603, the control process regarding the speaker provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the lamp control process of step S604, a control process related to lamps / LEDs provided in the pachinko machine 1 is executed. In the information output process in step S605, a process of transmitting a lamp / LED lighting signal to the lamp driving substrate 4170 is executed. In the random number update process of step S606, a process of updating random numbers used for various settings in the effect control process (step S602) is executed.

  In addition, the process of step S601-step S606 in a 16mS steady process is complete | finished within 16 mS. Even if it takes 16 mS or more from the start of the 16 mS steady process to the end of the 16 mS steady process, the 16 mS steady process is immediately executed from the beginning when the 16 mS has elapsed since the start of the 16 mS steady process (command in step S601). Do not execute (from analysis process). That is, when 16 mS elapses during execution of the 16 mS steady process, only the 16 mS elapse flag is set, and when it is determined in step S502 that the 16 mS elapse flag is set after the 16 mS steady process ends, the 16 mS steady process is performed. To start.

  In this embodiment, the random number update process (step S606) is executed in the 16 mS steady process to update various random numbers. However, the timing (timing) for updating the various random numbers is limited to this. It is not something that can be done. For example, various random numbers may be updated in one or both of the loop process in the sub-main process and the 16 mS steady process.

  FIG. 163 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the effect control process (step S602).

  In the effect control process, the peripheral control MPU 1511a selectively executes one of the following five process processes according to the effect process flag indicating the progress of the game stored in the peripheral control MPU 1511a of the peripheral control board 1510. Will be.

1. Fluctuation pattern command (first variation pattern command for instructing variation pattern of first special symbol, second variation pattern command for instructing variation pattern of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) analyzed by command analysis process above After performing processing for controlling the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, etc. based on the second variation pattern command for instructing the variation pattern of the special symbol), the value corresponding to the processing during variation effect is performed. Change production start processing to be changed to (Step S711)
2. An elapsed time since the start of the control of the effect display device 1600, the LED and the speaker 921, etc. is measured, and a process for controlling the effect display device 1600, the LED, the speaker 921, etc. is performed according to the elapsed time, and the special symbol ( Processing during changing effect (step S712) in which the effect process flag is changed to a value according to the change end processing in response to the change time corresponding to the change pattern of the first special symbol and the second special symbol).
3. A process for deriving and displaying a predetermined display result based on the reception of a stop display command for instructing to stop changing the display of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Changing the process flag to a value according to the variable effect start process, changing to a value corresponding to the big hit effect process if the big hit, changing to a value corresponding to the small hit effect process if the big hit (Step S713)
4). Based on the reception of the jackpot start command for instructing the start of the jackpot gaming state, the effect display device 1600 performs processing for executing display control during the jackpot gaming state, and when the jackpot gaming state is finished, Big hit effect process (step S714) for changing the flag to a value corresponding to the change effect start process
5. Based on the reception of the small hit start command instructing the start of the small hit gaming state, the effect display device 1600 performs processing for executing display control during the small hit gaming state, and the second in the small hit gaming state. If the game balls received in the big winning opening 2005b are distributed to the V winning opening 2411, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the above-mentioned presentation process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the big hit presentation starting process. If it is not distributed to the V winning opening 2411, the small hit effect process (step S715) is changed to a value corresponding to the variable effect start process.

  By the above processing, the special symbol display (first special symbol display 1403, second special symbol display 1405) is executed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) executed on the screen. The display device 1600 executes the variable display of decorative symbols.

[11. Game in Chance Mode and Winning Rights Exercise Time]
In the present embodiment, the game is started in the normal mode, the big win is won during the normal mode, and the short time state occurs after the big win game state, so that the mode is changed to the chance mode which is more advantageous than the normal mode. The game shifts to the winning right exercise time due to the occurrence of the second reserved memory, and the game in such a chance mode and the winning right exercise time will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the normal mode (non-time reduction state) and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, the first big prize opening 2005 is displayed as each round game in the big hit gaming state. In an open state (retracted state), in order to allow a large amount of game balls to enter the first big prize opening 2005 that has been opened, game balls must be driven one after another to the right side of the center accessory 2500. As described above, when a game ball is driven to the right side of the center object 2500, about 2/100 of the game balls distributed to the first passage 2012 side by the distribution member 2011 always move forward and backward. It enters the inside of the constantly driven door 2021, and a game ball is awarded to the first right starting port 2002b. For this reason, during the big hit gaming state, one or more game balls win the first right starting port 2002b with a high probability, and are held as the first reserved memory number that is the number of memories of the hit determination on the first special symbol side. It has come to be.

  On the other hand, during the big hit gaming state, since it is not controlled to the time-saving state (controlled to the non-time-saving state), it is temporarily determined whether or not it is a normal figure based on the passing of the game ball to the gate unit 2003 (normal determination) As a result of this, even if the symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed and the second start opening door 2022 of the second start opening 2004 moves forward and backward, the advance / retreat mode is a short advance / retreat with little reception of game balls to the second start opening 2004. As a result, the winning of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 hardly occurs. As a result, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the normal mode (non-temporary state) and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol, in most cases, after the big hit game state, the first special symbol is first. Will be displayed in a variable manner.

  Next, when the 10R big hit A symbol is stopped and displayed as the big special symbol of the first special symbol, the time is controlled to be short after the big hit gaming state. At this time, when the variation display of the first special symbol is started, the variation time of the first special symbol is a long variation time (120 seconds in this example) longer than the normal variation time regardless of the result of the hit determination. Will be displayed. Then, during the chance mode in which the first special symbol is variably displayed with the long variation time, a game aimed at passing the game ball to the gate unit 2003 is performed.

  When the game ball passes through the gate part 2003 during the above-described chance mode, it is determined whether or not it is a normal game (normal determination), and the normal symbol is variably displayed based on the determination result. At this time, in the normal symbol variation display, the variation display is performed in any one of 2 to 21 seconds which is the variation time of the normal symbol set as the ordinary symbol variation pattern. In other words, during the chance mode in which the first special symbol is variably displayed with a long variation time (120 seconds in this example), it is possible to make a normal determination about 60 times at the maximum.

  Further, when the normal symbol stop mode in the chance mode described above is a symbol per symbol, the opening time of the second start door 2022 in the short-time state is controlled to be in the protruding state for 6 seconds. The game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004. When a game ball is received at the second start port 2004, the second reserved memory number, which is the stored number of hit determinations on the second special symbol side, increases, and the second start port door 2022 is controlled to the retracted state. Will be.

  In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, one of the big hit and the small hit is always obtained as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side. Further, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when a small hit is made as a result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side, even if one game ball is accepted in the second big prize opening 2005b during the small hit gaming state. One of them is surely distributed to the V prize opening 2411. In this example, if the player continues to make a right hit in the small hit game state, the second big prize opening 2005b is controlled so that at least one game ball can be received. In other words, if the result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side is a small hit, it will be a big hit in most cases. It can be said that the company has acquired the right to win big (winning right).

  In the chance mode of this example, a case where the normal symbol is stopped and displayed twice as a symbol per ordinary symbol is shown. In such a case, when the second start port 2022 is in the protruding state, the game ball is received by the second start port 2004, so that the second special symbol side number of hits is stored. The number of reserved memories is increased by two, and the right (winning right) that is substantially a big hit is acquired twice. In addition, in the chance mode of the present example, in addition to the normal determination being performed about 20 to 40 times, the probability that the result of the normal determination becomes a symbol per common figure is set to 1/20. As a result, the number of the second reserved memory is increased by 1 to 2 on average, and the right (winning right) that is substantially a big hit can be acquired once or twice.

  Next, if the lost symbol is stopped as the symbol mode corresponding to the result of the hit judgment when the long variation time has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the state shifts to a non-time-short state. At the same time, based on the fact that there are two second reserved memory numbers, it shifts to the winning right exercise time. In the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when there is a second reserved memory number, the second special symbol is displayed with priority over the first special symbol, so when shifting to the winning right exercise time, the first reserved memory number Regardless of whether or not there is, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the second reserved memory. At this time, in the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation display is performed in 2 seconds that is the variation time of the second special symbol in the non-short-time state.

  In this example, the case where the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol is shown during the winning right exercise time. In such a case, the small winning game state is executed to make the second big prize opening 2005b acceptable, and the game balls that won the second big prize opening 2005b are distributed to the V prize opening 2411. On condition that the game has been played, the jackpot gaming state is executed, and the first big winning opening 2005 is opened (retracted) as each round game in the jackpot gaming state.

  In addition, if the game balls are distributed to the V winning opening 2411 during the small hit gaming state executed based on the fact that the second special symbol is the small hit symbol, the time is always reduced after the big hit gaming state ends. Control. In addition, after the end of the first jackpot gaming state in the winning right exercising time, the variable display of the second special symbol is performed based on the second second reserved memory. At this time, in the variation display of the second special symbol, the variation display is performed in 2 seconds which is the variation time of the second special symbol in the time reduction state, as in the non-time reduction state. Then, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol, the small hit gaming state is executed to make the second big winning opening 2005b acceptable to the game ball, and the second big winning opening 2005b. On the condition that the game balls that won the prize are distributed to the V prize opening 2411, the second big hit gaming state in the winning right exercising time is executed.

  In addition, after the end of the second jackpot gaming state in the winning right exercising time, the short-time state is continued and the mode is again shifted to the chance mode. In other words, as long as the normal determination is won during the chance mode, it is possible to continue the advantageous state for the player who loops between the winning right time and the chance mode.

[12. About display contents of effect display device]
FIG. 165 is an explanatory diagram showing the display contents of the effect display device 1600 during the chance mode. During the normal mode, a decorative symbol 1605 (left decorative symbol 1605a, middle decorative symbol 1605b, right decorative symbol 1605c) consisting of three columns of left, middle, and right is enlarged and displayed at the center of the effect display device 1600. The display is changed in synchronization with the change display. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 165, in the chance mode, as in the normal mode, the decorative design 1605 consisting of three columns of left, middle, and right is enlarged and displayed at the center of the effect display device 1600. The decorative symbol 1605 is not variably displayed in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol, but is variably displayed in synchronization with the variation display of the normal symbol.

  In addition, in the lower left part of the effect display device 1600, a first special symbol corresponding decoration display area 1606 that displays the first special symbol corresponding decorative symbol in response to the first special symbol variable display, and a second special symbol variable. A second special figure corresponding decoration display area 1607 is provided for variably displaying the second special figure corresponding decorative symbol corresponding to the display. The first special figure corresponding decoration display area 1606 and the second special figure corresponding decoration display area 1607 are also displayed during the normal mode, and are displayed at the center of the effect display device 1600 during the normal mode. Even when a character or the like is displayed in place of the decorative pattern that is displayed, or when the decorative pattern displayed at the center of the effect display device 1600 is synchronized with the change display of the normal pattern during the chance mode. The state of variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol can be confirmed.

  In addition, in the lower right portion of the effect display device 1600, there is provided a general-design-corresponding decoration display area 1608 that displays a variable-corresponding decorative symbol in response to the normal symbol variation display. This common figure-compatible decoration display area 1608 is displayed during the normal mode as well as the first special figure-compatible decoration display area 1606 and the second special figure-compatible decoration display area 1607. When the decorative symbol displayed in the central portion is synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol, or the character or the like is displayed instead of the decorative symbol displayed in the central portion of the effect display device 1600 during the chance mode. Even in this case, it is possible to confirm the state of the normal symbol variation display.

  Further, at the left end portion of the effect display device 1600, there are provided normal symbol hold display areas 1609a to 1609d for displaying the number of normal symbol hold memories corresponding to the normal random numbers stored in the normal symbol hold memory area. At the right end of 1600, second special figure reservation display areas 1610a to 1610d for displaying the second reserved memory number corresponding to the second special random number stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area are provided. Note that, as described above, the state with the second reserved memory number is a state in which the right (winning right) that is substantially a big win has been acquired, so that the game ball is accepted into the second start port 2004 during the chance mode. By displaying the second reserved memory number with a star mark, it is possible to recognize that a special hold has occurred.

  During the chance mode, a timer display area 1611 for displaying the remaining time of the chance mode is displayed at the bottom of the effect display device 1600. As described above, the chance mode is controlled over the period in which the first special symbol is variably displayed with the long variation time (120 seconds). During this period, the game ball is allowed to pass through the gate unit 2003. A game aiming at the usual figure is performed. In the timer display area 1611, the remaining time is displayed in a countdown manner, and the player is aware of the remaining time in the chance mode displayed in the timer display area 1611 and aims at the occurrence of the usual figure to be irritated and anxious. The game is held in a state of excitement, and when a normal hit occurs and a game ball is received at the second starting port 2004, a sense of accomplishment and satisfaction can be given. Will improve.

  Further, a mode information display area 1612 is displayed in the upper right part of the effect display device 1600 during the chance mode. This mode information display area 1612 is for notifying the player that the chance mode is in effect and making a right-hand hit, so that the player is not disadvantaged.

[13. About production during chance mode]
In this embodiment, a game is started in the normal mode, and a win-win state is won during the normal mode, and a short-time state occurs after the big win game state, and the mode shifts to a chance mode that is more advantageous than the normal mode. An effect using the effect display device 1600 in such a chance mode will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, during the chance mode, when a game ball passes through the gate part 2003, a determination is made as to whether or not it is a normal game (normal determination), and in synchronization with the fluctuation display of the normal symbol based on this determination result The display device 1600 performs variable display of decorative symbols. When the stop pattern of the normal symbol is the symbol per regular symbol, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is also displayed as the hit symbol and the ball can enter the second starting port 2004. At this time, when a game ball enters the second start port 2004, the second reserved memory number, which is the number of hit determinations stored on the second special symbol side, increases.

  Next, during the chance mode in which the first special symbol is variably displayed with a long variation time (120 seconds in this example), the remaining 10 seconds before the long variation time has elapsed (the variation of the first special symbol) At the stage of 110 seconds after the display is started), it is determined whether there is a second reserved memory number that is the number of hit determinations stored on the second special symbol side. Then, when there is a second reserved memory number at the stage of the remaining 10 seconds, the effect of whether or not the decorative symbol stop mode becomes the winning symbol is continued, and after the long fluctuation time has passed, Based on the fact that there are two reserved memory numbers, it shifts to the time for exercising winning rights.

  On the other hand, when there is no second reserved memory number in the remaining 10 seconds before the long fluctuation time elapses, the decorative pattern stop mode is hit as an effect using the effect display device 1600. In place of the effect of whether or not it becomes a symbol, the effect of whether or not the first special symbol that is being variably displayed is stopped at the jackpot symbol is executed. Specifically, an effect (last battle effect) is developed in a battle format as an effect as to whether or not the first special symbol during the variable display is stopped at the jackpot symbol.

  Next, if the first special symbol on the variable display is stopped at the jackpot symbol, the battle in the last battle effect will be won after the long variation time has elapsed, and then the variable display on the first special symbol will stop at the jackpot symbol The big hit gaming state is executed based on what is done.

  On the other hand, if the first special symbol on the variable display is stopped with a lost symbol, the battle in the last battle effect is defeated when the long variable time elapses, and the last battle effect is being executed (the long variable time has elapsed). It is determined whether or not the second reserved memory number has increased in the remaining 10 seconds before the operation). That is, at the remaining 10 seconds before the long fluctuation time has elapsed, there is no second reserved memory number, but when the remaining 10 seconds have elapsed and the long fluctuation time has elapsed, the second reserved memory number. Judge whether or not there is.

  In the remaining 10 seconds before the long fluctuation time has elapsed, there is no second reserved memory number, but when the long fluctuation time has elapsed, there is a second reserved memory number, After the defeat of the battle in the last battle production, a resurgence production that wins the battle is executed, and then the winning right exercise time is shifted based on the fact that there is a second reserved memory number. In addition, when executing the revival effect, the change display of the second special symbol that is started based on the second reserved memory after the long change time has elapsed (the time when the battle in the last battle effect was defeated) In FIG. 5, during the period until the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the revival effect is executed. On the other hand, in the stage of the remaining 10 seconds before the long fluctuation time elapses, there is no second reserved memory number, and there is no second reserved memory number even when the long fluctuation time has elapsed, The defeat of the battle in the last battle effect is not covered, and the mode is shifted to the normal mode (non-time reduction state) based on the fact that there is no second reserved memory number thereafter.

[14. Concealment of Second Hold Memory during Chance Mode and Winning Exercise Time]
In the present embodiment, the game is started in the normal mode, the big win is won during the normal mode, and the short time state occurs after the big win game state, so that the mode is changed to the chance mode which is more advantageous than the normal mode. When the second reserved memory occurs, the fact is notified when the second reserved memory occurs, but when the predetermined confidentiality condition is satisfied, the second reserved memory occurs. In this case, the fact is not notified, and the fact is notified after the second reserved memory is generated.

  First, the case where the concealment condition is satisfied when the second reserved memory is generated means that a game ball enters the second starting port 2004 during the small hit game state or the big hit game state during the winning right exercise time. Is mentioned. In addition, based on the fact that the normal symbol fluctuation display starts just before the end of the jackpot gaming state at the time of exercising the right to win, the second starting point is based on the fact that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed at the symbol per regular symbol after the end of the jackpot gaming state. There is a case where 2004 is in a state in which a ball can be entered, and a game ball enters the second start port 2004 that has entered the ball ready state. In addition, when the second start opening 2004 is ready to enter the ball in the chance mode, the second start to the second start opening 2004 and the like after the first entry is possible (one second start opening 2004 is opened). The case where a game ball enters the ball. Further, there is a case where a game ball enters the second start port 2004 at the end of the chance mode (for example, during execution of the last battle effect described above for less than 10 seconds).

  When the above-described concealment condition is satisfied and the occurrence of the second reserved memory is concealed, the fact that the second reserved memory has already occurred is notified at a predetermined timing. As, the time of the battle victory in the above-mentioned last battle production is mentioned. Further, the predetermined timing may be during execution of the big hit gaming state during the winning right exercise time. In this example, during the execution of the big hit gaming state, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600. For example, in the fourth round, is the generation of the second reserved memory concealed? You may perform the button production which alert | reports it. In such a button effect, when the operation button 410 is operated, the occurrence of the second hold memory is informed, and when the operation button 410 is not operated, the occurrence of the second hold memory is hidden. Do not report that it is. In addition, the button effect may be executed even when the occurrence of the second hold memory is not concealed. In such a case, when the operation button 410 is operated in the button effect, the occurrence of the second hold memory is concealed. It has come to notify that it has not been done. Further, as the predetermined timing, after the end of the chance mode, an ending effect indicating the end of the chance mode is being executed, and the ending effect is being executed.

  In addition, as described above, during execution of the jackpot gaming state during the winning right exercise time, it may be notified that the second reserved memory has occurred, but during the winning right exercise time, the second special symbol While the small hit game state is executed based on the fact that the game is stopped and displayed with the small hit symbol, it is not possible to enter the second big winning hole 2005b in the small hit game state, and a big hit game state occurs. May not. In such a case, after the end of the small hit gaming state, an ending period in which an ending effect indicating the end of the small hit gaming state (for example, display of “sorry” on the effect display device 1600) can be executed (this embodiment) In this ending period, an effect (continuous effect) for notifying that the second reserved memory has already occurred is executed instead of the ending effect indicating the end of the small hit gaming state. do it.

  In addition, when the above-described concealment condition is established a plurality of times and the occurrence of a plurality of second reserved memories is concealed, a notification that a plurality of second reserved memories have occurred at a predetermined timing may be provided. Alternatively, it may be notified that only one second reserved memory has occurred.

  By the way, in the case of notifying that when the second reserved memory occurs, the notification content depends on whether the second reserved memory number has reached the limit number (four in this example) or not. It is changing. Specifically, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, when the second reserved memory number has not reached the limit number, an effect is provided to notify that one second reserved memory has occurred, When the second reserved storage number reaches the limit number, a special effect (such as playing a special movie) that is not normally executed is executed as a subsequent effect. Thereby, when the special effect is executed, it can be recognized that the second reserved memory number has reached the limit number. In addition, when the above-described concealment condition is satisfied, the second reserved memory is not notified when the second reserved memory occurs, regardless of whether or not the second reserved memory number has reached the limit number. When the number of two reserved memories reaches the limit number, the special effect described above is executed. Thereby, even when the above-described concealment condition is satisfied, it is possible to recognize that the second reserved memory number has reached the limit number by executing at least the special effect, and the second start port 2004 in the chance mode. To avoid unnecessary driving. In addition, when the above-described concealment condition is satisfied, after the second reserved memory is generated, an effect of informing that the second reserved memory has already been generated is executed at a predetermined timing. When a special effect is executed, such an effect is not executed.

  Next, a specific example of concealing that the second reserved storage has occurred will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 and 170.

  First, a first specific example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 167 shows a case where one second reserved memory, which is the number of stored hit determinations on the second special symbol side, occurs during the chance mode. In such a case, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, a notification effect for notifying that effect is executed when one second reserved memory is generated. After the chance mode ends, the system shifts to the winning right exercise time based on the occurrence of one second reserved memory, but the second special symbol stops at the small hits during the winning right exercise time. The small hit gaming state is executed based on what is displayed, and the big hit gaming state is executed on condition that the game balls won in the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hit gaming state are distributed to the V winning opening 2411. doing. In such a big hit game state, when a game ball enters the second start port 2004 and a second reserved memory is generated, the game is concentrated on the second big win port 2005b in the big hit game state. For this reason, the fact is not notified when the second reserved memory occurs.

  After that, when the running big hit gaming state ends, an ending period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) in which an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit gaming state can be executed as an effect using the effect display device 1600. Although it is provided, during the ending period, it is not an ending effect indicating the end of the big hit gaming state, but a notification that the second reserved memory has occurred is generated by displaying “Still More!” On the effect display device 1600 It is made to recognize that the exercising time will be continued. In the ending period, after executing the ending effect indicating the end of the big hit gaming state, for example, when 3 seconds have elapsed, the ending effect may be switched to the continuous effect. In this way, when the second reserved memory is generated, the fact that the winning right has been exercised ends by notifying that fact but during the execution of the ending effect after the second reserved memory is generated. Then, it is possible to give a surprise to the player.

  Next, a second specific example will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 168, the normal symbol variation display is started just before the end of the jackpot gaming state before the start of the chance mode. The case where the start-up door 2022 is controlled to be in a protruding state for 6 seconds as the opening time of the start-up door 2022 and the game ball can enter the second start-up port 2004 is shown. For such a normal symbol variation display before and after the start of the chance mode, an effect using the effect display device 1600 is not executed. Even when the ball enters and the second reserved memory is generated, the fact is not notified when the second reserved memory is generated.

  Then, when the second hold memory is not generated, when it is not notified, the last battle effect (FIG. 166) is performed in the remaining 10 seconds before the end of the chance mode (before the long fluctuation time elapses). Is running). In such a last battle production, the player loses the battle at the end of the chance mode (when the long fluctuation time elapses), but after the chance mode ends (after the elapse of the long fluctuation time), it turns from the defeat of the battle. The revival effect of winning the battle is executed, and it is recognized that the time for exercising the winning right will start after the first special symbol is displayed. In this way, when the display of the normal symbol straddles before and after the start of the chance mode, the second reserved memory is not notified when the second reserved memory is generated immediately after the start of the chance mode. By notifying the fact later, it is possible to give a surprise to the player by recognizing that the time for exercising the winning right is not started.

  In the second specific example, the case where the second reserved memory is generated only immediately after the start of the chance mode is shown. However, based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second starting port 2004 during the chance mode. When the second second hold memory is generated, the fact is notified when the second second hold memory is generated, and the transition to the big hit gaming state at the winning right exercise time is confirmed There is. In such a case, the system shifts to the winning right exercise time based on the occurrence of two second reserved memories, but during the winning right exercise time, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol. The game is executed on the condition that the game ball that has won the second big prize opening 2005b in the small prize gaming state is distributed to the V prize opening 2411. Yes. During the execution of such a big hit gaming state, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600, but in a predetermined round, a second reserved memory occurs immediately after the start of the chance mode. An additional effect that informs the player that the player has been playing is executed to recognize that the winning right exercising time continues after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In this way, when the second reserved memory occurs immediately after the start of the chance mode, that fact is not notified, but by notifying that during the jackpot gaming state during the winning right exercise time, the winning right is exercised. Recognizing that the time is over, the player can be surprised.

  Next, a third specific example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 169 shows that during the chance mode, when the stop pattern of the normal symbol is the symbol per regular symbol, the second starter door 2022 is opened to the projecting state for 6 seconds in the short time state. The game balls can enter the second start port 2004, but two game balls enter the second start port 2004 in the protruding state, and the number of memory of the hit determination on the second special symbol side This shows a case where two second reserved memories are generated in succession. In principle, when a game ball enters the second starting port 2004, the second starting port door 2022 is controlled to the retracted state, but before the second starting port door 2022 is controlled to the retracted state. The second game ball may enter the second start opening 2004. In such a case, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, a notification effect for notifying that effect is executed when one second reserved memory is generated. However, at the time when the second second stored memory occurs, in order to be aware that the second starting port door 2022 is controlled to the retracted state by one game ball entering the second starting port 2004. , That is not notified.

  After the chance mode ends, the system shifts to the winning right exercise time based on the occurrence of two second reserved memories. During the winning right exercise time, the second special symbol stops at the small hit symbol. Based on what is displayed, the small hit gaming state is executed, and the big hit gaming state is executed on condition that the game balls won in the second big winning opening 2005b in the small hit gaming state are distributed to the V winning opening 2411. doing. During the execution of such a big hit gaming state, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600. In the predetermined round, the second second storage memory is stored during the chance mode. An additional effect for notifying that it has occurred is executed to recognize that the winning right exercising time continues after the end of the jackpot gaming state. As described above, during the execution of the big hit gaming state based on the occurrence of the first second reserved memory without notifying the fact when the second second reserved memory is generated during the chance mode. By notifying that effect, the player can be surprised by recognizing that the time for exercising the winning right has ended.

Next, a fourth specific example will be described with reference to FIG. In the fourth specific example, the case where the last battle effect shown in FIG. 166 is not executed is shown.
FIG. 170 shows a case where one second reserved memory, which is the number of stored hit determinations on the second special symbol side, occurs during the chance mode. In such a case, as an effect using the effect display device 1600, a notification effect for notifying that effect is executed when one second reserved memory is generated. Then, just before the chance mode ends (less than 3 seconds remaining), the normal symbol fluctuates and the normal symbol stops before and after the end of the chance mode. The opening time of 2022 is controlled to be in a protruding state for 6 seconds, and it may be possible to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004. When a game ball enters the second start port 2004 before and after the end of such a chance mode, and a second hold memory is generated, it is not possible to notify that during the chance mode, so the second hold This is not notified when the memory is generated.

  After the chance mode ends, the system shifts to the winning right exercise time based on the occurrence of the second reserved memory, but during the winning right exercise time, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a small hit symbol. The game is executed on the condition that the game ball that has won the second big prize opening 2005b in the small prize gaming state is distributed to the V prize opening 2411. Yes. During the execution of such a big hit gaming state, each round is shown as an effect using the effect display device 1600, but in a predetermined round, a second reserved memory occurs before and after the end of the chance mode. An additional effect that informs the player that the player has been playing is executed to recognize that the winning right exercising time continues after the end of the jackpot gaming state. In this way, when the second hold memory occurs before and after the end of the chance mode, the fact is not notified, and during the jackpot gaming state based on the occurrence of the first second hold memory, the fact is By notifying the player, the player can be surprised by recognizing that the winning right exercise time is over.

  In the fourth specific example, a game ball enters the second start port 2004 before the end of the chance mode (less than 3 seconds remaining), and the first second storage is generated. In this case, it is shown that the game state is shifted to the jackpot game state with the winning right exercise time, but at that time, the game ball has not entered the second starting port 2004 and the jackpot game with the winning right exercise time is shown. The transition to the state may not be confirmed. In such a case, for example, the second reserved memory is generated based on the fact that the game ball has entered the second start port 2004 at the end of the chance mode (less than 3 seconds remaining), and the second reserved memory is generated. If not notified at that time, the end of the chance mode (3 seconds remaining) in the ending period (5 seconds in the present embodiment) during which an ending effect indicating the end of the chance mode can be executed after the end of the chance mode. Less than 2) may be performed to notify that the second reserved memory has occurred, and to recognize that the winning right exercise time starts after the end of the chance mode. In addition, for example, when the second hold memory is generated based on the game ball entering the second start port 2004 after the chance mode ends, and when the second hold memory is generated, the fact is not notified. When the chance mode ends (after the end of the chance mode ending effect), the second special memory is informed after the end of the chance mode while the first special symbol is changing (losing). The additional effect to be executed may be executed to recognize that the winning right exercising time starts after the change display of the first special symbol. Even in these cases, when the second reserved memory occurs before and after the end of the chance mode, that fact is not notified, and the fact that the second reserved memory is generated will not start the winning right exercise time. It turns from recognition and can give a player a surprise.

[15. Example of production]
Next, an example of the effect display executed by the effect display device 1600 will be described. FIG. 171 shows an example of an effect display executed when the transition from the normal mode to the chance mode is controlled and a game ball is received at the second start port 2004 during the chance mode, and FIG. 172 shows the second display during the chance mode. FIG. 173 shows an example of an effect display that is executed when the chance mode is terminated without a game ball being received at the start port 2004. FIG. 173 shows that the second reserved memory number is obtained when the remaining time in the chance mode becomes 10 seconds. Otherwise, it is an example of an effect display during the last battle effect that is executed, and if the result of the change display in the long change time of the first special symbol is lost, a game ball is accepted at the second start port 2004 174 is an example of the effect display that is sometimes executed, and FIG. 174 is the last battle in the case of a big hit as a result of the change display in the long change time of the first special symbol It is an example of the effect display to be executed by the out.

  As shown in FIG. 171 (A), when the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side is a big hit (10R big hit A) that is controlled to the short-time state after the big hit gaming state, it is synchronized with the fluctuation display of the first special symbol. Then, the first special figure corresponding decoration display area 1606 is variably displayed and the left, middle, and right decorative patterns 1605 are variably displayed. After a predetermined period, the first special figure corresponding decoration display area is displayed. When the jackpot symbol of the decorative pattern corresponding to the first special figure is stopped and displayed at 1606 and the jackpot symbol of the left, middle and right decorative symbols 1605 is stopped, the fact that the jackpot has been won is notified, and then the control of the jackpot gaming state is performed. It starts (FIG. 171 (B)). As shown in FIG. 171 (A), during the normal mode, the effect display device 1600 has the first special figure corresponding decoration display area 1606, the second special figure corresponding decoration display area 1607, and the universal figure corresponding decoration display area 1608. In addition, first special figure reservation display areas 1613a to 1613d for displaying the first reserved memory number corresponding to the first special random numbers stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area are provided at the bottom.

  Then, after notifying that the chance mode (time-short state) is controlled after the big hit gaming state, the mode information display area 1612 is displayed to be right-handed (FIG. 171 (C)), and the first reserved memory number is 0. At the time of disappearance, the first special symbol is variably displayed in the long variation time, and the first special symbol-corresponding decorative symbol is variably displayed in the first special symbol-corresponding ornament display area 1606 in synchronization with the variation display of the first special symbol. (FIG. 171 (D)). As described above, during the chance mode, the timer display area 1610 indicating the remaining time of the chance mode is displayed, and is displayed in the timer display area 1610 according to the elapsed time since the start of the variable display of the first special symbol. The remaining time to be updated is displayed.

  In addition, when the number of stored ordinary symbols is no longer 0, the decorative symbols corresponding to the normal symbols are displayed in a variable in the general-purpose decorative display area 1608 in synchronism with the variable symbol display. The symbols 1605 are variably displayed, and after a predetermined period, the symbols corresponding to the symbols corresponding to the result of the lottery processing for the ordinary symbols are stopped and displayed in the symbols corresponding to the results of the lottery processing for the symbols in the symbols corresponding to the normal symbols. The symbol 1605 is stopped and displayed with a symbol corresponding to the result of the lottery process for the normal symbol (FIG. 171 (E)). At this time, if the result of the lottery process (ordinary determination) for the normal symbol is normal hit, the hit symbol for the normal symbol corresponding decoration display area 1608 is stopped and the left / middle / right ornament is displayed. The winning symbol of symbol 1605 is stopped and displayed (FIG. 171 (F)).

  When the normal symbol hitting symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 1402, the main control board 1310 advances the second starting port door 2022 of the second starting port 2004 to a protruding state for a predetermined period. The state of the start port 2004 is controlled to an open state where the game ball can be received. When the second starting port 2004 receives a game ball and the second special symbol is put on hold while the second starting port 2004 is open, the effect display device 1600 displays “big hit get” and second. The star mark in the special figure hold display areas 1610a to 1610d corresponding to the generated hold (second special figure hold display area 1610a in the example of FIG. 171 (G)) is displayed in a special form (for example, red). In this way, the fact that the right (winning right) that becomes a big jackpot has been acquired is notified (FIG. 171 (G)).

  After that, if there is the remaining time of the chance mode and the number of stored normal symbols, the normal symbol corresponding decorative symbol is displayed in the normal symbol corresponding decorative display area 1608 in synchronism with the normal symbol variable display. The right decorative pattern 1605 is displayed in a variable manner (FIG. 171 (H)).

  In addition, when the remaining time in the chance mode reaches 10 seconds without accepting the game ball at the second start port 2004 during the chance mode (FIGS. 172 (A) to 172 (C)), the last battle effect is performed in this example. When executed, it suggests the result of the variable display of the first special symbol. That is, as shown in FIG. 172 (C), the player side character A and the enemy character B are displayed instead of the left, middle and right decorative symbols, and the duel scene between the character A and the enemy character B is displayed. (FIG. 172 (D)).

  If the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side is a loss, a mode in which the character A is defeated by the enemy character is displayed (FIG. 172 (E)). After notifying the player of ending the mode and ending the chance mode (FIG. 172 (F)), control in the normal mode is started (FIG. 172 (G)).

  In this way, when the remaining time of the chance mode becomes short, by performing an effect display different from the normal display in the chance mode, not only the player's impatience and anxiety but also the expectation for the big hit It is designed to improve the amusement interest by holding it.

  Even if the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side is lost, when the game ball is received at the second start port 2004 and the second special symbol is suspended during execution of the last battle effect ( 173 (C) to 173 (D)) After displaying the mode in which the character A is defeated by the enemy character (FIG. 173 (D)), the mode in which the character A is restored is displayed (FIG. 173). 173 (E)).

  Then, the chance mode is ended and the transition to the winning right exercise time is controlled, and the second special figure corresponding decorative symbol 1 is displayed in a variable manner in the second special symbol corresponding decorative display area 1607 in synchronization with the second special symbol variable display. At the same time, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols 1605 are displayed in a variable manner. If the result of the hit determination on the second special symbol side is a small hit, the second special symbol corresponding to the second special symbol corresponding decorative display area 1607 after a predetermined period has elapsed. The small hit symbol of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and the small hit symbols of the left, middle and right decorative symbols 1605 are stopped and displayed (FIG. 173 (F)).

  When the small special symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol indicator 1405 on the second special symbol indicator, the main control board 1310 puts the second big prize opening 2005b into a state in which the game ball can be accepted, Peripheral control MPU 1511a displays on the effect display device 1600 “Aim for V!” To notify the player to continue right-handing to aim at the V winning opening 2411 (FIG. 173 (G)). Then, the second big winning opening 2005b is notified that the game ball has been received and one of the game balls has been distributed to the V winning opening 2411, so that it is a “big hit”, and the big hit gaming state To shift to (FIG. 173 (H)).

  In this way, the occurrence of a big hit is strongly expected by changing the result of the last battle effect according to the occurrence of the number of reserved memories on the second special symbol side as well as the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side Can be used to prevent a decline in gaming interest.

  Also, when the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side is a big win, after displaying a mode in which the character A wins the enemy character as a result of the last battle effect (FIG. 174 (E)), the big hit gaming state (FIG. 174 (F)).

  After the big hit gaming state, if there is no second reserved memory number, the transition to the chance mode is again controlled (FIG. 174 (C)), and if there is a second reserved memory number, the transition control is performed at the winning right exercise time. Become.

  In addition, when the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side is a big hit, when the chance mode is ended, the big hit based on the first special symbol being stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol regardless of the presence or absence of the second reserved memory number Control of the gaming state is executed. Then, if there is a second reserved memory number after the end of the big hit gaming state, it shifts to the winning right exercise time, and the variable display of the second special symbol is started. That is, prior to exercising the jackpot right accumulated during the chance mode, the benefit of the jackpot gaming state on the first special symbol side is given.

  In addition, the last battle effect basically changes the result according to the winning lottery result on the first special symbol side, but at least the chance mode ends without notifying the player to that effect. Until then, it will be kept secret to the player that the first special symbol is a big hit. As a result, a player who recognizes that he / she will exercise his / her right to become a jackpot during the chance mode can be given an unexpected profit, which is a jackpot of the first special symbol. Interest can be improved. Further, as described above, if the second reserved memory number is not 0, the second special symbol is variably displayed in preference to the first special symbol. Therefore, after the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a jackpot symbol, the winning right exercise time is entered and the right to become a jackpot stored during the chance mode is entered. As a result, a situation in which the entertainment interest of the game is reduced because the opportunity to exercise the jackpot right accumulated during the chance mode is not visited easily is avoided.

  In addition, as described above, by right-handing at the time of exercising the right to win, a game ball can be won in the second big prize opening 2005b, and a game ball won in the second big prize opening 2005b can be entered in the V prize opening 2411. Even when a big hit gaming state is generated after distribution, a game ball can be awarded to the first big winning opening 2005 by continuing the right-hand hit. That is, after the shift control to the chance mode is performed, the right-handed operation is continuously performed until the shift control to the normal mode is performed again.

  Also, in this example, even when the game ball is hit to the right, the game ball can be accepted into the first right starting port 2002b. Therefore, usually until the chance mode is ended after the transition control to the chance mode is finished, or the winning right The game ball can be accepted into the first right start opening 2002b within the period until the exercise time ends, and there is a first reserved memory number at the end of the chance mode or at the end of the winning right exercise time. It has become. In other words, the period for shifting to the chance mode and aiming to enter the second starting port 2004, or the time for shifting to the winning right exercising time and executing the jackpot gaming state by the amount of the second reserved memory number to obtain the winning ball During the period, a condition relating to the next game (acceptance of a game ball to the first start port 2002) can be generated.

  When a game ball is accepted at the first start opening 2002 (first left start opening 2002a, first right start opening 2002b) during the chance mode or during the winning right exercising time, a notification to that effect is made. (Not only a display notifying that a game ball has been received at the first start port 2002 (first left start port 2002a, first right start port 2002b) but also a notification by voice or lamp, etc. In addition, an area for displaying the first reserved memory number is provided in the effect display device 1600 during the chance mode and during the winning right exercise time, and the first start port 2002 (first left start port 2002a, first right start) The display of the reserved memory number may be updated when a game ball is received in the mouth 2002b). As a result, when the game ball is received at the first starting port 2002 (first left starting port 2002a, first right starting port 2002b) during the right exercise time, the mode shifts again to the chance mode and the first special symbol has a long fluctuation. It is possible to recognize that the time-variable display is started, and it is possible to enhance the interest toward the acquisition of a right (winning right) that becomes a big jackpot.

  Further, as described above, during the chance mode, a game for storing the second special symbol hold (second special random number) is performed. Since the upper limit of the second reserved memory number is four, it is possible to store up to four second special symbol holds (second special random numbers) during the chance mode. In this example, when the second reserved memory number reaches the upper limit of 4 during the chance mode, the peripheral control MPU 1511a replaces the display of the decorative symbol and the timer display area 1611 on the effect display device 1600 with a special effect (special movie). Etc.) may be executed. In other words, when the second reserved memory number reaches the upper limit of 4, the player stops the game ball driving until the time for shifting to the winning right exercise time, so that a special effect (such as playing a special movie) is executed. With this, you can relieve the trouble on hand.

  In addition, since the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol is increased based on the reception of the game ball to the second starting port 2004 provided on the right side of the center bonus 2500, the right-handed strike is made during the normal chance mode. A prompt display (mode information display area 1612) is performed. On the other hand, when the peripheral control MPU 1511a performs a special effect (such as playing a special movie) on the effect display device 1600 based on the fact that the second reserved memory number has reached the upper limit of 4 during the chance mode, the right The display (mode information display area 1612) for prompting the strike is lost. As a result, unnecessary driving can be avoided so as not to be disadvantageous to the player, and it is possible to avoid a decrease in gaming interest by being prompted to perform unnecessary driving. Further, in this case, the display (mode information display area 1612) that prompts a right-handed strike is not limited, and any display that is suppressed (modest display) than the normal display state in the chance mode may be used. For example, one or a combination of two or more of the following may be executed: reducing the right-handed display (mode information display area 1612), thinning characters (semi-transparent), changing the display position to an inconspicuous position, etc. It may be.

  In the above example, the long variation time of the first special symbol is set to 120 seconds, and it is configured to control the chance mode only during this period. You may make it control to several types of chance mode from which an advantage degree differs by a period differing. For example, two types of 68 seconds and 128 seconds are provided as the long variation time of the first special symbol, and when the variation display of the first special symbol is started in the short time state, it is determined based on a random number of random numbers. Also good.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of this example, when the result of the hit determination on the first special symbol side is a big hit (10R big hit A in this example) that is controlled to the short-time state after the big hit gaming state, after the big hit gaming state In the short time state, the first special symbol is variably displayed with the long fluctuation time, and the second special symbol hold (second special random number) is accumulated within this long fluctuation time, and the number of jackpots corresponding to the second hold memory number Can be repeatedly executed after the elapse of the long variation time, and after that, the first special symbol is variably displayed again with the long variation time. Note that, as described above, the state in which the second special symbol is suspended (the state in which the game ball is accepted by the second starting port 2004) is a state in which a right (winning right) that is a big hit is obtained. In other words, it can be rephrased as “special information that leads to a win (big hit)”.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 1 of this example can realize a novel game with a cycle that repeats a state in which special information related to winning is stored and a state in which hits corresponding to the number of stored special information are sequentially released. This will not only execute a game that simply waits for a new win after the big hit gaming state is finished, but also “how much special information will be stored within the time limit (long fluctuation time) To play a game with both the tension of storing special information within the time limit and the satisfaction of gaining profits (big hit gaming state) after the time limit. It is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest after the big hit gaming state.

In addition, the configuration for storing the second special symbol hold (second special random number) during the display of the variation of the first special symbol requires at least the following conditions.
“Variation time of the first special symbol during the time reduction state> (variation time of the normal symbol during the time reduction state + maximum time during which the second start door 2022 is projected when hitting the normal time during the time reduction state) × N ( N ≧ 2) ”
That is, the normal symbol variation display can be executed a plurality of times within the variation period of the first special symbol, and control is performed a plurality of times so that the game ball can be received at the second starting port 2004 when the normal symbol is reached. It needs to be possible.

  The present invention has been described with reference to preferred embodiments. However, the present invention is not limited to these embodiments, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention as described below. And design changes are possible.

  That is, in the embodiment, the gaming machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine are fused. Even in this case, the same effect can be obtained.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Pachinko machine 2 Outer frame 3 Door frame 4 Main body frame 5 Game board 5a Game area 6 CR unit 10 Upper frame member 11 Engagement notch part 12 Mounting step part 20 Lower frame member 21 Engagement notch part 22 Front end notch part 30 Left frame Member 31 Recess 32 Projection 40 Right frame member 41 Recess 42 Projection 50 Curtain plate member 51 Rear extension 52 Left discharge hole 53 Right discharge hole 54 Standing wall portion 55 Return portion 56 Left attachment portion 57 Right attachment portion 60 Outer frame side Upper hinge member 61 Upper fixed portion 62 Front extending portion 63 Bearing groove 64 Lateral fixed portion 65 Suspended portion 66 Lock member 66a Lock body 66b Operation portion 66c Elastic portion 66d Mounting hole 67 Mounting screw 70 Outer frame side lower hinge member 71 Horizontal portion 72 Rising portion 73 Outer frame lower hinge pin 74 Discharge hole
80 Curtain plate reinforcing member 81 Left sliding member 82 Right sliding member 85 Connecting member 85A Upper left connecting member 85B Upper right connecting member 85C Lower left connecting member 85D Lower right connecting member 86 Horizontal fixing portion 87 Upper horizontal fixing portion 88 Lower horizontal fixing portion 89 Bending portion 90 Upper hook member 91 Lower hook member 95 Guide vane 96 Guide vane 100 Door frame base unit 110 Door frame base 111 Through port 112 Handle mounting seat surface 113 Cylinder mounting portion 114 Cylinder insertion hole 115 Ball feed opening 116 Lower plate passing port 117 Upper plate passage port 118 Glass unit mounting portion 119 Speaker insertion port 130 Reinforcement unit 131 Upper reinforcement sheet metal 132 Middle reinforcement sheet metal 132a Notch 133 Left reinforcement sheet metal 134 Right reinforcement sheet metal 135 Locking locking part 140 Door frame side upper hinge member 141 Hinge shaft bracket on door frame 141a Protruding piece 142 Door frame upper hinge pin 143 Scissors member 144 Lock spring 150 Door frame side lower hinge member 151 Door frame lower hinge shaft bracket 151a Extension piece 152 Door frame lower hinge pin 160 Door frame left side decorative board 161 Door frame left side upper decorative board 161a LED
162 Door frame left side lower decorative board 162a LED
170 Glass unit mounting member 171 Base portion 172 Projection portion 180 Handle mounting member 181 Tube portion 182 Flange portion 183 Projection 184 Reinforcement rib 190 Glass unit 191 Glass frame 191a Mounting piece 191b Locking piece 192 Glass plate 194 Frame decoration drive amplifier board 194a + 9V Creation circuit 200 Crime prevention cover 201 Main body portion 202 Rear protrusion piece 203 Locking piece 210 Opening and closing cylinder unit 211 Cylinder lock 211a Key hole 212 Rotation transmission member 212a Notch portion 213 Cylinder mounting plate 213a Front plate portion 213b Side plate portion 213c Mounting plate portion 250 Ball feed Unit 251 Front cover 251a Advance entrance 251b Ball outlet 251c Slit 252 Rear cover 252a Hitting ball supply port 252b Mounting recess 253 Ball removal member 253a Partition 253b Rotating rod 253c Actuating rod 253d Weight portion 254 Ball feed member 254a Blocking portion 254b Ball holding portion 254c Rod portion 255 Ball feed solenoid 256 Ball feed actuating rod 257 Ball feed crank 257a Engaging portion 257b Shaft portion 257c Transmitter 260 Improper prevention Member 261 Upper piece 262 Lower piece 263 Inclined portion 270 Foul cover unit 271 Unit main body 272 Lid member 273 Through ball passage 274 Full ball receiving port 275 Foul ball receiving port 276 Ball discharge port 277 Storage passage 278 Movable piece 279 Full tank Detection sensor 280 Spring 281 Door opening / closing contact part 300 Handle unit 301 Handle base 301a Base part 301b Front end part 301c Groove part 302 Handle 302a First protrusion 302b Second protrusion 302c Third protrusion 302d Fourth protrusion 302e Lit 302f Locking projection 303 Handle cover 303a Mounting boss 304 Inner base 305 Shaft member 305a Drive gear 306 Transmission gear 307 Handle rotation detection sensor 307a Detection shaft 308 Handle return spring 309 Auxiliary spring 310 Handle touch sensor 311 Single button 312 Single button Operation sensor 315 Handle relay terminal plate 320 Plate unit 321 Upper plate 321a Guide passage portion 321b Earth fitting 322 Lower plate 322a Lower plate ball hole (lower plate discharge port)
322b Escapement part 322c Sphere guidance part (guidance means)
322d Buffer (guidance means)
322e Return part (guidance means)
323 Plate unit base 323a Upper plate ball supply port 323b Speaker slit 323c Lower plate ball supply port (lower plate supply port)
323d Upper plate ball feed port 323e Ball feed guide route 323f Ball removal guide route 323g Opening 323h Handle insertion port 323i Cylinder insertion port 324 Upper plate body 325 Lower plate body 325A Main body portion 325B First extension portion 325C Second extension portion 325a Bottom Wall unit 325b Standing wall unit 326 Dish unit cover (cover)
326a Production operation unit mounting part (covering part)
326b Upper dish part 326c Lower decoration part 326d Lower dish opening 326e Lower speaker port 326f Handle insertion port 326g Cylinder insertion port 326h Top plate part 326i Bottom plate part 326j Installation space 327 Upper dish ball removal button (discharge operation part)
327a Operation transmission unit 327b Ball removal slider 327c Upper plate ball release spring 328 Ball rental button 329 Return button 330 Ball rental return display unit 331 Production selection left button 332 Production selection right button 333 Lower plate ball removal button 334 Lid member 335 Lower plate ball Drawer base 335a Discharge port 340 Lower plate cover 340a Cover standing wall 340b Ceiling portion 365 Frequency display plate 365a Ball lending switch 365b Return switch 365d CR unit lamp A1 Lower plate 1st area A2 Lower plate 2nd area PL Dividing line 400 Production operation unit (Coating part)
400A Second production operation unit (cover)
410 Operation button (operation receiving part)
411 Button lens 411a First button decoration 411b Second button decoration 412 Button frame 412a Frame opening 413 Button base 413a Body 413b Flange 413c Guide boss 413d Detection piece 413e Base opening 415 Frame unit 416 Frame body 416a Center Opening 416b Outer peripheral opening 416c Notch 416d Inner cylinder 416e Mounting part 417 Frame side lens 418 Frame top lens 420 Substrate unit 421 Substrate base 422 Operation button left outer decorative substrate 422a First LED
422b Second LED
423 Operation button right outside decorative board 423a First LED
423b Second LED
424 Vibration motor 424a Weight 425 Motor cover 430 Base unit 431 Unit base 431a Through hole 431b Holding hole 431c Shading wall portion 432 Operation button interior decoration member 432a Peripheral wall portion 432b Front plate portion 432c Opening portion 432d Flange portion 432e Mounting button 432e Inner decoration part 423g Second button inner decoration part 433 Operation button left inner decoration board 434 Operation button right inner decoration board 435 Operation button upper inner decoration board 436 Operation button lower inner decoration board 437 Frame top lens decoration board 438 Operation button spring 439 Sensor holder 440 Press detection sensor 441 Production operation unit relay board 442 Relay board cover 442a Leg 450 Second base unit 451 Unit base 451a Main body 451b Cover 4 1c through hole 451d holding hole 451e upper bearing portion 451f lower bearing portion 451g rotation restricting portion 452 button shaft 454 press detection sensor 460 door frame side effect display device (second effect display means)
460A Door frame side second effect display device 461 Liquid crystal display device 462 Mounting bracket 470 Screen unit 471 Main screen 472 Sub screen 472a Peripheral decoration portion 472b Screen portion 473 Upper shaft member 474 Lower shaft member 475 Actuation gear member 475a Gear teeth 475b Stopper 475c Detection piece 476 Sub-screen decoration member 477 Sub-screen decoration substrate 477a LED
478 Peripheral decorative member 480 Upper bearing member 481 Bearing member 481a Recessed portion 482 Frame top lens decorative substrate 485 Lower bearing member 490 Rotation drive unit 491 Unit case 492 Switching drive motor 495 Second transmission gear 500 Projector 501 Projector body 502 Lens portion 505 Projector Mounting member 505a Slit 506 Upper cover 507 Rotation detection sensor 510 Buffer unit 511 Buffer member 512 Buffer base 512a Body portion 512b Leg piece portion 515 Second stage operation unit relay substrate 516 Relay substrate cover 530 Door frame left side unit 531 Left unit base 531a Opening 532 Left unit diffusing lens member 532A Upper diffusing lens member 532B Lower diffusing lens member 532a Circular lens portion 532b Shaped lens part 532c Central diffuse reflection part 532d Front diffused lens part 532e Input lens part 532f Front reflection part 534 Left unit upper decoration base 535 Left unit lower decoration base 536 Left unit decoration cover 537 Decoration member 550 Door frame right side unit 551 Right unit Base 552 Door frame right side decorative board 552A Door frame right side upper decorative board 552B Door frame right side lower decorative board 552a Left LED
552b Right LED
552c Medium LED
553 Right unit left diffusing lens member 553a Main body portion 553b Rear wall portion 553c Notch portion 553d Housing recess 553e Input lens portion 553f Side surface reflecting portion 554 Right unit left decorative member 555 Right unit left cover 556 Right unit right diffusing lens member 556a Main body portion 556b Rear wall portion 556c Notch portion 556d Housing recess 556e Input lens portion 556f Side reflecting portion 557 Right unit right decorative member 558 Right unit right cover 559 Right unit left shading member 559a Main body portion 559b Rear wall portion 559c Notch portion 559d Reinforcement portion 560 Right unit Right light blocking member 561 Right unit decorative lens member 561a Circular decorative portion 561b Multi-face decorative portion 562 Right unit decorative base 563 Right unit cover 564 Decorative member 570 Door frame top unit 571 Medium Base 572 Side base 573 Upper speaker 574 Unit main body 574a Opening 574b Slit 574c Upper opening 574d Lower opening 574e Top left decoration 574f Top right decoration 575 Speaker cover 576 Top middle decoration member 577 Door frame top middle decoration board 578 Lead Optical member 578a Direct portion 578b Arc portion 578c Diffuse reflection portion 578d Diffuse input portion 579 Top left decorative lens member 579a Decorative lens portion 580 Top right decorative lens member 580a Decorative lens portion 581 Top middle left decorative member 582 Top middle right decorative member 583 Door Frame top left decorative board 583a LED
584 Door frame top right decorative board 584a LED
585 Substrate base 586 Door frame top middle left decorative substrate 586a LED
587 Door frame top middle right decorative board 587a LED
588 Shading member 589 Door frame top unit relay board 590 Relay board cover 591 Upper cover 592 Lower cover CL Center axis (of operation button 410)
600 Main body frame base 601 Game board insertion slot 602 Game board placement section 603 Game board regulation section 604 Launcher mounting section 605 Cylinder insertion slot 606 Connection opening section 607 Speaker opening section 608 Rear extension section 609 Upper hinge mounting section 610 Lower hinge mounting portion 615 Opening cover 616 Game board lock member 618 Door frame release switch 619 Main body frame release switch 620 Main body frame side upper hinge member 621 Upper hinge main body 622 Main body frame upper hinge pin 623 Door frame upper hinge hole 640 Main body frame side lower Hinge member 641 Lower hinge first main body 643 Lower hinge second main body 644 Door frame hinge hole 645 Restriction piece 660 Reinforcement frame 661 Left positioning member 680 Ball launch device 681 Launch base 682 Launch solenoid 683 Shot ball cage 684 Launch rail 700 Locking unit 70 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 Unit base 702 Door frame cage 703 Outer frame cage 710 Key cylinder 784 External terminal board 800 Discharge unit 801 Discharge unit base 802 Sphere tank 803 Tank rail 804 Sphere equalizing member 820 Sphere guide unit 821 Front case 821a Sphere guide inlet 821b Sphere guide outlet 821c Guide passage 821d Introduction portion 821e Detection portion 821f Meander portion 821g Notch portion 822 Rear case 822a Sphere guide inlet 822b Sphere guide outlet 822c Guide passage 822d Introduction portion 822e Detection portion 822g Snake portion 822g 823 825 Front of movable piece member 825a Movable piece 825b Shaft hole 825c Extension part 825d Connection part 825e Weight attachment part 825f Detection piece 825g Stopper piece 826 After movement piece member 826a Movable piece 826b Shaft hole 826c Extension portion 826d Connection portion 826e Weight attachment portion 826f Detection piece 826g Stopper piece 827 Ball breakage detection sensor 830 Discharge device 831 Front box 831a Discharge inlet 831b Discharge outlet 831c Discharge passage 831d Discharge passage shelf 831e 831g Lever mounting portion 832 Rear box 832a Discharge inlet 832b Discharge outlet 832c Ball outlet 832d Discharge passage 832e Ball extraction passage 832f Guide shelf 832g Lever attachment portion 833 Front cover 834 Discharge motor 835 Drive gear 837 Intermediate gear 837 8 Detecting piece 837c Connecting portion 838 Shaft member 839 Discharge vane 839a Base tube portion 839b Front vane 839c Rear vane 839d Connected portion 839e Ball housing portion 840 Blade rotation detection sensor 841 Partition plate 842 Discharge detection sensor 843 Ball removal movable piece 843a Main body portion 843b Shaft tube portion 843c Projection portion 843d Weight attachment portion 844 Ball removal lever 850 Upper full ball passage unit 850a Upper delivery ball receiving port 850b Upper ball removal entrance 850c Upper portion Sphere storage passage 850d Normal discharge port 850e Full tank discharge port 850f Partition piece 850g Upper ball discharge passage 850h Upper ball discharge outlet 851 Upper full base 852 Upper full cover 853 Dispensing device pressing member 854 Back cover attachment portion 860 Lower full ball path Unit 860b Error LED indicator 869 Game ball lending device connection terminal plate 861 Normal guideway 862 Fully guideway 863 Guideway open / close door 863a Base 863b First door plate 863c Second door plate 863d Extension 863e Acting protrusion Part 8 64 Closing spring 865 Lower ball guiding path 866 Upper case 867 Lower case 867a Boss portion 868 Frame peripheral relay terminal plate 869 Game ball lending device connection terminal plate 870 Guide passage opening / closing door 870a Base portion 870b First door plate portion 870c Second Door plate portion 870d Recessed portion 870e Actuation protrusion 880 Main door relay terminal plate 882 Peripheral door relay terminal plate 900 Substrate unit 910 Substrate unit base 911 Door frame relay substrate 920 Speaker unit 921 Speaker 930 Power supply board box 934 Power switch 931 Power supply board 935 Power supply control unit 935a Synchronous rectification circuit 935b Power factor correction circuit 935c Smoothing circuit 935d Power supply generation circuit 940 Interface control board box 950 Delivery control board box 951 Delivery control board 951a Delivery control filter circuit 952 Payout control unit 952a Payout control MPU
952b Discharge control input circuit 952c Discharge control output circuit 952d Discharge motor drive circuit 952da Voltage switching circuit 952e CR unit input / output circuit 953 Firing control unit 953a Firing control circuit 954 Operation switch 980 Back cover 1000 Front component 1001 Outer rail 1002 Inner rail 1003 Out guiding portion 1004 Right lower rail 1005 Right rail 1006 Stopping portion 1007 Backflow prevention member 1008 Crime prevention concave portion 1009 Positioning projection 1010 Mounting boss 1011 Notch portion 1100 Game panel 1110 Panel plate 1111 Out concave portion 1112 Opening portion 1113 Fitting hole 1114 Long hole 1115 Engagement step portion 1116 Inner rail fixing hole 1120 Panel holder 1121 Holding step portion 1122 Through port 1123 Projection pin 1124 Engagement claw 1125 Engagement 1126 Out port 1127 notch 1128 mounting hole 1129 through opening 1150 gaming panel (Second Embodiment)
1151 Out Port 1152 Notch 1153 Insertion Hole 1154 Inner Rail Fixing Hole 1155 Mounting Hole 1200 Substrate Holder 1201 Discharge Part 1300 Main Control Unit 1310 Main Control Board 1310a Main Control MPU
1310aa main control CPU core 1310ae main peripheral serial transmission port 1310aa transmission shift register 1310aeb transmission buffer register 1310aec serial management unit 1310af WDT
1310an Hard random number circuit 1310b Main control input circuit 1310c Main control output circuit 1310ca Main control output circuit with reset function 1310cb Main control output circuit without reset function 1310d Main control solenoid drive circuit 1310e Power failure monitoring circuit 1300g + 5V creation circuit 1300h Main control filter circuit 1320 Main control board box 1400 Function display unit 1401 Status indicator 1402 Normal symbol indicator 1403 First special symbol indicator 1404 First special reserved number indicator 1405 Second special symbol indicator 1406 Second special reserved number indicator 1407 Round display 1500 Peripheral control unit 1510 Peripheral control board 1510b + 3.3V creation circuit 1511 Peripheral control unit 1511a Peripheral control MPU
1511aa peripheral control CPU core 1511ab peripheral control built-in RAM
1511ac Peripheral control DMA controller 1511ad Peripheral control bus controller 1511ae Peripheral control various serial I / O ports 1511af Peripheral control built-in WDT
1511ag Peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 1511ak Peripheral control A / D converter 1511ai Peripheral bus 1511ah Internal bus 1511b Peripheral control ROM
1511c Peripheral control RAM
1511d Peripheral control SRAM
1511e Peripheral control external WDT
1511h External bus 1512 Liquid crystal display controller 1512a Sound source built-in VDP
1512b Liquid crystal and sound control ROM
1512c Audio data transmission IC
1512d Transmitter IC for door frame side production
1512e Differential circuit 1512f Forcible switching circuit 1520 Peripheral control board box 1600 Game board side effect display device 1600a Liquid crystal module 1600b Backlight power supply 1601 Left fixed piece 1602 Right fixed piece 2000 Table unit 2001 General winning opening 2002a First left starting opening 2002b 1st right starting port 2003 Gate part 2004 2nd starting port 2005 1st grand prize opening 2005b 2nd big prize winning port 2011 Sorting member 2012 1st passage 2013 2nd passage entrance 2014 2nd passage 2015 2015 2nd passage exit 2016 reception entrance 2017 Kroon 2021 Always drive door 2022 Second start door 2107 Always drive solenoid 2108 Second start solenoid 2109 First attacker solenoid 2110 Second attacker solenoid 2200 Side unit Lower 2300 Upper side unit 2400 V winning device 2410 Rotating body 2411 V winning port 2412 Discharge port 2500 Center accessory 2520 Warp inlet 2522 Warp outlet 2530 Stage 3000 Back unit 3010 Back box 3010a Opening portion 3010b Liquid crystal attachment portion 3010d Fixed groove portion 3010d 3010e Fixed piece part 3042 Production drive board box 3050 Back left middle decoration unit 3100 Back lower rear movable production unit 3200 Back upper left movable production unit 3300 Back left movable production unit 3400 Back upper middle movable production unit 3500 Back lower front movable production unit 4002a First left start port sensor 4002b First right start port sensor 4003 Gate sensor 4004 Second start port sensor 4005a First count sensor 4005b Second count Sensor 4007a First V prize opening sensor 4007b Second V prize opening sensor 4008 Discharge port sensor 4020 General prize opening sensor 4024 Magnetic detection sensor 4161 Panel relay board 4162 Sensor signal input unit 4163 Voltage output unit 4164 Detection circuit unit 4165 RTC control unit 4165a RTC
4165b Battery 4165aa Built-in RAM
4166 Voltage raising part 4170 Lamp drive board 4180 Motor drive board 4450 Effect display drive board 4450v Liquid crystal module circuit 4450x Door frame side effect module power supply circuit 4450y Door frame side effect module backlight power supply circuit MGS Magnetic sensor STR transistor (built-in type)
ZD0 Zener diode CON1 connector RR Contact resistance CNO2 connector

Claims (1)

A game board having a game area on the front;
A launcher that launches a game ball toward the game area;
Distribution means for distributing game balls that have passed through a specific area in the game area to either the first path or the second path formed in the game area;
A first start port into which a game ball flowing down the first passage can enter;
A second starting port that allows a game ball flowing down the second passage to enter and has a different advantage from the first starting port;
Lottery means for performing lottery based on entering the first starting port or the second starting port;
Profit granting means for granting a predetermined profit based on the result of the lottery,
A game ball is allowed to flow alternately into the first passage and the second passage using the distribution means, and the balls can sequentially enter the first start port and the second start port. Gaming machine.